2010 Glclass

GL
Operator’s Manual
Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Symbols
Trademarks®:
RAdBlue® is a registered trademark of the
German Association of the Automotive
Industry (VDA).
RBabySmartTM is a trademark of Siemens
Automotive Corp.
RBluetooth® is a registered trademark of
Bluetooth SIG Inc.
RESP® and PRE-SAFE® are registered
trademarks of Daimler.
RHomeLink® is a registered trademark of
Prince, a Johnson Controls Company.
RSIRIUS and related marks are trademarks
of SIRIUS XM Radio Inc.
The following symbols are found in this
Operator’s Manual:
G Warning!
Warning notices draw your attention to
hazards that may endanger your health or life,
or the health or life of others.
! Highlights hazards that may result in

damage to your vehicle.
i Helpful hints or further information you

may find useful.
X This symbol points to instructions
for you to follow.
X A number of these symbols
appearing in succession indicates
a multiple-step procedure.
Y page This symbol tells you where to look
for further information on a topic.
YY This continuation symbol marks a
warning or procedure which is
continued on the next page.
Display Text in displays, such as the control
system, are printed in the type
shown here.

Our company and staff congratulate you on
the purchase of your new Mercedes-Benz.
Your selection of our product is a
demonstration of your trust in our company
name. Furthermore, it exemplifies your desire
to own an automobile that will be as easy as
possible to operate and will provide years of
service.
Your Mercedes-Benz represents the efforts of
many skilled engineers and craftsmen. To
help assure your driving pleasure, and also
the safety of you and your passengers, we ask
you to make a small investment of time:
RPlease read this manual carefully, then
return it to your vehicle where it will be
handy for your reference.
RPlease follow the recommendations
contained in this manual. They are
designed to acquaint you with the
operation of your Mercedes-Benz.
RPlease pay attention to the warnings and
cautions contained in this manual. They are
designed to help improve the safety of the
vehicle operator and occupants.
We extend our best wishes for many miles of
safe, pleasurable driving.
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
A Daimler Company
1645841583 É1645841583&ËÍ
Contents 3
Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25
Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35
Controls in detail ................................. 69
Operation ........................................... 225
Practical hints ................................... 283
Technical data ................................... 359

4 Index
1, 2, 3 ... Front passenger front air bag off

indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 322
115V AC Socket ................................. 213 Knee bag .......................................... 40
3-zone automatic climate control Messages in the multifunction
see Climate control system display ........................................... 291
4-ETS (Electronic Traction System) ... 64 OCS (Occupant Classification
4MATIC System) ........................................... 42
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Safety guidelines ............................. 39
Side impact ...................................... 41
A Window curtain ................................ 42
ABS (Antilock Brake System) ............. 62 Air conditioning refrigerant and
Indicator lamp ................................ 315 lubricant ............................................. 371
Messages in the multifunction Air distribution .......................... 178, 188
display ................................... 288, 300 Air filter .............................................. 309
Accessory weight .............................. 254 Air pressure
Accidents ........................................... 112 see Tire inflation pressure
Air bags ........................................... 37 Air pressure (tires) ............................ 255
Distance warning function ............. 155 Air recirculation mode .............. 180, 190
Emergency calls (Tele Aid) ............. 215 Air suspension program
NECK-PRO active front head Comfortable driving style ............... 159
restraints ........................................ 53 Introduction ................................... 159
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps Messages in the multifunction
Messages in the multifunction display ........................................... 301
display ........................................... 310 Sporty driving style ........................ 159
see Headlamps Suspension tuning ......................... 159
Adaptive Damping System Vehicle level control ...................... 159
see ADS Air volume ................................. 179, 189
AdBlue® ...................................... 346, 373 Alarm system
Capacity, AdBlue® tank ................. 369 see Anti-theft systems
Refilling ......................................... 347 Alignment bolt (vehicle tool
Additives kit) .............................................. 284, 343
Engine oil ....................................... 371 All-wheel drive (4MATIC) .................. 166
Gasoline ......................................... 372 Alternator
Address change ................................... 22 Messages in the multifunction
ADS (Adaptive Damping System) ..... 159 display ................................... 296, 308
Advanced Tire Pressure Alternator (Technical data)
Monitoring System (Advanced see Vehicle specification
TPMS) ................................................. 239 Anticorrosion/antifreeze .................. 374
Messages in the multifunction Antilock Brake System
display ................................... 297, 313 see ABS
Air bags ................................................ 37 Anti-theft systems ............................... 66
Emergency call upon deployment . . 215 Anti-theft alarm system ................... 66
Front, driver and passenger ............. 40 Immobilizer ...................................... 66
Front passenger front air bag off Aquaplaning
indicator lamp (Canada see Hydroplaning
only) ........................................ 46, 322 Armrest, front
Storage compartment .................... 208

Index 5
Ashtrays ............................................. 211 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel

Aspect ratio (tires) ............................ 255 engine) ............................................... 345
Audio/DVD menu .............................. 129 BlueTEC
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ........ 94 AdBlue® tank ................................. 346
Automatic central locking .......... 74, 138 AdBlue® tank capacity ................... 369
Automatic headlamp mode ................ 98 Brake fluid
Automatic interior lighting control .. 101 Checking level ............................... 233
Automatic locking when driving ...... 138 Messages in the multifunction
Automatic transmission ................... 114 display ........................................... 300
Emergency operation (limp-home Brake lamps
mode) ............................................ 119 Cleaning lenses ............................. 277
Gear range indicator ...................... 118 Brake pads
Gear ranges ................................... 118 Messages in the multifunction
Gear selector lever ........................ 114 display ........................................... 299
Hill-start assist system .................. 155 Brakes ................................................ 260
Kickdown ....................................... 117 Parking brake ........................ 112, 261
One-touch gearshifting .................. 118 Warning lamp ................................. 316
Shifting procedure ......................... 116 Break-in period .................................. 226
Steering wheel gearshift control .... 118 Bug cover (Radiator) ......................... 230
Towing a trailer .............................. 118 Bulbs
Transmission position indicator ..... 116 see Replacing bulbs
Transmission positions .................. 116
AUX socket ........................................ 207 C
Axle oils .............................................. 369
CAC (Customer Assistance Center) ... 23
B California retail buyers and
lessees, important notice for ............. 21
BabySmart™ Calls (phone) ...................................... 142
Air bag deactivation system ............. 46 Can holders
Self-test ........................................... 47 see Cup holders
Backrest Capacities and recommended
see Seats fuel/lubricants .................................. 368
Backup lamps Cargo compartment
Messages in the multifunction Cargo net ....................................... 206
display ........................................... 310 Cargo volume, expanding .............. 201
Bar (air pressure unit) ....................... 255 Cover blind .................................... 205
BAS (Brake Assist System) ................. 63 Fuse box ........................................ 357
Batteries, SmartKey Hooks ............................................ 201
Checking condition .......................... 73 Tie-down rings ............................... 200
Replacing ....................................... 326 Cargo compartment cover blind ...... 205
Battery, Vehicle ................................. 348 Cargo net ........................................... 206
Charging ........................................ 350 Cargo tie-down rings ......................... 200
Jump starting ................................. 350 Carpets, cleaning .............................. 280
Messages in the multifunction Carriers .............................................. 196
display ................................... 296, 308 Center console
Bead (tire) .......................................... 255 Lower part ....................................... 33
Beverage holders Upper part ....................................... 31
see Cup holders

6 Index
Central locking Collapsible wheel chock ................... 286

Automatic ................................ 74, 138 COMAND system
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 see separate COMAND system
Locking/unlocking from inside ........ 75 operating instructions
SmartKey ......................................... 70 Combination switch .......................... 100
Central locking/unlocking switch ..... 75 Comfort submenu
Certification label .............................. 360 Easy-entry/exit feature .................. 139
Children in the vehicle Fold-in function for exterior rear
Air bags ........................................... 37 view mirrors ................................... 140
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation Seat belt adjustment feature ......... 139
system ............................................. 46 Compass
Child safety locks (rear doors) ......... 60 Calling up ....................................... 223
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 59 Control system .................................. 125
Indicator lamp, front passenger Multifunction display ..................... 127
front air bag off (Canada only) ......... 46 Multifunction steering wheel ......... 125
Indicator lamp, front passenger Resetting to factory settings .......... 132
front air bag off (USA only) .............. 42 Control system menus ...................... 127
Infant and child restraint systems .... 56 Audio/DVD .................................... 129
OCS (Occupant Classification Distronic ........................................ 131
System) ........................................... 42 Navigation ..................................... 130
Override switch ................................ 60 Off-road ......................................... 131
Safety notes ..................................... 55 Settings ......................................... 132
Tether anchorage points .................. 58 Standard display ............................ 128
Top tether ........................................ 58 Telephone ...................................... 142
Child safety Trip computer ................................ 141
see Children in the vehicle Vehicle configuration ..................... 140
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type Vehicle status message memory ... 131
see Children in the vehicle Control system submenus
Chrome-plated exhaust tip, Comfort ......................................... 139
cleaning .............................................. 281 Instrument cluster ......................... 133
Cigarette lighter ................................ 212 Lighting .......................................... 136
Climate control system .................... 172 Time/Date ..................................... 135
3-zone automatic climate control . . 181 Vehicle ........................................... 138
Air conditioning ..................... 177, 186 Coolant
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 371 Anticorrosion/antifreeze ............... 374
Air distribution ....................... 178, 188 Capacities ...................................... 369
Air recirculation mode ........... 180, 190 Checking level ............................... 231
Air volume ............................. 179, 189 Messages in the multifunction
Automatic mode .................... 178, 187 display ........................................... 306
Climate control .............................. 175 Cruise control .................................... 144
Deactivating system .............. 177, 185 Activating ....................................... 145
Front defroster ...................... 179, 189 Canceling ....................................... 146
Residual heat and Changing the set speed ................. 146
ventilation .............................. 180, 191 Last stored speed .......................... 147
Temperature .......................... 178, 187 Lever .............................................. 145
Clock ............................................ 28, 135 Messages in the mutlifunction
Cockpit ................................................. 27 display ........................................... 294
Cold tire inflation pressure .............. 255

Index 7
Resume function ............................ 147 Messages in the multifunction

Setting current speed .................... 145 display ........................................... 287
Cup holders ........................................ 209 Multifunction display ..................... 127
Curb weight ....................................... 255 Outside temperature ............. 129, 135
Customer Assistance Center (CAC) ... 23 Symbol messages .......................... 299
Customer Relations Department ....... 23 Text messages ............................... 288
Trip computer ................................ 141
D Vehicle status message memory ... 131
Vehicle system settings ................. 132
Dashboard Distronic ............................................ 147
see Instrument cluster Cleaning system sensor cover ....... 278
Data recording ..................................... 24 Control system .............................. 131
Date, Setting ...................................... 135 Distance warning function ............. 155
Daytime running lamp mode .............. 99 Distance warning
Switching on or off ......................... 136 lamp ...................................... 149, 319
Deep water Driving with .................................... 153
see Standing water Menu ............................................. 150
Defroster Messages in the multifunction
Rear window .................................. 191 display ........................................... 294
Windshield ............................. 179, 189 Resume function ............................ 152
Delayed shut-off Sensor cover .................................. 278
Exterior lamps ................................ 137 Speed settings ............................... 151
Interior lighting .............................. 138 Door control panel .............................. 34
Department of Transportation Door handles ........................................ 34
see DOT Doors
Diesel engine Child safety locks ............................ 60
Preglow indicator lamp .................... 29 Locking/unlocking (KEYLESS-GO) ... 71
Diesel fuel Locking/unlocking (SmartKey) ........ 70
see Fuel Messages in the multifunction
Differential locks ............................... 121 display ........................................... 304
A few words about ......................... 122 Opening from inside ......................... 74
Messages in the multifunction Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 219
display ................................... 123, 302 Unlocking (Mechanical key) ........... 323
Switching ....................................... 122 DOT (Department of
Difficulties Transportation) .................................. 255
While driving .................................. 111 Downhill Speed Regulation
With starting .................................. 110 see DSR
Digital clock Drinking and driving ......................... 259
see Clock Driving
Digital speedometer ......................... 129 Abroad ........................................... 272
Dimensions (vehicle) Hydroplaning ................................. 262
see Vehicle specification Instructions ........................... 108, 259
Direction of rotation (tires) .............. 246 In winter ........................................ 258
Displays Off-road ......................................... 262
Digital speedometer ...................... 129 Problems ....................................... 111
Distronic ........................................ 149 Safety systems ................................ 61
Maintenance service indicator ....... 273 Systems ......................................... 144

8 Index
Through standing water ................. 262 Emergency calls

With Distronic ................................ 153 Tele Aid .......................................... 215
Driving and parking Emergency engine shutdown ........... 357
Safety notes .................................. 108 Emergency operations
Driving off .................................. 110, 261 Limp-home mode ........................... 119
Driving safety systems ....................... 61 Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ....... 219
4-ETS ............................................... 64 Emergency Tensioning Device
ABS .................................................. 62 see ETD
BAS .................................................. 63 Emission control ............................... 272
EBP .................................................. 63 Information label ............................ 361
ESP® ................................................ 63 System warranties ........................... 20
Driving systems Engine
Air suspension program ................. 159 Break-in recommendations ............ 226
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) ................ 166 Cleaning ......................................... 276
Cruise control ................................ 144 Compartment ................................ 228
Distronic ........................................ 147 Malfunction indicator
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) . . 155 lamp ........................................ 29, 320
Hill-start assist system .................. 155 Messages in the multifunction
Off-road driving program ............... 158 display ........................................... 306
Parktronic system .......................... 166 Number .......................................... 361
Rear view camera .......................... 169 Starting .......................................... 108
Driving tips, automatic Turning off ..................................... 113
transmission ...................................... 117 Engine (Technical data)
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) .... 155 see Vehicle specification
Messages in the multifunction Engine compartment
display ........................................... 303 Radiator ......................................... 230
Engine coolant
E see Coolant
Engine oil
Easy-entry/exit feature .............. 92, 139
Adding ........................................... 231
EBP (Electronic Brake
Additives ........................................ 371
Proportioning) ...................................... 63 Checking level ............................... 230
Electrical system Consumption ................................. 230
Improper work on or Messages in the multifunction
modifications ................................... 23 display ........................................... 308
Power outlets ................................. 212 Oil dipstick ..................................... 230
Electrical system (Technical data) Recommended engine oils and oil
see Vehicle specification filter ............................................... 370
Electronic Stability Program
ESP® (Electronic Stability
see ESP® Program) .............................................. 63
Electronic Traction System 4-ETS ............................................... 64
see 4-ETS Messages in the multifunction
Emergency, in case of display ................................... 289, 300
First aid kit ..................................... 284
Off-road ESP® .................................. 65
Flat tire .......................................... 336
Trailer stabilization ........................... 65
Hazard warning flasher .................. 101
Warning lamp ................................. 318
Roadside Assistance ................ 21, 216
Towing the vehicle ......................... 352

Index 9
ETD (Emergency Tensioning Front passenger front air bag ............ 40

Device) ................................................. 52 Messages in the multifunction
Safety guidelines ............................. 39 display ........................................... 291
Express operation Front passenger front air bag off
Power windows .............................. 105 indicator lamp (Canada only) ..... 46, 322
Tilt/sliding sunroof ........................ 192 Front passenger front air bag off
Exterior lamp switch ........................... 97 indicator lamp (USA only) .......... 42, 322
Exterior rear view mirrors .................. 94 Front seat head restraints
Fold-in function ........................ 95, 140 see Head restraints
Parking position ............................... 95 Fuel ..................................................... 226
Power-folding ................................... 95 Additives ........................................ 372
Exterior view of vehicle ...................... 26 Capacity, fuel tank ......................... 369
Diesel fuel ............................. 369, 372
F Drive sensibly–safe fuel ................. 259
Fuel consumption statistics ........... 141
Fastening the seat belts ..................... 50
Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 227
First aid kit ......................................... 284
Fuel tank reserve warning
Flat tire ............................................... 336 lamp ........................................ 29, 320
Lowering the vehicle ...................... 344 Premium unleaded gasoline ... 369, 371
Mounting the spare wheel ............. 340 Refueling ........................................ 226
Preparing the vehicle ..................... 336 Requirements ................................ 371
Spare wheel ........................... 336, 368 Fuel filler flap ..................................... 227
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 337 Opening manually .......................... 324
Floormats ........................................... 223 Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.
Fluids Capacities ...................................... 368
AdBlue® ......................................... 369 Fuel system, bleeding (diesel
Automatic transmission fluid ......... 369 engine) ............................................... 345
Brake fluid ..................................... 369 Fuel tank
Capacities ...................................... 368 Capacity ........................................ 369
Engine coolant ............................... 369 Fuel filler flap and cap ................... 227
Engine oil ....................................... 369 Refueling ........................................ 226
Power steering fluid ....................... 369 Fuses .................................................. 355
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ........................................... 370
G
Fog lamps ............................................. 99
Messages in the multifunction Garage door opener .................... 33, 219
display ................................... 310, 312 Gasoline
Fold-in function for exterior rear see Fuel
view mirrors ................................ 95, 140 GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating) ... 255
Four-wheel drive Gear range ......................................... 118
see All-wheel drive (4MATIC) Indicator ........................................ 118
Front air bags Limiting .......................................... 119
see Air bags Shifting into optimal ...................... 119
Front axle oil ...................................... 369 Transfer case ................................. 120
Front lamps Gear selector lever ............................ 114
see Headlamps Cleaning ......................................... 280
Gearshift pattern ........................... 114
Shifting procedure ......................... 116

10 Index
Transmission position indicator ..... 116 NECK-PRO active front head

Transmission positions .................. 116 restraints ......................................... 53
Generator NECK-PRO active front head
see Alternator restraints, resetting ....................... 325
Global locking/unlocking Heated steering wheel ........................ 93
see Key, SmartKey Height adjustment
Glove box ........................................... 207 Seat belt outlet ................................ 51
Gross Axle Weight Rating Seats ............................................... 82
see GAWR Vehicle level control ...................... 159
Gross Trailer Weight High-beam flasher ............................. 101
see GTW High-beam headlamps .............. 100, 329
Gross Vehicle Weight Indicator lamp .................................. 29
see GVW Hill-start assist system ..................... 155
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating Hinged quarter windows .................. 106
see GVWR Hood ................................................... 228
GTW (Gross Trailer Weight) .............. 255 Messages in the multifunction
GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight) ............ 255 display ........................................... 304
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Hooks ................................................. 201
Rating) ................................................ 255 Horn ...................................................... 27
HVAC
H see Climate control system
Hydroplaning ..................................... 262
Halogen headlamps
see Headlamps
I
Hard plastic trim items, cleaning .... 279
Hazard warning flasher .................... 101 Identification labels .......................... 360
Headlamp cleaning system .............. 101 Identification number, vehicle
Headlamps (VIN) ................................................... 361
Active Bi-Xenon headlamps ............. 97 Ignition ......................................... 80, 109
Adjusting aim ................................. 333 Immobilizer .......................................... 66
Automatic headlamp mode .............. 98 Indicator lamps
Bi-Xenon .................................. 97, 329 see Lamps, indicator and warning
Cleaning lenses ............................. 277 Infant and child restraint systems
Cleaning system ............................ 101 see Children in the vehicle
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 99 Inflation pressure
Delayed shut-off ............................ 137 see Tires, Inflation pressure
Halogen ......................................... 329 Infrared reflecting windshield ......... 223
High-beam flasher ......................... 101 Inside door handle .............................. 74
High-beam headlamps ................... 100 Instrument cluster ............................ 124
Low-beam headlamps ...................... 98 Illumination .................................... 124
Replacing bulbs ............................. 328 Lamps ............................................ 314
Switch .............................................. 97 Multifunction display ..................... 127
Headliner, cleaning and care of ....... 280 Instrument lighting
Head restraints .................................... 82 see Instrument cluster, Illumination
Adjustment ................................ 82, 84 Instrument panel
Comfort head restraint .................... 84 see Instrument cluster
Instruments and controls
see Cockpit

Index 11
Interior lighting Selective setting ........................ 71, 73

Delayed shut-off ............................ 138 Starter switch positions ................... 80
Emergency lighting ........................ 102 KEYLESS-GO
Front .............................................. 101 Starter switch positions ................... 80
Front reading lamps ....................... 101 Kickdown ........................................... 117
Rear ............................................... 102 Kilopascal (air pressure unit) ........... 255
Rear reading lamps ........................ 102 Knee bag .............................................. 40
Interior rear view mirror ..................... 93
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 94 L
Interior storage spaces
Labels
see Storage compartments
Intermittent wiping Certification ................................... 360
Emission control information ......... 361
Rain sensor .................................... 103
Tire and Loading Information
placard ........................................... 242
J
Tire inflation pressure .................... 236
Jack ..................................................... 286 Lamps, exterior
Jump starting ..................................... 350 Exterior lamp switch ........................ 97
Front .............................................. 329
K Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 310
Key, Mechanical
Rear ............................................... 329
Loss of ............................................. 73
Switching on/off .............................. 97
Replacing ......................................... 74
Lamps, indicator and warning
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 323
ABS .......................................... 28, 315
Key, SmartKey
Brakes ..................................... 28, 316
Battery check lamp .......................... 73
Center console ................................ 31
Checking batteries ........................... 73
Differential locks ............................ 123
Factory setting ........................... 71, 72
Distance warning
Global locking (KEYLESS-
lamp .............................. 149, 155, 319
GO) .................................................. 73
Engine malfunction .................. 29, 320
Global locking (SmartKey) ................ 71
ESP® ........................................ 28, 318
Global unlocking (KEYLESS-
Fog lamps ........................................ 99
GO) ............................................ 72, 73
Front passenger front air bag off
Global unlocking
(Canada only) .......................... 46, 322
(SmartKey) ....................................... 71
Front passenger front air bag off
Important notes on KEYLESS-GO ..... 72
(USA only) ................................ 42, 322
Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
Fuel tank reserve ..................... 29, 320
Loss of ............................................. 73
High-beam headlamps ............. 29, 100
Messages in the multifunction
Instrument cluster ................... 28, 314
display ........................................... 304
Low-beam headlamps ................ 29, 98
Opening and closing the power
Low tire pressure/TPMS
tilt/sliding sunroof ......................... 107
malfunction telltale .................. 28, 321
Opening and closing the windows . 107
Seat belt telltale ................ 29, 51, 317
Remote control ................................ 70
SRS .................................... 29, 36, 318
Replacing ......................................... 74
Turn signals ..................................... 28
Replacing batteries ........................ 326
Language, selecting .......................... 134
Restoring to factory setting ....... 71, 73

12 Index
LATCH-type child seat anchors Manual headlamp mode (Low-

see Children in the vehicle beam headlamps) ................................ 98
License plate lamps Maximum engine speed
Messages in the multifunction see Vehicle specification
display ........................................... 311 Maximum loaded vehicle weight ..... 256
Replacing bulbs ............................. 330 Maximum load rating (tires) ............. 255
Light alloy wheels, cleaning ............. 279 Maximum permissible tire
Lighter inflation pressure .............................. 256
see Cigarette lighter Mechanical key .................................. 323
Lighting ................................................ 97 Media interface ................................. 207
Daytime running lamp mode ............ 99 Memory function ................................. 96
Exterior ............................................ 97 Menus
Interior ........................................... 101 see Control system menus
Limp-home mode .............................. 119 Minispare wheel
Load index (tires) ...................... 251, 255 see Spare wheel
Loading Mirrors .................................................. 93
see Vehicle loading Auto-dimming rear view mirrors ....... 94
Locator lighting ................................. 136 Exterior rear view mirror parking
Lock button position ............................................ 95
Outside door handle (KEYLESS- Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 94
GO) .................................................. 73 Interior rear view mirror ................... 93
Locking the vehicle Memory function .............................. 96
KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71 Power-folding exterior rear view
Manually ........................................ 324 mirrors ............................................. 95
SmartKey ......................................... 70 Vanity mirror .................................. 210
Loss of MOExtended system ......................... 345
Key .................................................. 73 MOExtended tires ..................... 345, 365
Service and Warranty Information MON (Motor Octane Number) .......... 371
booklet .......................................... 360 Motor Octane Number
Low-beam headlamps ......................... 98 see MON
Exterior lamp switch ........................ 97 Multicontour seat ................................ 90
Indicator lamp .................................. 29 Multifunction display ........................ 127
Switching on .................................... 98 Symbol messages .......................... 299
LOW RANGE mode ............................. 120 Text messages ............................... 288
Messages in the multifunction Vehicle status messages ............... 287
display ........................................... 303 Multifunction display messages
Switching ....................................... 121 ABS ....................................... 288, 300
Lubricants .......................................... 368 Active headlamps .......................... 310
Lumbar support ................................... 87 Advanced TPMS ..................... 297, 313
Air bags ......................................... 291
M Air filter .......................................... 309
Air suspension program ................. 301
Maintenance ........................................ 21
Alternator .............................. 296, 308
Maintenance System
Automatic
Service indicator display ................ 274
transmission .................................. 296
Service indicator message ............. 273
Battery ................................... 296, 308
Service term exceeded .................. 274
Brake fluid ..................................... 300

Index 13
Brake pads ..................................... 299 N

Coolant .......................................... 306
Cruise control ................................ 294 Navigation menu ............................... 130
Differential locks ................... 123, 302 Navigation system
Distronic ........................................ 294 see Separate operating instructions
Doors ............................................. 304 NECK-PRO active front head
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) . . 303 restraints ............................................. 53
EBP ................................................ 300 Resetting ....................................... 325
Engine oil ....................................... 308 Nets, parcel ....................................... 200
ESP® ...................................... 289, 300 Night security illumination .............. 137
Fog lamps .............................. 310, 312 Normal occupant weight .................. 256
Front passenger front air bag ........ 291 Number, vehicle identification
Gas cap .......................................... 309 (VIN) ................................................... 361
High-beam lamps ........................... 311
Hood .............................................. 304 O
License plate lamps ....................... 311 Occupant Classification System
Light sensor ................................... 311 see OCS (Occupant Classification
Low-beam lamps ............................ 312 System)
LOW RANGE mode ......................... 303 Occupant distribution ....................... 256
Parking brake ................................ 300 Occupant safety
Parking lamps ................................ 311 Air bags ........................................... 37
PRE-SAFE® .................................... 290 BabySmart™ .................................... 46
Reserve fuel ................................... 309 Children and air bags ....................... 37
Reverse lamp ................................. 310 Children in the vehicle ..................... 55
Side marker lamps ......................... 311 Child seat anchors – LATCH-type .... 59
SmartKey ....................................... 304 Fastening the seat belts ................... 50
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO .......... 304 Front passenger front air bag off
SRS ................................................ 301 indicator lamp (Canada
Tailgate .......................................... 304 only) ........................................ 46, 322
Tail lamps ...................................... 312 Front passenger front air bag off
Tele Aid .......................................... 301 indicator lamp (USA only) ........ 42, 322
Tire inflation pressure ............ 297, 313 Infant and child restraint systems .... 56
Tire pressure monitor .................... 297 Introduction ..................................... 36
Tires ...................................... 297, 313 OCS (Occupant Classification
Trailer brake lamps ........................ 312 System) ........................................... 42
Trailer tail lamps ............................ 312 PRE-SAFE® ....................................... 52
Trailer turn signal lamps ................ 312 Seat belts .................................. 39, 48
Turn signals ................................... 313 OCS (Occupant Classification
Washer fluid ................................... 305 System) ................................................ 42
Multifunction steering wheel Self-test ........................................... 45
Adjustment ...................................... 91 Odometer ........................................... 127
Buttons .......................................... 125 Off-road driving ................................. 262
Cleaning ......................................... 280 Checklist ............................... 264, 268
Easy-entry/exit feature ........... 92, 139 Crossing obstacles ........................ 267
Gearshift control ............................ 118 Driving instructions ........................ 262
Heating ............................................ 93 Driving on sand .............................. 267
Memory function .............................. 96 Driving through water .................... 266
Overview .......................................... 30

14 Index
Returning ....................................... 268 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

Ruts ............................................... 267 (USA only)
Steep terrain .................................. 264 see Front passenger front air bag
Off-road driving program .................. 158 off indicator lamp (USA only)
Off-road menu ................................... 131 Passenger safety
Oil, oil level see Occupant safety
see Engine oil Pedals ................................................. 259
On-board computer Phone
see Control system see Telephone
One-touch gearshifting ..................... 118 Plastic parts, cleaning ...................... 279
Operating safety .................................. 23 Power assistance .............................. 259
Ornamental moldings, cleaning ....... 277 Power outlets .................................... 212
Outside temperature Power seats
see Displays see Seats
Overhead control panel ...................... 33 Power tailgate
Closing ............................................. 76
P Messages in the multifunction
display ........................................... 304
Paintwork, cleaning .......................... 276
Opening ........................................... 76
Paintwork code ................................. 361
Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Panic alarm .......................................... 61
Operation ....................................... 192
Panorama roof Synchronizing ................................ 194
Sunshade ....................................... 211 Power washer .................................... 276
Parcel nets ......................................... 200 Power windows ................................. 105
Parking ............................................... 112 Cleaning ......................................... 278
Parktronic system .......................... 166 Door windows ................................ 106
Parking brake ............................ 112, 261 Hinged quarter windows ................ 106
Messages in the multifunction Operation ....................................... 105
display ........................................... 300 Rear door window, override
Parking position switch .............................................. 60
Exterior rear view mirrors ................ 95 Synchronizing ................................ 107
Transmission position .................... 116 Practical hints ................................... 284
Parktronic system Preglow indicator lamp .............. 29, 109
Cleaning system sensors ............... 278
PRE-SAFE® ............................................ 52
Malfunction .................................... 169
Messages in the multifunction
Minimum distance ......................... 167
display ........................................... 290
Sensor range ................................. 167
Problems
Switching on/off ........................... 168
While driving .................................. 111
System sensors ............................. 167
With vehicle ..................................... 23
Warning indicators ................... 27, 168
With wipers .................................... 105
Parts service ...................................... 360
Product information ............................ 20
PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp
Production options weight ............... 256
(Canada only)
Proximity key
see Front passenger front air bag
see Key, SmartKey
off indicator lamp (Canada only)
PSI (air pressure unit) ....................... 256

Index 15
R Reset tool (NECK-PRO active front

head restraints) ................................. 325
Radiator ..................................... 230, 257 Restraint systems
Radio see Occupant safety
Selecting stations .......................... 129 Rims ........................................... 256, 365
Radio transmitters ............................ 272 Roadside Assistance ................... 21, 216
Rain sensor RON (Research Octane Number) ..... 371
see Intermittent wiping Rubber parts, cleaning ...................... 279
Rear axle oil ....................................... 369 Run-flat tires
Rear center console ashtray see MOExtended tires
see Ashtrays
Rear doors
S
Child safety locks ............................ 60
Rear door window Safety
Override switch ................................ 60 Driving safety systems ..................... 61
Rear fog lamp Occupant safety ............................... 36
see Fog lamps Reporting defects ............................ 24
Rear lamps Safety belts
see Tail lamps see Seat belts
Rear seats Seat belt force limiter ......................... 52
see Seats Seat belts ............................................. 48
Rear view camera .............................. 169 Adjustment function ........................ 51
Cleaning the camera lens .............. 278 Children in the vehicle ..................... 55
Rear window defroster ..................... 191 Cleaning ......................................... 280
Rear window wiper/washer ............. 104 Fastening ......................................... 50
Recommended tire inflation Height adjustment ........................... 51
pressure ..................................... 234, 256 Proper use of ................................... 49
Refilling Safety guidelines ............................. 39
AdBlue® ......................................... 347 Safety notes ..................................... 48
Refrigerant, air conditioning ............ 371 Telltale ..................................... 29, 317
Refueling ............................................ 226 Seat heating ......................................... 90
Regular checks .................................. 228 Seating capacity ................................ 243
Reminder, Seat belt Seats ..................................................... 82
see Seat belts, Telltale Adjustment ...................................... 82
Remote control Easy-entry/exit feature .................... 92
see Key, SmartKey Folding (expanding cargo volume) . 201
Remote door unlock (Tele Aid) ......... 219 Heating ............................................ 90
Replacing Memory function .............................. 96
Key .................................................. 74 Multicontour seat ............................ 90
Replacing bulbs ................................. 328 Rear seats ........................................ 87
Reporting safety defects .................... 24 Ventilation ....................................... 90
Research Octane Number Securing cargo
see RON Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 200
Reserve fuel Selective setting
Messages in the multifunction see Key, SmartKey
display ........................................... 309 Selector lever
Warning lamp ................................... 29 see Gear selector lever
Reset button ................................ 28, 124

16 Index
Self-test SRS
BabySmart™ .................................... 47 Indicator lamp ................... 29, 36, 318
OCS (Occupant Classification Messages in the multifunction
System) ........................................... 45 display ........................................... 301
Tele Aid .......................................... 215 Standing water, driving through ...... 262
Service Starter switch positions
see Maintenance KEYLESS-GO .................................... 80
Service, parts .................................... 360 SmartKey ......................................... 80
Service and warranty information ..... 20 Starting difficulties (engine) ............ 110
Service intervals Starting the engine ........................... 108
see Maintenance System, Service Steering column
indicator message see Multifunction steering wheel,
Service life (tires) .............................. 247 Adjustment
Settings Steering wheel
Factory setting (KEYLESS-GO) ......... 72 see Multifunction steering wheel
Factory setting (SmartKey) .............. 71 Steering wheel gearshift control ..... 118
Memory function .............................. 96 Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services . . . 219
Menu ............................................. 132 Storage compartments ..................... 207
Selective setting (KEYLESS-GO) ....... 73 Storing tires ....................................... 248
Selective setting (SmartKey) ............ 71 Stranded vehicle ............................... 355
Side impact air bags ........................... 41 Sunroof
Side marker lamps see Power tilt/sliding sunroof
Cleaning lenses ............................. 277 Sunshade
Messages in the multifunction Rear panorama roof ....................... 211
display ........................................... 311 Sun visors .......................................... 210
Sidewall (tires) .................................. 256 Suspension tuning
Side windows see Air suspension program
see Power windows SUV (Sport Utility Vehicle) ................. 22
SmartKey
see Key, SmartKey T
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
see Key, SmartKey Tachometer .................................. 29, 125
Snow chains ...................................... 258 Overspeed range ........................... 125
Snow tires Tailgate
see Winter tires Closing ............................................. 75
Spare wheel ....................................... 365 Messages in the multifunction
Mounting ....................................... 340 display ........................................... 304
Storage location ............................ 286 Opening ........................................... 75
Speedometer ............................... 28, 149 Power tailgate .................................. 76
Speed settings Tail lamps ........................................... 329
Cruise control ................................ 145 Cleaning lenses ............................. 277
Distronic ........................................ 151 Messages in the multifunction
Resume function ................... 147, 152 display ........................................... 312
Sport Utility Vehicle Tar stains ........................................... 276
see SUV Technical data
Air conditioning refrigerant ............ 371
Brake fluid ..................................... 371

Index 17
Capacities fuels, coolants, Tether anchorage points

lubricants etc. ................................ 368 see Children in the vehicle
Coolant .......................................... 373 Tie-down rings ................................... 200
Engine oil additives ........................ 371 Tightening torque
Engine oils ..................................... 370 Wheels ........................................... 344
Fuel requirements .......................... 371 Time setting ....................................... 135
Gasoline additives .......................... 372 TIN (Tire Identification Number) ...... 256
Identification labels ....................... 360 Tire and Loading Information
Premium unleaded gasoline ........... 371 placard ............................................... 242
Rims and tires ................................ 365 Tire and loading terminology ........... 254
Spare wheel ................................... 368 TIREFIT ............................................... 337
Vehicle specification Tire Identification Number
GL 350 BlueTEC ............................. 362 see TIN
Vehicle specification GL 450 ......... 362 Tire inflation pressure
Vehicle specification GL 550 ......... 363 Checking ........................................ 237
Washer and headlamp cleaning Important notes on ........................ 235
system ................................... 370, 375 Label on the inside of fuel filler
Technical data (dimensions) flap ................................................ 236
see Vehicle specification Placard on driver’s door B-pillar ..... 242
Technical data (electrical system) Tire labeling ....................................... 250
see Vehicle specification Tire load rating .................................. 255
Technical data (engine) Tire ply composition and material
see Vehicle specification used .................................................... 256
Technical data (weights) Tire pressure loss warning system . 237
see Vehicle specification Tire repair kit
Tele Aid ............................................... 214 see TIREFIT
Emergency calls ............................. 215 Tires ........................................... 233, 365
Information button ......................... 217 Advanced Tire Pressure
Initiating an emergency call Monitoring System (Advanced
manually ........................................ 216 TPMS) ............................................ 239
Messages in the multifunction Air pressure ................................... 234
display ........................................... 301 Care and maintenance ................... 247
Remote door unlock ...................... 219 Cleaning ......................................... 248
Roadside Assistance button .......... 216 Direction of rotation, spinning ....... 246
Search & Send ............................... 218 Important notes on tire inflation
SOS button .................................... 216 pressure ........................................ 235
Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services .. 219 Inflation pressure .................. 236, 237
System self-test ............................. 215 Information placard ....................... 242
Telephone ............................................. 30 Inspection ...................................... 247
Answering/ending a call ................ 143 Labeling ......................................... 250
Hands-free microphone ................... 34 Load index ............................. 251, 255
Menu ............................................. 142 Load rating .................................... 255
Operation ....................................... 142 Messages in the multifunction
Phone book .................................... 143 display ................................... 297, 313
Redialing ........................................ 144 MOExtended .................................. 365
Temperature Ply composition and material
Interior temperature .............. 178, 187 used ............................................... 256
Outside .................................. 129, 135

18 Index
Problems under-/overinflation ...... 236 Transmission

Retreads ........................................ 233 see Automatic transmission
Rims and tires (technical data) ...... 365 Transmission fluid level .................... 231
Rotation ......................................... 249 Transmission gear selector lever
Service life ..................................... 247 see Gear selector lever
Sizes .............................................. 365 Transmission positions .................... 116
Snow chains .................................. 258 Traveling abroad ............................... 272
Speed rating .......................... 252, 256 Tread (tires) ....................................... 257
Storing ........................................... 248 Tread depth (tires) .................... 247, 257
Temperature .......................... 235, 249 Treadwear .......................................... 248
Terminology ................................... 254 Treadwear indicators (tires) .... 247, 257
TIREFIT (tire repair kit) ................... 337 Trip computer menu ......................... 141
Tire Identification Number ............. 256 Trip odometer, resetting ................... 125
Tire pressure loss warning system . 237 Turning off the engine ...................... 113
TPMS low tire pressure/ Turn signals ....................................... 100
malfunction telltale ........................ 321 Cleaning lenses ............................. 277
Traction ................................. 248, 256 Indicator lamps ................................ 28
Tread ............................................. 257 Messages in the multifunction
Tread depth ........................... 247, 257 display ........................................... 313
Treadwear ...................................... 248 TWR (Tongue Weight Rating) ........... 257
Treadwear indicators ............. 247, 257
Vehicle maximum load on .............. 257 U
Wear pattern .................................. 249
Winter tires ............................ 257, 365 Uniform Tire Quality Grading
Tire speed rating ....................... 252, 256 Standards .................................. 248, 257
Tongue Weight Rating Units
see TWR Selecting digital speedometer
Top tether display mode ................................. 134
see Children in the vehicle Selecting speedometer/
Total load limit ................................... 256 odometer display mode ................. 134
Towing Unleaded gasoline, premium ........... 371
Towing eye bolt .............................. 353 Unlocking the vehicle
Trailer .................................... 118, 269 KEYLESS-GO .................................... 71
Vehicle ........................................... 352 Manually ........................................ 323
Towing eye bolt ................................. 353 SmartKey ......................................... 70
Traction ...................................... 248, 256 Upholstery, cleaning ......................... 280
Trailer towing ............................ 118, 269 Useful features .................................. 209
Coupling a trailer ........................... 270
Decoupling ..................................... 271 V
Electrical connections .................... 269 Vehicle
Towing ........................................... 270 Battery ........................................... 348
Trailer hitch ................................... 269 Care ............................................... 275
Weights and ratings ....................... 269 Control system .............................. 125
Transfer case ..................................... 119 Identification Number (VIN) ........... 360
Gear ranges ................................... 120 Locking/unlocking ........................... 70
LOW RANGE mode ......................... 120 Lowering (wheel change) ............... 344
Switching LOW RANGE mode ........ 121

Index 19
Modifications and alterations, Washer fluid

Operating safety .............................. 23 Messages in the multifunction
Towing ........................................... 352 display ........................................... 305
Unlocking/locking manually .......... 323 Mixing ratio .................................... 375
Vehicle configuration menu ............. 140 Refilling .......................................... 232
Vehicle dimensions Washing the vehicle .......................... 275
see Vehicle specification Wear pattern (tires) .......................... 249
Vehicle Identification Number Weights (vehicle)
(VIN) ................................................... 360 see Vehicle specification
Vehicle jack Wheel
see Jack Changing ....................................... 336
Vehicle level control Removing ....................................... 343
see Air suspension program Spare ............................................. 336
Vehicle lighting .................................... 97 Tightening torque ........................... 344
Vehicle loading Wheels, sizes ..................................... 365
Cargo tie-down rings ...................... 200 Wheels, Tires and .............................. 233
Cargo volume, expanding .............. 201 Window curtain air bags ..................... 42
Carriers .......................................... 196 Windows
Instructions .................................... 194 see Power windows
Load limit ....................................... 243 Windows, cleaning ............................ 278
Terminology ................................... 254 Windshield
Vehicle maximum load on the tire ... 257 Cleaning wiper blades .................... 278
Vehicle specification Infrared reflecting .......................... 223
GL 350 BlueTEC ............................. 362 Washer fluid ................................... 375
GL 450 ........................................... 362 Wipers ........................................... 103
GL 550 ........................................... 363 Windshield wipers
Vehicle status message memory .... 131 Replacing wiper blades .................. 334
Vehicle tool kit .................................. 284 Winter cover .............................. 230, 257
Vehicle washing Winter driving
see Vehicle care Instructions .................................... 258
Vehicle weights Radiator cover ............................... 257
see Vehicle specification Snow chains .................................. 258
Tires ............................................... 257
W Winter tires ................................ 257, 365
Wood trims, cleaning ........................ 280
Warning lamps
see Lamps, Indicator and warning
Warning sounds
Distance warning function ............. 155
Distronic ........................................ 149
Driver’s or passenger’s seat belt ..... 51
Parking brake ................................ 300
Parktronic system .......................... 169
Seat belt telltale ............................ 317
Warranty coverage ............................ 360
Washer and headlamp cleaning
system ................................................ 375

20 Introduction
Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

product and ask for your understanding that
Please observe the following in your own best we reserve the right to make changes in
interest: design and equipment. Therefore,
We recommend using Genuine Mercedes- information, illustrations, and descriptions in
Benz Parts as well as conversion parts and this Operator’s Manual might differ from your
accessories explicitly approved by us for your vehicle.
vehicle model.
We have tested these parts to determine their
Vehicle equipment
reliability, safety and special suitability for
Mercedes-Benz vehicles. Your vehicle may have some or all of the
We are unable to make an assessment for equipment described in this manual.
other products and therefore cannot be held Therefore, you may find explanations for
responsible for them, even if in individual optional equipment not installed in your
cases an official approval or authorization by vehicle. If you have any questions about
governmental or other agencies should exist. operating particular equipment, any
Use of such parts and accessories could authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
adversely affect the safety, performance or to demonstrate the proper procedures.
reliability of your vehicle. Please do not use Optional equipment is also described in this
them. manual, including operating instructions
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts and pre- wherever necessary. Since they are special-
approved conversion parts and accessories order items, the descriptions and illustrations
are available at any authorized Mercedes- herein may vary slightly from the actual
Benz Center. In addition, you will receive equipment of your vehicle.
comprehensive information on permissible If there are any equipment details that are not
technical modifications and expert shown or described in this Operator’s
installations. Manual, any authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center will be glad to inform you of correct
care and operating procedures. The
Operator’s Manual Operator’s Manual and Maintenance Booklet
are important documents and should be kept
Notes with the vehicle.
This Operator’s Manual contains a great deal
of useful information. We urge you to read it
carefully and familiarize yourself with the Service and warranty information
vehicle before driving. The Service and Warranty Information
For your own safety and longer service life of booklet contains detailed information about
the vehicle, we urge you to follow the the warranties covering your Mercedes-Benz,
instructions and warnings contained in this including:
Operator’s Manual. Ignoring them could RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
result in damage to the vehicle or personal
injury to you or others. Vehicle damage REmission System Warranty
caused by failure to follow instructions is not REmission Performance Warranty
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited RCalifornia,
Connecticut, Maine,
Warranty.
Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,

Introduction 21
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission Written notification should not be sent to a
Control System Warranty1 dealer, it should be addressed to
RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
Laws) Customer Assistance Center
One Mercedes Drive
Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
Important notice for California retail
buyers and lessees of Mercedes-Benz
automobiles Maintenance
Under California law you may be entitled to a The Maintenance Booklet describes all the
replacement of your vehicle or a refund of the necessary maintenance work which should
purchase price or lease price, if after a be performed at regular intervals.
reasonable number of repair attempts Always have the Maintenance Booklet with
Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC and/or its you when you take the vehicle to an
authorized repair or service facilities fail to fix authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
one or more substantial defects or service. The service advisor will record each
malfunctions in the vehicle that are covered service in the booklet for you.
by its express warranty. During the period of
18 months from original delivery of the
vehicle or the accumulation of 18 000 miles Roadside Assistance
(approximately 29 000 km) on the odometer
of the vehicle, whichever occurs first, a The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance
reasonable number of repair attempts is Program provides factory-trained technical
presumed for a retail buyer or lessee if one or help in the event of a breakdown. Calls to the
more of the following occurs: toll-free Roadside Assistance number
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the USA)
(1) the same substantial defect or
1-800-387-0100 (in Canada)
malfunction results in a condition that is
likely to cause death or serious bodily will be answered by Mercedes-Benz
injury if the vehicle is driven, that defect Customer Assistance Representatives
or malfunction has been subject to repair 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.
two or more times, and you have directly Roadside Assistance will be provided in
notified Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC in accordance with standard program
writing of the need for its repair, guidelines which include providing service to
(2) the same substantial defect or the vehicle up to a reasonable distance from
malfunction of a less serious nature than a paved roadway. We will make every effort
category (1) has been subject to repair to assist in a breakdown situation, however,
four or more times and you have directly the accessibility of your vehicle will be
notified us in writing of the need for its determined by our authorized Mercedes-Benz
repair, or Center technician or the tow service provider
on a case-by-case basis and may be a factor
(3) the vehicle is out of service by reason of
in our ability to respond.
repair of the same or different substantial
defects or malfunctions for a cumulative Additional charges may be applicable for a
total of more than 30 calendar days. breakdown location determined not to be a
reasonably accessible roadside location as
1 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Z
22 Introduction
determined by our authorized technician and the use of leaded fuels will damage the
tow service provider. catalysts.
For additional information refer to the RGasoline may have a considerably lower
Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance octane rating, and improper fuel can cause
Program brochure (in the USA) or the engine damage.
Roadside Assistance section of the Service
and Warranty Information Booklet (in
Canada) in your vehicle literature portfolio. Sport Utility Vehicle
G Warning!
Change of address or ownership This Sport Utility Vehicle is designed for both
If you change your address, be sure to send on-road and off-road use. It can go places and
in the “Change of Address Notice” found in perform tasks for which conventional 2-wheel
the Service and Warranty Information drive passenger cars are not intended. This
Booklet, or simply call the Mercedes-Benz vehicle will handle and maneuver differently
Customer Assistance Center (in the USA) at from conventional passenger cars in driving
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372), or conditions which may occur on streets,
Customer Service (in Canada) at highways and off-road use.
1-800-387-0100. This will assist us in This vehicle has a higher ground clearance
contacting you in a timely manner should the and a higher center of gravity than many
need arise. passenger cars. As with other vehicles of this
If you sell your Mercedes, please leave all type, if you make sharp turns at excessive
literature with the vehicle to make it available speeds or abrupt maneuvers, the vehicle may
to the next operator. roll over or may go out of control and crash.
Utility vehicles have a significantly higher
If you bought this vehicle used, be sure to
rollover rate than other types of vehicles.
send in the “Notice of Purchase of Used
Failure to operate this vehicle safely may
Truck” found in the Service and Warranty
result in an accident, rollover of the vehicle,
Information Booklet, or call the Mercedes-
and severe or fatal injury.
Benz Customer Assistance Center (in the
USA) at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes Before you start to drive this vehicle, read the
(1-800-367-6372), or Customer Service (in Operator’s Manual. Take time to become
Canada) at 1-800-387-0100. familiar with the driving characteristics of this
vehicle. Be sure you are familiar with all
vehicle controls. Learn how your vehicle
Operating your vehicle outside the handles on different road surfaces. Do not
USA or Canada attempt sharp turns at excessive speeds or
abrupt maneuvers or other unsafe driving
If you plan to operate your vehicle in foreign actions that can cause loss of vehicle control.
countries, please be aware that: When driving off-road or working the vehicle
RService facilities or replacement parts may hard, do not overload it. And, always wear
not be readily available. your seat belts at all times. In a rollover crash,
RUnleaded
an unbelted person is significantly more likely
gasoline for vehicles with
to die than a person wearing a seat belt.
catalytic converters may not be available;

Introduction 23
Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle

Proper use of the vehicle requires that you are
G Warning! familiar with the following information and
Work improperly carried out on electronic rules:
components and associated software could Rthe safety precautions in this manual
cause them to cease functioning. Because the
vehicle’s electronic components are Rthe “Technical data” section in this manual
interconnected, any modifications made may Rtraffic rules and regulations

produce an undesired effect on other
Rmotor vehicle laws and safety standards
systems. Electronic malfunctions could
seriously impair the operating safety of your G Warning!
vehicle.
Various warning labels are attached to your
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center vehicle. These warning labels are intended to
for repairs or modifications to electronic make you and others aware of various risks.
components. Do not remove any of these warning labels
Other improper work or modifications on the unless explicitly instructed to do so by
vehicle could also have a negative impact on information on the label itself. Removing
the operating safety of the vehicle. warning labels may cause you and others to
Some safety systems only function while the be unaware of certain risks which may result
engine is running. You should therefore never in an accident and/or personal injury.
turn off the engine while driving.
G Warning! Problems with your vehicle

Heavy blows against the vehicle underbody or
tires/wheels may cause serious damage and If you should experience a problem with your
impair the operating safety of your vehicle. vehicle, particularly one that you believe may
Such blows can be caused, for example, by affect its safe operation, we urge you to
running over an obstacle, road debris or a contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
pothole. If you feel a sudden significant immediately to have the problem diagnosed
vibration or ride disturbance, or you suspect and corrected if required. If the matter is not
that damage to your vehicle as occurred: handled to your satisfaction, please discuss
Rturn on your hazard warning flashers the problem with the Mercedes-Benz Center
management or, if necessary, contact us at
Rslow down carefully one of the following addresses:
Rdrive with caution to an area which is a safe In the USA:
distance from the road Customer Assistance Center
Inspect the vehicle underbody and tires/ Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC
wheels for possible damage. If the vehicle One Mercedes Drive
appears unsafe, have it towed to the nearest Montvale, NJ 07645-0350
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or other In Canada:
qualified maintenance or repair facility for Customer Relations Department
further inspection or repairs. Mercedes-Benz Canada, Inc.
98 Vanderhoof Avenue
Toronto, Ontario M4G 4C9
Z
24 Introduction
Reporting safety defects This information helps, for example, to

diagnose vehicle systems after a collision and
For the USA only: to continuously improve vehicle safety.
The following text is published as required of Daimler may access the information and
manufacturers under Title 49, Code of U.S. share it with others
Federal Regulations, Part 575 pursuant to the Rfor safety research or vehicle diagnosis
“National Traffic and Motor Vehicle Safety Act purposes
of 1966”. Rwith the consent of the vehicle owner or
lessee
Rin response to an official request by law
Reporting safety defects
enforcement or other government agency
If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
Rfor use in dispute resolution involving
which could cause a crash or could cause
injury or death, you should immediately Daimler, its affiliates or sales/service
inform the National Highway Traffic Safety organization and/or
Administration (NHTSA) in addition to Ras otherwise required or permitted by law
notifying Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC. Please check the Tele Aid subscription
If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may service agreement for details regarding the
open an investigation, and if it finds that a information that may be recorded or
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it transmitted via that system.
may order a recall and remedy campaign.
However, NHTSA cannot become involved in
individual problems between you, your
dealer, or Mercedes-Benz USA, LLC.
To contact NHTSA, you may call the Vehicle
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236
(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go to
www.safercar.gov; or write to:
Administrator, NHTSA Headquarters,
1200 New Jersey Avenue, SE, West Building,
Washington, DC 20590.
You can also obtain other information about
motor vehicle safety from
www.safercar.gov.
Vehicle data recording

Information regarding electronic
recording devices
(Including notice pursuant to California Code
§ 9951)
Please note that your vehicle is equipped with
devices that can record vehicle systems data
and, if equipped with the Tele Aid system, may
transmit some data in certain accidents.

25
Exterior view ....................................... 26

Cockpit ................................................. 27
Instrument cluster .............................. 28
At a glance
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 30
Center console .................................... 31
Overhead control panel ...................... 33
Door control panel .............................. 34

26 Exterior view
Exterior view
At a glance
i This Operator’s Manual describes all features, standard or optional, potentially available
for your vehicle at the time of purchase. Please be aware that your vehicle might not be
equipped with all features described in this manual.
Function Page Function Page
: Tailgate 75 F Hood 228
Power tailgate 76 G Wipers 103
; Rear window defroster 191 Wiper blades, replacing 334
= Rear window wiper/washer 104 Wiper blades, cleaning 278
Wiper blade, replacing 334 H Windshield:
Wiper blade, cleaning 278 Wiping with washer fluid 104
? Rear lamps 328 Cleaning 278
A Fuel filler flap 226

I Power tilt/sliding sunroof 192
B Doors:
J Carriers 196
Locking and unlocking 70, Crossbars 196
323 K Tires and wheels 233
C Exterior rear view mirrors 94 Rims and tires 365
D Towing eyes 353 L Headlamp cleaning system 101
E Front lamps 328 M LED daytime running lamps 97

Cockpit 27
Cockpit
At a glance
: Cruise control lever: I Starter switch 80
Cruise control 144 J Steering wheel adjustment,
Distronic 147 manual 91
; Instrument cluster 28, K On-board diagnostics
124 (OBD) socket
= Multifunction steering 30, L Hood lock release 228
wheel 125
M Parking brake release 112
? Horn
N Parking brake pedal 112
A Steering wheel gearshift
control 118 O Door control panel 34
B Gear selector lever 114 P Exterior lamp switch 97
C Front Parktronic warning Q Steering wheel adjustment,
indicators 166 electrical 91
Heated steering wheel 93
D Overhead control panel 33
R Combination switch:
E Glove box lid release, glove
box lock 208 Turn signals 100
Wipers 103
F Glove box 207 High beam 100
G Power outlet 212
H Center console 31
Z
28 Instrument cluster
Instrument cluster
At a glance

: # Left turn signal $ Brake warning lamp,
indicator lamp USA only 316
d ESP® warning lamp 318
; To dim instrument cluster
· Distance warning
illumination 124
lamp3 319
= Reset button for: J Brake warning lamp,
Trip odometer 125 Canada only 316
Settings 132 h Combination low tire
? To brighten instrument pressure/TPMS
cluster illumination 124 malfunction telltale, USA 239,
only 321
A ! Right turn signal
indicator lamp
B Clock 135
C Speedometer with:
! Antilock Brake
System (ABS) indicator
lamp 315
È Variable speed limiter
indicator lamp2
2 Lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should go out when the engine is running.
3 Vehicles without Distronic: Warning lamp without function. It illuminates when the ignition is on. It should
go out when the engine is running.

Instrument cluster 29
At a glance
D Multifunction display with: 8 Fuel filler flap
indicator: The fuel filler flap
Trip odometer 125
is located on the rear right-
Main odometer 127 hand side.
E Tachometer with: G Multifunction display with:
7 Seat belt telltale 51, Outside temperature
317 indicator or digital
% Preglow indicator speedometer (depending
lamp, diesel engine only 109 on selected setting in the 129,
+ Supplemental control system) 134
Restraint System (SRS) 36, Transmission position
indicator lamp 318 indicator 116
L Low-beam headlamp Gear range indicator 118
indicator lamp 98 LOW RANGE mode
; Engine malfunction indicator 121
indicator lamp, Canada only 320 Distance warning function
! Engine malfunction indicator 140
indicator lamp, USA only 320 Rear window wiper
K High-beam headlamp indicator 104
indicator lamp 100 Downhill Speed Regulator
(DSR) indicator 157
F Fuel gauge with:
Off-road driving program
Fuel tank reserve warning
indicator 158
lamp 320
Z
30 Multifunction steering wheel
Multifunction steering wheel Function Page

Press button & or *
At a glance
briefly:
to move within a menu
to select previous or next
track, scene or stored
station within Audio/DVD
menu 129
to switch to the phone book
and select a name or
number within Telephone
menu 142
Press and hold button
& or *:
to select previous or next
track with quick search or
Function Page to select previous or next
station in station list or
: Multifunction display 127 wave band within Audio/
DVD menu 129
; Press button ~:
to start the quick search in
to end a call 142
the phone book within
to reject an incoming call 142 Telephone menu 142
Press button 6: Press button A to turn
to answer a call 142 the Voice Control System
to dial4 142 off5, see separate operating
to redial4 142 instructions.
Press button W or X:
to select submenus in the
Settings menu 133
to set values
to set the volume
Press button ? to turn
the Voice Control System
on5, see separate operating
instructions.
= Press button V or U
to select next/previous
menu. 125
4 Function only available in telephone menu.

5 Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.

Center console 31
Center console Function Page

Upper part (Vehicles without D Storage compartment 207
At a glance
enhanced off-road package)
E Alarm system indicator
lamp 67
F Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch 64
G Adaptive Damping System
(ADS) switch 159
H Seat ventilation, driver’s
side 90
I Seat heating, driver’s side 90
J Switch for Downhill Speed
Regulation (DSR) 155
K Hazard warning flasher
switch 101
L Switch for off-road driving
program 158
Function Page
: COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
; Climate control system 172
Rear window defroster 191
= Seat heating, front
passenger side 90
? Seat ventilation, front
passenger side 90
A Parktronic system
deactivation switch 168
B Vehicle level control switch 159
C Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp (USA 42,
only) 322
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp 46,
(Canada only) 322
Z
32 Center console
Upper part (Vehicles with enhanced Function Page

off-road package)
F Seat ventilation, driver’s
At a glance
side 90
G Seat heating, driver’s side 90
H Adaptive Damping System
(ADS) switch 159
I Electronic Stability
Program (ESP®) switch 64
J Parktronic system
deactivation switch 168
K Hazard warning flasher
switch 101
L Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp (USA 42,
only) 322
Front passenger front air
bag off indicator lamp 46,
Function Page (Canada only) 322
: COMAND system, see
separate operating
instructions
; Climate control system 172
= Seat heating, front
passenger side 90
? Seat ventilation, front
passenger side 90
A Rotary switch for
differential locks 122
B Switch for LOW RANGE
mode 120
C Switch for Downhill Speed
Regulation (DSR) 155
D Rotary switch for vehicle
level control 159
E Alarm system indicator
lamp 67

Overhead control panel 33
Lower part Overhead control panel
At a glance
: Ashtray with storage : Left front reading lamp on/
compartment 211 off 101
Cigarette lighter 212 ; Automatic interior lighting 101
; Cup holder 209 = Rear interior lighting on/off 101
= Front armrest storage ? Front interior lighting on/
compartment 207 off 101
? Removable card/ticket A Right reading lamp on/off 101
holder 209
B Front right interior lamp 101
C Power tilt/sliding sunroof
switch 192
D SOS button (Tele Aid
system) 216
E Interior rear view mirror 93
F Reading lamps 101
G Garage door opener 219
Z
34 Door control panel
Function Page Door control panel

H Hands-free microphone for
At a glance
Tele Aid (emergency call

system), telephone and
Voice Control System, see
separate operating
instructions
I Front left interior lamp 101
Function Page
: Inside door handle 74
; Central locking/unlocking
switch 75
= Exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 94
? Selection buttons for
exterior rear view mirror
adjustment 94
Power-folding exterior rear
view mirrors 95
A Switches for opening/
closing front and rear door
windows 105
B Rear door window override
switch 60
C Hinged quarter window
switch 105
D Remote tailgate switch,
power tailgate 79

35
Vehicle equipment .............................. 36

Occupant safety .................................. 36
Panic alarm .......................................... 61
Driving safety systems ....................... 61
Anti-theft systems .............................. 66
Safety and security

36 Occupant safety
Vehicle equipment G Warning!

Modifications to or work improperly
i This Operator’s Manual describes all conducted on restraint system components
features, standard or optional, potentially or their wiring, as well as tampering with
available for your vehicle at the time of interconnected electronic systems, can lead
Safety and security
purchase. Please be aware that your to the restraint systems no longer functioning
vehicle might not be equipped with all as intended.
features described in this manual. Air bags or Emergency Tensioning Devices
(ETDs), for example, could deploy
inadvertently or fail to deploy in accidents
Occupant safety although the deceleration threshold for air
Introduction bag deployment is exceeded. Therefore,
never modify the restraint systems. Do not
In this section you will learn the most tamper with electronic components or their
important facts about the restraint system software.
components of the vehicle.
The restraint systems are: i See “Children in the vehicle”
RSeat belts (Y page 55) for information on
Rinfants and children traveling with you in
RChild restraints
the vehicle
RLower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren Rrestraint systems for infants and children
(LATCH)
Additional protection potential is provided by:
RSupplemental Restraint System (SRS) with SRS indicator lamp
- Air bags The SRS system conducts a self-test when
- Air bag control unit (with crash sensors) the ignition is switched on and in regular
intervals while the engine is running. This
- Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) for
facilitates detection of system malfunctions.
seat belts
The SRS indicator lamp + in the
- Seat belt force limiter instrument cluster comes on when the
RNECK-PRO active front head restraints ignition is switched on. It goes out no later
than a few seconds after the engine has been
RPreventive occupant safety (PRE-SAFE®) started.
RAir bag system components with The SRS components are in operational
- Front passenger front air bag off readiness when the SRS indicator lamp
indicator lamp + is not lit while the engine is running.
- USA only: Front passenger seat with A malfunction in the system has been
Occupant Classification System (OCS) detected if the SRS indicator lamp +
Rfails to go out after approximately
- Canada only: Front passenger seat with
4 seconds after the engine was started
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system
Rdoes not come on at all
Although the systems are independent, their
Rcomes on after the engine was started or
protective functions work in conjunction with
each other. while driving

Occupant safety 37
G Warning! Deployment of the air bags temporarily

The SRS self-check has detected a releases a small amount of dust from the air
malfunction when the SRS indicator lamp bags. This dust, however, is neither harmful
+: to your health, nor does it indicate a fire in the
vehicle. The dust might cause some
Rdoes not come on at all
Safety and security

temporary breathing difficulty for people with
Rdoes not go out after 4 seconds after the asthma or other breathing trouble. To avoid
engine was started this, you may wish to get out of the vehicle as
Rcomes on while driving soon as it is safe to do so. If you have any
breathing difficulty but cannot get out of the
For your safety, we strongly recommend that vehicle after the air bag inflates, then get fresh
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz air by opening a window or door.
Center immediately to have the system
checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be G Warning!
activated when needed in an accident, which To reduce the risk of injury when the front air
could result in serious or fatal injury. The SRS bags inflate, it is very important for the driver
might also deploy unexpectedly and and front passenger to always be in a properly
unnecessarily which could also result in injury seated position and to wear their respective
as well. seat belt.
In addition, improper work on the SRS creates For maximum protection in the event of a
a risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or collision always be in normal seated position
causing unintended air bag deployment. Work with your back against the seat backrest.
on the SRS must therefore only be performed Fasten your seat belt and make sure it is
by qualified technicians. Contact an properly positioned on your body.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Since the air bag inflates with considerable
If it is necessary to modify an air bag system speed and force, a proper seating position
to accommodate a person with disabilities, and correct positioning of the hands on the
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. steering wheel will help to keep you at a safe
USA only: Call our Customer Assistance distance from the air bag. Occupants who are
Center at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes not wearing their seat belt, are not seated
(1-800-367-6372) for details. properly or are too close to the air bag can be
seriously injured or killed by an air bag as it
inflates with great force instantaneously:
Air bags RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
G Warning! position that is as upright as possible with

Air bags are designed to reduce the potential your back against the seat backrest.
of injury and fatality in certain RMove the driver’s seat as far back as
Rfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s possible, still permitting proper operation
side knee bag) of vehicle controls. The distance from the
center of the driver’s chest to the center of
Rside impacts (side impact air bags and the air bag cover on the steering wheel
window curtain air bags) must be at least 10 inches (25 cm) or more.
Rrollovers (window curtain air bags) You should be able to accomplish this by
However, no system available today can adjusting the seat and steering wheel. If
completely eliminate injuries and fatalities.
Z
38 Occupant safety
you have any difficulties, please contact an There is a possibility for a side impact air bag-
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. related injury if occupants, especially
RDo not lean your head or chest close to the children, are not properly seated or restrained
steering wheel or dashboard. when next to a side impact air bag which
needs to deploy rapidly in a side impact in
RKeep hands on the outside of the steering
Safety and security
order to do its job.

wheel rim. Placing hands and arms inside
To help avoid the possibility of injury, please
the rim can increase the risk and potential
follow these guidelines:
severity of hand/arm injury when the driver
front air bag inflates. (1) Always sit as upright as possible,
wear the seat belt properly, and for
RAdjust the front passenger seat as far as
children 12 years old and under,
possible rearward from the dashboard
use an appropriately sized infant
when the seat is occupied.
restraint, toddler restraint, or
ROccupants, especially children, should booster seat recommended for the
never place their bodies or lean their heads size and weight of the child.
in the area of the door where the side (2) Always wear seat belts properly.
impact air bag inflates. This could result in
serious injuries or death should the side Air bags are designed to deploy only in certain
impact air bag be deployed. Always sit as Rfrontal impacts (front air bags and driver’s
upright as possible, wear the seat belt
side knee bag)
properly and use an appropriately sized
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or Rside impacts (side impact and window
booster seat recommended for the size and curtain air bags) if the system determines
weight of the child. the need for air bag deployment
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and Rrollovers (window curtain air bags)
under must never ride in the front seat, Only in the event of such a situation will they
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized provide their supplemental protection.
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which The driver and passengers should always
operates with the BabySmart™ air bag wear their seat belts. Otherwise it is not
deactivation system installed in the vehicle possible for the air bags to provide their
to deactivate the front passenger front air supplemental protection.
bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
In case of other types of impacts and impacts
they will be struck by the air bag when it
below air bag deployment thresholds, air
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
bags will not deploy. The driver and
or fatal injury will result.
passengers will then be protected to the
Failure to follow these instructions can result extent possible by a properly fastened seat
in severe injuries to you or other occupants. belt. A properly fastened seat belt is also
If you sell your vehicle, it is important that you needed to provide the best possible
make the buyer aware of this safety protection in a rollover.
information. Be sure to give the buyer this Air bags are not a substitute for seat belts.
Operator’s Manual. Always wear your seat belt, regardless of
whether or not your vehicle is equipped with
G Warning! air bags.
Accident research shows that the safest place It is important to your safety and that of your
for children in an automobile is in a rear seat. passengers to have deployed air bags

Occupant safety 39
replaced and to have any malfunctioning air wheel hub, front passenger front air bag
bags repaired. This will help to make sure the cover, outboard sides of the seat
air bags will continue to provide supplemental backrests, door trim panels, or door frame
crash protection for occupants. trims.
RDo not install additional electrical/
Safety guidelines for the seat belt,
Safety and security

electronic equipment on or near SRS
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD) components and wiring.
and air bag
RKeep area between air bags and occupants
G Warning! free of objects (e.g. packages, purses,
RDamaged seat belts or seat belts that have umbrellas, etc.).
been subjected to stress in an accident RDo not hang items such as coat hangers
must be replaced. Their anchoring points from the coat hooks or handles over the
must also be checked. Only use seat belts door. These items may be thrown around in
installed or supplied by an authorized the vehicle and cause head and other
Mercedes-Benz Center. injuries when the window curtain air bag is
RAir bags and pyrotechnic Emergency deployed.
Tensioning Devices (ETDs) contain RAir bag system components will be hot after
perchlorate material, which may require an air bag has inflated. Do not touch them.
special handling and regard for the
RNever place your feet on the instrument
environment. Check with your local
government’s disposal guidelines. panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
California residents, see keep both feet on the floor in front of the
www.dtsc.ca.gov/HazardousWaste/ seat.
Perchlorate/index.cfm. RImproper repair work on the SRS creates a
RAir bags and ETDs are designed to function risk of rendering the SRS inoperative or
on a one-time-only basis. An air bag or ETD causing unintended air bag deployment.
that has deployed must be replaced. PRE- Work on the SRS must therefore only be
performed by qualified technicians.
SAFE® has electrically operated reversible
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
pre-tensioners in addition to the
Center.
pyrotechnic ETDs.
RFor your protection and the protection of
RDo not pass seat belts over sharp edges.
others, when scrapping the air bag unit or
They could tear.
ETD, our safety instructions must be
RDo not make any modification that could followed. These instructions are available
change the effectiveness of the seat belts. from any authorized Mercedes-Benz
RDo not bleach or dye seat belts as this may Center.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RGiven the considerable deployment speed,
not be able to provide adequate protection. required inflation volume, and the material
RNo modifications of any kind may be made of the air bags, there is the possibility of
to any components or wiring of the SRS. abrasions or other, potentially more serious
RDo no change or remove any component or
injuries resulting from air bag deployment.
part of the SRS. If you sell your vehicle, we strongly
RDo not install additional trim material, seat recommend that you inform the subsequent
covers, badges, etc. over the steering owner that the vehicle is equipped with SRS.
Z
40 Occupant safety
Also refer them to the applicable section in vehicle deceleration rate required for second
the Operator’s Manual. stage inflation of the front passenger front air
bag.
Front air bags The air bags will not deploy in impacts which
do not exceed the system’s preset
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37.
Safety and security
deployment thresholds. You will then be

protected by the fastened seat belts.
The front air bags will not deploy in the event
of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
longitudinal deceleration or acceleration
exceeds the preset deployment threshold for
the front air bags.
The front passenger front air bag will only be
deployed if
Rvehicles with OCS, USA only: the system,
based on OCS weight sensor readings,
Driver’s front air bag : and front passenger detects that the front passenger seat is
front air bag ; are designed to provide occupied
increased protection for the driver and front Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the
passenger against the risk of injuries to the center console is not lit
head and thorax. (USA only: (Y page 42),
Driver and front passenger front air bag and Canada only: (Y page 46))
driver’s side knee bag are deployed Rthe impact exceeds a preset deployment
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts threshold
Rif the system determines that air bag ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deployment can offer additional protection deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
to that provided by the seat belt place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
Rdepending on whether the respective seat the front passenger seat. This could cause
belt is in use the front or side impact air bag on the front
Rindependently
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
of the side impact air bags
exceeds the system’s deployment
and/or the window curtain air bags
threshold.
The front air bags in this vehicle have been
designed to inflate in two stages. This allows Knee bag
the air bags to have different rates of inflation. Knee bag = is designed to provide increased
The rate of inflation is based on the vehicle protection for the driver against the risk of
deceleration rate as assessed by the air bag injuries to the knees, thighs and lower legs.
control unit. Knee bag = is located on the driver side
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The front lower instrument panel. It is designed to
passenger front air bag deployment is operate together with the driver front air bag
additionally influenced by the passenger’s in certain frontal impacts if the system
weight category as identified by the Occupant determines that air bag deployment can offer
Classification System (OCS) (Y page 42). additional protection to that provided by the
Vehicles with OCS, USA only: The lighter the seat belt. Knee bag = operates best in
front passenger-side occupant, the higher the

Occupant safety 41
conjunction with a properly positioned and Vehicles with OCS (USA only): The front
fastened seat belt. passenger side impact air bag will not deploy
if the OCS senses that the front passenger
Side impact air bags seat is empty and the front passenger seat
belt is not fastened. With the front passenger
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. seat empty and the seat belt fastened, the
Safety and security

G Warning! front passenger side impact air bag will
deploy independently of the empty seat.
The pressure sensors for side impact air bag
Whether a seat belt is recognized as fastened
control are located in the doors. Do not
depends on whether or not the latch plate is
modify any components of the doors or door
properly inserted into the buckle.
trim panels including, for example, the
addition of door speakers. The side impact air bags are not deployed in
side impacts which do not exceed the
Improper repair work on the doors or the
system’s deployment threshold.
modification or addition of components to the
doors create a risk of rendering the side The side impact air bags will not deploy in the
impact air bags inoperative or causing event of a rollover unless the vehicle’s rate of
unintended air bag deployment. Work on the lateral deceleration or acceleration exceeds
doors must therefore only be performed by the preset deployment threshold for the side
qualified technicians. Contact an authorized impact air bags.
Mercedes-Benz Center. ! Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag
deactivation system (Canada only): Do not
place objects heavier than 20 lb (9 kg) on
the front passenger seat. This could cause
the front or side impact air bag on the front
passenger side to deploy in a crash which
exceeds the system’s deployment
threshold.
G Warning!
Only use seat covers which have been tested
and approved by Mercedes-Benz for your
vehicle model. Using other seat covers may
Front side impact air bags : and rear side interfere with or prevent the deployment of
impact air bags ; are designed to provide the side impact air bags. Contact an
increased protection for the thorax but not authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
the head, neck and arms. availability.
The side impact air bags are deployed
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral
vehicle deceleration or acceleration
Rregardless of whether the seat belts on the
impacted side of the vehicle are in use
Rindependently of the front air bags
Rindependently of the ETDs
Z
42 Occupant safety
Window curtain air bags weight sensor readings from the front
passenger seat.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 37. The system does not deactivate
Rthe front passenger side impact air bag
Rthe window curtain air bag
Safety and security
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs)

To be classified correctly, the front passenger
must sit
Rwith the seat belt properly fastened
Rin a position that is as upright as possible
with the back against the seat backrest
Rwith the feet on the floor
Window curtain air bags : are designed to
provide increased protection for the head but If the occupant’s weight is transferred to
not the chest or arms. another object in the vehicle (e.g. by leaning
Window curtain air bags : are deployed on armrests), the OCS may not be able to
properly approximate the occupant’s weight
Ron the impacted side of the vehicle category.
Rin instances with a high rate of lateral Furthermore, the occupant weight may
vehicle deceleration or acceleration appear to increase or decrease due to the
Rindependently of the front air bags following:
Rregardless of whether the front passenger Robjects hanging on the seat
seat is occupied Robjects lodged underneath the seat
Rregardless of whether the seat belt on the Robjects stuffed between the seat and
impacted side of the vehicle is in use middle console
Rin certain vehicle rollovers, if the system Robjects stuffed between the seat and door
determines that air bag deployment can
Rother passengers pushing on the seat
offer additional protection to that provided
by the seat belt Robjects applying pressure to the back of
Window curtain air bags : are not deployed the seat
in impacts which do not exceed the system’s Always make sure the seat has clearance
deployment threshold. in all directions at all times.
Window curtain air bags : deploy in the area If your seat, including the trim cover and
indicated by the arrows. cushion, needs to be serviced in any way, take
the vehicle to an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Occupant Classification System Only seat accessories approved by
Mercedes-Benz may be used.
The Occupant Classification System (OCS) is
standard equipment in USA. Both the driver and the front passenger
should always use the 42
The OCS activates or deactivates the front
passenger front air bag automatically. The indicator lamp as an indication of whether or
respective status is based on the classified not the front passenger is properly
occupant weight category determined by positioned.

Occupant safety 43
G Warning! indicator lamp out, the front passenger front

If the 42 indicator lamp air bag is activated.
illuminates when an adult or someone larger When the OCS senses that the front
than a small individual is in the front passenger seat occupant is classified as an
passenger seat, have the front passenger adult or someone larger than a small
Safety and security

reposition himself or herself in the seat until individual, the 42 indicator lamp
the 42 indicator lamp goes out, will illuminate for approximately 6 seconds
or check whether objects are caught under or when the engine is started and then goes out,
around the seat. indicating that the front passenger front air
In the event of a collision, the air bag control bag is activated.
unit will not allow front passenger front air bag If the 42 indicator lamp is
deployment when the OCS has classified the illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
front passenger seat occupant as weighting is deactivated and will not be deployed.
as much as or less than a typical 12-month- If the 42 indicator lamp is not
old child in a standard child restraint or if the illuminated, the front passenger front air bag
front passenger seat is classified as being is activated and will be deployed
empty.
Rin the event of certain frontal impacts
When the OCS senses that the front
Rif impact exceeds a preset deployment
passenger seat occupant is classified as
being up to or less than the weight of a typical threshold
12-month-old child in a standard child Rindependently of the side impact air bags
restraint, the 42 indicator lamp
If the front passenger front air bag is
will illuminate when the engine is started and
deployed, the rate of inflation will be
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
influenced by
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
Rthe rate of relevant vehicle deceleration as
When the OCS senses that the front
passenger seat is classified as being empty, assessed by the air bag control unit
the 42 indicator lamp will Rthe front passenger’s weight category as
illuminate when the engine is started and identified by the OCS
remain illuminated, indicating that the front
passenger front air bag is deactivated. For more information on air bag display
When the OCS senses that the front messages in the multifunction display, see
passenger seat occupant is classified as (Y page 291).
being heavier than the weight of a typical G Warning!
12-month-old child seated in a standard child According to accident statistics, children are
restraint or as being a small individual (such safer when properly restrained in the rear
as a young teenager or a small adult), the seating positions than in the front seating
42 indicator lamp will illuminate position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
for approximately 6 seconds when the engine children be placed in the rear seats whenever
is started and then, depending on occupant possible. Regardless of seating position,
weight sensor readings from the seat, remain children 12 years old and under must be
illuminated or go out. With the seated and properly secured in an appropriate
42 indicator lamp illuminated, infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster
the front passenger front air bag is seat recommended for the size and weight of
deactivated. With the 42 the child.
Z
44 Occupant safety
The infant or child restraint must be properly 42 indicator lamp while

secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat driving to make sure the 42
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the 42 indicator lamp goes out or
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. remains out, do not transport a child on the
Safety and security
Occupants, especially children, should always front passenger seat until the system has
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt been repaired.
properly and use an appropriately sized infant A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat front passenger seat will be seriously
recommended for the size and weight of the injured or even killed if the front passenger
child. front air bag inflates.
Children can be killed or seriously injured by RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
an inflating air bag. Note the following facing child restraint on the front passenger
important information when circumstances seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
require you to place a child in the front use the proper child restraint
passenger seat: recommended for the age, size and weight
RYour vehicle is equipped with air bag of the child, and secure child restraint with
technology designed to deactivate the front the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
passenger front air bag in your vehicle seat manufacturer’s instructions. For
when the system senses the weight of a children larger than the typical 12-month-
typical 12-month-old child or less along old child, the front passenger front air bag
with the weight of a standard appropriate may or may not be activated.
child restraint on the front passenger seat.
Deployment of the driver front air bag does
RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
not mean that the front passenger front air
front passenger seat will be seriously
bag also should have deployed.
injured or even killed if the front passenger
front air bag inflates in a collision which The OCS may have determined
could occur under some circumstances, Rthat the seat was empty or occupied by the
even with the air bag technology installed weight up to or less than that of a typical
in your vehicle. The only means to 12-month-old child seated in a standard
completely eliminate this risk is to never child restraint – both of which are instances
place a child in a rear-facing child restraint where the system suppresses deployment
in the front seat. We therefore strongly of the front passenger front air bag even
recommend that you always place a child though the impact met the criteria and was
in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat. of sufficient severity to deploy the driver
RIf you must install a rear-facing child front air bag
restraint on the front passenger seat Rthat the seat was occupied by a small
because circumstances require you to do individual (such as a young teenager or a
so, make sure the 42 small adult) or a child who weighs more
indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating than the weight of a typical 12-month-old
that the front passenger front air bag is child in a standard child restraint – both of
deactivated. Should the 42 which are instances where the system may
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while suppress deployment of the front
the restraint is installed, please check passenger front air bag even though the
installation. Periodically check the impact met the criteria and was of

Occupant safety 45
sufficient severity to deploy the driver front RDo not move the front passenger seat
air bag backwards against stiff objects.
RSit with the seat belt properly fastened in a
position that is as upright as possible with
your back against the seat backrest.
Safety and security

RWhile seated, an occupant should not
position him/herself in such a way as to
cause the occupant’s weight to be lifted
from the seat bottom as this may result in
the OCS being unable to correctly
approximate the occupant’s weight
category.
RRead and observe all warnings in this
42 indicator lamp : will be
illuminated, except with the SmartKey chapter.
removed from the starter switch or with the
starter switch in position 0. OCS Self-test
G Warning! After turning the SmartKey in the starter
If the red SRS indicator lamp + in the switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
instrument cluster and the 42 KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
indicator lamp are lit at the same time, there twice, the 42 indicator lamp
is a malfunction in the OCS. The front illuminates. If an adult occupant is properly
passenger front air bag will be deactivated in sitting on the front passenger seat and the
this case. Have the system checked by system classifies the occupant as an adult,
qualified technicians as soon as possible. the 42 indicator lamp will
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz illuminate and go out after approximately
Center. 6 seconds.
Only have the seat repaired or replaced at an If the seat is not occupied and the system
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. classifies the front passenger seat as being
In order to ensure proper operation of the air empty, the 42 indicator lamp
bag system and OCS: will illuminate and not go out.
RDo not place more than 4.4 lb (2 kg) into G Warning!
the parcel net on the back of the front If the 42 indicator lamp does not
passenger seat. Otherwise, the OCS may illuminate, the system is not functioning. You
not be able to properly approximate the must contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
occupant weight category. Center before seating any child on the front
RDo not place objects under and/or around passenger seat.
the front passenger seat. For more information, see the “Practical
RDo not hang anything from or attach any hints” section (Y page 322).
items to the seats.
G Warning!
RDo not stuff objects such as books between
Never place anything between seat cushion
the front passenger seat and the center and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces
console or front passenger door. the effectiveness of the OCS. The bottom and
back of the child seat must make full contact
Z
46 Occupant safety
with the passenger seat cushion and Children can be killed or seriously injured by
backrest. an inflating air bag. Note the following
If necessary, adjust the tilt of the passenger important information when circumstances
seat backrest. require you to place a child in the front
An incorrectly mounted child seat could cause passenger seat:
Safety and security
injuries to the child in case of an accident, RChildren 12 years old and under must never
instead of increasing protection for the child. ride in the front seat, except in a Mercedes-
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for Benz authorized BabySmart™ compatible
installation of child seats. child seat, which operates with the
BabySmart™ system installed in the vehicle
to deactivate the front passenger front air
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation bag when it is installed properly. Otherwise
system they will be struck by the air bag when it
inflates in a crash. If this happens, serious
The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system or fatal injury will result.
is standard equipment in Canada. RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
G Warning! front passenger seat will be seriously
According to accident statistics, children are injured or even killed if the front passenger
safer when properly restrained in the rear front air bag inflates in a collision which
seating positions than in the front seating could occur under some circumstances,
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that even with the air bag technology installed
children be placed in the rear seats whenever in your vehicle. The only means to
possible. Regardless of seating position, completely eliminate this risk is to never
children 12 years old and under must be place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
seated and properly secured in an appropriate in the front seat. We therefore strongly
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster recommend that you always place a child
seat recommended for the size and weight of in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
the child. RIf you must install a BabySmart™
The infant or child restraint must be properly compatible rear-facing child restraint on
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat the front passenger seat because
belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and circumstances require you to do so, make
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the sure the 42 indicator lamp is
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. illuminated, indicating that the front
Occupants, especially children, should always passenger front air bag is deactivated.
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt Should the 42 indicator lamp
properly and use an appropriately sized infant not illuminate or go out while the restraint
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat is installed, please check installation.
recommended for the size and weight of the Periodically check the 42
child. indicator lamp while driving to make sure
the 42 indicator lamp is
illuminated. If the 42 indicator
lamp goes out or remains out, do not
transport a child on the front passenger
seat until the system has been repaired.

Occupant safety 47
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the Please contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz

front passenger seat will be seriously Center for information on availability. With
injured or even killed if the front passenger the special child seat installed properly, the
front air bag inflates. front passenger front air bag will not deploy.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward- The 42 indicator lamp : will be
Safety and security

facing child restraint on the front passenger illuminated, except with the SmartKey
seat, move the seat as far back as possible, removed from the starter switch or with the
use the proper child restraint starter switch in position 0.
recommended for the age, size and weight The system does not deactivate
of the child, and secure child restraint with Rthe side impact air bag
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
Rthe window curtain air bag
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
Rthe Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD)
G Warning!
When using a BabySmart™ compatible child Self-test BabySmart™ without special
seat on the front passenger seat, the front child seat installed
passenger front air bag will not deploy only if
the 42 indicator lamp remains After turning the SmartKey in the starter
illuminated.
switch to position 1 or 2 or pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once or
Please be sure to check the 42 twice, the 42 indicator lamp
indicator lamp every time you use a comes on for approximately 6 seconds and
BabySmart™ compatible child seat on the then goes out.
front passenger seat. Should the
42 indicator lamp go out while
If the 42 indicator lamp should
the restraint is installed, please check
not come on or is continuously lit, the system
installation. If the 42 indicator
is not functioning. You must see an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center before
lamp remains out, do not use the
seating any child on the front passenger seat.
BabySmart™ restraint to transport a child on
More information can be found in the
the front passenger seat until the system has
“Practical hints” section (Y page 322).
been repaired.
G Warning!
Do not place powered-on laptops, mobile
phones, electronic tags such as those used in
ski passes and like electronic devices on the
front passenger seat. Signals from such
devices may interfere with the BabySmart™
air bag deactivation system. Such signal
interference may cause the 42
indicator lamp not to come on during self-test.
The SRS indicator lamp + and/or the
42 indicator lamp could be
continuously lit, indicating that the system is
Special BabySmart™ compatible child seats, not functioning. The front passenger front air
designed for use with the Mercedes-Benz bag could deploy inadvertently or fail to
system, are required for use with the deploy in an accident.
BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system.
Z
48 Occupant safety
G Warning! seat belt properly buckled. Without your seat

The BabySmart™ air bag deactivation system belt buckled, you are much more likely to hit
will ONLY work with a special child seat the interior of the vehicle or be ejected from
designed to operate with it. It will not work it. You can be seriously injured or killed.
with child seats which are not BabySmart™ In the same crash, the possibility of injury or
Safety and security
compatible. death is lessened if you are properly wearing

Never place anything between seat cushion your seat belt. The air bags can only protect
and child seat (e.g. pillow), since it reduces as intended if the occupants are properly
the effectiveness off the BabySmart™ air bag wearing their seat belts.
deactivation system. The bottom of the child
seat must make full contact with the front G Warning!
passenger seat cushion. An incorrectly Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
mounted child seat could cause injuries to the backrest in an excessively reclined position as
child in case of an accident, instead of this can be dangerous. You could slide under
protecting the child. the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions for it, the seat belt would apply force at the
installation of special child seats. abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
or even fatal injuries. The seat backrest and
seat belt provide the best restraint when the
wearer is in a position that is as upright as
Seat belts
possible and the seat belt is properly
Safety notes positioned on the body.
The use of seat belts and infant and child G Warning!

restraint systems is required by law in all 50 Never let more people ride in the vehicle than
states, the District of Columbia, the U.S. there are seat belts available. Make sure
territories and all Canadian provinces. everyone riding in the vehicle is correctly
Even where this is not the case, all vehicle restrained with a separate seat belt. Never
occupants should have their seat belts use a seat belt for more than one person at a
fastened whenever the vehicle is in motion. time.
For information on infants and children
traveling with you in the vehicle and restraint G Warning!
systems for infants and children, see Damaged seat belts or seat belts that have
“Children in the vehicle” (Y page 55). been subjected to stress in an accident must
be replaced. Also, the seat belt anchoring
G Warning! points must be checked.
Always fasten your seat belt before driving off. Only use seat belts which have been approved
Always make sure all of your passengers are by Mercedes-Benz.
properly restrained. You and your passengers
Do not make any modifications to the seat
should always wear seat belts.
belts. This can lead to unintended activation
Failure to wear and properly fasten and of the ETDs or to their failure to activate when
position your seat belt greatly increases your necessary.
risk of injuries and their likely severity in an
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
accident.
severely weaken them. In a crash they may
If you are ever in an accident, your injuries can not be able to provide adequate protection.
be considerably more severe without your

Occupant safety 49
Have all work carried out only by qualified touch the neck. Never pass the shoulder
technicians. Contact an authorized portion of the seat belt under your arm. For
Mercedes-Benz Center. this purpose, you can adjust the height of
the seat belt outlet.
Proper use of seat belts RPosition the lap belt as low as possible on
Safety and security

your hips and not across the abdomen. If
G Warning! the lap belt is positioned across your
USE SEAT BELTS PROPERLY abdomen, it could cause serious injuries in
RSeat belts can only protect when used a crash.
properly. Never wear seat belts in any other RNever wear seat belts over rigid or
way than as described in this section, as breakable objects in or on your clothing,
that could result in serious injuries in case such as eyeglasses, pens, keys etc., as
of an accident. these might cause injuries.
REach occupant should wear their seat belt RMake sure the seat belt is always fitted
at all times, because seat belts help reduce snugly. Take special care of this when
the likelihood of and potential severity of wearing loose clothing.
injuries in accidents, including rollovers.
RNever use a seat belt for more than one
The integrated restraint system includes
person at a time. Do not fasten a seat belt
SRS (driver front air bag, driver side knee
around a person and another person or
bag, front passenger front air bag, side
other objects at the same time.
impact air bags, window curtain air bags for
door windows), Emergency Tensioning RSeat belts should not be worn twisted. In a
Devices (ETDs), seat belt force limiters, and crash, you would not have the full width of
front seat knee bolsters. the seat belt to distribute impact forces.
The system is designed to enhance the The twisted seat belt against your body
protection offered to properly belted could cause injuries.
occupants in certain frontal (front air bags, RPregnant women should also always use a
driver side knee bag and ETDs) and side lap/shoulder belt. The lap belt portion
(side impact air bags, window curtain air should be positioned as low as possible on
bags, and ETDs) impacts which exceed the hips to avoid any possible pressure on
preset deployment thresholds and in the abdomen.
certain rollovers (window curtain air bags RPlace the seat backrest in a position that is
and ETDs).
as upright as possible.
RNever wear the shoulder belt under your RCheck your seat belt during travel to make
arm, against your neck or off your shoulder.
sure it is properly positioned.
In a frontal crash, your body would move
too far forward. That would increase the RNever place your feet on the instrument
chance of head and neck injuries. The seat panel, dashboard, or on the seat. Always
belt would also apply too much force to the keep both feet on the floor in front of the
ribs or abdomen, which could severely seat.
injure internal organs such as your liver or RWhen using a seat belt to secure infant
spleen. restraints, toddler restraints, or children in
Adjust the seat belt so that the shoulder booster seats, always follow the child seat
section is located as close as possible to manufacturer’s instructions.
the middle of the shoulder. It should not
Z
50 Occupant safety
G Warning!
Do not pass seat belts over sharp edges. They
could tear.
Do not allow the seat belt to get caught in the
door or in the seat adjustment mechanism.
Safety and security
This could damage the seat belt.

Never attempt to make modifications to seat
belts. This could impair the effectiveness of
the seat belts.
Fastening the seat belts

G Warning!
According to accident statistics, children are
safer when properly restrained in the rear
seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
children be placed in the rear seats whenever
possible. Regardless of seating position, X With a smooth motion, pull the seat belt out
children 12 years old and under must be of seat belt outlet :.
seated and properly secured in an X Place the shoulder portion of the seat belt
appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler across the top of your shoulder and the lap
restraint, or booster seat recommended for portion across your hips.
the size and weight of the child. For additional
X Push latch plate ; into buckle = until it
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
clicks.
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
Seat belt adjustment function: The seat
significantly increased if the child restraints
belts on both front seats adjust to the
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
upper body automatically as necessary
or the child is not properly secured in the child
(Y page 51).
restraint.
X If necessary, adjust the seat belt to the
G Warning! correct height (Y page 51).

Vehicles with BabySmart™ air bag X If necessary, tighten the lap portion to a
deactivation system, Canada only: Children snug fit by pulling shoulder portion up.
12 years old and under must never ride in the All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat
front seat, except in a Mercedes-Benz belt have special seat belt retractors to
authorized BabySmart™ compatible child secure child restraints properly. For more
seat, which operates with the BabySmart™ information on special seat belt retractors,
system installed in the vehicle to deactivate see “Infant and child restraint system”
the front passenger front air bag when it is (Y page 56).
installed properly. Otherwise they will be To release the seat belt with seat belt release
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a button ?, see (Y page 51).
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
will result.

Occupant safety 51
Seat belt outlet height adjustment Releasing the seat belts

X Press seat belt release button ?
(Y page 50).
Allow the retractor to completely rewind
the seat belt by guiding latch plate ;
Safety and security

(Y page 50).
! Make sure the seat belt retracts
completely. Otherwise the seat belt and/or
latch plate could get caught or pinched in
the door or in the seat mechanism. This can
damage the seat belt and impair its
X Raising: Slide the seat belt outlet height effectiveness, and/or cause damage to the
adjuster upward. door and/or door trim panel. Such damage
The seat belt outlet height adjuster is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
engages in different positions. Limited Warranty.
Damaged seat belts must be replaced.
X Lowering: Press and hold release Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
button :. Center.
X Slide the seat belt outlet height adjuster
downward. Enhanced seat belt reminder system
X Release button : and make sure the seat
When the engine is started, the seat belt
belt outlet height adjuster engages into telltale 7 will always illuminate for
place.
6 seconds to remind you and your passengers
to fasten your seat belts.
Seat belt adjustment function If the driver’s seat belt is not fastened when
The seat belt adjustment function adjusts the the engine is started, an additional warning
seat belts on both front seats to the upper chime will sound. The warning chime goes out
body of the respective vehicle occupant. The after approximately 6 seconds or once the
seat belt will be pulled slightly tighter for that driver’s seat belt is fastened.
purpose when If after these 6 seconds the driver’s or the
Ryou engage the latch plate into the buckle front passenger’s seat belt (with the front
and then turn the SmartKey in the starter passenger seat occupied) is not fastened with
switch to position 2 front doors closed,
Rthe seat belt telltale 7 remains
Rthe SmartKey in the starter switch is in
position 2 and you then engage the latch illuminated for as long as either the driver’s
plate in the buckle or front passenger’s seat belt is not
fastened.
The seat belt adjustment function takes place
Rand if the vehicle speed once exceeds
with a certain amount of retracting force
when the system senses slack between the 15 mph (25 km/h), the seat belt telltale
vehicle occupant and the seat belt. Do not 7 starts flashing and a warning chime
retain the seat belt during this procedure. You sounds with increasing intensity for a
can activate or deactivate the seat belt maximum of 60 seconds or until the
adjustment function via the control system driver’s and front passenger’s seat belt are
(Y page 139). fastened.
Z
52 Occupant safety
If you and/or your passenger release the activate with or without the respective seat
seat belt during driving, the seat belt belts fastened.
telltale 7 starts flashing and the In an impact, the ETDs remove slack from the
warning chime sounds as described before. seat belts in such a way that the seat belts fit
If the driver’s or the front passenger’s seat more snugly against the body. Seat belt force
Safety and security
belt remains unfastened after 60 seconds, limiters, when activated, are employed to
the warning chime stops sounding, the seat help reduce the peak force exerted by the
belt telltale 7 stops flashing but seat belts on occupants during a crash.
continues to be illuminated. i The ETDs do not correct an incorrect seat
After a vehicle standstill, the warning chime position or incorrectly worn seat belts.
is reactivated and the seat belt telltale The ETDs do not pull occupants back
7 is flashing again if the vehicle speed toward the seat backrest.
once exceeds 15 mph (25 km/h).
The seat belt telltale 7 will only go out if G Warning!
both the driver’s and the front passenger’s Pyrotechnic ETDs that were activated must be
seat belt (with the front passenger seat replaced.
occupied) are fastened, or the vehicle is For your safety, when disposing of the
standing still and a front door is opened. pyrotechnic ETDs always follow our safety
For more information, see “Practical hints” instructions. These are available at any
(Y page 317). authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The PRE-SAFE® system has electrically
Emergency Tensioning Device (ETD), operated reversible pre-tensioners that do
seat belt force limiter not require replacement after activation.
The seat belts for the front seats and second

row outer seats are equipped with ETDs and
Preventive occupant safety (PRE-
seat belt force limiters. The seat belts for the
third-row seats are equipped with ETDs.
SAFE®)
The ETDs are designed to activate in the G Warning!
following cases: The PRE-SAFE® system is intended to reduce
Rin frontal or rear-end impacts exceeding the effects of an accident on vehicle
the system’s preset deployment threshold occupants who are wearing their seat belt
Rin
properly. Despite your vehicle being equipped
side impacts exceeding the system’s
preset deployment threshold on the far with the PRE-SAFE® system, the possibility of
side of the impact personal injuries occurring as a result of an
accident cannot be eliminated. Therefore,
Rin certain vehicle rollovers always drive carefully and adjust your driving
Rif the restraint systems are operational and to the prevailing road, weather, and traffic
functioning correctly, see “SRS indicator conditions.
lamp” (Y page 36)
The ETDs for the front seats will only activate
if the front seat belts are fastened (latch plate
properly inserted into buckle).
The ETDs for the rear outer seats (second-row
seats) or rear seats (third-row seats) will

Occupant safety 53
The PRE-SAFE® system takes preventive ! When moving the seats, make sure there
measures to better protect the occupants are no items in the footwell or behind the
from the possibility of personal injuries in the seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
following hazardous situations: seats and/or the items.
Remergency braking maneuvers with the For information on the seat belt adjustment
Safety and security

Brake Assist System (BAS) (Y page 63) function as an integrated comfort feature of
activated PRE-SAFE®, see (Y page 51).
Rcritical dynamic driving situations, e.g.
when the vehicle has been caused to
understeer or oversteer because it has NECK-PRO active front head
exceeded its physical limitations or in case restraints
of evasive steering maneuvers at speeds The NECK-PRO active front head restraints
above approximately 85 mph (140 km/h) are intended to offer the driver and front
PRE-SAFE® takes the following measures passenger increased protection from
when it is activated: whiplash-type injuries. In the event of a rear-
RThe front seat belts are pre-tensioned
end collision, the NECK-PRO active front head
restraints on the front seats are designed to
automatically.
move forward in the direction of travel. They
RVehicles with front passenger seat memory thus provide the head with increased support
function: If the passenger seat is in an earlier on in the collision sequence. The
unfavorable position, the seat will be NECK-PRO active front head restraints will
adjusted to a position that seeks to better move forward whether the seats are occupied
protect the occupant. or not.
RIf the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving
G Warning!
situation, the door windows close, except
Do not attach any objects (e.g. hangers) to the
for a minimal gap that remains open.
head restraint posts. Otherwise, the NECK-
RVehicles with power tilt/sliding sunroof: If PRO active front head restraints may not be
the vehicle is in a critical dynamic driving able to function properly or offer the intended
situation, the tilt/sliding sunroof also degree of protection they were designed for
closes, except for a minimal gap that in the event of a rear-end collision.
remains open.
If the closing procedure of any of these G Warning!
elements is blocked, it will stop and open Only use seat or head restraint covers which
slightly. have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Once the hazardous situation no longer exists Benz for your vehicle model.
and an accident has been avoided, the seat Using other seat or head restraint covers may
belt pre-tensioning is deactivated. All of the interfere with or prevent the activation of the
PRE-SAFE® settings can be re-adjusted NECK-PRO active front head restraints and/
following the critical driving event. or the deployment of the front side impact air
bags.
If the seat belts do not release:
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
X Adjust the seat backrest or seat slightly to for availability.
the rear until the seat belt tension is
reduced. When the NECK-PRO active front head
The locking mechanism releases. restraints have been triggered in an accident,
the NECK-PRO active front head restraints
Z
54 Occupant safety
must be reset. Otherwise, the NECK-PRO

active front head restraints cannot offer any
additional protection in the event of another
rear-end collision.
For information on resetting the activated
Safety and security
NECK-PRO active front head restraints, see

“Resetting activated head restraints”
(Y page 325).
You cannot remove the NECK-PRO active
front head restraints.
G Warning!
For your protection, drive only with properly
positioned head restraints.
Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
to the head as possible and the center of the
head restraint supports the back of the head
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation. Steering wheel
For information on head restraint adjustment, G Observe Safety notes, see page 91.
see “Head restraint height” (Y page 83), or X Position steering wheel : properly. See
see “Head restraint fore and aft adjustment”
(Y page 91) for manual adjustment and
(Y page 84).
(Y page 92) for electrical adjustment.
Make sure:
Correct driver seat adjustment RYou can reach the steering wheel with your
arms slightly bent at the elbows.
G Warning!
RYou can move your legs freely.
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle
control the following must be done before the RAll displays (including malfunction and
vehicle is put into motion: indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
Rseat adjustment are clearly visible.
Rhead restraint adjustment
Seat belt
Rsteering wheel adjustment
Rrear view mirror adjustment
X Fasten and position your seat belt ;
Rfastening of seat belts
correctly (Y page 50).

Occupant safety 55
Make sure: Children in the vehicle

RThe seat belt is always fitted snugly.
Safety notes
RAdjust the seat belt so that the shoulder
section is located as close as possible to If an infant or child is traveling with you in the
the middle of the shoulder. vehicle:
Safety and security

X Secure the child using an infant or child
RPlace the lap portion of the seat belt as low
restraint appropriate to the age and size of
as possible on your hips.
the child.
X Make sure the infant or child is properly
Seat and head restraint secured at all times while the vehicle is in
G Observe Safety notes, see page 82. motion.
X Position seat = and head restraint G Warning!
properly. See (Y page 83) for seat and When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
head restraint adjustment. SmartKey from the starter switch. Always
Observe the following points: take the SmartKey with you and lock the
RAlways be in a properly seated position. vehicle. Do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle, even if they are secured in a child
RThe position should be as far rearward from
restraint system, or with access to an
the front air bag in the steering wheel as unlocked vehicle. A child’s unsupervised
possible, while still permitting proper access to a vehicle could result in an accident
operation of vehicle controls. and/or serious personal injury. The children
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating could
position that still allows you to reach the Rinjure themselves on parts of the vehicle
accelerator/brake pedal safely.
Rbe seriously or fatally injured through
RThe seat must be adjusted so that you can excessive exposure to extreme heat or cold
correctly fasten and position your seat belt.
Rinjure themselves or cause an accident with
RThe seat backrest must be in a position that
vehicle equipment that can be operated
is as nearly upright as possible. even if the SmartKey is removed from the
RAdjust the seat cushion so that the front starter switch or removed from the vehicle,
edge of the seat cushion lightly supports such as seat adjustment, steering wheel
your legs. adjustment, or the memory function
RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as If children open a door, they could injure other
close to the head as possible and the persons or get out of the vehicle and injure
center of the head restraint supports the themselves or be injured by following traffic.
back of the head at eye level. Do not expose the child restraint system to
RNever place hands under the seat or near direct sunlight. The child restraint system’s
any moving parts while the seat is being metal parts, for example, could become very
adjusted. hot, and the child could be burned by these
parts.
G Warning!
Do not carry heavy or hard objects in the
passenger or cargo compartment unless they
are firmly secured in place.
Z
56 Occupant safety
Unsecured or improperly positioned cargo G Warning!

increases a child’s risk of injury in the event Never release the seat belt buckle while the
of vehicle is in motion, since the special seat belt
Rstrong braking maneuvers retractor will be deactivated.
Rsudden changes of direction
Safety and security
Ran accident
i Information on child seats with mounting
fittings for tether anchorages
(Y page 58).
Infant and child restraint systems For information on LATCH-type child seat
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. anchors (Y page 59).
We recommend all infants and children be The use of infant or child restraints is required
properly restrained at all times while the by law in all 50 states, the District of
vehicle is in motion. Columbia, the U.S. territories and all
Canada only: Canadian provinces.
Only use a BabySmart™ compatible child Infants and small children should be seated
restraint for the front passenger seat in this in an appropriate infant or child restraint
vehicle. system. They must be properly secured in
All lap/shoulder belts except the driver’s seat accordance with the manufacturer’s
belt have special seat belt retractors for instructions for the child restraint. All infant
secure fastening of child restraints. or child restraint systems must comply with
U.S. Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standards
To fasten a child restraint, follow the child
213 and 225 and Canadian Motor Vehicle
restraint manufacturer’s instructions for
Safety Standards 213 and 210.2.
mounting.
A statement by the child restraint
To activate the special seat belt retractor: manufacturer of compliance with these
X Pull the shoulder belt out completely and standards can be found on the instruction
let it retract. label on the restraint and in the instruction
During seat belt retraction, a ratcheting manual provided with the restraint.
sound can be heard to indicate that the When using any infant restraint, toddler
special seat belt retractor is activated. restraint, or booster seat, make sure to
The seat belt is now locked. carefully read and follow all manufacturer’s
X Push down on child restraint to take up any instructions for installation and use.
slack. Please read and observe warning labels
affixed to the inside of the vehicle and to
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor:
infant or child restraints.
X Release the seat belt buckle and let the
seat belt retract completely. G Warning!
The seat belt can then again be used in the According to accident statistics, children are
usual manner. safer when properly restrained in the rear
To deactivate the special seat belt retractor seating positions than in the front seating
for the front passenger seat, the front position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
passenger seat must be in the most backward children be placed in the rear seats whenever
position. possible. Regardless of seating position,
children 12 years old and under must be
seated and properly secured in an appropriate

Occupant safety 57
infant restraint, toddler restraint, or booster RA child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
seat recommended for the size and weight of front passenger seat will be seriously
the child. injured or even killed if the front passenger
The infant or child restraint must be properly front air bag inflates in a collision which
secured with the vehicle’s seat belt, the seat could occur under some circumstances,
Safety and security

belt and top tether strap, or lower anchors and even with the air bag technology installed
top tether strap, fully in accordance with the in your vehicle. The only means to
child seat manufacturer’s instructions. completely eliminate this risk is to never
Occupants, especially children, should always place a child in a rear-facing child restraint
sit as upright as possible, wear the seat belt in the front seat. We therefore strongly
properly and use an appropriately sized infant recommend that you always place a child
restraint, toddler restraint, or booster seat in a rear-facing child restraint in a backseat.
recommended for the size and weight of the RIf you must install a rear-facing child
child. restraint on the front passenger seat
Children can be killed or seriously injured by because circumstances require you to do
an inflating air bag. Note the following so, make sure the 42
important information when circumstances indicator lamp is illuminated, indicating
require you to place a child in the front that the front passenger front air bag is
passenger seat: deactivated. Should the 42
RUSA
indicator lamp not illuminate or go out while
only: Your vehicle is equipped with air
the restraint is installed, please check
bag technology designed to deactivate the
installation. Periodically check the
front passenger front air bag in your vehicle
42 indicator lamp while
when the system senses the weight of a
driving to make sure the 42
typical 12-month-old child or less along
with the weight of a standard appropriate indicator lamp is illuminated. If the
child restraint on the front passenger seat. 42 indicator lamp goes out or
remains out, do not transport a child on the
RUSA only: For children larger than the front passenger seat until the system has
typical 12-month-old child, the front been repaired.
passenger front air bag may or may not be
A child in a rear-facing child restraint on the
activated. Always make sure the
front passenger seat will be seriously
42 indicator lamp is
injured or even killed if the front passenger
illuminated, indicating that the front
front air bag inflates.
passenger front air bag is deactivated.
RIf you have to place a child in a forward-
RCanada only: Children 12 years old and
facing child restraint on the front passenger
under must never ride in the front seat,
seat, move the seat as far back as possible,
except in a Mercedes-Benz authorized
use the proper child restraint
BabySmart™ compatible child seat, which
recommended for the age, size and weight
operates with the BabySmart™ system
of the child, and secure child restraint with
installed in the vehicle to deactivate the
the vehicle’s seat belt according to the child
front passenger front air bag when it is
seat manufacturer’s instructions.
installed properly. Otherwise they will be
struck by the air bag when it inflates in a
G Warning!
crash. If this happens, serious or fatal injury
will result. Infants and small children should never share
a seat belt with another occupant. During an
Z
58 Occupant safety
accident, they could be crushed between the Top tether straps enable an additional
occupant and seat belt. connection to be made between child
A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is restraint systems secured with LATCH-type
significantly increased if the child restraints anchors and rear seats. This can further
are not properly secured in the vehicle and/ reduce the risk of injury.
Safety and security

restraint.
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck. A booster seat may be
necessary to achieve proper seat belt
positioning for children over 41 lb (18 kg) until
they reach a height where a lap/shoulder belt
fits properly without a booster.
When the child restraint is not in use, remove
it from the vehicle or secure it with the seat X Press in lower part of anchorage ring
belt to prevent the child restraint from cover : on the seat backrest on which a
becoming a projectile in the event of an child seat is to be installed.
accident. X Pull on upper part of anchorage ring
cover : to remove cover.
Installation of infant and child restraint X Store anchorage ring cover : in a
systems convenient place (e.g. glove box).
G Warning!
Always lock the seat backrests in their upright
position when the rear seats are occupied by
passengers. Lock the seat backrests in their
upright position after installing top tether
straps or when the extended cargo
compartment is not in use. Make sure that
seat backrests are secured properly by
pushing and pulling on the seat backrests. If
a seat backrest is not locked properly, the
X Move the respective head restraint to its
seat backrest could fold. The child seat would
uppermost position (Y page 88).
no longer be supported properly or positioned
to provide its intended benefit. That could
cause serious or even fatal injuries.
This vehicle is equipped with tether

anchorages for a top tether strap at the
second-row seat backrest. For installing an
infant and child restraint system at the
third-row seats, use the cargo tie-down rings
in the cargo compartment (Y page 200).

Occupant safety 59
Child seat anchors – LATCH-type

G Warning!
Children too big for a toddler restraint must
Safety and security

ride in seats using regular seat belts. Position
shoulder belt across chest and shoulder, not
face or neck.
A booster seat may be necessary to achieve
proper seat belt positioning for children over
41 lb (18 kg) until they reach a height where
X Guide top tether strap ? between the a lap/shoulder belt fits properly without a
head restraint and top of the seat backrest. booster.
X Securely fasten hook =, which is part of
Install child seat according to manufacturer’s
top tether strap ?, to anchorage ring ;. instructions.
Make sure The child seat must be firmly attached to both
Rhook = is attached to anchorage ring ; anchors.
beyond the safety catch, as illustrated An incorrectly mounted child seat may come
Rtop
loose during an accident which could result in
tether strap ? is not twisted
serious injury or death to the child.
Rthe head restraint is installed and Damaged or impact damaged child seats or
positioned such that top tether strap ? child seat mounting fittings must be replaced.
can pass freely between the head restraint
and top of the seat backrest Each of the outboard second-row seats and
Rtop
third-row seats has two LATCH-type anchors
tether strap ? is positioned between
for the installation of a LATCH-type child seat
the seat backrest and the cargo
with matching mounting fittings.
compartment cover blind (if installed)
Non-LATCH-type child seats may also be used
Rtop tether strap ? is positioned between and can be installed using the vehicle’s seat
the seat backrest and the cargo net (if belt system. Install child seat according to the
installed) manufacturer’s instructions.
X Lower the head restraint if necessary The LATCH-type anchors are blended with
(Y page 88). covers.
Make sure the top tether strap can pass
freely between the head restraint and top
of the seat backrest.
X Install the child restraint system and
tighten the top tether strap according to
the child restraint manufacturer’s
instructions.
After removing the child restraint system and
top tether strap ?:
X Reinstall anchorage ring cover :.
Example, second-row seats
Z
60 Occupant safety
X Remove anchorage ring covers : from

anchors ; of the seat on which a child seat
is to be installed.
Safety and security
X Securing: Press the lever down in direction

of arrow ;.
X Check to make sure the child safety locks
Example, second-row seats are working properly.
X Install a LATCH-type child seat according X Releasing: Press the lever up in direction
to the manufacturer’s instructions. of arrow :.
A rigid connection between the child seat
and the body of the vehicle is established. Override switch
X Make sure that the seat belt for the rear G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
center seat can operate freely with a child With the override switch you can disable the
seat installed. rear door window switches in the rear door
panels. This can be useful, for instance, when
Child safety you have children riding in the rear passenger
compartment.
Child safety locks
G Warning!
Activate the override switch when children
G Warning! are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
Children could open a rear door from the children may otherwise injure themselves,
inside. This may cause serious personal injury e.g. by becoming trapped in the rear door
or an accident. Therefore, secure the rear window opening.
doors with the child safety locks whenever
children are riding in the back seats of the
vehicle.
The child safety locks on the rear doors

enable you to secure each rear door
individually. You cannot open a secured rear
door from the inside. You can open the rear
door from the outside when the vehicle is
unlocked.
X Activating: Press override switch :.

The switch engages in recessed position.

Driving safety systems 61
The rear door windows can no longer be i USA only:

operated using the respective switch This device complies with Part 15 of the
located in the rear doors. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
You can still operate the rear door windows following two conditions:
using the switches located on the door 1. This device may not cause harmful
Safety and security

control panel of the driver’s door. interference, and
X Deactivating: Press override switch :
2. this device must accept any
again. interference received, including
The switch disengages from its recessed interference that may cause undesired
position back to its original position. operation.
The rear door windows can be operated
Any unauthorized modification to this
again using the respective switch located
device could void the user’s authority to
in the rear doors.
operate the equipment.
For more information on power windows, see
the “Controls in detail” section i Canada only:
(Y page 105). This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
Panic alarm
1. This device may not cause interference,
and
interference received, including
interference that may cause undesired
operation of the device.
Driving safety systems

Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X
Introduction
Activating: Press and hold !
button : for at least 1 second. This section contains information about the
An audible alarm and flashing exterior following driving safety systems:
lamps will operate briefly. RABS (Antilock Brake System)
X Deactivating: Press ! button : again.
RBAS (Brake Assist System)
or REBP (Electronic Brake Proportioning)
X Insert the SmartKey into the starter switch.
RESP® (Electronic Stability Program)
or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button. i In winter operation, the maximum
The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be effectiveness of most of the driving
inside the vehicle. systems described in this section is only
Z
62 Driving safety systems
achieved with winter tires, or snow chains and significantly reduces braking
as required. effectiveness.
Safety notes The Antilock Brake System (ABS) regulates

the brake pressure so that the wheels do not
G Warning! lock during braking. This allows you to
Safety and security
The following factors increase the risk of maintain the ability to steer your vehicle.
accidents: The ABS is functional above a speed of
RExcessive speed, especially in turns approximately 5 mph (8 km/h) independent
of road surface conditions.
RWet and slippery road surfaces
On slippery road surfaces, the ABS will
RFollowing another vehicle too closely respond even to light brake pressure.
The driving safety systems described in this The ABS indicator lamp ! indicator lamp
section cannot reduce these risks or prevent in the instrument cluster comes on when you
the natural laws of physics from acting on the switch on the ignition. It goes out when the
vehicle. They cannot increase braking or engine is running.
steering efficiency beyond that afforded by
the condition of the vehicle brakes and tires Braking
or the traction afforded.
At the instant one of the wheels is about to
Only a safe, attentive, and skillful driver can
lock up, a slight pulsation can be felt in the
prevent accidents.
brake pedal. The pulsation indicates that the
The capabilities of a vehicle equipped with the ABS is in the regulating mode.
driving safety systems described in this
X Keep firm and steady pressure on the brake
section must never be exploited in a reckless
pedal while you feel the pulsation.
or dangerous manner which could jeopardize
the user’s safety or the safety of others. Continuous, steady brake pedal pressure
yields the advantages provided by the ABS,
Always adjust your driving style to the
namely braking power and the ability to steer
prevailing road and weather conditions and
the vehicle.
keep a safe distance to other road users and
objects on the street. The pulsating brake pedal can be an
indication of hazardous road conditions and
If a driving system malfunctions, other driving
functions as a reminder to take extra care
safety systems may also switch off. Observe
while driving.
indicator and warning lamps that may come
on as well as messages in the multifunction
display that may appear. Emergency brake maneuver
X Keep continuous full pressure on the brake
pedal.
ABS
G Warning!
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62. If the ABS malfunctions, other driving safety
G Warning! systems such as the BAS or the ESP® are also
switched off. Observe indicator and warning
Do not pump the brake pedal. Use firm, steady
lamps that may come on as well as messages
brake pedal pressure instead. Pumping the
in the multifunction display that may appear.
brake pedal defeats the purpose of the ABS

If the ABS malfunctions, the wheels may lock of the braking effort in straight-line braking
during hard braking, reducing steering without a loss of vehicle stability.
capability and extending the braking distance.
G Warning!
If the EBP malfunctions, the brake system will
Off-road ABS still function with full brake boost. However,
Safety and security

With the off-road driving program switched the rear wheels could lock up during
on, or with the transmission in LOW RANGE emergency braking situations, for example.
mode, the ABS designed for off-road driving You could lose control of the vehicle and
is activated automatically. cause an accident.
When applying the brakes at speeds below Adapt your driving style to the changed
18 mph (30 km/h), the front wheels are driving characteristics.
locked cyclically to shorten the braking
distance (dig-in effect). This will restrict
steering the vehicle. ESP®
BAS The Electronic Stability Program (ESP®) is
operational as soon as the engine is running.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 62. It monitors the vehicle’s traction (force of
The Brake Assist System (BAS) operates in adhesive friction between the tires and the
emergency situations. If you apply the brakes road surface) and handling.
very quickly, the BAS provides full brake The ESP® recognizes that the vehicle deviates
boost automatically, thereby potentially from the direction of travel as intended by the
reducing the braking distance. driver. By applying brakes to individual
X Apply continuous full braking pressure until wheels and by limiting the engine output, the
the emergency braking situation is over. ESP® works to stabilize the vehicle. The
The ABS will prevent the wheels from ESP® is especially useful while driving off and
locking. on wet or slippery road surfaces. The ESP®
When you release the brake pedal, the brakes also stabilizes the vehicle during braking and
function again as normal. The BAS is then steering maneuvers.
deactivated. The ESP® warning lamp d in the
G Warning! instrument cluster comes on when you switch
If the BAS malfunctions, the brake system still on the ignition. It goes out when the engine
functions, but without the additional brake is running.
boost available that the BAS would normally The ESP® warning lamp d in the
provide in an emergency braking maneuver. instrument cluster flashes when the ESP® is
Therefore, the braking distance may increase. engaged.
EBP
The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP)
enhances braking effectiveness by allowing
the rear brakes to supply a greater proportion
Z
64 Driving safety systems
G Warning! i The Distronic system and cruise control

Never switch off the ESP® when you see the switch off automatically when the ESP®
ESP® warning lamp d flashing in the engages.
instrument cluster. In this case proceed as
follows: Electronic Traction System (4-ETS)
Safety and security
RWhen driving off, apply as little throttle as G Observe Safety notes, see page 62.
possible. The 4-ETS (four-wheel Electronic Traction
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator System) is a component of the ESP®. The
pedal. 4-ETS improves the vehicle’s ability to utilize
RAdapt
available traction, especially under slippery
your speed and driving style to the
road conditions by applying the brakes to a
prevailing road conditions.
spinning wheel. In addition, more power is
Failure to observe these guidelines could transferred to the wheel(s) with traction.
cause the vehicle to skid. The ESP® cannot When you switch off the ESP®, the 4-ETS is
prevent accidents resulting from excessive still enabled.
speed.
X If conditions require, switch on the off-road
driving program (Y page 158) or the LOW
! Only conduct operational or performance
RANGE mode (Y page 119).
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
tests are necessary, contact an authorized Off-road 4-ETS
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
With the off-road driving program switched on
otherwise seriously damage the brake
(Y page 158), or the transmission in LOW
system or the transfer case which is not
RANGE mode (Y page 120), the 4-ETS
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
designed for off-road use is activated
Warranty.
automatically.
! Because the ESP® operates
automatically, the engine and ignition must Switching off the ESP®
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch
G Warning!
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking The ESP® should not be switched off during
brake is being tested on a brake test normal driving other than in the
dynamometer. Such testing should be no circumstances described below. Disabling
longer than 10 seconds. the system will reduce vehicle stability in
driving maneuvers.
Active braking action through the ESP®
may otherwise seriously damage the brake Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
system which is not covered by the wheel is mounted.
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. To improve the vehicle’s traction, switch off
the ESP®. This allows the drive wheels to spin
! The ESP® will only function properly if you
and thus cut into surfaces for better grip, for
use wheels of the recommended tire size
example
as specified in the “Technical data” section
of this Operator’s Manual. Rwhen driving with snow chains
Rin deep snow
Rin sand or gravel

G Warning! G Warning!
Switch on the ESP® immediately if the When the ESP® warning lamp d is
aforementioned circumstances do not apply illuminated continuously, the ESP® is
anymore. Otherwise the ESP® will not switched off or is not operational due to a
stabilize the vehicle when it is starting to skid malfunction. Vehicle stability in standard
Safety and security

or a wheel is spinning. driving maneuvers is reduced.
Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing
When you switch off the ESP®,
road conditions and to the non-operating
Rthe ESP® does not stabilize the vehicle status of the ESP®.
Rthe engine output is not limited, which
allows the drive wheels to spin and thus cut ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
into surfaces for better grip extended period with the ESP® switched
Rthe 4-ETS will still apply the brakes to a off. This may cause serious damage to the
spinning wheel drivetrain which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Rthe ESP® continues to operate when you
are braking Switching on the ESP®
Rthe cruise control or the Distronic system
X Press ESP® switch : until the ESP®
cannot be activated
warning lamp d in the instrument
Rthe cruise control or the Distronic system cluster goes out.
switch off if activated You are now again in normal driving mode
i When the ESP® is switched off and one or with the ESP® switched on.
more drive wheels are spinning, the ESP®
warning lamp d in the instrument Off-road ESP®
cluster flashes. However, the ESP® will With the off-road driving program switched on
then not stabilize the vehicle. (Y page 158), or with the transmission in
LOW RANGE mode (Y page 120), the ESP®
designed for off-road use is activated
automatically. At speeds below 27 mph
(45 km/h), the ESP® assists in over–
understeering, thus improving vehicle
traction.
ESP® trailer stabilization

If the trailer you are towing should begin to
sway, the rig can only be stabilized by
immediately applying the brakes hard.
X With the engine running, press ESP® Steering during this maneuver will not help to
switch : until the ESP® warning lamp stabilize the rig.
d in the instrument cluster comes on. The ESP® will assist you in such situations.
The ESP® is switched off. The ESP® recognizes when the trailer starts
swaying and will apply the brakes to reduce
the vehicle speed to a non-critical speed that
Z
66 Anti-theft systems
allows the vehicle-trailer combination to Center or call 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (in the

stabilize. USA) or 1-800-387-0100 (in Canada).
The ESP® trailer stabilization is functional at
vehicle speeds above approximately 40 mph
(65 km/h) when the ESP® is switched on. Anti-theft alarm system
Safety and security
Once the alarm system has been armed, a

G Warning!
visual and audible alarm is triggered when
The system will not be able to assist when the
someone opens
trailer jackknifes
Ra door
Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
Rthe tailgate
malfunction
Ron Rthe hood
wet or icy roads
Ron roads with slippery surface The alarm will stay on even if the activating
element, a door, for example, is closed
Rin sand or gravel immediately.
Trailers with a high center of gravity may tip The alarm system will also be triggered when
over before the system recognizes swaying of Rthe vehicle is opened with the mechanical
the trailer.
key
Ra door is opened from the inside
Anti-theft systems To cancel the alarm after it has been
triggered, see “Canceling the alarm”
Immobilizer (Y page 67).
The immobilizer prevents unauthorized i If the alarm stays on for more than
persons from starting your vehicle.
30 seconds, the Tele Aid system initiates a
When leaving the vehicle, always take the call to the Response Center automatically.
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. The The Tele Aid system will initiate the call
engine can be started by anyone with a valid provided that
SmartKey that is left inside the vehicle.
Ryou have subscribed to the Tele Aid
service
Activating
Rthe Tele Aid service has been activated
X With SmartKey: Remove the SmartKey properly
from the starter switch.
Rthe necessary mobile phone, power
X With KEYLESS-GO: Turn off the engine and
open the driver’s door. supply and GPS coverage are available
Deactivating
X Switch on the ignition.
i Starting the engine will also deactivate
the immobilizer.
In the event that the engine cannot be
started (yet the vehicle’s battery is
charged), the system is not operational.

Anti-theft systems 67
The SmartKey must be within 3 ft (1 m) of

the vehicle.
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The SmartKey must be inside the vehicle.
Safety and security

X Arming: Lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash three times to
indicate that the vehicle is locked. Indicator
lamp : flashes to indicate that the alarm
system is armed.
i If the turn signal lamps do not flash three
times, a door or the tailgate may not be
properly closed.
Close the respective element.
X Disarming: Unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO.
The turn signal lamps flash once to indicate
that the alarm system is disarmed.
i Unless you open a door or the tailgate
within approximately 40 seconds after
unlocking the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe anti-theft alarm system will be

rearmed.
Canceling the alarm

To cancel the alarm, do one of the following:
X Press button % or & on the
SmartKey.
In vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Grasp an outside door handle.
Z
68

69
Vehicle equipment .............................. 70

Locking and unlocking ....................... 70
Starter switch positions ..................... 80
Seats .................................................... 82
Multifunction steering wheel ............. 91
Mirrors ................................................. 93
Memory function ................................. 96
Controls in detail
Lighting ................................................ 97
Wipers ................................................ 103
Power windows ................................. 105
Driving and parking .......................... 108
Automatic transmission ................... 114
Transfer case .................................... 119
Differential locks .............................. 121
Instrument cluster ............................ 124
Control system .................................. 125
Driving systems ................................ 144
Overview of climate control sys-
tem functions and air vents ............. 172
Climate control ................................. 175
3-zone automatic climate control . . . 181
Rear window defroster ..................... 191
Power tilt/sliding sunroof ............... 192
Loading and storing .......................... 194
Useful features ................................. 209

70 Locking and unlocking
Vehicle equipment SmartKey

Your vehicle comes supplied with two
i This Operator’s Manual describes all
SmartKeys, each with remote control and a
features, standard or optional, potentially removable mechanical key.
available for your vehicle at the time of
purchase. Please be aware that your The SmartKey centrally locks and unlocks:
vehicle might not be equipped with all Rthe doors
features described in this manual. Rthe tailgate
Controls in detail
Rthe fuel filler flap

Locking and unlocking
Notes
When unlocking the vehicle, all turn signal
lamps flash once. The locking knobs in the
doors move up. The anti-theft alarm system
is disarmed.
When locking the vehicle, all turn signal lamps
flash three times. The locking knobs in the
doors move down. The anti-theft alarm Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
system is armed. : & Lock button
All doors and the tailgate must be closed. ; F Unlock button for tailgate
If you cannot lock or unlock the vehicle with = % Unlock button
the SmartKey, the batteries in the SmartKey
are discharged, the SmartKey is i USA only:
malfunctioning, or the vehicle battery is This device complies with Part 15 of the
drained. FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
X Check the batteries in the SmartKey following two conditions:
(Y page 73) and replace them if 1. This device may not cause harmful
necessary. interference, and
X Use the mechanical key to unlock the
driver’s door (Y page 323).
X Use the mechanical key to lock the vehicle
(Y page 324). operation.
X Have the vehicle battery and the vehicle
battery connections checked at an
If the SmartKey is malfunctioning, contact
Roadside Assistance or an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center.

Locking and unlocking 71
i Canada only: KEYLESS-GO

This device complies with RSS-210 of
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to Vehicles equipped with KEYLESS-GO come
the following two conditions: with two SmartKeys with KEYLESS-GO, each
with remote control and a removable
1. This device may not cause interference, mechanical key.
and The KEYLESS-GO function is integrated into
2. this device must accept any the SmartKey. The validity of the SmartKey is
Controls in detail
interference received, including checked every time you grasp an outside door
interference that may cause undesired handle.
operation of the device. When the SmartKey is valid, your vehicle
Any unauthorized modification to this unlocks
device could void the user’s authority to Rthe doors
Rthe fuel filler flap
Factory setting Rthe tailgate
X Global unlocking: Press button %. i USA only:
Unless you open a door or the tailgate within This device complies with Part 15 of the
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
the vehicle: following two conditions:
RThe vehicle will be locked again. 1. This device may not cause harmful
interference, and
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
X Global locking: Press button &. interference received, including
Selective setting operation.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish Any unauthorized modification to this
to reprogramm the SmartKey. Pressing device could void the user’s authority to
button % will then only unlock the driver’s operate the equipment.
door and the fuel filler flap.
i Canada only:
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
% and & simultaneously for Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
approximately 6 seconds until the battery the following two conditions:
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
and
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Press button % once.
X Global unlocking: Press button %
twice. operation of the device.
X Global locking: Press button &.
Z
Important notes on using KEYLESS-GO Find the SmartKey or change its present
RYou
location immediately (e.g. place it on the
can also use the SmartKey with
front passenger seat or insert it in shirt
KEYLESS-GO like a normal SmartKey
pocket).
(Y page 70).
RIf you have started the engine with the
RYou can combine KEYLESS-GO functions
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button, you can
with normal SmartKey functions (e.g.
turn it off again by
unlocking with KEYLESS-GO and locking
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
Controls in detail
with button &).

button
RAlways carry the SmartKey with you.
- inserting the SmartKey into the starter
RNever store the SmartKey together with: switch when the vehicle is at a standstill
- Electronic items such as a mobile phone and the automatic transmission is in park
or another SmartKey position P
- Metallic objects such as coins or metal RThe vehicle could be inadvertently
foil unlocked if the SmartKey is within 3 ft (1 m)
Doing so could impair the function of the of the vehicle and
KEYLESS-GO system. - an outside door handle is splashed with
RTo lock or unlock the vehicle, the SmartKey water
must be located outside the vehicle within or
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door or the - you attempt to clean an outside door
tailgate. handle
RWhen the vehicle has been parked for more
RRemember that the engine can be started
than 72 hours, the KEYLESS-GO function is
deactivated. Pull an outside door handle by anyone with a SmartKey that is left
and switch on the ignition once to activate inside the vehicle.
the KEYLESS-GO function. Possibility 1 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
one SmartKey outside the vehicle):
RIf the SmartKey is positioned farther away
from the vehicle, the system may no longer If you leave the SmartKey behind when
recognize the SmartKey. The vehicle exiting and locking the vehicle, no message
cannot be locked or the engine started via appears in the multifunction display.
the KEYLESS-GO system. Possibility 2 (One SmartKey in the vehicle,
RIf the SmartKey is removed from the vehicle
no SmartKey outside the vehicle):
(e.g. if a passenger exits the vehicle with When exiting and trying to lock the vehicle,
the SmartKey) the message Key Detected In Vehicle
appears in the multifunction display. The
- when pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/
vehicle will not be locked.
stop button or trying to lock the vehicle
with the lock button on an outside door
handle the message Key Not Factory setting
Detected appears in the multifunction X Global unlocking: Grasp an outside door
display handle.
- with the engine running, the red message
Key Not Detected appears in the
multifunction display while driving off

Unless you open a door or the tailgate within Checking SmartKey batteries
approximately 40 seconds after unlocking
the vehicle:
RThe vehicle will be locked again.
RThe antitheft alarm system will be rearmed.
Controls in detail
Example illustration: SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X Press button & or % on the
SmartKey.
Battery check lamp : comes on briefly to
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an indicate that the SmartKey batteries are in
order.
outside door handle.
If the battery check lamp does not come on
briefly during check, the SmartKey batteries
Selective setting are discharged.
If you frequently travel alone, you may wish X Replace the batteries (Y page 326).
to reprogram the SmartKey. Grasping the
driver’s outside door handle will then only i You can obtain the required batteries at
unlock the driver’s door and the fuel filler flap. any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Switching on/off: Press and hold buttons
i If the batteries are checked within signal
% and & simultaneously for
range of the vehicle, pressing button
approximately 6 seconds until the battery & or % will lock or unlock the vehicle
check lamp (Y page 73) flashes twice.
accordingly.
The SmartKey will then function as follows:
X Unlocking driver’s door and fuel filler
flap: Grasp the driver’s outside door Loss of the SmartKey
handle. If you lose your SmartKey or mechanical key,
X Global unlocking: Grasp any outside door you should do the following:
handle other than the driver’s outside door
X Have the SmartKey deactivated by an
handle.
X Global locking: Press lock button : on an
X Report the loss of the SmartKey or the
outside door handle.
mechanical key to your car insurance
company immediately.
X Have the mechanical lock replaced if
necessary.
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be
glad to supply you with a replacement. For
Z
information on replacing the SmartKey, see

“Replacing the SmartKey” (Y page 74).
Replacing the SmartKey

Only you, or someone authorized by you can
order a replacement key from any Mercedes-
Benz Center. In order to do so, the Mercedes-
Controls in detail
Benz Center will require proof of identity and

vehicle ownership with original documents,
including the following: Example illustration driver’s door
If you are the current owner of the vehicle: If the vehicle has previously been locked with
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, opening
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers a door from the inside will trigger the anti-
license theft alarm system.
To cancel the alarm, see (Y page 67).
If you are an authorized person:
X Front doors: Pull on inside door
Rthe vehicle’s current state registration handle ; on the respective front door.
Ra current identity card, passport, or drivers If the door was locked, locking knob : will
license for the authorized individual move up.
Rsigned and dated authorization from the X Rear doors: Pull up locking knob on the
owner of the vehicle for which the key is respective rear door to unlock door.
being requested X Pull on the inside door handle on the
i Duplicated or photocopied respective rear door.

documentation will not be accepted.
Activating the key Automatic central locking

The doors and the tailgate lock automatically
Once you, or an authorized person, has
when the vehicle is set into motion.
provided the appropriate documents, the
Mercedes-Benz Center will need to You can open a locked front door from the
synchronize the key to your vehicle before it inside. Open door only when conditions are
can be used. In order to do so, the Mercedes- safe to do so.
Benz Center need access to your vehicle. The doors are designed to unlock
automatically after an accident if the force of
the impact exceeds a preset threshold.
Opening the doors from the inside The vehicle locks automatically when the
You can open a door from the inside even ignition is switched on and the wheels are
when it is locked unless it is secured with the turning at vehicle speeds of above 9 mph
child safety lock (Y page 60). (15 km/h). You could therefore lock yourself
out when the vehicle is pushed or towed or is
Open door only when conditions are safe to
on a test stand.
do so.
i You can also activate or deactivate the
automatic central locking using the control
system (Y page 138).

Locking and unlocking from the inside Tailgate

G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. G Warning!
You can lock or unlock the vehicle from the Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
inside using the central locking switches. This engine is running and while driving. Among
can be useful, for example, if you want to lock other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
the vehicle before starting to drive. gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
The central locking switches do not lock or unconsciousness and death.
Controls in detail
unlock the fuel filler flap.
A minimum height clearance of 7.40 ft
The switches are located in each front door. (2.25 m) is required to open the tailgate.
Opening the tailgate from the outside
X Locking: Press central locking switch ;.

When all doors and the tailgate are closed,
the vehicle locks. X Pull on handle :.
X Unlocking: Press central unlocking
In vehicles without KEYLESS-GO: The
switch :. vehicle must be unlocked.
You can open a locked front door from the X Pull tailgate upwards to open.
inside at any time. Open door only when
conditions are safe to do so.
Closing the tailgate from the outside
If the vehicle was previously locked with the
central locking switch G Observe Safety notes, see page 55.
Rand the SmartKey is set to factory settings,
G Warning!
the complete vehicle is unlocked when a
To prevent possible personal injury, always
front door is opened from the inside
keep hands and fingers away from the cargo
Rand the SmartKey is set to selective compartment opening when closing the
settings, only the front door opened from tailgate. Be especially careful when small
the inside is unlocked children are around.
If the vehicle has been locked centrally with
the SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, it will not
unlock using the central unlocking switch.
Z
X Push handle : in direction of arrow ; and

hold it there.
X From this position, lift handle : in
direction of arrow = and hold it there.
The tailgate is released and can be opened
manually.
i If you do not open the tailgate within a few
Controls in detail
seconds, the tailgate lock will engage again

automatically. Additionally, the tailgate will
relock automatically if the vehicle was
X Lower tailgate by pulling firmly on locked when the tailgate was released from
handles :. the inside.
X Close tailgate with hands placed flat on it. If the tailgate lock does not engage
Once the tailgate touches the latch, the automatically and, if applicable, the tailgate
tailgate will pull itself shut automatically. does not relock after a few seconds, you
have to close the tailgate manually
Opening the tailgate from the inside (Y page 75).
G Warning!
Do not leave children unattended in the Power tailgate
vehicle. Children could open the tailgate from
G Warning!
the inside, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury. Make sure the tailgate is closed when the
engine is running and while driving. Among
other dangers, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)
! Always make sure there is sufficient
gases may enter vehicle interior resulting in
overhead clearance.
unconsciousness and death.
You can unlock the tailgate from the third-row
seats and then open it manually. ! The tailgate swings open upwards
automatically. Always make sure there is
sufficient overhead clearance.
A minimum height clearance of 7.40 ft
(2.25 m) is required to open the tailgate.
In vehicles with power tailgate, you can
Ropen and close the tailgate from the inside
and the outside electrically
Rlimit the opening height of the tailgate
Rinterrupt the opening/closing procedure at

any time by
- pressing or pulling the door-mounted
remote tailgate opening/closing switch
- pulling the outside handle on the tailgate

- pressing the tailgate closing switch RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
- pressing the KEYLESS-GO locking/ closing switch on the driver’s door.
closing switch RPress the tailgate closing switch.
Notes for operating the tailgate with the RPress the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
SmartKey: switch.
You can also open, close, and stop the RPull outside handle on the tailgate.
tailgate by pressing button F on the RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter
Controls in detail
SmartKey. switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
The prerequisites for this are: sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics
RNo SmartKey is inserted in the starter
have status 0): Press button F on the
switch. SmartKey.
RKEYLESS-GO: The vehicle’s on-board
electronics must have status 0 Do not leave the SmartKey in the vehicle. You
(Y page 80). may lock yourself out.
If the vehicle was previously centrally locked
Opening the tailgate from the outside with the SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO, the
tailgate will lock automatically when it is
You can unlock and open the tailgate closed. The turn signal lamps flash three
simultaneously from the outside when the times to confirm locking.
vehicle is stationary.
X Press and hold button F on the
SmartKey until the tailgate unlocks and
begins to open.
While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
warning sounds.
or
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Pull on the
handle (Y page 75).
Closing the tailgate from the outside Vehicles without KEYLESS-GO

G Warning!
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
injured. To prevent possible personal injury,
always keep hands and fingers away from the
cargo compartment opening when closing the
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around. To stop the closing
procedure, do one of the following:
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO
Z
X Press tailgate closing switch : or press

and hold button F on the SmartKey until
the tailgate begins to close.
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
object while closing, the closing procedure is
stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
example.
Controls in detail
Closing the tailgate and locking the

vehicle from the outside (vehicles with
KEYLESS-GO) X Make sure you have the SmartKey with you.
X Press KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. switch : briefly.
G Warning! The tailgate closes.
Monitor the closing procedure carefully to Once the tailgate and all doors are closed:
make sure no one is in danger of being RThe vehicle locks.
injured. To prevent possible personal injury, RThe turn signals flash three times to
always keep hands and fingers away from the confirm locking.
cargo compartment opening when closing the
RThelocking knobs in the doors move
tailgate. Be especially careful when small
children are around. To stop the closing down.
procedure, do one of the following: RThe anti-theft alarm system is armed.
RPress or pull the remote tailgate opening/
If the tailgate comes into contact with an
closing switch on the driver’s door. object while closing, the closing procedure is
RPress the tailgate closing switch. stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
RPress
happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
the KEYLESS-GO locking/closing
example.
switch.
The closing process is stopped if the system
RPull outside handle on the tailgate. cannot recognize a SmartKey with KEYLESS-
RWhen no SmartKey is inserted in the starter GO anymore. Make sure the SmartKey with
switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make KEYLESS-GO is within approximately 3 ft
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics (1 m) of the tailgate. Repeat the closing
have status 0): Press button F on the procedure if necessary.
SmartKey. The tailgate remains unlocked when a
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is recognized
You can close the tailgate and lock the vehicle inside the vehicle to prevent a possible
simultaneously from the outside using the inadvertent lockout. In this case, the turn
KEYLESS-GO locking/closing switch. signals will not flash and the anti-theft alarm
will be triggered when the tailgate is opened.

Opening/closing the tailgate from the the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
inside Monitor the closing procedure carefully to
make sure no one is in danger of being
Opening injured.
G Observe Safety notes, see page 76. To interrupt the closing procedure, press or
G Warning! pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch.
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of If the tailgate comes into contact with an
Controls in detail
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with object while closing, the closing procedure is
the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. stopped and the tailgate reopens. This may
Monitor the opening procedure carefully to happen if luggage has been piled too high, for
make sure no one is in danger of being example.
injured. X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
To interrupt the opening procedure, press or position 1 or 2.
pull the door-mounted remote tailgate switch. X Press remote tailgate opening/closing
When the SmartKey is not inserted in the switch : until the tailgate begins to close.
starter switch (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: While the tailgate is closing an acoustic
Make sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics warning sounds.
have status 0): Press button F on the
X Interrupting the closing procedure:
SmartKey.
Press or pull remote tailgate opening/
You can unlock and open the tailgate closing switch :.
simultaneously from the driver’s seat when
the vehicle is stationary. Limiting opening height of tailgate
You can limit the opening height of the
tailgate in the upper opening range. This can
be useful, for example, when the space above
the tailgate is not sufficient.
Activating
X Open the tailgate: Pull on handle
(Y page 75) or press and hold button
F on the SmartKey until the tailgate
opens.
X Stop opening procedure: When the
X Pull remote tailgate opening/closing
tailgate is in the desired position, press
switch : until the tailgate begins to open.
tailgate closing switch (Y page 78) or pull
While the tailgate is opening, an acoustic
on handle once more.
warning sounds.
X You can also press or pull the remote
Closing tailgate opening/closing switch
(Y page 79) to stop the opening procedure.
G Warning!
Maintain sight of the area around the rear of
the vehicle while operating the tailgate with
Z
80 Starter switch positions
X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch X Always remove the SmartKey from the
in the tailgate (Y page 78) until you hear a starter switch when the engine is not in
short acoustic signal. operation.
The opening height of the tailgate is limited. This will help to prevent accelerated vehicle
The tailgate will now stop at the stored battery discharge or a completely
position when opened. discharged vehicle battery.
If the SmartKey cannot be turned in the
Deactivating starter switch, the vehicle battery may not be
Controls in detail
X Press and hold the tailgate closing switch sufficiently charged.

in the tailgate (Y page 78) until you hear X Check the vehicle battery and charge it if
two short, consecutive acoustic signals. necessary.
or
X Get a jump start.
Starter switch positions
SmartKey i If the SmartKey does not belong to the
vehicle, the SmartKey can be turned in the
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. starter switch. However, the ignition does
not switch on and the engine does not start.
KEYLESS-GO
Vehicles equipped with the KEYLESS-GO
feature are supplied with a SmartKey with
integrated KEYLESS-GO function and a
removable KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button must be
Starter switch inserted in the starter switch and the
g For removing SmartKey SmartKey present in the vehicle.
1 Power supply for some electrical Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
consumers, e.g. radio without depressing the brake pedal
2 Ignition (power supply for all electrical corresponds to the various starter switch
consumers) and driving position positions (Y page 80).
3 Starting position Pressing the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
with the brake pedal firmly depressed will
When you switch on the ignition, all lamps start the engine (Y page 108).
(except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button can be
high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
pulled out of the starter switch easily. You can
signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
then insert the SmartKey into the starter
instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
switch.
instrument cluster fails to come on when the
ignition is switched on, have it checked and i The KEYLESS-GO start/stop button does
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the not need to be removed from the starter
instrument cluster remains on after starting switch when you leave the vehicle.
the engine or comes on while driving, refer to However, always take the SmartKey with
“Lamps in instrument cluster” (Y page 314). you when you leave the vehicle. As long as

Starter switch positions 81
the SmartKey is in the vehicle, the vehicle’s Position 1

electrical systems can be switched on or
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
the engine can be started using the
once.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
This supplies power for some electrical
consumers, such as radio functions.
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button
Controls in detail
Ronce more, the ignition (position 2) is
switched on
Rtwice more the power supply is again
switched off
Ignition (or position 2)

: KEYLESS-GO start/stop button X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
; Starter switch twice.
This supplies power for all electrical
X Insert the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button consumers.
into the starter switch (if not inserted
already). All lamps (except low-beam headlamp
indicator lamp, high-beam headlamp
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
indicator lamp, and turn signal indicator
park position P. lamps unless activated) in the instrument
X Do not depress the brake pedal. cluster come on. If a lamp in the instrument
cluster fails to come on when the ignition
is switched on, have it checked and
replaced if necessary. If a lamp in the
instrument cluster remains on after
starting the engine or comes on while
driving, refer to “Lamps in instrument
cluster” (Y page 314).
i If you now press the KEYLESS-GO start/
stop button once, the power supply is again
switched off.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
= USA only
? Canada only
Position 0
Before you press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button, the vehicle’s on-board electronics
have status 0 (as with SmartKey removed).
Z
82 Seats
Seats RAdjust the head restraint so that it is as

close to the head as possible. The center of
Safety notes the head restraint must support the back of
G Warning! the head at eye level.
In order to avoid possible loss of vehicle RNever place hands under the seat or near
control the following must be done before the any moving parts while a seat is being
vehicle is put into motion: adjusted.
Controls in detail
Rseat adjustment Failure to do so could result in an accident

Rhead
and/or serious personal injury.
restraint adjustment
Rsteering wheel adjustment G Warning!
Rrear view mirror adjustment The power seats can be operated at any time.
Therefore, do not leave children unattended
Rfastening of seat belts
in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
G Warning! vehicle could result in an accident and/or
Do not adjust the driver’s seat while driving. serious personal injury.
Adjusting the seat while driving could cause
the driver to lose control of the vehicle. G Warning!
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat According to accident statistics, children are
backrest in an excessively reclined position as safer when properly restrained in the rear
this can be dangerous. You could slide under seating positions than in the front seating
the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
it, the seat belt would apply force at the children be placed in the rear seats whenever
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious possible. Regardless of seating position,
or fatal injuries. The seat backrest and seat children 12 years old and under must be
belts provide the best restraint when the seated and properly secured in an
wearer is in a position that is as upright as appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
possible and seat belts are properly restraint, or booster seat recommended for
positioned on the body. the size and weight of the child. For additional
information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
G Warning! A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can significantly increased if the child restraints
correctly fasten your seat belt. are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
Observe the following points: or the child is not properly secured in the child
RAdjust the seat backrest until your arms are restraint.
slightly angled when holding the steering
wheel. G Warning!
RAdjust the seat to a comfortable seating positioned head restraints.
position that still allows you to reach the
accelerator/brake pedal safely. The
to the head as possible and the center of the
position should be as far back as possible
head restraint supports the back of the head
with the driver still able to operate the
at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
controls properly.
injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.

Seats 83
Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head

restraints. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident.
Seat adjustment
! When moving the seats, make sure there
Controls in detail
are no items in the footwell or behind the
seats. Otherwise, you could damage the
seats and/or the items.
X Seat fore and aft adjustment: Press the
Power seats switch forward or backward in direction of
! When the second-row seats are folded arrow A.
forward, e.g. for cargo volume expansion, X Seat backrest tilt: Press the switch
the front seats may not be moved to the forward or backward in direction of
rearmost position. Otherwise you could arrow ?.
damage the front and second-row seats. X Seat height: Press the switch up or down
in direction of arrow =.
! When adjusting the seat backrest tilt and X Seat cushion tilt: Press the switch up or
head restraint height, make sure the sun
down in direction of arrow ; until your
visor is folded up. If the head restraint is in
upper legs are lightly supported.
the uppermost position, it could hit and
X Head restraint height (vehicles with
damage the sun visor.
memory function): Press the switch up or
i Vehicles without memory function: down in direction of arrow :.
The seats can be adjusted within 5 minutes
Head restraint height adjustment,
after either front door has been opened.
manual
The counter resets each time
This feature is only available in vehicles
Ryou open or close a front door
without memory function.
Ryou insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch G Warning!
Ryou remove the SmartKey from the
positioned head restraints.
starter switch
Ryou switch the ignition on or off to the head as possible and the center of the
Just like in vehicles with memory function, head restraint supports the back of the head
the power seats can be operated at any at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
time when the ignition is switched on. injury to the head and neck in the event of an
accident or similar situation.
i The memory function (Y page 96) lets Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
you store the settings for the seat position restraints. Head restraints are intended to
together with the settings for the steering help reduce injuries during an accident.
wheel (electrical) and exterior rear view With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
mirrors. the respective head restraint up from the
Z
84 Seats
lowest non-use position and have the

occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
! Do not attempt to remove front seat head

restraints. They can only be removed by
qualified technicians. We recommend that
you have this work carried out by an
Controls in detail
X While seated, reach behind you with both

hands and find lower edge of the head
restraint.
X Push or pull on the lower edge of the head
restraint cushion to the desired position.
Comfort head restraint

G Warning!
When folding back the side cushions, never
X Raising: Adjust the height of head
reach between the side cushion and the
restraint : by pulling it upward.
mounting post. You could otherwise be
If head restraint : is fully retracted, press trapped.
release button ; in direction of arrow and
pull head restraint : upward.
X Lowering: Press release button ; in
direction of arrow and press down on head
restraint :.
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment

G Warning!
Vehicles with Rear Seat Entertainment
System: When adjusting the head restraint,
make sure your fingers do not become caught
between the head restraint cushion and the You can adjust the side cushions of the head
monitor. Failing to do so may lead to injury. restraints individually.
X Adjusting side cushions: Pull or push side
cushions : into desired position.
X Adjusting forward or backward: Pull or
push head restraint in direction of
arrow ;.

Seats 85
Easy-entry/exit feature for third-row X Pull and hold easy-entry lever : once
seats again in direction of arrow at resistance
point.
This feature allows for easier access to and
X Lift up the right second-row seat until it
exit from the vehicle’s third-row seats.
folds forward.
G Warning! You should now have sufficient space to
To help avoid personal injury, the second-row access the vehicle’s third-row seat.
seat backrests must be properly locked either
Controls in detail
in the upright position or, when using the i Vehicles with memory function:
expanded cargo volume, in the fully folded The front passenger seat moves slightly
position while the vehicle is in motion. forward.
Easy-entry feature for third-row seats

The lever for the easy-entry feature is located
on the rear of the seat base of the passenger
side second-row seat.
Easy-entry/exit position
While the easy-entry feature is activated, you
will see, for example, the following message
in the multifunction display:
2nd Row Of Seats - Right
Not Locked
! Make sure the head restraint is pushed all
X Return seat into its original position.
the way down.
The message in the multifunction display
X Pull and hold easy-entry lever : in disappears.
direction of arrow at resistance point. For setting the front passenger seat back into
The seat backrest folds forward. the stored position, see “Recalling positions
from memory” (Y page 97).
X Enter the vehicle.
For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see
“Expanding cargo volume” (Y page 201).
For setting the front passenger seat back into
the stored position, see “Recalling positions
Z
86 Seats
Easy-exit feature for third-row seats Returning second-row seats to their

original position
The easy-exit strap is located on the right rear
of the second-row seat base. G Warning!
When occupants have entered or exited the
vehicle using the easy-entry/exit feature,
before driving off make sure
Rthe seats are properly locked
Controls in detail
Rthe seat backrests are in an upright position

and are properly locked
If a seat and seat backrest are not properly
locked, the seat could move forward and the
seat backrest could fold. You could slide
under the seat belt during braking, vehicle
Easy-exit strap maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide
X
under it, the seat belt would apply force at the
To exit the vehicle when seated on a third-
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
row seat, pull up and hold easy-exit
or even fatal injuries.
strap :.
The right second-row seat backrest folds X Fold seat back until it audibly engages.
forward. X Fold seat backrest back into original
X Pull and hold once easy-entry strap :.
position until it engages.
X Lift up the right second-row seat until it To make sure the seat backrest has
folds forward. engaged, lean firmly against the seat
You should now have sufficient space to backrest.
exit the vehicle’s third-row seat.
i Vehicles with memory function: Emergency exit for third-row seats
The front passenger seat moves slightly i If, due to an accident or other situation, it
forward. is not possible for you to exit the vehicle on
While the easy-entry feature is activated, you the side of the easy-entry seat
will see, for example, the following message (Y page 85), you can fold the left side of the
in the multifunction display: seat backrest in the second row of seats
down in order to open the left rear door.
2nd Row Of Seats - Right
Not Locked
X Return seat into its original position
(Y page 86).
The message in the multifunction display
disappears.
For setting the front passenger seat back into
the stored position, see “Recalling positions
For information on how to fold down the
second-row seats completely, see
“Expanding cargo volume” (Y page 201).

Seats 87
! Make sure the head restraint is pushed all Rear seats

the way down.
G Warning!
X Pull emergency release : in the direction According to accident statistics, children are
of arrow. safer when properly restrained in the rear
X Push seat backrest ; forwards. seating positions than in the front seating
position. Thus, we strongly recommend that
G Warning! children be placed in the rear seats whenever
Controls in detail
To help avoid personal injury when folding the possible. Regardless of seating position,
seat backrest forward, make sure you move children 12 years old and under must be
both feet and legs all the way back and out of seated and properly secured in an
the way to avoid them contacting the seat as appropriately sized infant restraint, toddler
it pivots forward. restraint, or booster seat recommended for
In order to prevent an accident or any other the size and weight of the child. For additional
potentially dangerous situations when information, see “Children in the vehicle”.
opening the rear door and exiting the vehicle, A child’s risk of serious or fatal injuries is
make sure you are aware of the traffic significantly increased if the child restraints
situation at all times. are not properly secured in the vehicle and/
X Open the left door. restraint.
X Exit the vehicle.
Rear seat adjustment
Lumbar support G Warning!

Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
You can adjust the contour of the driver’s seat backrest in an excessively reclined position as
lumbar support to help enhance support to this can be dangerous. You could slide under
your spine. the seat belt in a collision. If you slide under
it, the belt would apply force at the abdomen
or neck. That could cause serious or fatal
injuries. The seat backrest and seat belts
provide the best restraint when the wearer is
in a nearly upright position and seat belts are
properly positioned on the body.
Your seat must be adjusted so that you can
correctly fasten your seat belt.
Never place hands under the seat or near any
moving parts while a seat is being adjusted.
After adjusting rear seats, make sure
X Curvature position: Use button : to Rthe seats are properly locked
move the curvature up and button = to
Rthe seat backrests are in an upright position
move it down.
and are properly locked
X Degree of curvature: Use button ; to
lessen the curvature and button ? to Check for secure locking by pushing and
increase it. pulling on the seat backrests. If a seat and
seat backrest are not properly locked, the
seat could move forward and the seat
Z
88 Seats
backrest could fold. The child seat would no Head restraint height
longer be properly supported or positioned to
provide its intended benefit.
G Warning!
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the
Seat backrest tilt (second-row seats) lowest non-use position and have the
G Warning! occupant adjust the head restraint properly.
The seat belt only offers its intended For your protection, drive only with properly
Controls in detail
protection when the seat backrest is in a positioned head restraints.

nearly vertical position and the occupant is Adjust the head restraint so that it is as close
sitting upright. Avoid sitting in positions that to the head as possible and the center of the
prevent the seat belt from being properly head restraint supports the back of the head
positioned against the body. You should at eye level. This will reduce the potential for
therefore adjust the seat backrest to a injury to the head and neck in the event of an
position as upright as possible. accident or similar situation.
The seat backrest tilt can be set to five

different positions.
Second-row seat head restraint

X Raising: Manually adjust the height of head
X While seated, pull adjustment handle : in restraint : by pulling it upward to the
direction of arrow to resistance point and desired position.
hold it there. X Lowering: Push release button ; and
X To move seat backrest back, lean lightly press down on head restraint :.
against the seat backrest.
X To move seat backrest forward, lean
i The third-row seat head restraints are
forward with adjustment handle : pulled adjusted in the same manner.
and held at resistance point.
The seat backrest will move forward
against your back.
X Release adjustment handle : when the
seat backrest has reached the desired
position.
To make sure the seat backrest has
engaged, lean firmly against the seat
backrest.

Seats 89
Head restraint fore and aft adjustment
Controls in detail
Second-row seat head restraint
The angle of the head restraint for the outer Removing

second-row seats or the third-row seats can X Second-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
be adjusted manually. forward (Y page 88).
X While seated, reach behind you with both X Third-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
hands and find lower edge of the head forward (Y page 201).
restraint. X Pull head restraint : to its uppermost
X Adjust the head restraint to the desired position.
position by pushing or pulling on the lower X Press release button ; and pull out head
edge of the head restraint cushion. restraint :.
X Second-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
Head restraints, removing and rearward until it engages.
installing X Third-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
G Warning! rearward (Y page 201).

Do not drive the vehicle without the seat head
Installing
restraints installed when the rear seats are
occupied. Head restraints are intended to
help reduce injuries during an accident. forward (Y page 88).
X Third-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
With a rear seat occupied, make sure to move
the respective head restraint up from the forward (Y page 201).
lowest non-use position and have the X Insert head restraint : into openings on
occupant adjust the head restraint properly. the seat backrest.
For your protection, drive only with properly X Push head restraint : down until it audibly
positioned head restraints. engages.
Adjust the head restraint in such a way that it X Push release button ; and adjust head
is as close to the head as possible and the restraint : to the desired position
center of the head restraint supports the back
(Y page 88).
of the head at eye level. This will reduce the
potential for injury to the head and neck in the
event of an accident or similar situation. rearward until it engages.
X Third-row seat: Fold the seat backrest
rearward (Y page 201).
Z
90 Seats
Multicontour seats The blue indicator lamps ; in seat ventilation

switch : come on to show which ventilation
The multicontour seat has a movable seat
level you have selected.
cushion and inflatable air cushions built into
the seat backrest to provide additional i The seat ventilation for the driver’s seat
lumbar and side support. can be activated using the summer opening
feature (Y page 107).
Controls in detail
X Switching on: Press respective seat

ventilation switch :.
Three blue indicator lamps ; in seat
ventilation switch : come on.
X Press seat ventilation switch : repeatedly
until the desired ventilation level is set.
X Switching off: Press seat ventilation
switch : repeatedly until all indicator
X Switch on the ignition. lamps ; go out.
X Seat cushion depth: Adjust the seat If there is insufficient voltage the seat
cushion depth to the length of your upper ventilating switches off automatically.
leg using switch :.
X Seat backrest contour: Adjust the
contour of the seat backrest to the desired Seat heating
position using W or X.
X Move the seat backrest support cushion to
the bottom with button ? or to the center
with button =.
X Seat backrest side bolsters: Adjust the
side bolsters so that they provide good
lateral support using switch ;.
Seat ventilation
Front seat heating switches
The switches for the outboard second-row
seat heating are located in the rear center
console.

Multifunction steering wheel 91
Multifunction steering wheel

Safety notes
G Warning!
Do not adjust the steering wheel while driving.
Adjusting the steering wheel while driving, or
driving without the steering wheel adjustment
feature locked could cause the driver to lose
Controls in detail
control of the vehicle.
The electrical steering wheel adjustment
Rear seat heating switches feature can be operated at any time.
The red indicator lamps ; in front or rear Therefore, do not leave children unattended
seat heating switch : come on to show in the vehicle, or with access to an unlocked
which heating level you have selected. vehicle. A child’s unsupervised access to a
vehicle could result in an accident and/or
The seat heating switches from level 3 (high) serious personal injury.
to level 2 after approximately 5 minutes.
The seat heating switches from level 2 to level Make sure
1 (low) after approximately 10 minutes. Ryou can reach the steering wheel with your
After approximately 20 minutes in level 1, the arms slightly bent at the elbows
seat heating switches off automatically. Ryou can move your legs freely
Rall displays (including malfunction and
X Switching on: Press respective seat
indicator lamps) on the instrument cluster
heating switch :. are clearly visible
Three red indicator lamps ; in the
respective seat heating switch : come on.
X Continue pressing respective seat heating Steering wheel adjustment, manual
switch : until desired seat heating level is (USA only)
reached.
X Switching off: Press respective seat
heating switch : repeatedly until all
indicator lamps ; go out.
If one or more of indicator lamps ; in
respective seat heating switch : are
flashing, there is insufficient voltage available
since too many electrical consumers are
turned on. The seat heating switches off
automatically.
The seat heating will switch back on again
X Unlocking: Pull release handle : out to
automatically as soon as sufficient voltage is
available. its stop limit.
X Move steering wheel to the desired
position.
Z
92 Multifunction steering wheel
X Locking: Push release handle : back to To stop steering wheel movement do one of
its original position. the following:
X Make sure the steering wheel is securely RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk.
locked by trying to move it up and down as
RPress one of the memory position buttons.
well as in and out before driving off.
RPress memory button M.
Do not leave children unattended in the
Steering wheel adjustment, electrical vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
Controls in detail
Children could open the driver’s door and

unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
feature, which could result in an accident
and/or serious personal injury.
With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,

the steering wheel will return to its last set
position when you close the driver’s door with
the ignition switched on. The steering wheel
will also return to its last set position when
you insert the SmartKey into the starter
switch or press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
X Adjusting steering wheel in or out: Move button once with the driver’s door closed.
stalk in direction of arrows :.
i The last set steering wheel position is
X Adjusting steering wheel up or down:
stored when the ignition is switched off or
Move stalk in direction of arrows ;. the position is stored in memory
i You can store the settings for the steering (Y page 97).
wheel with the memory function With the easy-entry/exit feature activated,
(Y page 96). the steering wheel tilts upwards when you
remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
The steering wheel also tilts upwards when
Easy-entry/exit feature you open the driver’s door with the SmartKey
This feature allows the driver an easier entry in starter switch position 0 or 1 or the
into and exit from the vehicle. When entering KEYLESS-GO start/stop button in position 1.
and exiting the vehicle, the steering wheel is i When the current position for the steering
in its uppermost position. wheel is in the uppermost tilt position, the
The easy-entry/exit feature can be activated steering wheel will no longer be able to
or deactivated in the Comfort submenu of the move upward when the easy-entry/exit
control system (Y page 139). feature is activated.
The adjustment procedure is briefly
G Warning!
interrupted when the engine is started.
You must make sure no one can become
trapped or injured by the moving steering G Warning!
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is Let the system complete the adjustment
activated. procedure before setting the vehicle in
motion. All steering wheel adjustment must
be completed before setting the vehicle in

Mirrors 93
motion. Driving off with the steering wheel When these conditions do not apply
still adjusting could cause the driver to lose anymore, steering wheel heating
control of the vehicle. continues.
X Switching off: Turn switch at the tip of
Crash-responsive exit aid stalk in direction of arrow ;.
When you open the driver’s door after an Indicator lamp = goes out.
accident has occurred, the steering column
i Indicator lamp = flashes or goes out in
Controls in detail
moves up. The position of the SmartKey in the
starter switch is insignificant. This function case of power surge or undervoltage or if
facilitates exiting as well as rescue of vehicle the steering wheel heating malfunctions.
occupants.
i The steering wheel heating switches off
The crash-responsive exit aid can only be automatically when you remove the
triggered when the easy-entry/exit feature is SmartKey from the starter switch or, on
activated via the control system. vehicles with KEYLESS-GO, when you
switch off the ignition and open the driver’s
door.
Heated steering wheel
For more information on the steering wheel,
The steering wheel heating warms up the see “Multifunction steering wheel”
leather area of the steering wheel. (Y page 125).
Mirrors
Notes
Adjust the interior and exterior rear view
mirrors before driving so that you have a good
view of the road and traffic conditions.
Interior rear view mirror

X Switch on the ignition. X Adjust the interior rear view mirror
X Switching on: Turn switch at the tip of the manually.
stalk in direction of arrow :.
Indicator lamp = comes on.
i The steering wheel heating may be
suspended temporarily. However, indicator
lamp = remains on. The steering wheel
heating is suspended when the
temperature of the vehicle interior is above
86‡ (30†). It is also suspended when the
temperature of the steering wheel is above
95‡ (35†).
Z
94 Mirrors
Interior rear view mirror, antiglare the passenger-side exterior rear view
position mirror.
The indicator lamp in the respective button
comes on for approximately 15 seconds.
If you do not make adjustments to the
selected exterior rear view mirror within
15 seconds, the indicator lamp goes out.
You will then have to select the desired
Controls in detail
exterior rear view mirror again before

adjustments can be made. Adjustments
can only be made with the indicator lamp
for the respective exterior rear view mirror
button illuminated.
X Tilt the mirror to the antiglare position by X Press adjustment button ; up, down, left
moving lever : towards the windshield. or right according to the desired setting.
The interior rear view mirror is dimmed.
! If an exterior rear view mirror was forcibly
hit from the front, manually snap it back
into place.
Exterior rear view mirrors
! Vehicle with power-folding exterior rear
G Warning!
view mirrors:
Exercise care when using the passenger-side
If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
exterior rear view mirror. The mirror surface
forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
is convex (outwardly curved surface for a
or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from front),
wider field of view). Objects in mirror are
press fold button to fold mirrors in, then
closer than they appear. Check your interior
press fold button again to fold mirrors out.
rear view mirror and glance over your
Do not force mirrors by hand as this may
shoulder before changing lanes.
damage the adjustment mechanism.
The mirror housing is then properly
positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
the usual manner.
i At low ambient temperatures, the exterior

rear view mirrors will be heated
automatically.
Auto-dimming rear view mirrors

The exterior rear view mirror on the driver’s
X Switch on the ignition. side and the interior rear view mirror will
X Press button : for the driver’s side
respond automatically to glare when the
ignition is switched on and incoming light
exterior rear view mirror or button = for
from headlamps falls on the sensor in the
interior rear view mirror.

Mirrors 95
The rear view mirrors will not react if the X Shift the automatic transmission into
automatic transmission is set to reverse gear reverse gear R.
R or the interior lighting is switched on. The passenger-side exterior rear view
mirror moves to the preset parking
G Warning! position.
The auto-dimming function does not react if X Adjust the passenger-side exterior rear
incoming light is not aimed directly at sensors
view mirror with adjustment button ; so
in the interior rear view mirror.
that you see the rear wheel and the road
Controls in detail
The interior rear view mirror and the exterior curb.
rear view mirror on the driver’s side do not The exterior rear view mirror parking
react, for example, when transporting cargo position is stored.
which covers the rear window.
Light hitting the mirror(s) at certain angles
Calling up the parking position
(incident light) could blind you. As a result,
you may not be able to observe traffic X Switch on the ignition.
conditions and could cause an accident. X Press button =, to select the passenger-
side exterior rear view mirror.
X Shift the automatic transmission into
Exterior rear view mirror parking reverse gear R.
position The passenger-side exterior rear view
For more convenient parking, you can set the mirror moves to the stored parking
passenger-side exterior rear view mirror so position.
that you can see the rear wheel and the road The passenger-side exterior rear view mirror
curb. returns to its previously stored driving
position
Setting and storing the parking position R10 seconds after you have put the gear
selector lever out of reverse gear R
Rimmediately once your vehicle exceeds a
speed of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h)
Rimmediately when you press button : to
select the driver’s side exterior rear view
mirror
Power-folding exterior rear view

mirrors
X Switch on the ignition. ! Before you drive the vehicle through an
X Press button =, to select the passenger- automatic car wash, fold in the exterior rear
side exterior rear view mirror. view mirrors. Otherwise they may get
damaged.
Folding in and out automatically

The function must be activated in the
Convenience submenu (Y page 140).
Z
96 Memory function
The exterior rear view mirrors fold in X Switch on the ignition.

automatically as soon as the vehicle is locked X Folding in: Briefly press button :.
from the outside. Both exterior rear view mirrors fold in.
The exterior rear view mirrors fold out
automatically as soon as the vehicle is i At speeds above approximately 30 mph
unlocked and the driver’s or front passenger (47 km/h), you will not be able to fold the
door is subsequently opened. exterior mirrors in.
X Folding out: Briefly press button :.
Controls in detail
Synchronizing Both exterior rear view mirrors fold out.

The power-folding rear view mirrors may have ! If an exterior rear view mirror housing is
to be synchronized after the vehicle battery forcibly pushed forward (hit from the rear)
has been disconnected or discharged. If the or forcibly pushed rearward (hit from the
exterior rear view mirrors do not fold properly front), press button : to fold mirrors in.
upon locking or unlocking the vehicle, do the Then press button : again to fold mirrors
following: out. Do not force mirrors by hand as this
X Make sure the power-folding function in the may damage the adjustment mechanism.
control system is activated (Y page 140). The mirror housing is then properly
X When the power-folding function is positioned and you can adjust the mirror in
activated and the exterior rear view the usual manner.
mirrors still do not fold properly: Fold Make sure both rear view mirrors are folded
each exterior rear view mirror in completely out before driving off.
(Y page 96).
X Fold each exterior rear view mirror out
completely (Y page 96). Memory function
When the exterior rear view mirrors fold
Notes
properly upon locking the vehicle, the exterior
mirrors are synchronized. Otherwise repeat With the memory function you can store up
the above steps. to three different configurations per front
seat.
Folding in and out manually Each memory position button on the driver’s
The exterior rear view mirrors can vibrate if side can store all of the following settings:
they are not folded out completely. RSeat position
RSteering wheel position
RExterior rear view mirrors’ position
G Warning!
Do not activate the memory function while
driving. Activating the memory function while
driving could cause the driver to lose control
of the vehicle.
Each memory position button on the front

passenger side can store the setting of the
seat position.

Lighting 97
modified for symmetrical low beams.

Relevant information can be obtained at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i Vehicles equipped with active Bi-Xenon

headlamps:
The active Bi-Xenon headlamps increase
usable illumination over conventional
Controls in detail
headlamps because they follow the
curvature of the road ahead. The beams of
the active Bi-Xenon headlamps shift to
either side according to the vehicle’s
steering angle and speed.
Storing positions into memory
X Adjust the seats.
X On the driver’s side, also adjust the Exterior lamp switch
steering wheel and exterior rear view
mirrors to the desired positions.
X Press memory button M once and within
3 seconds press memory position button
1, 2 or 3.
When the settings are stored to the
selected position, an acknowledgement
signal sounds.
Recalling positions from memory 1 W Standing lamps, left

X Press and hold desired memory position 2 X Standing lamps, right
button 1, 2 or 3 until the seat has moved 3 $ Off
to the stored position completely. On the Daytime running lamp mode
driver’s side, also wait for the steering
4Ã Automatic headlamp mode
wheel and exterior rear view mirrors to
Daytime running lamp mode
move to the stored position.
5T Parking lamps6
i Releasing the memory position button 6L Low-beam headlamps or high-beam
stops movement to the stored positions headlamps
immediately. 7R Vehicles without front fog lamps:
Rear fog lamp
7N Vehicles with front fog lamps: Front
Lighting fog lamps
Notes 8R Vehicles with front fog lamps: Rear
fog lamp
i If you drive in countries with left-hand
driving, you must have the headlamps
6 When the parking lamps are on, the tail lamps, the license plate lamps, the side marker lamps, and the
instrument cluster illumination are also on.
Z
98 Lighting
i The exterior lamps (except standing Automatic headlamp mode

lamps or parking lamps) go out
automatically when you remove the G Warning!
SmartKey from the starter switch or open If the exterior lamp switch is set to Ã, the
the driver’s door with the ignition switched headlamps will not automatically come on
off. under foggy conditions.
When the parking lamps or the rear fog To minimize risk to you and to others, activate
lamp are switched on and you remove the headlamps by turning exterior lamp switch to
Controls in detail
SmartKey from the starter switch and open L when driving or when traffic and/or
the driver’s door, an acoustic signal ambient lighting conditions require you to do
sounds. so.
In addition the message Switch Off In low ambient lighting conditions, only switch
Lights appears in the multifunction from position Ã to L with the vehicle
display. at a standstill in a safe location. Switching
Switch off the parking lamps or the rear fog from Ã to L will briefly switch off the
lamp manually. headlamps. Doing so while driving in low
ambient lighting conditions may result in an
! Failure to switch off the parking lamps accident.
when leaving the vehicle may result in a The automatic headlamp feature is only an aid
discharged battery. to the driver. The driver is responsible for the
operation of the vehicle’s lights at all times.
i Vehicles without front fog lamps: For
better detection of the vehicle, the LED X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp
daytime running lamps are dimmed to switch to position Ã.
parking lamp level when the low-beam When ambient light is low: When the
headlamps are switched on. SmartKey is in starter switch position 1 or
when the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button has
Low-beam headlamps been pressed once, the parking lamps6 come
The low-beam headlamps can be switched on on automatically.
and off with the exterior lamp switch. When the engine is running, the low-beam
X Switch on the ignition. headlamps come on additionally.
X Switching on: Turn the exterior lamp When ambient light is bright: When the
switch to position L. SmartKey is in starter switch position 1 or
The following lamps come on: when the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button has
been pressed once, all lamps are off.
RLow-beam headlamps
When the engine is running, the daytime
RParking lamps6 running lamps7 come on automatically.
RGreen indicator lamp L in the When the low-beam headlamps are switched
instrument cluster on, the green indicator lamp L in the
instrument cluster comes on.
X Switching off: Turn the exterior lamp
switch to position $. Once the low-beam headlamps are on, the
high-beam headlamps are also available.
7 USA only: The daytime running lamp mode must be activated via the control system.

Lighting 99
Daytime running lamp mode The corresponding exterior lamps come on

(Y page 97).
In Canada, the daytime running lamp mode is
mandatory and therefore in a constant mode. USA only
In the USA, the daytime running lamp mode When the engine is running, and you turn the
is deactivated by default. exterior lamp switch to position T or
X Activate the daytime running lamp mode L, the manual headlamp mode has
using the control system, see “Switching priority over the daytime running lamp mode.
Controls in detail
daytime running lamp mode on or off (USA The corresponding exterior lamps come on
only)” (Y page 136). (Y page 97).
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
$ or Ã. Fog lamps
When the engine is running and the
ambient light is bright, the daytime running Fog lamps cannot be switched on with the
lamps come on. exterior lamp switch in position Ã or
$.
In low ambient lighting conditions, the
following lamps will come on additionally: G Warning!
RLow-beam headlamps In low ambient lighting or foggy conditions,
only switch from position Ã to L with
RParking lamps6
the vehicle at a standstill in a safe location.
Rgreen indicator lamp L in the Switching from Ã to L will briefly
instrument cluster switch off the headlamps. Doing so while
You can only switch on the high-beam driving in low ambient lighting conditions may
headlamps when the low-beam headlamps result in an accident.
are on.
Front fog lamps will operate with the parking
The high-beam flasher is available at all times.
lamps and/or the low-beam headlamps on.
Canada only The rear fog lamp can only be switched on
When the engine is running, and you with the exterior lamp switch in position
L. Fog lamps should only be used in
Rshift from a driving position to park conjunction with low-beam headlamps.
position P with the vehicle at a standstill or Consult your State or Province Motor Vehicle
the parking brake is engaged, daytime Regulations regarding permissible lamp
running lamps or the low-beam headlamps operation.
will go out with a delay of 3 minutes
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
T, the daytime running lamps and the T or L (Y page 97).
parking lamps6 come on in bright ambient
lighting conditions.
Rturn the exterior lamp switch to position
L, the manual headlamp mode has
priority over the daytime running lamp
mode
Z
100 Lighting
Vehicles with front fog lamps Combination switch

X Switching on front fog lamps: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to first stop.
The green indicator lamp N in the
exterior lamp switch comes on.
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the
exterior lamp switch to second stop.
The rear fog lamp, the front fog lamps, the
Controls in detail
green and the yellow indicator lamp R

in the exterior lamp switch come on.
X Switching off front fog lamps/rear fog
lamp: Push in the exterior lamp switch to
its stop.
Turn signals
Vehicles without front fog lamps
X Press the combination switch in direction
X Switching on rear fog lamp: Pull out the of arrow ; or ?.
exterior lamp switch to its stop. The corresponding turn signal indicator
The rear fog lamp and the yellow indicator lamp ! or # in the instrument
lamp R in the exterior lamp switch cluster flashes.
come on. The combination switch resets automatically
X Switching off rear fog lamp: Push in the after major steering wheel movements.
exterior lamp switch to its stop.
i To signal minor directional changes such
as changing lanes, press the combination
Locator lighting and night security switch only to point of resistance and
illumination release. The corresponding turn signal
Locator lighting and night security lamps will flash three times.
illumination are described in the “Control
system” section, see “Switching locator High beam
lighting on or off” (Y page 136) and
“Switching night security illumination
L (Y page 97).
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or
off” (Y page 137). X Switching on: Push the combination
switch in direction of arrow :.
The high-beam headlamp indicator lamp
K in the instrument cluster comes on.
X Switching off: Pull the combination switch
in direction of arrow = to its original
position.
i Also note the information on high-beam
headlamps with activated automatic
headlamp mode (Y page 98) or the daytime
running lamp mode (Y page 99).

Lighting 101
High-beam flasher and

X Switching on: Pull the combination switch Rthe windshield wipers have wiped the
briefly in direction of arrow =. windshield with washer fluid five times
The counter resets when you switch off the
headlamps.
Hazard warning flasher For information on filling up the washer
The hazard warning flasher can be switched reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
Controls in detail
on at all times, even with the SmartKey cleaning system” (Y page 232).
removed from the starter switch.
The hazard warning flasher comes on
Interior lighting in the front
automatically when an air bag deploys.
X Switching on: Press hazard warning

flasher switch :.
All turn signal lamps are flashing.
i With the hazard warning flasher activated
and the combination switch set for either
left or right turn, only the respective left or
right turn signals will operate when the : p Left front reading lamp on/off
ignition is switched on. ; v Rear interior lighting on/off
X Switching off: Press hazard warning = ~ Automatic control on/off
flasher switch : again. ? c Front interior lighting on/off
i If the hazard warning flasher has been A p Right front reading lamp on/off
activated automatically, press hazard B Front interior lighting
warning flasher switch : to switch it off. C Front reading lamps
D Front interior lighting
Headlamp cleaning system Automatic control

The headlamps will be cleaned with a high- X Activating: Press button ~.
pressure water jet automatically when the
engine is running and you have Button ~ disengages and sits flush with
the other buttons.
Rswitched on the headlamps The interior lighting comes on when you
Z
102 Lighting
Runlock the vehicle Switching off:

Rremove the SmartKey from the starter X Press button ~.
switch (Interior Lighting Delayed or
Shut-off must be switched on X Press hazard warning flasher switch
(Y page 138)) (Y page 101).
Ropen a door or
Ropen the tailgate X Unlock the vehicle with the SmartKey.
Controls in detail
The interior lighting goes out after a short

time.
Interior lighting in the rear
i If a door remains open, the interior lamps
go out automatically after approximately ! An interior lamp switched on manually
5 minutes when the SmartKey is removed does not go out automatically.
or in starter switch position 0. Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine
X Deactivating: Press button ~.
turned off could result in a discharged
Button ~ engages. battery.
Manual control Second-row reading lamps

! An interior lamp switched on manually
does not go out automatically.
Leaving an interior lamp switched on for an
extended period of time with the engine
turned off could result in a discharged
battery.
X Switching front interior lighting on/
off: Press switch c.
X Switching rear interior lighting on/off:
Press switch v.
X X Switching rear reading lamps on/off:
Switching front reading lamps on/off:
Press respective switch p. Press second-row reading lamp : where
indicated by the arrow.
Ambient lighting
The brightness of the ambient lighting C is
adjusted via the “Control system”
(Y page 137).
Emergency lighting
The interior lighting comes on automatically
if the vehicle is involved in an accident.

Wipers 103
Third-row reading lamps and interior Switching on/off

lighting
Controls in detail
Combination switch
: p Right third-row reading lamp on/off 1 $ Windshield wipers off
; p Left third-row reading lamp on/off 2 Ä Slow intermittent wiping8
= Left third-row reading lamp 3 Å Fast intermittent wiping9
? Rear interior lighting 4 ° Slow continuous wiping
A Right third-row reading lamp 5 ¯ Fast continuous wiping
B í Single wipe/ î Wiping with
i The rear interior lighting is switched on
and off using the button on the front washer fluid
overhead control panel (Y page 101). X Switch on the ignition.
X Turn the combination switch to the desired
position, depending on the intensity of the
Wipers rain.
Notes
Intermittent wiping
! Do not operate the wipers when the
windshield/rear window is dry. Dust that Only switch on intermittent wiping under wet
accumulates on a windshield/rear window weather conditions or in the presence of
might scratch the glass and/or damage the precipitation.
wiper blades when wiping occurs on a dry When you select intermittent wiping, the rain
windshield/rear window. If it is necessary sensor is activated. The rain sensor sets a
to operate the wipers in dry weather suitable wiping interval depending on the
conditions, always operate the wipers with wetness of the sensor surface automatically.
washer fluid.
! Do not leave windshield wipers on an
intermittent setting when the vehicle is
Windshield wipers taken to an automatic car wash or during
windshield cleaning. Windshield wipers will
X Observe notes on page (Y page 103). operate in the presence of water sprayed
on the windshield, and windshield wipers
may be damaged as a result.
8 Rain sensor operation with low sensitivity.

9 Rain sensor operation with high sensitivity.
Z
104 Wipers
! If you have set intermittent wiping, dirt on For information on filling up the washer
the surface of the rain sensor or optical reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp
effects may cause the windshield wipers to cleaning system” (Y page 232).
wipe in an undesired fashion. This could For information on cleaning the headlamps
then damage the windshield wiper blades with washer fluid, see “Headlamp cleaning
or scratch the windshield. You should system” (Y page 101).
therefore switch off the windshield wipers
when weather conditions are dry.
Controls in detail
Rear window wiper/washer

X Turn the combination switch to position
Ä or Å. X Observe notes on page (Y page 103).
After the initial wipe, pauses between The rear window wiper engages automatically
wipes are controlled by the rain sensor when the automatic transmission is shifted
automatically. into reverse gear R with the windshield wipers
Intermittent wiping is interrupted when the switched on.
vehicle is at a standstill and a front door is
opened. This protects persons getting into or
out of the vehicle from being sprayed.
Intermittent wiping will be continued when all
doors are closed and
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
position D or reverse gear R
or
Rthe wiper setting is changed using the
combination switch
Combination switch
Single wipe : Rear window wiper switch
X Press the combination switch briefly in 2 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
direction of arrow B to the resistance 3 Intermittent wiping
point. 4 Rear window wiper off
The windshield wipers wipe one time 5 Wiping rear window with washer fluid
without washer fluid.
Wiping with washer fluid X Turn rear window wiper switch : to the
desired position.
X Press the combination switch in direction
of arrow B past the resistance point.
The windshield wipers operate with washer
fluid.
i To prevent smears on the windshield or
noisy/chattering wiper blades, wipe with
washer fluid every now and then even when
it is raining. Rear window wiper indicator B appears in
the lower multifunction display when the rear
window wiper is activated.

Power windows 105
For information on filling up the washer The hinged quarter windows can be operated
reservoir, see “Washer system and headlamp from the driver’s seat only.
cleaning system” (Y page 232).
i Operating the rear door windows from
the rear is not possible when you activate
the override switch (Y page 60).
Problems with wipers
! If anything blocks the wipers (leaves,
snow, etc.), switch them off immediately. G Warning!
Controls in detail
For safety reasons, do the following before When opening or closing the windows, make
attempting to remove any blockage: sure there is no danger of anyone being
RStop the vehicle in a safe location. harmed by the opening/closing procedure.
The door windows are equipped with the
RRemove the SmartKey from the starter
express operation and automatic reversal
switch.
function. If in express operation mode a door
or window encounters an obstruction that
RTurn off the engine by pressing the blocks its path, the automatic reversal
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and function will stop the door window and open
open the driver’s door (with the driver’s it slightly.
door open, starter switch is in position The door windows operate differently when
0, same as with SmartKey removed from the switch is pulled and held. See the “Closing
starter switch). when a door window is blocked” section in
REngage the parking brake. this chapter for details.
RRemove
The closing of a door window can be
blockage.
immediately halted by releasing the switch or,
RTurn the wipers on again. if the switch was pulled past the resistance
If the windshield wipers fail to function at point and released, by either pressing or
all with the combination switch in position pulling the respective switch.
Ä or Å, The closing of the hinged quarter windows can
Rset
be immediately halted by pressing or pulling
the combination switch to the next
the switch.
higher wiper speed
If a window encounters an obstruction that
Rhave the windshield wipers checked at blocks its path in a circumstance where you
the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz are closing the windows by pressing and
Center holding button & on the SmartKey or by
pressing and holding the lock button (vehicles
with KEYLESS-GO) on an outside door handle,
Power windows the automatic reversal function will not
Opening and closing operate.
Activate the override switch when children
The door windows and the hinged quarter are riding in the back seats of the vehicle. The
windows are opened and closed electrically. children may otherwise injure themselves,
The switches for all door windows and the e.g. by becoming trapped in the window
hinged quarter windows are located on the opening.
driver’s door control panel. The switches for
the respective door windows are located on
the front passenger door and the rear doors.
Z
106 Power windows
G Warning! X Express operation: Press or pull

Do not keep any part of your body up against switch : to ? past the resistance point
the window pane when opening a window. The and release.
downward motion of the pane may pull that The corresponding window opens or closes
part of your body down between the window completely.
pane and the door frame and trap it there. If X Stopping during express operation:
there is a risk of entrapment, release the Press or pull the respective switch again.
switch and pull it to close the window.
Controls in detail
Closing when a door window is blocked

i You can also open or close the windows G Warning!
using the SmartKey, see “Summer opening Make sure that nobody can become trapped
feature” (Y page 107) and “Convenience and be seriously or even fatally injured when
closing feature” (Y page 107). closing a door window with greater force or
without automatic reversal function.
i After switching off the ignition or
removing the SmartKey from the starter If the upward movement of a door window is
switch, you can operate the windows until blocked during the closing procedure, the
you open the driver’s or front passenger door window will stop and open slightly.
door. If no door was opened you can
X Immediately after the door window has
operate the windows for up to 5 minutes.
stopped because it was blocked, pull and
hold the respective switch upward until the
door window is fully closed.
The door window closes with greater force.
If the door window is blocked again and opens
slightly:
X Immediately after the door window was
blocked, pull and hold the respective
switch upward until the door window is fully
closed.
The door window closes without automatic
reversal function.
Door windows
G Warning!
X Switch on the ignition. Pulling and holding the switch to close the
X Opening/closing: Press or pull and hold door window immediately after it had been
switch : to ? to the resistance point. blocked two times will cause the door window
The corresponding window moves to close without any reversal function for as
downward or upward until you release the long as you hold the switch.
switch.
Hinged quarter windows
X Opening: Press switch A and release.
Both hinged quarter windows open
completely.

Power windows 107
X Closing: Pull switch A and release. Summer opening feature

Both hinged quarter windows close
When the weather is warm, you can ventilate
completely.
the vehicle before driving off by
i When the obstruction sensor detects that simultaneously
a hinged quarter windows is blocked during Ropening the door windows
the closing process, they will stop and open
Ropening the hinged quarter windows
slightly.
Controls in detail
Ropening the tilt/sliding sunroof
X Halting closing process: Press or pull
switch A once more during the closing Rswitching on the seat ventilation for the
process. driver’s seat
The hinged quarter windows will stop and The summer opening feature can only be
open completely. activated via the remote control of the
i For your safety, the hinged quarter SmartKey. The SmartKey must be in close
windows cannot be opened again until proximity to the driver’s outside door handle.
4 seconds have passed. X Aim the transmitter eye of the SmartKey at
the driver’s outside door handle.
X Press and hold button % on the
Synchronizing door windows SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/
The door windows must be synchronized after sliding sunroof have reached the desired
the battery has been disconnected or if the position.
door windows cannot be fully closed (express The vehicle unlocks.
operation). X Release button % on the SmartKey to
Each door window must be synchronized interrupt the opening procedure.

separately.
X Close all doors.
Convenience closing feature
X Pull and hold switch :, ;, = or ? When locking the vehicle, you can
(Y page 106) until the respective door simultaneously close
window is closed. Rthe door windows
The door window opens again slightly. Rthe hinged quarter windows
X Pull and hold the respective switch once
Rthe tilt/sliding sunroof
more immediately until the door window is
closed completely. G Warning!
X Hold the respective switch for
When closing the windows and the tilt/sliding
approximately 1 second. sunroof, make sure there is no danger of
The door window is synchronized. anyone being harmed by the closing
procedure.
If potential danger exists, proceed as follows:
RRelease button & to stop the closing
procedure. To open, press and hold button
%. To continue the closing procedure
after making sure that there is no danger of
Z
108 Driving and parking
anyone being harmed by the closing Driving and parking

procedure, press and hold button &.
Safety notes
Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
RRelease the lock button on the outside door
G Warning!
handle to stop the closing procedure. Make sure absolutely no objects are
obstructing the pedals’ range of movement.
RImmediately pull on the same outside door Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
handle and hold firmly. The windows and obstacles. If there are any floormats or
Controls in detail
the tilt/sliding sunroof will open for as long carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals
as the door handle is held but the door not still have sufficient clearance.
opened.
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
the objects could get caught between the
With SmartKey pedals. You could then no longer brake or
The SmartKey must be in close proximity to accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
the driver’s outside door handle. injury.
X Aim transmitter eye of the SmartKey at the G Warning!
driver’s outside door handle. With the engine not running, there is no power
X Press and hold button & on the assistance for the brake and steering
SmartKey until the windows and the tilt/ systems. In this case, it is important to keep
sliding sunroof are closed completely. in mind that a considerably higher degree of
The vehicle locks. effort is necessary to brake and steer the
X Release button & on the SmartKey to vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
interrupt the closing procedure.
With KEYLESS-GO Starting the engine

The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO must be G Warning!
located outside the vehicle within Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of a door. health. All exhaust gas contains carbon
X Close all doors. monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause
unconsciousness and possible death.
X Press and hold the lock button on an
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such
outside door handle (Y page 73) until the
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated.
door windows and the tilt/sliding sunroof
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are
are closed completely.
entering the vehicle while driving, have the
X Release the lock button on the outside door
cause determined and corrected
handle to interrupt the closing procedure. immediately. If you must drive under these
conditions, drive only with at least one
window fully open at all times.

Driving and parking 109
Automatic transmission on and you can start the engine without

preglowing.
With KEYLESS-GO
G Warning!
As long as the SmartKey is in your vehicle, the
vehicle can be started. Therefore, never leave
Controls in detail
children unattended in the vehicle, as they
could otherwise accidentally start the engine.
When leaving the vehicle, always take the
SmartKey with you and lock the vehicle. Do
Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission not leave children unattended in the vehicle,
: Button for selecting park position P or with access to an unlocked vehicle. A
j Park position child’s unsupervised access to a vehicle could
result in an accident and/or serious personal
k Reverse gear
injury.
i Neutral position
h Drive position You can start your vehicle without the
SmartKey in the starter switch using the
For more information on how to operate the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
gear selector lever, see “Automatic The SmartKey must be located in the vehicle.
transmission” (Y page 114).
park position P.
The transmission position indicator in the
multifunction display should be on P
(Y page 116).
With SmartKey
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal.
X Gasoline engine: Turn the SmartKey in the
starter switch to position 3 (Y page 80) and KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
release it. : USA only
The engine starts automatically. ; Canada only
X Diesel engine: Turn the SmartKey in the X Make sure the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
starter switch to position 2 (Y page 80).
button is inserted in the starter switch
Preglow indicator lamp % in the
(Y page 80).
instrument cluster comes on.
X As soon as preglow indicator lamp % i To start the engine with the SmartKey
goes out, turn the SmartKey in the starter instead of the KEYLESS-GO function,
switch to position 3 and release it. remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
The engine starts automatically. from the starter switch. Proceed as
described in “With SmartKey”
i If the engine is at operating temperature, (Y page 109).
preglow indicator lamp % may not stay
Z
X Depress the brake pedal during the starting The engine does not start. You cannot
procedure. hear the starter.
X Do not depress the accelerator pedal. The battery may not be charged sufficiently.
X Gasoline engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO X Get a jump start (Y page 350).
start/stop button once. If the engine will not start despite a jump
The engine starts automatically. start:
X Diesel engine: Press the KEYLESS-GO X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Controls in detail
start/stop button once. Center or call Roadside Assistance.

The engine preglows and starts The starter has been exposed to excessive
automatically. temperatures.
i If the engine is at operating temperature, X Let the starter cool for about 2 minutes.
the time the engine needs to preglow is X Repeat the starting procedure.
reduced.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts:
Starting difficulties
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
! Remember that extended starting Center or call Roadside Assistance.
attempts can drain the battery.
The engine does not start. You can hear
the starter. Driving off
There could be a malfunction in the engine G Warning!
electronics or in the fuel supply system. On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
Carry out the following steps: order to obtain braking action. This could
X If you are starting the engine with the result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
SmartKey: Turn the SmartKey in the starter control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
switch to position 0 and repeat the starting this type of loss of control.
procedure.
X If you are starting the engine with KEYLESS-
! Do not run a cold engine at high engine
GO: Close any doors that may be open to speeds. Running a cold engine at high
allow for better detection of the SmartKey. engine speeds may shorten the service life
of the engine. This is not covered by the
or
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch. ! If an acoustic warning sounds and the
X Start the engine with the SmartKey as radio message Release Parking Brake
signals from another source may be appears in the multifunction display when
interfering with the KEYLESS-GO function. driving off, you have forgotten to release
X Repeat the starting procedure. the parking brake.
Release the parking brake.
If the engine does not start after several
starting attempts: ! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz cause serious damage to the drivetrain
Center or call Roadside Assistance. which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.

! Simultaneously depressing the X Wait for the gear selection process to

accelerator pedal and applying the brakes complete before setting the vehicle in
reduces engine performance and causes motion.
premature brake and drivetrain wear which X If engaged, release the parking brake.
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz X Release the brake pedal.
Limited Warranty.
X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
i Once the vehicle is in motion, the After a cold start, the automatic transmission
Controls in detail
automatic central locking function engages shifts at a higher engine speed. This allows
and the locking knobs in the doors move the catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or
down. the oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to reach
The automatic central locking function can its operating temperature earlier.
be switched off (Y page 138). For more information on driving, see “Driving
instructions” (Y page 259).
Automatic transmission For information on off-road driving, see “Off-
road driving” (Y page 262).
G Warning!
It is dangerous to shift the automatic
transmission out of park position P or neutral Problems while driving
position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the The engine runs erratically and misfires
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate RGasoline engine: An ignition cable may be
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose damaged.
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
RThe engine electronics may not be
something. Only shift into gear when the
operating properly.
engine is idling normally and when your right
foot is firmly on the brake pedal. RGasoline engine: Unburned gasoline may
have entered the catalytic converter and
! Only shift the automatic transmission into damaged it.
reverse gear R or park position P when the X Give very little gas.
vehicle is stopped. Otherwise the X Have the problem checked at an authorized
automatic transmission could be damaged. Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
X Depress the brake pedal.
The gear selector lever can now be used. The coolant temperature is above
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
248‡ (120†)
position D or reverse gear R. The coolant is too hot and is no longer cooling
the engine.
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon
park position P is only possible with the
brake pedal depressed. as possible.
X Turn off the engine immediately.
Without the brake pedal depressed, the
gear selector lever can be moved up or X Allow the engine and coolant to cool off.
down. However, the parking pawl remains X Check the coolant level and add coolant if
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur. necessary (Y page 231).
Z
In case of accident the starter switch, or press the KEYLESS-

If the vehicle is leaking fuel: GO start/stop button.
RTake the SmartKey with you and lock the
X Do not start the engine under any
circumstances. vehicle when leaving.
X Exit the vehicle at a safe distance from the
roadway. Parking brake
X Notify local fire and/or police authorities.
G Warning!
Controls in detail
If the extent of the damage cannot be Engaging the parking brake while the vehicle
determined: is in motion can cause the rear wheels to lock
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz up. You could lose control of the vehicle and
Center or call Roadside Assistance. cause an accident. In addition, the vehicle’s
brake lights do not light up when the parking
If no damage on major assemblies, fuel brake is engaged.
system, and engine mount can be
determined: G Warning!
X Start the engine in the usual manner. When leaving the vehicle, always remove the
SmartKey from the starter switch, take it with
you, and lock the vehicle. Do not leave
Parking children unattended in the vehicle, or with
access to an unlocked vehicle. Children could
G Warning! release the parking brake and/or shift the
Do not park this vehicle in areas where automatic transmission out of park position
combustible materials such as grass, hay or P, either of which could result in an accident
leaves can come into contact with the hot and/or serious personal injury.
exhaust system. These materials could be
ignited and cause a vehicle fire.
Vehicle movement may result in serious
personal injury or damage to the vehicle or
vehicle drivetrain. Therefore, always do the
following before turning off the engine and
leaving the vehicle:
RKeep right foot on the brake pedal.
REngage the parking brake.
RShift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X Releasing: Pull on release handle :.
RSlowly release the brake pedal.
When the ignition is switched on or the
RWhen parked on an incline, always turn the engine is running, the brake warning lamp
front wheels towards the road curb. $ (USA only) or J (Canada only) in
RTurn the SmartKey in the starter switch to the instrument cluster goes out.
position 0 and remove the SmartKey from X Engaging: Step on parking brake
pedal ; firmly.
When the engine is running, the brake
warning lamp $ (USA only) or J

(Canada only) in the instrument cluster G Warning!

comes on. Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
only will shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N automatically.
Turning off the engine Always shift the automatic transmission into
G Warning! park position P before turning off the engine.
Do not turn off the engine before the vehicle Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
Controls in detail
has come to a complete stop. With the engine could result in an accident and/or serious
not running, there is no power assistance for personal injury.
the brake and steering systems. In this case,
it is important to keep in mind that a With KEYLESS-GO
considerably higher degree of effort is
X Press the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
necessary to brake and steer the vehicle.
With the driver’s door closed, the starter
switch is now in position 1. With the driver’s
i If the engine cannot be turned off as
door opened, the starter switch is set to
described, see “Emergency engine position 0, same as the SmartKey removed
shutdown” (Y page 357).
from the starter switch (Y page 80).
X Shift the automatic transmission into park When you turn off the engine using the
position P. KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open a
X
front door, the automatic transmission will
Engage the parking brake.
shift into park position P automatically.
i Always engage the parking brake in
G Warning!
addition to shifting the automatic
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone
transmission into park position P.
only will shift the automatic transmission into
i Observe instructions if you want the neutral position N automatically.
automatic transmission to remain in Always shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N, see “Remaining in park position P before turning off the engine.
neutral position N” (Y page 115). Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
could result in an accident and/or serious
With SmartKey personal injury.
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to
i In an emergency you can turn off the
position 0.
engine while driving by pressing and
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter holding the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button
switch. for approximately 3 seconds.
When you turn off the engine using the
SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey from If you have started the engine with the
the starter switch or open a front door, the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and cannot
automatic transmission will shift into park turn it off as described above:
position P automatically. X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
The engine turns off. The starter switch is
in position 0 (Y page 80).
Z
114 Automatic transmission
Automatic transmission Gear selector lever

Introduction
For information on driving with an automatic
transmission, see “Driving and parking”
(Y page 108).
G Warning!
Controls in detail
Make sure absolutely no objects are

Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
carpets in the footwell, make sure the pedals Gearshift pattern for automatic transmission
still have sufficient clearance.
: Button for selecting park position P
During sudden driving or braking maneuvers
j Park position
the objects could get caught between the
pedals. You could then no longer brake or k Reverse gear
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and i Neutral position
injury. h Drive position
! Allow the engine to warm up under low G Warning!

load use. Do not place full load on the It is dangerous to shift the automatic
engine until the operating temperature has transmission out of park position P or neutral
been reached. position N if the engine speed is higher than
idle speed. If your foot is not firmly on the
Avoid spinning of a drive wheel for an
brake pedal, the vehicle could accelerate
extended period when driving off on
quickly forward or in reverse. You could lose
slippery road surfaces.
control of the vehicle and hit someone or
This may cause serious damage to the something. Only shift into gear when the
engine and the drivetrain which is not engine is idling normally and when your right
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited foot is firmly on the brake pedal.
Warranty.
i During the brief warm-up, transmission ! The vehicle must be stopped when you
upshifting is delayed. This allows the shift the automatic transmission
catalytic converter (gasoline engine) or Rdirectly between drive position D and
oxidation catalyst (diesel engine) to heat up reverse gear R
more quickly to operating temperature. Rdirectly between reverse gear R and
drive position D
Rdirectly into park position P
Otherwise the automatic transmission
could be damaged.
When trying to free a vehicle stuck in mud or
snow, see “Rocking the vehicle”
(Y page 118).

Automatic transmission 115
i Shifting the automatic transmission out of Always shift the automatic transmission into
park position P is only possible with the park position P before turning off the engine.
brake pedal depressed. Otherwise the vehicle could roll away which
Without the brake pedal depressed, the could result in an accident and/or serious
gear selector lever can be moved up or personal injury.
down, but the parking pawl remains
engaged, not allowing shifting to occur. i Moving the gear selector lever up or down
shifts the automatic transmission out of
Controls in detail
i Depending on vehicle production date: park position P.
The automatic transmission will shift into
park position P automatically when
Shifting into neutral position N
Ryou open the driver’s door while driving
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the
at low speed, and
brake pedal.
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive X Move the gear selector lever up or down to
position D or reverse gear R
the resistance point to select neutral
After the vehicle has engaged park position position N.
P automatically, you can engage drive When you turn off the engine, the automatic
position D or reverse gear R again to transmission will shift into neutral position
override this locking feature purposely. N automatically.
i The gear selector lever always returns to SmartKey: Removing the SmartKey from the
its original position. starter switch or opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic
The current transmission position P, R, N, transmission into park position P
or D appears in the multifunction display automatically.
(Y page 116).
KEYLESS-GO: Opening a front door after
turning off the engine will shift the automatic
Shifting into park position P
transmission into park position P
X With the vehicle at a standstill, press automatically.
button : on the gear selector lever.
Remaining in neutral position N
SmartKey: When you turn off the engine using
If you want the automatic transmission to
the SmartKey, and remove the SmartKey
remain in neutral position N, e.g. when taking
from the starter switch or open a front door,
the vehicle through an automatic conveyor-
the automatic transmission will shift into park
type car wash, observe the following
position P automatically.
instructions.
KEYLESS-GO: When you turn off the engine
using the KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and G Warning!
open a front door, the automatic transmission When leaving the SmartKey in the starter
will shift into park position P automatically. switch, do not leave children unattended in
the vehicle. It is possible for children to switch
G Warning!
on the ignition which could result in
Keep in mind that turning off the engine alone unsupervised use of vehicle equipment.
only will shift the automatic transmission into Unsupervised use of vehicle equipment could
neutral position N automatically. result in an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Z
With SmartKey: Shifting procedure

X Make sure the ignition is switched on. The automatic transmission selects individual
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the gears automatically, depending on
brake pedal and keep it pressed. Rthe selected gear range (Y page 118)
X Shift the automatic transmission into Rthe position of the accelerator pedal
neutral position N.
Rthe vehicle speed
X Release the brake pedal.
Controls in detail
X If engaged, release the parking brake. With drive position D selected, you can
influence transmission shifting by limiting or
X Switch off the ignition and leave the
extending the gear range.
SmartKey in the starter switch.
With KEYLESS-GO:
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. Transmission positions
X With the vehicle at a standstill, depress the The current transmission position appears in
brake pedal and keep it pressed. the multifunction display.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
position P.
X Release the brake pedal.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button from the starter switch.
X Switch on the ignition. : Transmission position indicator
X Depress the brake pedal and keep it
If the current transmission position does not
pressed.
appear in the multifunction display due to a
X Shift the automatic transmission into
malfunction, for example, make sure that the
neutral position N. automatic transmission is in the desired
X Release the brake pedal. position.
X If engaged, release the parking brake. X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
X Switch off the ignition and leave the position D.
SmartKey in the starter switch. X Do not limit the gear range.
X Drive off carefully.
Shifting into reverse gear R
brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever up past the
resistance point.
Shifting into drive position D

brake pedal.
X Move the gear selector lever down past the
resistance point.

Automatic transmission 117
Effect Effect
B Park position A Neutral position
Shift the automatic transmission No power is transmitted from the
into park position P only when the engine to the drive axle. When the
vehicle is stopped. The park position brakes are released, the vehicle can
is not intended to serve as a brake be moved freely (pushed or towed).
when the vehicle is parked. Rather, To avoid damage to the
Controls in detail
the driver should always engage the transmission, never shift the
parking brake in addition to shifting automatic transmission into neutral
the automatic transmission into position N while driving.
park position P to secure the
Exception: If the ESP® is switched
vehicle. off or malfunctioning, shift the
If the vehicle’s electrical system is automatic transmission into neutral
malfunctioning, the automatic position N if the vehicle is in danger
transmission could remain locked in of skidding.
park position P.
! Coasting the vehicle, or driving
X Have the vehicle’s electrical
for any other reason with the
system checked at an authorized
automatic transmission in neutral
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
position N can result in
possible.
transmission damage that is not
C Reverse gear covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Shift the automatic transmission
into reverse gear R only when the 7 Drive position
vehicle is stopped. The automatic transmission shifts
automatically. All forward gears are
available.
Driving tips
Kickdown
Use the kickdown when you want maximum
acceleration.
X U.S. vehicles: Fully depress the
accelerator pedal.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
X Canada vehicles: Depress the accelerator
pedal past the point of resistance.
Depending on the engine speed the
automatic transmission shifts into a lower
gear.
Z
Rocking the vehicle The current gear range appears in the

multifunction display.
Rocking the vehicle by shifting the automatic
transmission directly between drive position
D and reverse gear R can help free a vehicle
stuck in mud or snow. The engine control
system of this vehicle electronically limits
directly shifting the automatic transmission
between drive position D and reverse gear R
Controls in detail
to very low speeds, i.e. approximately 5 mph

(9 km/h). To shift the automatic transmission : Gear range indicator
directly between drive position D and reverse
Effect
gear R, move the gear selector lever up or
down past the resistance point. = With this selection you can use the
braking effect of the engine.
Working on the vehicle
5 Allows the use of the engine’s
G Warning! braking effect when driving
When working on the vehicle, engage the Ron steep downgrades
parking brake and shift the automatic Rin mountainous regions
transmission into park position P. Otherwise
Runder extreme operating
the vehicle could roll away which could result
in an accident and/or serious personal injury.
conditions
4 For maximum use of the engine’s
Towing a trailer braking effect on very steep or
X
lengthy downgrades.
When you tow a trailer, shift into a lower
gear range manually if the automatic
transmission hunts between gears on
inclines. One-touch gearshifting
A lower gear range and reduction of speed With the automatic transmission in drive
reduces the potential to overload or to position D, you can limit or extend the gear
overheat the engine. range using the steering wheel gearshift
For more information on trailer towing, see control.
“Trailer towing” (Y page 269).
Gear ranges
With the automatic transmission in drive
position D, you can limit or extend the gear
range, see “One-touch gearshifting”
(Y page 118).
Steering wheel gearshift control

Transfer case 119
i You cannot shift with the steering wheel Shifting into optimal gear range
gearshift control when the automatic X Pull and hold left gearshift control :.
transmission is in park position P, neutral
The automatic transmission will select the
position N, or reverse gear R.
gear range suited for optimal acceleration
and deceleration automatically. This will
Limiting gear range involve shifting down one or more gears.
G Warning!
Controls in detail
On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
order to obtain braking action. This could Emergency operation (limp-home
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle mode)
control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent If vehicle acceleration becomes less
this type of loss of control. responsive or sluggish or the automatic
transmission no longer shifts, the automatic
X Briefly pull left gearshift control :. transmission is most likely operating in limp-
The automatic transmission will shift into home (emergency operation) mode. In this
the next lower gear as permitted by the mode only second gear and reverse gear R
shift program. This action simultaneously can be selected.
limits the gear range of the automatic X Stop the vehicle in a safe location.
transmission.
X Shift the automatic transmission into park
i To avoid overrevving the engine when position P.
downshifting, the automatic transmission X Turn off the engine.
will not shift into a lower gear if the engine’s X Wait at least 10 seconds before restarting.
maximum speed would be exceeded.
X Restart the engine.
X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
Extending gear range
position D (for second gear) or reverse gear
X Briefly pull right gearshift control ;. R.
The automatic transmission will shift into X Have the automatic transmission checked
the next higher gear as permitted by the at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as
shift program. This action simultaneously soon as possible.
extends the gear range of the automatic
transmission.
i If you press on the accelerator pedal Transfer case
when the engine has reached the
revolution limit of the current gear range, The vehicle is equipped with all-wheel drive
the automatic transmission will upshift (4MATIC). Both the front and rear axles are
beyond any gear range limit selected. powered at all times when the vehicle is being
operated.
Canceling gear range limit ! Only conduct operational or performance
X Pull and hold right gearshift control ; until tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
the gear range indicator disappears from tests are necessary, contact an authorized
the multifunction display. Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
The automatic transmission will shift from otherwise seriously damage the brake
the current gear range directly into drive system or the transfer case which is not
position D.
Z
120 Transfer case
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Gear ranges

Warranty.
There are two possible settings.
! Because the ESP® operates HIGH Road position for all normal
automatically, the engine and ignition must RANGE driving situations.
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch (LOW RANGE mode off)
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking LOW Off-road position for
RANGE traveling on rough terrain.
Controls in detail
brake is being tested on a brake test

dynamometer. Such testing should be no (LOW RANGE mode on)
longer than 10 seconds. Also use the off-road
Active braking action through the ESP® position when driving on-
may otherwise seriously damage the brake road on steep gradients,
system which is not covered by the especially when towing a
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. trailer.
LOW RANGE acts by raising
the engine’s gear ratio. The
LOW RANGE mode vehicle travels at roughly
third the speed compared to
The LOW RANGE mode is available on when in HIGH RANGE
vehicles with enhanced off-road package. position, leading to an
In the following situations you should switch increase in the engine’s
to the LOW RANGE mode: drive power.
Rduring off-road driving
Rbefore driving through water G Warning!
Rwhen towing up or down on steep gradients Always wait until the procedure of shifting
from HIGH RANGE to LOW RANGE – and from
With LOW RANGE selected, the engine’s LOW RANGE to HIGH RANGE – has been
power delivery and the shifting behavior of entirely completed. During this procedure do
the automatic transmission are adjusted. not turn off the engine or shift the automatic
Furthermore, the ABS, the ESP®, and the transmission into another gear.
4-ETS functions especially adapted to off-
If you do not wait until the shifting procedure
road travel are activated.
has been entirely completed then it might not
For more information on off-road driving, see be correctly performed. The transfer case
“Off-road driving” (Y page 262). might be in neutral, thus interrupting the
For information on driving safety systems transfer of power between the engine and the
during LOW RANGE mode, see “Driving safety drive axle.
systems” (Y page 61). The vehicle is then freely movable, even if a
gear has been selected, and could
unintentionally be set into motion –
particularly on up – or downhill grades. This
could lead to an accident and cause injury to
yourself and others.
Please observe related messages appearing
in the multifunction display.

Differential locks 121
Switching LOW RANGE mode indicating that the LOW RANGE mode has
been activated.
i You can cancel the procedure by pressing
the LOW RANGE switch again while the
indicator lamp is flashing.
Switching LOW RANGE mode off
(switching from LOW RANGE to HIGH
Controls in detail
RANGE)
! The shifting procedure can only be
performed when the following conditions
are met:
RThe engine is running.
RThe automatic transmission is in neutral
position N.
RThe vehicle speed does not exceed
43 mph (70 km/h).
Switching LOW RANGE mode on i There is no reset to LOW after the ignition
(switching from HIGH RANGE to LOW has been switched off.
RANGE) X Press LOW RANGE switch :.
! The shifting procedure can only be Indicator lamp ; flashes.
performed when the following conditions If the system senses that all conditions are
are met: met, it will switch from LOW RANGE to
RThe engine is running. HIGH RANGE. A chime sounds and LOW
RThe
RANGE indicator = disappears from the
automatic transmission is in neutral
position N. multifunction display.
Indicator lamp ; on LOW RANGE
RThe vehicle speed does not exceed
switch : goes out, indicating that the LOW
25 mph (40 km/h).
RANGE mode has been deactivated.
i There is no reset to HIGH after the ignition i You can cancel the procedure by pressing
has been switched off. the LOW RANGE switch again while the
X
indicator lamp is flashing.
Press LOW RANGE switch :.
Indicator lamp ; flashes. For messages in the multifunction display,
see the “Practical hints” section
If the system senses that all conditions are
(Y page 303).
met, it will switch from HIGH RANGE to
LOW RANGE. A chime sounds and LOW
RANGE indicator = appears in the
Differential locks
Indicator lamp ; on LOW RANGE Vehicles with enhanced off-road package are
switch : comes on continuously, equipped with automatic locks for the center
Z
122 Differential locks
and rear axle differential to improve vehicle More extreme off-road conditions may call for
traction. another solution, engaging a differential lock
The center differential compensates for or preventing the differential from operating
differences in wheel rotation between the altogether. This vehicle comes with two
front and rear axle. differential locks: transfer case (center) and
The rear axle differential compensates rear. Each can be engaged simply by
differences between the rear wheels. operating the rotary switch located on the
center console (Y page 123). When the
Controls in detail
i At the front axles, the 4-ETS system transfer case (center) differential is locked,
compensates for any traction problems. the combined (or average) speed of the front
For more information on off-road driving, see wheels is identical to the combined rear
“Off-road driving” (Y page 262). wheel speed. When the rear differential is
locked, both rear wheels turn at the same
speed, independent of the individual torque.
A few words about differentials and Please be aware that engaging the differential
differential locks locks will significantly reduce the steering
ability of the vehicle.
When a vehicle negotiates a turn, wheels on
For your safety and the safety of others and
the outside of the curve must travel farther
to prevent damage to the vehicle, the
and rotate faster than the inside wheels. The
differential locks must not be engaged when
differential, the operation of a set of gears
driving on paved roads. It is important to
that allows the powered wheels in a vehicle
understand that during on-road/paved
to turn at different speeds, makes this
driving, differentials are absolutely necessary
essential function possible.
for providing the essential control and
The drawback is that the differential also steering ability of the vehicle. The differential
sends most of the engine’s power to the locks, therefore, must not be engaged when
wheel with the least load or strain on it. For driving on paved roads and should only be
example, if one of a vehicle’s powered wheels used to the extent necessary to negotiate off-
sits on a patch of snow and spins because road conditions which cannot be handled by
there is no traction, all of the engine’s power the systems (the 4-ETS, the ESP®, and the
will go to that wheel because the power will transfer case in LOW RANGE mode) this
take the path of least resistance. Meanwhile, vehicle comes equipped with.
the opposite wheel, sitting on dry pavement
where it could get enough grip to start the
vehicle moving, sits idle because it receives Switching differential locks
no power.
The 4-ETS addresses this problem and ! If the differential locks are engaged,
provides for good control and steering ability accelerate gently when setting the vehicle
by automatically slowing the slipping wheel in motion.
and thus increasing the power to the other Only operate the vehicle on a single axle
non-slipping drive wheels to get the vehicle dynamometer if the axle not being driven is
moving. The ESP® and the 4-ETS in this jacked up or the associated propeller shaft
vehicle feature such intelligent limited-slip is disconnected.
differential technology, ideally suited for on- Otherwise the transmission could be
road and light off-road driving. Transfer case damaged.
position LOW (Y page 120) also enhances off-
road driving capabilities.

Differential locks 123
You can select between three locking modes. Center and rear axle differential locks
G Warning!
Never drive on a paved surface with the center
and rear axle differential locks manually
engaged. Ability to steer the vehicle is greatly
reduced when the differential locks are
manually engaged, increasing the risk of an
Controls in detail
accident.
For safety reasons, the locks are
automatically released at a vehicle speed
above 31 mph (50 km/h). Nevertheless, you
Rotary switch for differential locks should only manually lock the differential if
: Rotatable outer adjustment ring with absolutely necessary because engaged locks
indicator lamp will restrict the vehicle drivetrain while
2 AUTO mode: center differential is cornering and cause the vehicle to chatter.
automatically locked This could cause you to lose control of the
3 Center differential is completely locked vehicle and cause an accident.
4 Center and rear axle differential are
completely locked ! The differential locks must not be
engaged manually when towing the vehicle
or spinning the wheels.
AUTO mode The differential locks should only be engaged
The AUTO mode is adequate for most driving manually if traction is insufficient in AUTO
situations since the center differential is mode.
locked and released as required. The differential locks can be engaged in the
sequence 3, 4 (Y page 123) up to a speed
i At speeds up to 19 mph (30 km/h), it is of 19 mph (30 km/h).
possible to manually lock the differential
Engage differential locks:
locks for driving on rough terrain.
Rfor off-road driving
X Start the engine.
Rfor driving through water
The center differential lock is in AUTO
mode. The indicator lamp on adjustment Rwhen driving on deep snow and icy or
ring : above symbol Ã is on. fouled surfaces
A message indicating that the center X Start the engine.
differential lock is in AUTO mode appears in X To select the desired locking mode, rotate
the multifunction display when the off-road adjustment ring : to position 3 or 4
menu is selected. For selecting the off-road (Y page 123).
menu, see the “Controls in detail” section The indicator lamp on adjustment ring :
(Y page 131).
at the respective symbol comes on.
A message indicating that the respective
differential is completely locked appears in
the multifunction display when the off-road
menu is selected. For selecting the off-road
Z
124 Instrument cluster
menu, see the “Controls in detail” section If you must continue to drive, do so with added
(Y page 131). caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center as soon as possible.
Controls in detail
Example illustration
A Center differential completely locked
! If the differential locks have been

manually engaged, the tires will scuff on the
road surface when cornering because the
differences between the individual wheel : To dim instrument cluster illumination
rotation speeds will not be compensated ; Reset button
for. = To brighten instrument cluster
illumination
i The differential locks are reset to AUTO
For information on changing the instrument
mode after the ignition has been switched
cluster settings, e.g. the language, see
off for longer than 10 seconds.
(Y page 133).
Instrument cluster
Activating the instrument cluster
Introduction The instrument cluster is activated when you
For a full view illustration of the instrument Ropen the driver’s door
cluster, see “Instrument cluster”
Rswitch on the ignition
(Y page 28).
Rpress button :, ; or =
G Warning!
No messages will be displayed if either the i Opening the driver’s door or pressing
instrument cluster or the multifunction button :, ; or = without switching on
display is inoperative. the ignition activates the instrument
As a result, you will not be able to see cluster illumination only for 30 seconds.
information about your driving conditions,
such as
Rspeed Adjusting the instrument cluster
illumination
Routside temperature
X To brighten illumination: Press and hold
Rwarning/indicator lamps
button = until the desired level of
Rmalfunction/warning messages illumination is reached.
Rfailure of any systems X To dim illumination: Press and hold
Driving characteristics may be impaired. button : until the desired level of

illumination is reached.

Control system 125
i The instrument cluster illumination is messages in the instrument cluster display,

dimmed or brightened automatically to suit and much more.
ambient light conditions.
G Warning!
The instrument cluster illumination will also
A driver’s attention to the road and traffic
be adjusted automatically when you switch
conditions must always be his/her primary
on the vehicle’s exterior lamps.
focus when driving.
i With the exterior lighting switched on, the For your safety and the safety of others,
Controls in detail
brightness of the switches in the center selecting features through the multifunction
console will also be adjusted when using steering wheel should only be done by the
button : or =. driver when traffic and road conditions permit
it to be done safely.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
Resetting trip odometer (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
X Make sure you are viewing the standard
14 m) every second.
display (Y page 128) in the multifunction
display. The control system relays information to the
X Press and hold the reset button in the multifunction display.
instrument cluster (Y page 124) until the
trip odometer is reset.
Multifunction steering wheel
The displays in the multifunction display and
Tachometer the settings in the control system are
The red marking on the tachometer controlled by using the buttons on the
(Y page 29) denotes excessive engine speed. multifunction steering wheel.
! Avoid driving at excessive engine speeds,
as it may result in serious engine damage
that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
To help protect the engine, the fuel supply is
interrupted if the engine is operated within
the red marking.
Control system
Introduction
The control system is activated as soon as the
starter switch is in position 1 (Y page 80).
The control system enables you to call up
information about your vehicle and to change
vehicle settings.
For example, you can use the control system
to find out when your vehicle is next due for
maintenance service, to set the language for
Z
126 Control system
: Multifunction display Press and hold button

; Press button & Within Audio/DVD menu to
* select previous or next track
~ to end a call
with quick search or to select
to reject an incoming call previous or next station in
6 to answer a call station list or wave band
to dial10 Within Telephone menu to
Controls in detail
to redial10 start the quick search in the

phone book
Press button
Press button
W to select submenus in the
X Settings menu A to turn Voice Control System
to set values off11, see separate operating
instructions
to set the volume
Press button Depending on the selected menu, pressing

? to turn Voice Control System the buttons on the multifunction steering
on11, see separate operating wheel will alter what appears in the
instructions multifunction display.
The information available in the multifunction
= Press button display is arranged in menus and
V to select next or previous menu accompanying functions and submenus.
U The individual functions are then found within
the relevant menu (radio or CD operations
Press button briefly under Audio/DVD menu, for example).
& to move within a menu These functions serve to call up relevant
* Within Audio/DVD menu to information or to customize the settings for
select previous or next track, your vehicle.
scene or stored station It is helpful to think of the menus, and the
Within Telephone menu to functions within each menu, as being
switch to the phone book and arranged in a circular pattern.
select a name or number X Press button V or U repeatedly to
pass through each menu one after the
other.
X Press button * or & repeatedly to
pass through each function display, one
after the other, in the current menu.
In the Settings menu, instead of functions,
you will find a number of submenus for calling
up and changing settings. For instructions on
using these submenus, see “Settings menu”
(Y page 132).
10 Function only available in telephone menu.

11 Vehicles without Voice Control System: Button without function.

Control system 127
The number of menus available in the system = Transmission position/gear range

depends on which optional equipment is indicator
installed in your vehicle. ? Outside temperature or digital
speedometer
Multifunction display For more information on menus displayed in
the multifunction display, see “Menus and
submenus” (Y page 127).
Controls in detail
: Trip odometer
; Main odometer
Menus and submenus
i The headings used in the menus table are The first function displayed in each menu
designed to facilitate navigation within the will automatically show you which part of
system and are not necessarily identical to the system you are in.
those shown in the multifunction display.
Z
128 Control system
Function The following functions are available:

RRestarting the tire pressure loss warning
: Standard display menu system (Y page 238) (Canada only)
(Y page 128)
RChecking tire inflation pressure with the
; Audio/DVD menu (Y page 129) Advanced TPMS (Y page 239) (USA only)
= Navigation menu (Y page 130) RChecking coolant temperature
(Y page 128)
Controls in detail
? Off-road menu (Y page 131)

RCalling up digital speedometer or outside
A Distronic menu (Y page 131) temperature (Y page 129)
B Vehicle status message RCalling up maintenance service indicator
memory12 menu (Y page 131) display (Y page 274)
C Settings menu (Y page 132) Checking coolant temperature

D Vehicle configuration menu
G Warning!
(Y page 140)
Driving when your engine is overheated can
E Trip computer menu (Y page 141) cause some fluids which may have leaked into
the engine compartment to catch fire. You
F Telephone menu (Y page 142)
could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause
serious burns which can occur just by opening
Standard display menu
the engine hood. Stay away from the engine
if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from
other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until
the engine has cooled down.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until

Standard display the coolant temperature appears in the
In the standard display, trip odometer : and multifunction display.
main odometer ; appear in the
X If you see another display, press button
V or U repeatedly until the standard
display appears.
X Press button & or * to select the
functions in the Standard display menu.
During severe operating conditions, e.g. stop-
and-go traffic, the coolant temperature may
rise close to 248‡ (120†).
! Excessive coolant temperature triggers a
warning in the multifunction display.
12 The vehicle status message memory menu is only displayed if there is a message stored.

Control system 129
The engine should not be operated with a Audio/DVD menu

coolant temperature above 248‡
(120†). Doing so may cause serious The functions in the Audio/DVD menu
engine damage which is not covered by the operate the audio or video equipment which
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. you have currently switched on.
The following functions are available:
Calling up digital speedometer or RSelecting radio station (Y page 129)
outside temperature ROperating audio devices/audio media
Controls in detail
You can select whether the digital (Y page 130)
speedometer or the outside temperature ROperating video DVD (Y page 130)
appears in the multifunction display
(Y page 135). If no audio equipment is currently switched
on, the message AUDIO Off appears in the
G Warning! multifunction display.
The outside temperature indicator is not
designed to serve as an ice-warning device Selecting radio station
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
The HD Radio with SIRIUS Satellite Radio is
Indicated temperatures just above the treated as a radio application.
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
For more information on HD Radio with
especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
SIRIUS Satellite Radio, refer to separate
COMAND system operating instructions.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until Additional optional satellite radio equipment
the digital speedometer or the outside and a subscription to a satellite radio service
temperature appears in the multifunction provider are required for satellite radio
display. operation. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center for details and availability for
your vehicle.
X Switch on the COMAND system and select
radio. Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the currently tuned station appears in the
Digital speedometer multifunction display.
Outside temperature Example illustration

: Wave band setting and stored memory
position
; Station frequency
Z
130 Control system
X Selecting next or previous stored Operating video DVD

station: Press button * or & briefly
to select a stored station.
DVD-Video. Refer to separate COMAND
X Selecting next or previous station in the
system operating instructions.
station list: Press and hold button * or X Press button V or U repeatedly until
& to select a station.
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the
X Selecting next or previous station in multifunction display.
wave band (Only if no station list is
Controls in detail
available): Press and hold button * or

& to select a station.
You can only store new stations using the
corresponding feature on the radio. Refer to
separate COMAND system operating
instructions.
You can also operate the radio in the usual : Disc number
manner. ; Current scene
Operating audio devices/audio media X Press button * or & to select a

scene.
the audio device or audio media. Refer to
instructions. Navigation menu
X Press button V or U repeatedly until The Navigation menu contains the functions
the Audio/DVD menu appears in the needed to operate your navigation system.
multifunction display. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the Navigation menu appears in the
The message shown in the multifunction
display depends on the status of the
navigation system:
RWith the COMAND system switched off,
the message NAVI Off appears in the
Example illustration multifunction display.
: Disc number RWith the COMAND system switched on
; Current track but route guidance not activated, the
direction of travel and, if applicable, the
X Selecting next or previous track: Press name of the street currently traveled on
button * or & briefly. appear in the multifunction display.
X Selecting a track from the track list
RWith the COMAND system switched on
(quick search): Press and hold button
and route guidance activated, the
* or &.
direction of travel and maneuver
The current track does not appear during instructions appear in the multifunction
Audio AUX mode operation. display.

Control system 131
Please refer to separate COMAND system Please refer to the “Driving systems” section
operating instructions for instructions on how of this manual (Y page 147) for instructions
to activate the route guidance system. on how to activate Distronic.
Off-road menu Vehicle status message memory

menu
The Off-road menu displays the messages for
air suspension, differential locks and the Use the Vehicle status message memory
Controls in detail
direction into which you are currently driving. menu to scan malfunction and warning
X Press button V or U repeatedly until messages that may be stored in the memory.
one of the following messages appears in Such messages appear in the multifunction
the multifunction display. display and are based on conditions or
system status the vehicle’s system has
Vehicles with air suspension:
recorded.
The Vehicle status message memory menu
only appears if messages have been stored.
G Warning!
Malfunction and warning messages are only
indicated for certain systems and are
intentionally not very detailed. The
Vehicles with air suspension and differential malfunction and warning messages are
locks: simply a reminder with respect to the
operation of certain systems. They do not
replace the owner’s and/or driver’s
responsibility to maintain the vehicle’s
operating safety. Have all required
maintenance and safety checks performed on
the vehicle. Bring the vehicle to an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center to address the
malfunction and warning messages.
For information on air suspension, see “Air
suspension program” (Y page 159). X Press button V or U repeatedly until
For information on differential locks, see the Vehicle status message memory
“Differential locks” (Y page 121). menu appears in the multifunction display.
For information on the compass, see If conditions have occurred causing status
“Compass” (Y page 223). messages to be recorded, the number of
messages appears in the multifunction
display.
Distronic menu
Use the Distronic menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system.
The information shown in the multifunction
display depends on whether the Distronic
system is activated or deactivated.
Z
132 Control system
X Press button & or *. RVehicle submenu (Y page 138)

The stored messages will now be displayed RComfort submenu (Y page 139)
in the order in which they have occurred.
For malfunction and warning messages, Resetting to factory settings
see “Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display” (Y page 287). You can reset the settings of all submenus to
the factory settings.
i After you have scrolled through all
For safety reasons, the function Lamp
Controls in detail
recorded status messages, the first

Circuit Headlamp in the Lighting
recorded message appears again.
submenu cannot be reset while driving.
Should the vehicle’s system record any The following message appears in the
conditions while driving, the number of multifunction display:
messages will reappear in the multifunction Settings
display when the SmartKey in the starter Cannot be
switch is turned to position 0 or removed completely reset
from the starter switch. With KEYLESS-GO, to factory settings
the number of messages will reappear when when engine is running.
you turn off the engine by pressing the
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button and open the
driver’s door. the Settings menu appears in the
Except for high-priority messages, the vehicle
status message memory will be cleared when
you switch off the ignition.
Settings menu
Introduction
In the Settings menu there are two X Press the reset button in the instrument
functions: The function To reset, press cluster (Y page 124) for approximately
reset button for 3 seconds, with which 3 seconds.
you can reset all the settings to the original The request to press the reset button once
factory settings and a collection of submenus more to confirm appears in the
with which you can make individual settings multifunction display.
for your vehicle.
The following settings and submenus are
available in the Settings menu:
RResetting to factory settings
(Y page 132)
RSubmenus in the Settings menu
(Y page 133)
RInstrument cluster submenu X Press the reset button once more.
(Y page 133) The settings you have changed will not be
RTime/Date submenu (Y page 135) reset unless you confirm the action by
pressing the reset button a second time. After
RLighting submenu (Y page 136)

Control system 133
approximately 5 seconds, the Settings RSelecting language (Y page 134)

menu reappears in the multifunction display. RSelecting display (digital speedometer or
outside temperature) for status indicator
Submenus in the Settings menu (Y page 135)
Time/Date submenu
the Settings menu appears in the
RSetting the time (Y page 135)
Controls in detail
X Press button &. RSetting the date (Y page 135)
The collection of the submenus appears in
the multifunction display. There are more Lighting submenu
RSwitching daytime running lamp mode on
submenus than can be displayed
simultaneously. or off (USA only) (Y page 136)
RSwitching locator lighting on or off
(Y page 136)
RSetting ambient lighting (Y page 137)
RSwitching night security illumination
(Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on or
off (Y page 137)
RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off
X Press button X. on or off (Y page 138)
The selection marker moves to the next
submenu. Vehicle submenu
X Scroll down with button X, scroll up RSwitching automatic central locking on or
with button W. off (Y page 138)
X With the selection marker on the desired
Comfort submenu
submenu, use button & to access the
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
individual functions within that submenu.
X Once within the submenu, use button
(Y page 139)
& to move to the next function or button RActivating/deactivating seat belt
* to move to the previous function adjustment feature (Y page 139)
within that submenu. RSwitching fold-in function for exterior rear
X Use button W or X to change the view mirrors on or off (Y page 140)
settings of the respective function.
The following lists show what settings can be Instrument cluster submenu
changed within the various menus. Detailed
Access the Instrument Cluster submenu
instructions on making individual settings can
via the Settings menu. Use the
be found on the following pages.
Instrument Cluster submenu to change
Instrument cluster submenu the instrument cluster display settings.
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display
mode (Y page 134) (Canada only)
RSelecting digital speedometer display
mode (Y page 134)
Z
134 Control system
The following functions are available: X Move the selection marker with button
RSelecting speedometer/odometer display W or X to the Instrument
mode (Y page 134) (Canada only) Cluster submenu.
RSelecting digital speedometer display
mode (Y page 134) the message Display Unit Digital
Speedometer appears in the multifunction
RSelecting language (Y page 134) display.
RSelecting display (digital speedometer or The selection marker is on the current
Controls in detail
outside temperature) for status indicator setting.

(Y page 135)
Selecting speedometer/odometer
display mode (Canada only)
X Press button &.
X Press button W or X to set digital
X Move the selection marker with button
speedometer unit to Km or Miles.
W or X to the Instrument
Cluster submenu. Selecting language
X Press button & or * repeatedly until X Press button V or U repeatedly until
the message Display Unit the Settings menu appears in the
Speedometer/Odometer appears in the multifunction display.
multifunction display. X Press button &.
The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Cluster submenu.
the message Language appears in the
setting.
X Press button W or X to set

speedometer/odometer unit to Km or
Miles.
Selecting digital speedometer display

mode
X Press button W or X to select the
multifunction display. language to be used for the multifunction
display messages.
X Press button &.

Control system 135
Selecting display (digital speedometer or Setting the time

outside temperature) for status indicator This function is not available if your vehicle is
X Press button V or U repeatedly until equipped with the COMAND system and
the Settings menu appears in the navigation module.
multifunction display. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
X Press button &. the Settings menu appears in the
X Move the selection marker with button multifunction display.
X Press button &.
Controls in detail
Cluster submenu. X Move the selection marker with button
X Press button & or * repeatedly until W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
the message Status Line Display X Press button & or * repeatedly until
appears in the multifunction display. the message Clock Set Hour or Clock
The selection marker is on the current Set Minute(s) appears in the
setting. multifunction display.
setting.
X Press button W or X to select the

desired setting.
The selected display is then shown Example illustration for setting the hour
continuously in the status indicator (lower X Press button W or X to set the hours
display). or minute(s).
The other display now appears in the
Standard display menu (Y page 128). Setting the date
This function is not available if your vehicle is
Time/Date submenu equipped with the COMAND system and
navigation module.
Access the Time/Date submenu via the
Settings menu. Use the Time/Date
submenu to change the time and date display the Settings menu appears in the
settings. multifunction display.
X Press button &.
RSetting the time (Y page 135)
W or X to the Time/Date submenu.
RSetting the date (Y page 135) X Press button & or * repeatedly until
If your vehicle is equipped with the COMAND the message Date Set Month, Date Set
system and navigation module, see separate Day, or Date Set Year appears in the
COMAND system operating instructions for multifunction display.
information on how to set the time and date. The selection marker is on the current
setting.
Z
136 Control system
Example illustration for setting the month

X Press button W or X to switch the
Controls in detail
X Press button W or X to set the daytime running lamp mode On or Off.

month, day, or year. With daytime running lamp mode activated
and the exterior lamp switch in
Lighting submenu position $ or Ã, the daytime running
lamps are switched on when the engine is
Access the Lighting submenu via the running.
Settings menu. Use the Lighting submenu
In low ambient light conditions the following
to change the lamp and lighting settings on
lamps will come on additionally:
your vehicle.
RLow-beam headlamps
RSwitching RParking lamps
daytime running lamp mode on
or off (USA only) (Y page 136) RTail lamps
RSwitching locator lighting on or off RLicense plate lamps
(Y page 136) RSide marker lamps
RSetting ambient lighting (Y page 137)
For more information on the daytime running
RSwitching night security illumination on or lamp mode, see (Y page 99).
off (Y page 137) For safety reasons, changing the setting for
RSwitching interior lighting delayed shut-off the daytime running lamp mode is not
on or off (Y page 138) possible while the vehicle is in motion.
The following message appears in the
Switching daytime running lamp mode on multifunction display:
or off (USA only) Settings can only be made with
X Press button V or U repeatedly until engine off.
the Settings menu appears in the For safety reasons, resetting all the functions
multifunction display. of all submenus to the factory settings while
X Press button &. driving (Y page 132) will not deactivate the
X Move the selection marker with button daytime running lamp mode.
W or X to the Lighting submenu. Switching locator lighting on or off
X Press button & or * repeatedly until With the locator lighting feature activated, the
the message Daytime Running Lamps exterior lamp switch in position Ã and the
appears in the multifunction display. interior lighting in automatic mode, the
The selection marker is on the current following lamps will come on during darkness
setting. when the vehicle is unlocked using button
% on the SmartKey:

Control system 137
RParking lamps X Move the selection marker with button

RTail lamps W or X to the Lighting submenu.
RLicense plate lamps
the message Ambient Light Level
RSide marker lamps appears in the multifunction display.
RFront fog lamps The selection marker is on the current
setting.
The locator lighting goes out when the driver’s
Controls in detail
door is opened.
If you do not open the driver’s door after
unlocking the vehicle with the SmartKey, the
lamps will go out automatically after
approximately 40 seconds.
multifunction display. X Press button W or X to select the
X Press button &. desired brightness of the ambient lighting.
The setting 1 represents the darkest level
and setting 5 the brightest level. The
W or X to the Lighting submenu.
ambient light is switched off at setting 0.
the message Surround Lighting Switching night security illumination
Function appears in the multifunction (Headlamps delayed shut-off feature) on
display. or off
The selection marker is on the current Use this function to set whether you would
setting. like the exterior lamps to remain on for
15 seconds during darkness after exiting the
vehicle and closing all doors.
With the headlamps delayed shut-off feature
activated and the exterior lamp switch in
position Ã before the engine is turned off,
the following lamps will come on when the
engine is turned off:
X Press button W or X to switch the RParking lamps
locator lighting function On or Off. RTail lamps
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position RLicense plate lamps
Ã when exiting the vehicle.
RSide marker lamps
The locator lighting feature is activated.
RFront fog lamps
Setting ambient lighting
If, after turning off the engine, you do not
Use this function to adjust the brightness of open a door or do not close an opened door,
the ambient lighting. the lamps will automatically go out after
X Press button V or U repeatedly until 60 seconds.
X Press button &.
Z
138 Control system
X Press button V or U repeatedly until X Press button V or U repeatedly until

the Settings menu appears in the the Settings menu appears in the
multifunction display. multifunction display.
X Press button &. X Press button &.
X Move the selection marker with button X Move the selection marker with button
W or X to the Lighting submenu. W or X to the Lighting submenu.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until X Press button & or * repeatedly until
Controls in detail
the message Headlamp Delayed Shut- the message Interior Lighting

off appears in the multifunction display. Delayed Shut-off appears in the
The selection marker is on the current multifunction display.
setting. The selection marker is on the current
setting.

headlamps delayed shut-off feature On or X Press button W or X to switch the
Off. interior lighting delayed shut-off feature
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position On or Off.
Ã before turning off the engine.
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is Vehicle submenu
activated.
Access the Vehicle submenu via the
You can temporarily deactivate the Settings menu. Use the Vehicle submenu
headlamps delayed shut-off feature: to set the automatic central locking.
X Before exiting the vehicle, turn the Switching automatic central locking on or
SmartKey in the starter switch to position off
0.
Use this function to switch the automatic
X Then turn it to position 2 and back to
central locking on or off. With the automatic
position 0. central locking activated, the vehicle is
The headlamps delayed shut-off feature is locked centrally at a vehicle speed of
deactivated. It will reactivate as soon as approximately 9 mph (15 km/h).
you start the engine.
Switching interior lighting delayed shut- the Settings menu appears in the
off on or off multifunction display.
Use this function to set whether you would X Press button &.
like the interior lighting to remain on for
10 seconds during darkness after you have
removed the SmartKey from the starter
switch.

Control system 139
X Move the selection marker with button Do not leave children unattended in the
W or X to the Vehicle submenu. vehicle, or with access to an unlocked vehicle.
X Press button & or * repeatedly until Children could open the driver’s door and
the message Automatic Door Locking unintentionally activate the easy-entry/exit
appears in the multifunction display. feature, which could result in an accident
The selection marker is on the current and/or serious personal injury.
setting.
Controls in detail
X Press button &.
W or X to the Comfort submenu.
X Press button W or X to switch the the message Easy-entry Function

automatic central locking On or Off. appears in the multifunction display.
setting.
Comfort submenu
Access the Comfort submenu via the
Settings menu.
RActivating easy-entry/exit feature
(Y page 139)
RActivating/deactivating the seat belt
adjustment feature (Y page 139) X Press button W or X to activate (On)
RSwitching
or deactivate (Off) the easy-entry/exit
fold-in function for exterior rear
feature.
view mirrors on or off (Y page 140)
Activating/deactivating seat belt
Activating easy-entry/exit feature
adjustment feature
Use this function to activate and deactivate
Use this feature to set the seat belts to be
the easy-entry/exit feature (Y page 92).
adjusted automatically with the driver’s or
G Warning! front passenger seat belt fastened and the
You must make sure no one can become starter switch in position 2.
trapped or injured by the moving steering For more information on the seat belt
wheel when the easy-entry/exit feature is adjustment feature, see (Y page 51).
activated. X Press button V or U repeatedly until
To stop steering wheel movement do one of the Settings menu appears in the
the following: multifunction display.
RMove steering wheel adjustment stalk. X Press button &.
RPress one of the memory position buttons.

RPress memory button M.
Z
140 Control system

the message Belt Adjustment appears in
the multifunction display.
setting.
Controls in detail
function On or Off.
Vehicle configuration menu

Use the Vehicle configuration menu to
activate/deactivate the Distance warning
X Press button W or X to active (On) or function (Y page 140) or to set the DSR
deactivate (Off) the seat belt adjustment speed (Y page 141).
feature.
Distance warning function
Switching fold-in function for exterior
In vehicles equipped with Distronic, you can
rear view mirrors on or off
determine whether the distance warning
Use this function to set the exterior rear view function is to be enabled or disabled. With this
mirrors to be folded in automatically when function set to On, the system will alert you
you lock your vehicle. when recognizing a stationary obstacle or a
With this function set to On and the exterior slower vehicle moving in your vehicle’s path
rear view mirrors folded in using the button and the danger of a collision exists, even
on the door control panel (Y page 95), the when the Distronic is switched off.
exterior rear view mirrors will not fold out X Press button V or U repeatedly until
when you switch on the ignition. You will then
the vehicle configuration menu appears
have to fold out the exterior rear view mirrors
using the button on the door control panel
(Y page 95).
Make sure both exterior rear view mirrors are the message Distance Warning appears
folded out completely before driving off. in the multifunction display.
setting.
X Press button &.
the message Fold In Mirrors When
Locking appears in the multifunction X Press button W or X to switch the
display.
distance warning function On or Off.
setting.

Control system 141
Once DSR is switched on, you can adjust the

set speed using the cruise control lever
(Y page 157).
Trip computer menu
: Symbol for activated distance warning Use the Trip computer menu to call up
statistical data on your vehicle.
Controls in detail
function
The following information is available:
If the distance warning function is switched
RFuel consumption statistics since start
on you will see the symbol Ä in the
Standard display. When the distance warning (Y page 141)
function is switched off the symbol Ä will RFuel consumption statistics since last reset
not appear. (Y page 142)
RResetting fuel consumption statistics
DSR (Downhill Speed Regulation) (Y page 142)
programmed default speed
RDistance to empty (Y page 142)
Use this function to program the default RCurrent fuel consumption (Y page 142)
speed the DSR is set to when it is activated.
You can program the default speed between When you enter the Trip computer menu,
3 - 10 mph (Canada: 4- 18 km/h). The set you will always see the fuel consumption
value is increased in 1 mph (Canada: statistics since start first.
2 km/h) increments.
Fuel consumption statistics since start
the Vehicle configuration menu appears X Press button U or V repeatedly until
in the multifunction display. the message From Start appears in the
X Press button & or * repeatedly until multifunction display.
the message DSR Speed appears in the
setting.
: Distance driven since start

; Time elapsed since start
= Average speed since start
? Average fuel consumption since start
X Press button W or X repeatedly until All statistics stored since the last engine start
the desired speed is shown in the will be reset approximately 4 hours after the
multifunction display. SmartKey in the starter switch is turned to
When DSR is switched on, DSR will use the position 0 or removed from the starter switch.
programmed default speed to regulate the
Resetting will not occur if you turn the
vehicle’s speed.
SmartKey back to position 1 or 2 within this
time period.
Z
142 Control system
Fuel consumption statistics since last Distance to empty

reset
X Press button U or V repeatedly until
X Press button U or V repeatedly until the message From Start appears in the
the message From Start appears in the multifunction display.
multifunction display. X Press button & or * repeatedly until
X Press button & or * repeatedly until the message Range: appears in the
the message From Reset appears in the multifunction display.
Controls in detail
multifunction display. The calculated remaining driving range

based on the current fuel tank level
appears in the multifunction display.
If only very little fuel is left in the tank, a
vehicle at the fuel pump C appears
instead of the remaining driving range.
: Distance driven since last reset

; Time elapsed since last reset
= Average speed since last reset
? Average fuel consumption since last reset
Resetting fuel consumption statistics Current fuel consumption

X Press button U or V repeatedly until X Press button U or V repeatedly until
the message From Start appears in the
the message From Start appears in the
the reading that you want to reset appears
the message Consumption appears in the
X Press and hold the reset button in the
The current fuel consumption appears in
instrument cluster until the respective the multifunction display.
values are reset to 0.
The fuel consumption statistics reset
automatically to 0 after 99 999 miles or
9 999 hours, whichever occurs first.
Telephone menu
G Warning!
A driver’s attention to the road must always
be his/her primary focus when driving. For

Control system 143
your safety and the safety of others, we

recommend that you pull over to a safe
location and stop before placing or taking a
telephone call. If you choose to use the
telephone while driving, please use the hands-
free device and only use the telephone when
weather, road and traffic conditions permit.
Some jurisdictions prohibit the driver from X Press button 6.
Controls in detail
using a mobile phone while driving a vehicle. You have answered the call.
Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
(approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is Ending a call or rejecting an incoming
covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately call
14 m) every second.
X Press button ~.
You can connect your telephone to the
COMAND system via Bluetooth®, see Dialing a number from the phone book
instructions. When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
X Switch on the COMAND system.
you may select and dial a number from the
phone book at any time.
Refer to separate COMAND system
operating instructions.
the message TEL appears in the
One of the following messages will appear the desired name appears in the
in the multifunction display: multifunction display.
RNo Service: No network is available. If you press and hold button & or
* for longer than 1 second, the system
RBluetooth Ready: The telephone has
scrolls rapidly through the list of names
not been connected to the COMAND
until you release the button again.
system via Bluetooth® yet. The stored names are displayed in
X Connect the telephone to the alphabetical order.
COMAND system via Bluetooth®.
RReady or name of the network provider
(if available): The telephone has found a
network and is ready for use. You can
operate it using the control system.
Answering a call : Selected name from the phone book

When your telephone is ready to receive calls,
X Press button 6.
you can answer a call at any time. In the
multifunction display you will then see the The control system dials the selected
following message, or if available, the caller phone number.
ID (number or name):
Z
144 Driving systems
If the connection is successful and this RDistance warning function (only available
feature is supported by your network with Distronic)
provider, the name of the party (if stored in RHill-start assist system
your phone book) you are calling will
RDownhill Speed Regulation (DSR)
appear in the multifunction display.
The control system stores the dialed ROff-roaddriving program (vehicles without
number in the redial memory. enhanced off-road package)
or RAir suspension program (Adaptive
Controls in detail
X Press button ~ if you do not want to Damping System (ADS) and vehicle level
make the call. control)
RAll-wheel drive (4MATIC)
RParktronic system
RRear view camera
Vehicles with enhanced off-road package:
For information on LOW RANGE mode, see
“LOW RANGE mode” (Y page 120) and for
information on differential locks, see
Redialing “Differential locks” (Y page 121).
The control system stores the most recently The driving safety systems ABS, BAS, EBP,
dialed phone numbers. This eliminates the ESP® and 4-ETS are described in the “Safety
need to search through your entire phone and security” section (Y page 61).
book.
Cruise control
multifunction display. The cruise control maintains the speed you
X Press button 6.
set for your vehicle automatically.
The first number in the redial memory The use of the cruise control is recommended
appears in the multifunction display. for driving at a constant speed for extended
periods of time.
the desired number or name appears in the The currently set speed or last set speed
multifunction display. (“Resume” function) appears in the status
indicator of the multifunction display:
X Press button 6.
The control system dials the selected RUSA only: e.g. Cruise 55 Miles
phone number. RCanada only: e.g. ¯ 90 Km/h
i The cruise control should not be activated
Driving systems during off-road driving.
Introduction G Warning!
The cruise control is a convenience system
This section describes the following driving designed to assist the driver during vehicle
systems of your vehicle: operation. The driver is and must always
RCruise control
RDistronic

Driving systems 145
remain responsible for the vehicle’s speed

and for safe brake operation.
Only use the cruise control if the road, traffic,
and weather conditions make it advisable to
travel at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on winding roads or in heavy
traffic because conditions do not allow safe
Controls in detail
driving at a constant speed.
RThe use of the cruise control can be
dangerous on slippery roads. Rapid : Setting current or higher speed
changes in tire traction can result in wheel ; Setting current or lower speed
spin and loss of control. = Canceling the cruise control
RDeactivate the cruise control when driving ? Activating the cruise control or resuming
in fog. to last set speed
The “Resume” function should only be
operated if the driver is fully aware of the Activating cruise control
previously set speed and wishes to resume You can activate the cruise control at a
this particular preset speed. vehicle speed above 20 mph (30 km/h).
G Warning! You cannot activate the cruise control
When the cruise control is braking, the brake Rwhen you brake
pedal is retracted (i.e. depressed Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake
automatically). The pedals’ range of motion
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park
must not be impeded by any obstacles:
position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
RDo not place any objects in the footwell. position N
RMake sure that the floormats and carpets Rthe ESP® is switched off or has switched off
are securely in place. due to a malfunction
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
The vehicle speed displayed in the
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped. speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
You could otherwise cause an accident and setting for the cruise control system.
injure yourself and/or others.
Setting current speed
X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
speed.
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
direction of arrow : or press in direction
of arrow ;.
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
pedal.
i On uphill grades, the cruise control may
not be able to maintain the set speed. Once
Z
146 Driving systems
the grade eases, the set speed will be Changing the set speed
resumed.
On downhill grades, the cruise control
G Warning!
maintains the set speed by braking with the Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
vehicle’s brake system. In addition, on until the vehicle has made the necessary
longer downhill grades the automatic adjustments.
transmission will downshift automatically. Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
a value that the prevailing road conditions and
Controls in detail
Canceling cruise control legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden

and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
X Depress the brake pedal. of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
or or serious injury to you and others.
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
You can increase or decrease the set speed
direction of arrow =.
in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
The last set speed is stored for later use.
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
The last stored speed is deleted from memory
When you use the cruise control lever to
when the engine is turned off.
decelerate, the brake system will brake the
The cruise control switches off automatically vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking
when you depress the brake pedal or you power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently.
engage the parking brake.
The cruise control switches off automatically Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada:
and an acoustic warning will sound when 1 km/h) increments
Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph i The set speed value is increased or
(30 km/h) decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
Rthe ESP® is in operation
cruise control lever up or down to the
Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP® resistance point.
switch
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a lever up to the resistance point in direction
malfunction of arrow :.
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
neutral position N while driving control lever down to the resistance point
Observe additional messages in the in direction of arrow ;.
multifunction display that may appear. X Release the cruise control lever.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not The new speed is set and the vehicle will
deactivate the cruise control. After a brief accelerate or decelerate.
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the cruise
control will resume the last set speed. Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada:
10 km/h) increments
i The set speed value is increased or
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h)
increments each time you lift or press the
cruise control lever up or down past the
resistance point.

Driving systems 147
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control follow that vehicle at your preset following
lever up past the resistance point in distance.
direction of arrow :. RIfthere is no vehicle directly ahead of you,
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise the Distronic will function in the same way
control lever down past the resistance as standard cruise control (Y page 144).
point in direction of arrow ;.
X Release the cruise control lever.
G Warning!
The new speed is set and the vehicle will The Distronic requires familiarity with its
Controls in detail
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that operational characteristics. We strongly
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle recommend that you review the following
has reached the set speed. information carefully before operating the
system.
Setting stored speed (Resume G Warning!
function)
When the Distronic is braking, the brake pedal
G Warning! is retracted (i.e. depressed automatically).
The pedals’ range of motion must not be
The set speed stored in memory should only
impeded by any obstacles:
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
legal speed limits permit. Possible RDo not place any objects in the footwell.
acceleration or deceleration differences RMake sure that the floormats and carpets
arising from returning to the preset speed are securely in place.
could cause an accident and/or serious injury
RDo not rest your foot underneath the brake
to you and others.
pedal, as it could otherwise be trapped.
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in You could otherwise cause an accident and
direction of arrow ?. injure yourself and/or others.
If no speed is stored, the current speed is
set and stored. G Warning!
X Remove your foot from the accelerator The Distronic is a convenience system. Its
pedal. speed adjustment reduction capability is
The last stored speed is deleted from memory intended to make cruise control more
when the engine is turned off. effective and usable when traffic speeds vary.
It is not however, intended to, nor does it,
replace the need for extreme care.
Distronic The responsibility for the vehicle’s speed,
distance to the preceding vehicle and, most
Safety notes importantly, brake operation to ensure a safe
When activated, the Distronic adaptive cruise stopping distance, always remains with the
control increases the driving convenience driver.
afforded by the cruise control while traveling The Distronic cannot take street and traffic
on expressways and other major roadways. conditions into account. Complex driving
RIf the Distronic distance sensor detects a situations are not always fully recognized by
slower moving vehicle directly ahead, your the Distronic. This could result in wrong or
vehicle speed will be reduced so that you missing distance warnings.
Z
148 Driving systems
G Warning! or fog, for example. The distance control

The Distronic adaptive cruise control is not a system functionality could be impaired.
substitute for active driving involvement. It Always pay attention to surrounding traffic
does not react to pedestrians or on stationary conditions even while the Distronic is
objects, nor does it recognize or predict the switched on. Otherwise, you may not be able
lane curvature or the movement of preceding to recognize dangerous situations until it is
vehicles. too late. This could cause an accident in which
The Distronic can only apply 20% of the you and/or others could be injured.
Controls in detail
maximum braking power of the vehicle.

It is the driver’s responsibility at all times to G Warning!
be attentive to the road, weather and traffic The “Resume” function should only be
conditions. Additionally, the driver must operated if the driver is fully aware of the
provide the steering, braking and other driving previously set speed and wishes to resume
inputs necessary to remain in control of the this particular preset speed.
vehicle.
G Warning!
High-frequency sources such as toll stations,
speed measuring systems etc. can cause the Close attention to road and traffic conditions
Distronic system to malfunction. is imperative at all times, regardless of
whether or not the Distronic is activated.
G Warning! Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on
The Distronic cannot take road and traffic winding roads or in heavy traffic because
conditions into account. Only use the conditions do not allow safe driving at a
Distronic if the road, weather and traffic constant speed.
conditions make it advisable to travel at a The Distronic will not react to stationary
constant speed. objects in the roadway (e.g. a stopped vehicle
in a traffic jam or a disabled vehicle). The
G Warning! Distronic will also not respond to oncoming
Use of the Distronic can be dangerous on vehicles.
slippery roads. Rapid changes in tire traction Switch off the Distronic:
can result in wheel spin and loss of control.
Rwhen changing from the left to the right
The Distronic does not function in adverse lane if vehicles are moving more slowly in
sight and distance conditions. Do not use the the left lane
Distronic during conditions of fog, heavy rain,
Rwhen entering a turn lane or highway off
snow or sleet.
ramp
G Warning! Rin complex driving situations, such as in
The Distronic cannot take weather conditions highway construction zones
into account. Switch off the Distronic or do
In these situations, the Distronic will continue
not switch it on if:
to maintain the set speed unless deactivated.
Rroads are slippery or covered with snow or The Distronic is designed and intended only
ice. The wheels could lose traction while to maintain a set speed and keep a set
braking or accelerating, and the vehicle distance from moving objects in front of it.
could skid.
Rthe Distronic system sensor cover is dirty i USA only:
or visibility is diminished due to snow, rain

Driving systems 149
This device has been approved by the FCC The vehicle speed displayed on the
as a “Vehicular Radar System”. The radar speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
sensor is intended for use in an automotive setting on the Distronic system.
radar system only. Removal, tampering, or
altering of the device will void any
warranties, and is not permitted by the
FCC. Do not tamper with, alter, or use in
any non-approved way.
Controls in detail
i Canada only:
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to When the Distronic detects a vehicle directly
the following two conditions: ahead, the cruise control speed
1. This device may not cause interference, segments ; appear in the speedometer.
and These segments represent the difference
between the set speed of your vehicle : and
the speed of the preceding vehicle =.
interference that may cause undesired If the Distronic calculates that there is a
operation of the device. danger of collision, the distance warning lamp
· in the instrument cluster comes on and
Removal, tampering, or altering of the an intermittent warning sounds.
device will void any warranties, and is not
X Immediately apply the brakes to avoid a
permitted. Do not tamper with, alter, or use
in any non-approved way. collision.
Under no circumstances should the driver
await the intermittent warning sound
before braking.
The intermittent warning sound ceases and
Distronic displays in the speedometer the distance warning lamp · goes out
when the necessary distance to the vehicle
ahead is established again.
G Warning!
An intermittent warning sounds and the
distance warning lamp · in the instrument
cluster is illuminated if the Distronic system
calculates that the distance to the vehicle
ahead and your vehicle’s current speed
indicate that the Distronic will not be capable
of slowing the vehicle sufficiently to maintain
the preset following distance, which creates
When the Distronic is activated, one or two a danger of a collision.
cruise control speed segments come on
around set speed :.
Z
150 Driving systems
Immediately brake the vehicle to increase X Press button V or U repeatedly until

your distance to the preceding vehicle. The one of the following two displays appears
warning sound is intended as a final caution in the multifunction display.
in which you should intercede with your own
braking inputs to avoid a potentially Distronic deactivated
dangerous situation. Do not wait for the
operation of the warning signal to intercede When the Distronic is deactivated, you will
with your own braking. This will result in see the standard Distronic display in the
Controls in detail
potentially dangerous emergency braking multifunction display.

which will not always result in an impact being
avoided.
Tailgating increases the risk of an accident.
G Warning!
The Distronic brakes your vehicle with a
maximum deceleration of 6.5 ft/s2 (2 m/s2).
This corresponds to approximately 20% of the : Preceding vehicle, if detected
maximum deceleration of your vehicle. ; Actual distance to the preceding vehicle
You must also apply the brakes yourself to = Preset distance threshold to the
avoid a collision. The Distronic brakes the preceding vehicle
vehicle in an effort to restore the preset ? Your vehicle
distance or to maintain the set speed. The
brake pedal is automatically applied as this Distronic activated
happens which results in the brake pedal
moving When the Distronic is activated :, you will
Keep driver’s foot area clear at all times,
see the set speed ; in the multifunction
including the area under the brake pedal. display for approximately 5 seconds. The
Objects stored in this area may impair pedal following display appears in the multifunction
movement which could interfere with the display.
braking ability of the Distronic system.
Do not place your foot under the brake pedal
– your foot could become caught.
Distronic menu in the control system

Use the DISTRONIC menu to display the
current settings for your Distronic system. After approximately 5 seconds the currently
The information shown in the multifunction set speed ; appears in the status indicator
display depends on whether the Distronic of the multifunction display:
system and/or the distance warning function RUSA only: DTR XXX Miles
are activated or deactivated.
RCanada only: DTR XXX km/h
i To activate or deactivate the Distronic
system, see (Y page 151) or see
Cruise control lever
(Y page 152).
To activate or deactivate the Distance The Distronic system is operated by means of
warning function, see (Y page 140). the cruise control lever.

Driving systems 151
Rwhen the automatic transmission is in park

position P, reverse gear R, or neutral
position N
Rwhen the ESP® is switched off or has
switched off due to a malfunction
The vehicle speed displayed on the
speedometer can briefly vary from the speed
Controls in detail
setting on the Distronic system.
Setting the current speed

: Setting current or higher speed
X Accelerate or decelerate to the desired
; Setting current or lower speed
speed.
= Deactivating the Distronic
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever in
? Activating the Distronic or resuming to direction of arrow : or depress in
the last set speed direction of arrow ; (Y page 151).
X Remove your foot from the accelerator
Activating Distronic
pedal.
You can activate the Distronic when the
vehicle speed is between 20 mph (30 km/h) i If you do not take your foot off of the
and 110 mph (180 km/h). accelerator pedal and continue to
accelerate past the set speed, the following
When the Distronic is activated, one or two
message will appear in the multifunction
cruise control speed segments around the set
display:
speed in the speedometer dial are
illuminated. The multifunction display will DISTRONIC Override
show a message such as The distance to a slower moving vehicle in
DISTRONIC 55 MPH front of you will not be set. Your vehicle
(Canada: DISTRONIC 90 km/h). speed will then be determined only by the
After approximately 5 seconds the currently accelerator pedal position.
set speed appears in the status indicator of
the multifunction display: Changing the set speed
RUSA only: e.g. DTR 55 Miles G Warning!
RCanada only: e.g. DTR 90 km/h Keep in mind that it may take a brief moment
until the vehicle has made the necessary
If the Distronic is not activated after the
adjustments.
cruise control lever is pulled in direction of
arrow ? (Y page 150), you will see the Increase or decrease the set vehicle speed to
message DISTRONIC Off in the a value that the prevailing road conditions and
multifunction display. legal speed limits permit. Otherwise, sudden
and unexpected acceleration or deceleration
In the following cases you cannot activate the
of the vehicle could cause an accident and/
Distronic:
or serious injury to you and others.
Rup to 2 minutes after starting the engine
You can increase or decrease the set speed
Rwhen you brake in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments or in
Rwhen you have engaged the parking brake 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments.
Z
152 Driving systems
When you use the cruise control lever to Setting stored speed (Resume function)
decelerate, the brake system will brake the
vehicle automatically if the engine’s braking G Warning!
power does not brake the vehicle sufficiently. The set speed stored in memory should only
be set again if prevailing road conditions and
Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: legal speed limits permit. Possible
1 km/h) increments acceleration or deceleration differences
i The set speed value is increased or arising from returning to the preset speed
Controls in detail
decreased in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) could cause an accident and/or serious injury
increments each time you lift or press the to you and others.
cruise control lever up or down to the
X Briefly pull the cruise control lever in
resistance point.
direction of arrow ? (Y page 151).
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control If no speed is stored, the current speed is
lever up to the resistance point in direction set and stored.
of arrow : (Y page 150). X Remove your foot from the accelerator
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise pedal.
control lever down to the resistance point
in direction of arrow ; (Y page 150). Deactivating Distronic
X Depress the brake pedal.
The new speed is set and the vehicle will
accelerate or decelerate. or
X Briefly push the cruise control lever in
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: direction of arrow = (Y page 151).
10 km/h) increments The cruise control speed segments in the
i The set speed value is increased or speedometer dial will go out and the
decreased in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) following message appears briefly in the
increments each time you lift or press the multifunction display: DISTRONIC Off
cruise control lever up or down past the The last set speed is stored for later use.
resistance point. The last stored speed is deleted from memory
when the engine is turned off.
X Increasing: Briefly lift the cruise control
The Distronic switches off automatically
lever up past the resistance point in
when you depress the brake pedal or you
direction of arrow : (Y page 150).
engage the parking brake. In this case, the
X Decreasing: Briefly press the cruise
cruise control speed segments in the
control lever down past the resistance speedometer dial will go out.
point in direction of arrow ;
The Distronic also switches off automatically
(Y page 150). when
Rthe vehicle speed falls below 20 mph
accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that (30 km/h)
it may take a brief moment until the vehicle Rthe ESP® is in operation
has reached the set speed. Rthe ESP® is switched off with the ESP®
switch

Driving systems 153
Rthe ESP® has switched off due to a

malfunction
Ryou shift the automatic transmission into
neutral position N while driving
The cruise control speed segments in the
speedometer dial goes out and an acoustic
warning will sound. Observe additional
Controls in detail
messages in the multifunction display that
may appear.
G Warning!
X Increasing distance: Turn distance
Distronic switches off and releases the brakes
when the vehicle decelerates below the setting switch : in direction of arrow =.
minimum speed of 20 mph (30 km/h) by Increasing the distance setting tells
operation of the system. At that time the Distronic to maintain a greater following
driver must apply the brakes in order to distance to the preceding vehicle.
reduce vehicle speed further or bring it to a X Decreasing distance: Turn distance
stop.
setting switch : in direction of arrow ;.
Depressing the accelerator pedal does not Decreasing the distance setting tells
deactivate the Distronic. After a brief Distronic to maintain a shorter following
acceleration (e.g. for passing), the Distronic distance to the preceding vehicle.
will resume the last set speed.
Driving with Distronic
Setting the following distance in
Distronic This section describes a number of driving
situations where special precaution is
You can set the specified following distance required on the part of the driver. Be prepared
for Distronic by varying the time setting to brake in such situations. Braking will
between 1.0 and 2.0 seconds. Using this time deactivate the Distronic system.
setting and the current speed of your vehicle,
Distronic calculates and sets the required G Warning!
following distance to the preceding vehicle. The Distronic works to maintain the speed
The set distance will be shown in the selected by the driver unless a moving
multifunction display. obstacle proceeding directly ahead of it in the
same travel direction is detected (e.g.
G Warning! following another vehicle ahead of you at your
It is up to the driver to exercise discretion to set distance).
select the appropriate setting given road This means that:
conditions, traffic, driver’s preferred driving
RYour vehicle can pass another vehicle after
style and applicable laws and driving
you have changed lanes.
recommendations for safe following distance.
RWhile in a sharp turn or if the preceding
vehicle is in a sharp turn, the Distronic
could lose sight of the preceding vehicle.
Your vehicle could then accelerate to the
previously selected speed.
Z
154 Driving systems
The Distronic regulates only the distance Offset driving

between your vehicle and those directly
ahead of it, but does not register stationary
objects in the road, e.g.:
Ra stopped vehicle in a traffic jam
Ra disabled vehicle
Ran oncoming vehicle
Controls in detail
The driver must always be alert, observe all

traffic and intercede as required by means of
steering or braking the vehicle.
G Warning! A vehicle traveling in your lane but offset from

The Distronic should not be used in snowy or your direct line of travel may not be detected
icy road conditions. by the Distronic. There will be insufficient
distance to the preceding vehicle.
The most likely cause for a malfunctioning
system is a dirty Distronic system sensor Lane changing
cover (located in the hood grille), especially
at times of snow and ice or heavy rain.
In such a case, the Distronic will switch off,
and the message DISTRONIC Currently
Unavailable – See Operator’s Manual
For cleaning and care of the Distronic system
sensor cover, see (Y page 278).
i If the message DISTRONIC Available
Again appears during driving, the dirt (e.g.
slush) has dissolved; the Distronic works The Distronic has not yet detected the vehicle
again, if you reactivate it (Y page 151). changing lanes. There will be insufficient
distance to the lane-changing vehicle.
Turns and bends
Narrow vehicles
In turns or bends, the Distronic may not

detect a moving vehicle in front, or it may Because of their narrow profile, the vehicles
detect one too soon. This may cause your traveling near the outer edges of the lane
vehicle to brake late or unexpectedly.

Driving systems 155
have not yet been detected by the Distronic. X Activating/deactivating: Activate or

There will be insufficient distance to the deactivate the distance warning function in
preceding vehicles. the control system (Y page 140).
When activated, the distance warning
Distance warning function function indicator Ä appears in the
This function warns you at a vehicle speed of
above approximately 20 mph (30 km/h) in
the following cases:
Controls in detail
Hill-start assist system
RAt the current speed, the distance between
your vehicle and the preceding vehicle is G Warning!
too low for several seconds. The distance The hill-start assist system is not designed to
warning lamp · in the instrument function as a parking brake. It does not
cluster comes on. prevent the vehicle from moving when parked
RYou are gaining on a preceding vehicle on an incline.
rapidly. An intermittent warning sounds Always engage the parking brake in addition
and the distance warning lamp · in the to shifting the automatic transmission into
instrument cluster comes on. park position P.
If these warnings are issued, you must apply On uphill grades, the hill-start assist system
the brakes to maintain a safe distance and maintains the pressure in the brake system
avoid a collision with the preceding vehicle. for approximately 1 second after you have
When depressing the brake pedal, the released the brake pedal. Therefore, you can
warning sound ceases. The warning sound start off smoothly without the vehicle moving
will also cease when the distance to the immediately after releasing the brake pedal.
preceding vehicle is sufficient again without X Depress the brake pedal.
applying the brakes. In this case, the distance X Shift the automatic transmission into drive
warning lamp · will also go out. position D or reverse gear R.
G Warning! X Release the brake pedal.
If the distance warning lamp · in the X Carefully depress the accelerator pedal.
instrument cluster comes on while driving The hill-start assist system is inactive
and/or an intermittent warning sounds, Rwhen starting off on a level road or downhill
immediate attention on the part of the driver
grades
is required. As required by the traffic
situation, apply the brakes and navigate Rwith the automatic transmission in neutral
around a possible obstacle. However, do not position N
drive by relying on the distance warning Rwith the parking brake engaged
function, as this will result in an emergency
braking application. This will not always
Rif the ESP® has switched off due to a
enable you to avoid a collision, especially malfunction
when traveling on varying road surface
conditions and with varying driver reaction.
Complex driving situations are not always Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR)
fully recognized by the distance warning For information on off-road driving, see “Off-
function. This could result in wrong or missing road driving” (Y page 262).
distance warnings.
Z
156 Driving systems
The DSR is an aid for driving downhill. The system (Y page 141). The next time the
DSR regulates your vehicle’s speed when DSR is switched on, the DSR will use the
driving downhill to the value set in the control newly programmed default speed to
system (Y page 141). The steeper the regulate the vehicle’s speed.
downhill gradient is, the greater the brake Once the DSR is switched on, you can
application. On flat road surfaces, the DSR adjust the set speed using the cruise
brakes only slightly or not at all. control lever (Y page 145). Keep in mind
G Warning! that adjusting the set speed using the
Controls in detail
cruise control lever with the DSR switched

The Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is a
on will not change the programmed default
convenience system designed to assist the
speed. If the DSR is switched off and then
driver during vehicle operation. The system
switched on again, the DSR will use the
must be set to be appropriate for the
programmed default speed.
topographical and weather conditions
encountered which can change quickly. The Depending on the road surface and level of
driver is and must remain at all times downhill grade, the DSR may not be able to
responsible for the vehicle speed and for safe maintain the set speed. To maintain the set
brake operation. speed, apply the brakes if necessary.
Depending on the programmed speed, actual
vehicle speed and gradient, switching on the
Switching the DSR on/off
DSR while driving can cause the vehicle to
slow down rapidly and you may hear a sound
which is caused by the activation of the
vehicle’s brake system through the DSR.
Sudden and unexpected deceleration can
result in loss of vehicle control, causing an
accident and/or serious personal injury to
you and others. Do not switch on the DSR in
a circumstance where rapid deceleration
could result in a loss of vehicle control.
The DSR regulates the vehicle’s speed in Vehicles without enhanced off-road package
automatic transmission positions D, or R.
i In addition, make use of the engine’s
braking effect by shifting the automatic
transmission into a lower gear.
You can drive slower or faster than the set
speed at any time by braking the vehicle or
depressing the accelerator pedal.
i Whenever the DSR is switched on, the
DSR will use the programmed default
speed to regulate the vehicle’s speed. The
default speed programmed at the factory is Vehicles with enhanced off-road package
4 mph (Canada: 6 km/h). The default speed
can be reprogrammed using the control

Driving systems 157
G Warning! Switching off the DSR

If the accelerator pedal is depressed while the X Press DSR switch :.
Downhill Speed Regulation (DSR) is activated, Indicator lamp ; goes out.
the vehicle can drive faster than the The message DSR Off appears in the
programmed set speed. You should therefore multifunction display.
drive downhill with particular caution as it
could otherwise lead to an accident and/or i At a speed above approximately 21 mph
serious injury to you or others. Keep in mind (Canada approximately: 35 km/h), the DSR
Controls in detail
that as soon as you remove your foot from the is automatically switched off. The message
accelerator pedal with the DSR switched on, DSR Off appears in the multifunction
the DSR will start regulating the vehicle’s display and an acoustic signal sounds. For
speed including use of brakes if required. information on how to switch the DSR on
Depending on the programmed set speed, again, see “Switching on the DSR”
actual vehicle speed and gradient, the DSR (Y page 157).
can cause the vehicle to slow down rapidly.
Sudden and unexpected deceleration can Adjusting the DSR speed
result in loss of vehicle control, causing an
With the DSR switched on (Y page 157), the
accident and/or serious personal injury to
speed setting can be changed using the
you and others.
cruise control lever.
Switching on the DSR
The DSR can only be switched on if the vehicle
speed is below 20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h).
X Press DSR switch :.
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
The message DSR and the set speed appear
Cruise control lever

You can change the set speed between
3-10 mph (Canada: 4-18 km/h).
You can increase or reduce the set speed in
i If the DSR is switched on at a speed above two ways.
20 mph (Canada: 30 km/h), the message Adjustment in 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h)
DSR Max. Speed 20 MPH (Canada: increments
30 km/h) appears in the multifunction
display. i The set value is increased or decreased in
1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h) increments each
For information on how to program the set time you lift or depress the cruise control
speed while driving, see “Adjusting the DSR lever to the resistance point.
speed” (Y page 157).
Z
158 Driving systems
Increase set speed: Each time the set speed is changed, DSR
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever up to the will appear in the multifunction display and
resistance point in direction of arrow :. the changed set speed is shown.
The vehicle speed increases in increments accelerate or decelerate. Keep in mind that
of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). it may take a brief moment until the vehicle
has reached the new set speed.
Reduce set speed: The set speed is canceled when the DSR is
Controls in detail
X Briefly press the cruise control lever down switched off. If the DSR is switched on again,
to the resistance point in direction of the DSR will use the programmed default
arrow ;. speed (Y page 141).
The vehicle speed decreases in increments
of 1 mph (Canada: 1 km/h). Off-road driving program (Vehicles
without enhanced off-road package)
Each time the set speed is changed, DSR
will appear in the multifunction display and The off-road driving program is designed to
the changed set speed is shown. assist the driver when driving off-road in
The set speed is canceled when the DSR is terrain and crossing water. The off-road
switched off. If the DSR is switched on again, driving program adjusts the engine power and
the DSR will use the programmed default shifting of the automatic transmission to be
speed (Y page 141). more suitable for the off-road use of the
vehicle. In addition, the ABS, ESP®, and 4-ETS
Adjustment in 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) designed for off-road use are automatically
increments activated.
i The set value is increased or decreased in In the following situations you should switch
5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h) increments each to the off-road driving program:
time you lift or depress the cruise control Rduring off-road driving
lever past the resistance point.
Rwhen crossing water (Y page 266)
Increase set speed: Rwhen towing up or down on steep gradients
X Briefly lift the cruise control lever up past
the resistance point in direction of
arrow :.
The vehicle speed increases in increments
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
Reduce set speed:
X Briefly press the cruise control lever down
past the resistance point in direction of
arrow ;.
X Switching on: Press switch :.
The vehicle speed decreases in increments
Indicator lamp ; comes on. The symbol
of 5 mph (Canada: 10 km/h).
Ç appears in the lower multifunction
display.

Driving systems 159
X Switching off: Press switch : again.
Controls in detail
Indicator lamp ; goes out. The symbol
Ç disappears.
Vehicles without enhanced off-road package
Air suspension program

The system lets you select the chassis and
suspension setup. The chassis and
suspension setup adjusts the damping
behavior and the ride height for your vehicle.
The system consists of two components. The
Adaptive Damping System (ADS)
(Y page 159) and the vehicle level control
(Y page 159).
Vehicles with enhanced off-road package

Adaptive Damping System (ADS) The following settings are available:
The Adaptive Damping System (ADS) is RAUTO (for normal driving situations)
controlled electronically and operates Indicator lamps ; and = are off.
continuously. It adjusts the damping RSPORT (for sporty driving)
characteristics to the current operating and
Indicator lamp ; comes on.
driving conditions. The damping is adjusted
individually for each wheel. Driving safety and With the ADS SPORT setting, the vehicle is
tire comfort are increased. lowered approximately 0.6 in (15 mm).
The fine tuning of the damping is dependent RCOMF (for comfort driving)
on: Indicator lamp = comes on.
Ryour driving style X Start the engine.
Rroad surface conditions X Press ADS switch : repeatedly until the
Ryour personal settings desired suspension tuning is reached.

The setting remains stored when you turn off
the engine.
Vehicle level control

Your vehicle automatically adjusts its ride
height to increase vehicle safety and to
reduce fuel consumption.
Z
160 Driving systems
Changes to the vehicle level should be made Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle
while the vehicle is moving. The vehicle will level is as low as possible. With higher ride
then reach the set level as fast as possible. height the ESP® may activate earlier in certain
When you park the vehicle and the ambient situations.
temperature changes, the vehicle level may Adapt your speed and driving to possible
change visibly. When the temperature drops, changed driving behavior of the vehicle after
the vehicle lowers. When the temperature changing the vehicle level. The ESP® cannot
rises, the vehicle raises. prevent accidents, including those resulting
Controls in detail
The vehicle automatically regulates its ride from excessive speed. The ESP® cannot
height based on the set vehicle height and the prevent the natural laws of physics from
current speed: acting on the vehicle.
RAs your driving speed increases, the vehicle
is lowered by increments until it reaches ! Keep in mind that in rough or uneven
highspeed level. terrain, adjusting the vehicle to a lower
RVehicles with ADS: If you are driving with level may cause the vehicle underbody to
the ADS setting COMF or AUTO, the come in contact with the ground and result
vehicle is raised back to highway level as in damage to the vehicle underbody.
your driving speed decreases. Always make sure the vehicle has sufficient
ground clearance before adjusting it to a
RVehicles with ADS: You can select the lower level.
highspeed level via the ADS setting
SPORT. In ADS SPORT, the vehicle is ! Before jacking up the vehicle with
lowered directly to highspeed level as your equipment that lifts one or more of the
driving speed increases. wheels completely off of the ground,
The vehicle begins adjusting to the set vehicle remove the SmartKey from the starter
level as soon as the doors or tailgate are switch.
unlocked or opened or closed with the vehicle For information on off-road driving, see “Off-
unlocked. road driving” (Y page 262).
In order to operate the vehicle level control
switch (Y page 160) or (Y page 162), Vehicles without enhanced off-road
however, the engine must be running. package
G Warning!
Make sure no one is near the wheel housing
or under the vehicle when you lower the
vehicle while it is standing still. Limbs could
become wedged into or under the vehicle.
For safety reasons, the vehicle can only be
lowered with all doors and the tailgate closed.
Lowering is interrupted if a door or the tailgate
is opened and will continue after the door is
closed again.
G Warning!
Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
level, the center of gravity also rises.

Driving systems 161
Basic settings the handling characteristics of the vehicle

The following vehicle chassis ride heights can may be unfavorable.
be selected using vehicle level control i You can select the raised level at speeds
switch : in the center console: up to 40 mph (64 km/h). At higher speeds,
Level Driving situation the message Á Level Selection
Not Permitted appears in the
Raised level For off-road driving or multifunction display.
driving in rough terrain.
Controls in detail
Indicator lamp ; is on. X Start the engine.
Highway For driving on paved roads When indicator lamp ; is off:

level in fair or better condition. X Press vehicle level control switch :.
Indicator lamp ; is off. Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle
adjusts to the raised level.
i The third available level is the highspeed
multifunction display while the level is
level that is set automatically.
being set:
The following is the approximate change in
ride height for each of the level settings:
Level Ride height
Raised level +2.3 in (60 mm)
Highway +/-0 in (0 mm)
level13
Highspeed -0.6 in (-15 mm) i The message can be cleared by pressing
level the V, U, & or * button on
the multifunction steering wheel.
i Vehicles with ADS: When the raised level is reached, indicator

lamp ; comes on continuously and the
Depending on the ADS setting following message appears in the
(Y page 159), the vehicle will be lowered to multifunction display for 5 seconds:
the highspeed level when traveling at
higher speeds. At speeds below 40 mph
(64 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned
to the highway level.
i The highspeed level is not available when

towing a trailer. For more information on
towing a trailer, see “Trailer towing”
(Y page 269). Highway level
Raised level ! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
Only select the raised level if appropriate for roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
the driving situation encountered. Otherwise may cause the vehicle underbody to come
the fuel consumption may increase and/or in contact with the road and result in
13 Ground clearance: 8.5 in (217 mm)
Z
162 Driving systems
damage to the vehicle underbody. Always Vehicles with enhanced off-road

make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground package
clearance before adjusting it to a lower
level.
X Start the engine.
When indicator lamp ; is on:
X Press vehicle level control switch :.
Controls in detail
Indicator lamp ; flashes. The vehicle

adjusts to the highway level.
being set:
Basic settings
The following vehicle chassis ride heights can
be selected using rotatable outer adjustment
ring : in the center console:
Level Driving situation
Off-road Exclusively for clearing
level 3 impracticable situations at
i The message can be cleared by pressing low speed. Lower, middle
the V, U, & or * button on and upper indicator lamps
the multifunction steering wheel. = are on.
When the highway level is reached, indicator Off-road Off-road driving. Lower and
lamp ; goes out and the following message level 2 middle indicator lamps =
appears in the multifunction display for are on.
5 seconds:
Off-road For driving on easy terrain.
level 1 Lower indicator lamp = is
on.
Highway For normal driving. Indicator
level lamps = are off.
i The vehicle is lowered to the highway level i Another available level is the highspeed
level that is set automatically.
automatically if the vehicle speed is above
55 mph (88 km/h) or if the vehicle speed The following is the approximate change in
stays between 40 mph (64 km/h) and ride height for each of the level settings:
55 mph (88 km/h) for approximately 20
seconds.

Driving systems 163
Level Ride height Off-road levels

G Warning!
Off-road +3.5 in (90 mm)
Vehicle off-road level 3 is not intended for use
level 3
on paved roads. This vehicle level is intended
Off-road +2.3 in (60 mm) for clearing impracticable situations at low
level 2 speed exclusively. The vehicle has a very high
center of gravity in off-road level 3. This
Off-road +1.2 in (30 mm) increases the overturning hazard.
Controls in detail
level 1
RSelect off-road level 3 exclusively for
Highway +/-0 in (0 mm) clearing impracticable situations at low
level13 speed.
RAdapt your driving style to the modified
Highspeed -0.6 in (-15 mm)
level conditions.
RDo not exceed a speed of 12 mph
(20 km/h).
i Vehicles with ADS:
RAvoid extreme, quick steering movements.
Depending on the ADS setting
(Y page 159), the vehicle will be lowered to RKeep in mind the vehicle’s driving
the highspeed level when traveling at characteristics are modified.
higher speeds. At speeds below 40 mph You should therefore drive in off-road level 3
(64 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned with particular caution as it could otherwise
to the highway level. lead to an accident and/or serious injury to
you or others.
i The highspeed level is not available when
towing a trailer. For more information on If you are driving too fast while using off-road
towing a trailer, see “Trailer towing” level 3, you will see the following message in
(Y page 269). the multifunction display:
You can only select the off-road levels below Reduce speed to under 12 MPH
a certain speed. At higher speeds, the (20 km/h)
message Level Selection Not In addition, an acoustic signal sounds.
Permitted appears in the multifunction i This message cannot be deactivated.
display.
For more information, see “Display
You can select
messages” (Y page 302).
ROff-road level 1: selectable below 60 mph
Only use off-road levels when necessary.
(96 km/h)
Otherwise the fuel consumption may
ROff-road level 2: selectable below 40 mph increase and/or the handling characteristics
(64 km/h) of the vehicle may be unfavorable.
ROff-road level 3: selectable below 12 mph X Start the engine.
(20 km/h) X Turn outer adjustment ring : repeatedly
to position 2 until indicator lamps = of
the desired level flashes.
13 Ground clearance: 8.5 in (217 mm)
Z
164 Driving systems
ROff-road level 1, lower indicator lamp

flashes
ROff-road level 2, lower and middle
indicator lamps flashes
ROff-road level 3, lower, middle and upper
indicator lamps flashes
The vehicle adjusts to the corresponding Once off-road level 3 is reached, you will see,
Controls in detail
off-road level. For example, the following for example, the following message in the
message appears in the multifunction multifunction display:
display while the level is being set:
i The message Max. 12 MPH (20 km/h)

The vehicle is raised from off-road level 1 to
reminds you of the maximum permissible
off-road level 2.
driving speed with off-road level 3.
i The message can be cleared by pressing If you drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h) for
the V, U, & or * button on a short period while using off-road level 3, the
the multifunction steering wheel. following message appears in the
When the off-road level 2 is reached, the multifunction display in red:
following message appears in the
multifunction display for 5 seconds:
Off-road level 3 is canceled.

If you continue to increase your speed, the
The lower and middle indicator lamps = message remains in the multifunction
comes on continuously. display.
While the vehicle is adjusting from off-road The new level will not be shown until the
level 2 to off-road level 3, you will see, for vehicle has been able to adjust to a level
example, the following message in the appropriate for the speed at which you are
multifunction display: currently driving.
If you maintain or reduce your speed, you will
see, for example, the following message in
the multifunction display while the vehicle is
lowering:

Driving systems 165
You will see, for example, the following

message in the multifunction display:
The vehicle is lowered to off-road level 2.
Controls in detail
Once off-road level 2 is reached, you will see,
for example, the following message in the RDepending on the ADS setting
multifunction display: (Y page 159), the vehicle will be lowered to
the highspeed level when traveling at
higher speeds. At speeds below 25 mph
(40 km/h) at the latest, it will be returned
to the highway level.
i The setting is stored when you turn off the
engine.
While driving, the vehicle is lowered Highway level
automatically as follows:
! Keep in mind that on rough or uneven
RAt vehicle speeds above 55 mph roads, adjusting the vehicle to a lower level
(88 km/h) or if the vehicle speed stays may cause the vehicle underbody to come
between 40 mph (64 km/h) and 55 mph in contact with the road and result in
(88 km/h) for approximately 20 seconds, damage to the vehicle underbody. Always
the off-road level 2 setting is canceled and make sure the vehicle has sufficient ground
the vehicle is lowered to the off-road clearance before adjusting it to a lower
level 1. level.
You will see, for example, the following
message in the multifunction display: X Start the engine.
When one or more indicator lamps = are on:
X Turn outer adjustment ring : repeatedly
to position 4 until all lit indicator lamps
= flash.
The vehicle adjusts to the highway level.
RAt speeds above 60 mph (96 km/h) the off-
being set:
road level 1 setting is canceled and the
vehicle is lowered to the highway level.
Z
166 Driving systems
i The message can be cleared by pressing Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the
the V, U, & or * button on ground. Observe instructions for towing the
the multifunction steering wheel. vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
When the highway level is reached, indicator ! Only conduct operational or performance
lamps = go out and the following message tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such
appears in the multifunction display for tests are necessary, contact an authorized
5 seconds: Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
Controls in detail
otherwise seriously damage the brake

system and/or the transfer case which is
not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
i In winter operation, the maximum

effectiveness of the 4MATIC is only
achieved with winter tires (Y page 257) or
i The vehicle is lowered to the highway level snow chains as required.
automatically if the vehicle speed is above
60 mph (96 km/h).
Parktronic system
All-wheel drive (4MATIC) The Parktronic system is an electronic
parking aid with ultrasonic sensors designed
In vehicles with all-wheel drive (4MATIC), to assist the driver during parking maneuvers.
both axles are powered at all times when the The Parktronic system indicates the relative
vehicle is being operated. The 4MATIC distance between the vehicle and an obstacle
improves traction in conjunction with the visually and audibly.
ESP® (Y page 63) and the Electronic Traction The Parktronic system is activated
System (4-ETS) (Y page 64). automatically when
G Warning! Ryou switch on the ignition
If a drive wheel is spinning due to insufficient and
traction:
Ryou release the parking brake
RWhile driving off, apply as little throttle as and
possible.
Rthe automatic transmission is in drive
RWhile driving, ease up on the accelerator position D, reverse gear R, or neutral
pedal. position N
RAdapt your speed and driving style to the The Parktronic system deactivates at speeds
prevailing road conditions. above approximately 11 mph (18 km/h). At
Failure to observe these guidelines could lower speeds, the Parktronic system
cause the vehicle to skid. activates again.
The 4MATIC cannot prevent accidents The Parktronic system also deactivates when
resulting from excessive speed. you shift the automatic transmission into
park position P or engage the parking brake.
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so The Parktronic system monitors the
could damage the transfer case, which is surroundings of your vehicle with six sensors

Driving systems 167
in the front bumper and four sensors in the ! Ultrasonic signals from outside sources
rear bumper. (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers) may impair the operation of
the Parktronic system.
Range of the sensors
Controls in detail
To function properly, sensors : must be free
of dirt, ice, snow and slush. Clean
sensors : regularly. Be careful not to
scratch or damage sensors :, see “Cleaning
the driving systems sensors” (Y page 278).
G Warning!
The Parktronic is a supplemental system. It is
not intended to, nor does it replace, the need
for extreme care. The responsibility during
parking and other critical maneuvers always
remains with the driver.
G Warning!
Make sure no persons or animals are in or
near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be Front sensors
injured.
Center approx. 40 in (100 cm)
! Special attention must be paid to objects Corners approx. 24 in (60 cm)
with smooth surfaces or low silhouettes
(e.g. trailer couplings, painted posts, Rear sensors
elevated crossbars or road curbs). Such Center approx. 48 in (120 cm)
objects may not be detected by the system
and can damage the vehicle. Corners approx. 32 in (80 cm)
During parking maneuvers, pay special
Minimum distance
attention to objects located above or below
the height of the sensors (e.g. street curbs, Center approx. 8 in (20 cm)
painted posts, or trailer hitches etc.). The
Parktronic system will not detect such Corners approx. 6 in (15 cm)
objects at close range and damage to your
vehicle or the object may result. If the Parktronic system detects an obstacle
in this range, all the distance warning
segments illuminate and you hear a warning
Z
168 Driving systems
signal. If the obstacle is closer than the Current Warning indicator

minimum distance, the actual distance may transmission
no longer be indicated by the Parktronic position
system.
D Front area activated
Warning indicators
R or N Front and rear area
Visual signals indicate the relative distance activated
between the sensors and an obstacle.
Controls in detail
As your vehicle approaches an object, one or

more distance segments will illuminate,
depending on the distance. When the seventh
distance segment illuminates, you have
reached the minimum distance.
RFront area: An intermittent acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
will sound as the first red distance segment
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound
for the second red distance segment. The
Front area warning indicators signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is shifted into park
position P or the parking brake is engaged.
RRear area: An intermittent acoustic
warning lasting a maximum of 2 seconds
will sound as the first red distance segment
illuminates. A constant acoustic warning
lasting a maximum of 2 seconds will sound
for the second red distance segment. The
signal is canceled when the automatic
transmission is shifted into drive
position D, or park position P, or the
Rear area warning indicators parking brake is engaged.
Each warning indicator is divided into five
yellow and two red distance segments for left Switching the Parktronic system on/
side : and right side ; of the vehicle. The off
Parktronic system is ready to measure when
the yellow readiness indicators = are The Parktronic system switches on
illuminated. automatically when the ignition is switched
on.
The current transmission position determines
which warning indicator will be activated.

Driving systems 169
Parktronic system malfunction

There is a malfunction in the Parktronic
system, if only the red distance segments
illuminate and an acoustic warning sounds.
The Parktronic system will switch off
automatically after 20 seconds and indicator
lamp ; in Parktronic switch : comes on.
Controls in detail
X Have the Parktronic system checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
Vehicle without enhanced off-road package If only the red distance segments illuminate
and no acoustic warning sounds, the
Parktronic system sensors are dirty (e.g. dirt,
ice, snow and slush). Another cause could be
interference from other radio or ultrasonic
signals (e.g. truck air brakes, car wash, or
jackhammers). The Parktronic system will
switch off automatically after 20 seconds and
indicator lamp ; in Parktronic switch :
comes on.
X Switch off the ignition.
X Clean the Parktronic system sensors
Vehicle with enhanced off-road package
(Y page 278).
X Switching off: Press Parktronic X Switch on the ignition.
switch :. or
Indicator lamp ; comes on. X Check the Parktronic system operation at
X Switching on: Press Parktronic switch : another location to rule out interference
again. from outside radio or ultrasonic signals.
Trailer towing
Rear view camera
The rear Parktronic sensors will be
deactivated when you have established the The rear view camera is an optical parking aid.
electrical connection between your vehicle The area behind the vehicle appears in the
and the trailer you are about to tow. COMAND system display as a mirror image,
! The distance between the sensors in the like in the rear view mirror.
bumpers and an obstacle is referred to as In addition, the rear view camera contains
the minimum range of the Parktronic. A guidelines to help you with driving in reverse.
trailer hitch will reduce the distance to an G Warning!
obstacle. Keep this in mind to avoid any Make sure no persons or animals are in or
damage. near the area in which you are parking/
maneuvering. Otherwise, they could be
injured.
Z
170 Driving systems
G Warning! recommends that you contact a Mercedes-

The rear view camera is only an aid and may Benz Center for this purpose.
display obstacles Do not use the rear view camera in these
Rfrom a distorted perspective situations. Otherwise you could injure
yourself or others and/or damage property
Rinaccurately
including your vehicle while parking/
Rmay not display obstacles at all maneuvering.
Controls in detail
The rear view camera does not relieve you of

the responsibility to be cautious. Take care G Warning!
and pay careful attention. The rear view Use of rear view camera can be dangerous if
camera may not show objects which are you are color-blind or have impaired color
vision.
Rvery close to the rear bumper
Only use rear view camera if you can see and
Runder the rear bumper distinguish all colored guidelines shown by
Rabove the tailgate handle rear view camera on the COMAND system
display.
You are responsible for safety at all times and
must continue to pay attention to the
immediate surroundings when parking and
maneuvering. This includes the area behind,
in front of, and beside the vehicle. Otherwise
you could endanger yourself and/or others.
G Warning!
The rear view camera either will not function
or will not function to its full capability if
Rthe tailgate is open
Rit is raining very hard, snowing or foggy

Rit
Camera lens : must be free of dirt, ice,
is night or you are parking/maneuvering
your vehicle in an area where it is very dark
snow, and slush to function properly. Clean
the camera lens regularly. Being careful not
Rthe camera is exposed to a very bright white
to scratch or damage the camera lens, see
light “Cleaning the rear view camera lens”
Rthe immediate surroundings are (Y page 278).
illuminated with fluorescent light (the
display may flicker) Switching on/off
Rthere is a sudden change in temperature, X Switching on: Switch on the ignition.
e.g. if you drive into a heated garage from X Switch on the COMAND system.
the cold (lens condensation) X Shift the automatic transmission to reverse
Rthe camera lens is dirty or covered gear R.
Rthe rear of your vehicle is damaged The COMAND system display will show the
In this case, have the position and setting
area behind the vehicle with guidelines.
of the camera checked by a qualified
specialist workshop. Mercedes-Benz

Driving systems 171
G Warning! Red guideline = indicates an approximate

Please note that objects which do not touch distance of 10 in (0.25 m) from the rear of the
the ground may appear to be further away vehicle. Yellow guidelines ; indicate an
than they actually are, for example: approximate distance of 3 ft (1 m) from the
rear of the vehicle. Blue guidelines :
Rthe bumper of a vehicle parked behind you
indicate the approximate width required for
Ra trailer hitch the vehicle.
Rthe back of a truck i The image from the rear view camera will
Controls in detail
In such cases, you should not use the no longer be displayed if you select another
guidelines to judge the distance. You may function on the COMAND system while
misjudge the distance which increases the reverse gear R is engaged. To display the
risk of impacting the objects. image again, disengage and reengage
Even when the object you approach is directly reverse gear R.
on the ground do not approach the object any X Switching off: Shift the automatic
closer than the red guideline. transmission into park position P, neutral
position N, or drive position D.
Z
172 Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Your vehicle is equipped with either of the following climate control systems:
Climate control (Y page 175) 3-zone automatic climate control
Controls in detail
USA only (Y page 181)
Canada only (Y page 183)

The climate control combines an automatic The 3-zone automatic climate control
heating and ventilation system with a cooling combines an automatic heating and
system. You can adjust the automatic ventilation system with a cooling system.
climate control separately for the driver’s You can adjust the 3-zone automatic climate
and passenger side. control separately for each zone in the
vehicle.
Rear automatic climate Air vents

control (Y page 185)
G Warning!
When operating the climate control, the air
that enters the passenger compartment
through the air vents can be very hot or very
cold (depending on the set temperature). This
may cause burns or frostbite to unprotected
skin in the immediate area of the air vents.
Always keep sufficient distance between
unprotected parts of the body and the air
vents. If necessary, use the air distribution
adjustment to direct the air to air vents in the
The rear automatic climate control allows vehicle interior that are not in the immediate
separate climate settings for the rear area of unprotected skin.
compartment.

Overview of climate control system functions and air vents 173
For best possible performance of the climate Side air vents

control:
X Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow, leaves, sticks, and
any other debris.
X Always keep all air vents and grilles in the
passenger compartment free from
obstruction.
Controls in detail
i For draft-free ventilation, move the
adjustable center and side air vents to the
middle position.
Example illustration driver’s side
Center air vents : Left side defroster air vent, fixed
; Left side air vent, adjustable
= Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left side air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheel = in
the required direction.
Rear center console air vents
: Left center air vent, adjustable

; Right center air vent, adjustable
adjustable right center air vent
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left center air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
and ? in the required direction. : Left rear center air vent, adjustable
; Right rear center air vent, adjustable
= Rear climate control panel
When the front climate control panel is
switched on or off, the air supply through the
rear center air vents is also switched on or
off.
Z
174 Overview of climate control system functions and air vents
Air vents in the roof liner over the Air vents in the roof liner over the third-
second-row seats row seats
Controls in detail
Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control Vehicles with 3-zone automatic climate control
only only
: Thumbwheel for air volume control : Left air vent, adjustable
; Air vent, adjustable ; Right air vent, adjustable
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels :
adjustable right air vent
upward or downward.
? Thumbwheel for air volume control for
adjustable left air vent
X Opening/closing: Turn thumbwheels =
and ? upward or downward.

Climate control 175
Climate control
Control panel
Controls in detail
Function Recommendation/Notes
: Temperature control, driver’s i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 178)
side (22†).
; Air distribution and air volume i Switches on the automatic (Y page 178)
(automatic mode) mode. The indicator lamp in
button Ã comes on.
= Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 179)
only until the windshield or the
side windows are clear again.
? Increasing air volume (Y page 179)
A Air distribution (directs air (Y page 178)
through the windshield and side
air vents)
B AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 177)
conditioning. The indicator
lamp in button Á comes
on.
Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 180)
is possible to continue to heat
or ventilate the interior.
Z
176 Climate control
C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 178)
side (22†).
D ± Rear climate control on/
off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(USA only)
Controls in detail
^ Rear climate control on/

off or air supply for rear
passenger compartment on/off
(Canada only)
E Air distribution (directs air (Y page 178)
through center and side air
vents)
F Air distribution (directs air (Y page 178)
through the footwells and side
air vents)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume (Y page 179)
I Rear window defroster (Y page 191)
J Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 180)
short time, e.g. in a tunnel.
Otherwise, the windows can
fog up due to lack of fresh air.
K Interior temperature sensor
L Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate (Y page 177)
control system. The indicator
lamp in button ^ goes out.
Notes on climate control Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the
The climate control is operational whenever passenger compartment through the air
the engine is running. You can operate the distribution system.
climate control system in either the
automatic or manual mode. The system cools G Warning!
or heats the interior depending on the Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
selected interior temperature and the current may require replacement of the filter before
outside temperature. its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior

Climate control 177
and the windows could fog up, impairing Deactivating the rear climate control
visibility and endangering you and others. from the front
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as X Deactivating: Press button ±.
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Center.
X Reactivating: Press button ±.
The air conditioning will not engage (no The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
Controls in detail
(Y page 177).
G Warning! Air conditioning
Follow the recommended settings for heating The air conditioning is operational while the
and cooling given on the following pages. engine is running and cools the interior air to
Otherwise the windows could fog up, the temperature set by the operator. In
impairing visibility and endangering you and addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
others. the interior air and helps prevent window
fogging.
Keep the air intake grille in front of the
windshield free of snow and debris. G Warning!
If you switch off the air conditioning, the
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
interior before driving off, see “Summer
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
opening feature” (Y page 107). The climate
more quickly. Window fogging may impair
control will then adjust the interior
visibility and endanger you and others.
temperature to the set value much faster.
i Condensation may drip out from
Deactivating the climate control underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
system not an indication of a malfunction.
G Warning! Deactivating
When the climate control system is switched It is possible to deactivate the air
off, the outside air supply and circulation are conditioning. The interior air will then no
also switched off. Only choose this setting for longer be cooled or dehumidified.
a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
X Press button Á.
up, impairing visibility and endangering you
and others. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The cooling function switches off after a
X Deactivating: Press button ^. short delay.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Reactivating: Press button Ã. Activating
i You can also press button ^ on the Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
climate control panel. dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning.
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the
climate control system, the defrosting X Press button Á again.
mode is activated. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Z
178 Climate control
The air conditioning uses the refrigerant shown in air volume display G
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which (Y page 175).
are harmful to the ozone layer. or
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated X Press air distribution button ¯, P, or
again, this indicates that the air O.
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
compressor has turned off. The automatic operation of air distribution
Have the air conditioning checked at the switches off.
Controls in detail
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Setting the temperature

Automatic mode
You can adjust the air temperature on each
When operating the climate control system in side of the passenger compartment. You
automatic mode, the interior air temperature, should raise or lower the temperature setting
air volume and air distribution are adjusted in small increments, preferably starting at
automatically. 72‡ (22†).
In automatic mode, cooling with X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
dehumidification is switched on. This function temperature control : and/or C
can be switched off if necessary. (Y page 175) slightly clockwise or
G Warning! counterclockwise.
vehicle will not be cooled when weather
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up Adjusting air distribution
more quickly. Window fogging may impair The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
visibility and endanger you and others. The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
X Set the desired temperature
(Y page 178). Symbol Function
X Activating: Press button Ã.
¯ Directs air to the windshield and
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. side air vents
The air volume and air distribution are
adjusted automatically. P Directs air through the center
and side air vents
i The settings for the passenger side are
also used for the rear passenger O Directs air to the footwells and
compartment. side air vents
X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out. X Press the desired air distribution button
The automatic operation of air volume ¯, P, or O.
switches off. The selected blower speed is The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
The automatic mode is switched off. Air
distribution is controlled according to the
desired button.

Climate control 179
Adjusting air volume X Press button I to decrease or button

K to increase air volume to the desired
X Decreasing/increasing: Press button
level.
I or K.
The automatic mode is switched off. The The air volume decreases/increases to the
selected blower speed is shown in air next lower/higher blower speed and
volume display G (Y page 175). heating switches to the temperature that
was set before the front defroster was
When using the Voice Control System, the switched on.
Controls in detail
blower speed reduces automatically. When
The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
the Voice Control System is not used
The indicator lamp in button Á comes
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
previously selected level. on.
or
X Turn temperature control : and/or C
Front defroster (Y page 175) slightly in any direction.
You can use this setting to defrost the Heating switches to the temperature that
windshield, for example if it is iced up. was set before the front defroster was
You can also defog the windshield and the switched on.
side windows. The indicator lamp in button ¦ goes out.
i Keep this setting selected only until the on.
windshield or the side windows are clear
again. i The air conditioning compressor remains
on even if the indicator lamp in button
Activating ¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the
windshield from fogging.
X Press button ¦.
Deactivating
The climate control switches to the
following functions automatically: X Press button ¦ again.
Rmost efficient blower speed and heating The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
power, depending on outside Defrosting is turned off.
temperature The previous settings are once again in
Rair
effect. The air conditioning compressor
flows onto the windshield and the
remains switched on.
front door windows (side air vents must
be open) i To deactivate, you can also press button
Rthe air conditioning compressor ^ or Ã.
switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air- Windshield fogged on the outside
drying
X Switch the windshield wipers on
(Y page 103).
Adjustments
You can adjust the air volume and the X Press air distribution button P or O.
temperature when the front defroster is
switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
Z
180 Climate control
Air recirculation mode i The manually selected air recirculation

mode is deactivated automatically:
Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
Rafter 5 minutes if the outside
unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
from the outside (e. g. before driving through temperature is below approximately
a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of 41‡ (5†)
outside air and recirculates the air in the Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and
passenger compartment. air-drying are turned off
Controls in detail
G Warning! Rafter30 minutes if the outside

Fogged windows impair visibility, temperature is above approximately
endangering you and others. If the windows 41‡ (5†)
begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
air recirculation mode immediately should
clear interior window fogging. If interior Residual heat and ventilation
window fogging persists, make sure the air
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
conditioning is activated, or press button
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for
¦.
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine.
X Activating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. i How long the system will provide heating
depends on the coolant temperature and
i The air recirculation mode is activated the battery voltage.
automatically at high outside Regardless of the temperature and air
temperatures. volume set on the climate control panel, an
The indicator lamp in button d is not lit interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡
when the air recirculation mode is switched (22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
on automatically. protect the vehicle battery.
A quantity of outside air is added after
X Activating: Switch off the ignition.
approximately 30 minutes.
X Press button Á.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
or the outside temperature is below 41‡ The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
switch on automatically. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
The residual heat is deactivated automatically
X Deactivating: Press button d.
Rwhen the ignition is switched on
The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Rafter approximately 30 minutes
Rif the battery voltage drops
Rif the coolant temperature is too low

3-zone automatic climate control 181
3-zone automatic climate control

Control panels
Controls in detail
USA only
side (22†).
button Ã comes on.
= Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 189)
? Increasing air volume (Y page 189)
A Air distribution (directs air (Y page 188)
through the windshield and side
air vents)
Z
182 3-zone automatic climate control
B AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 186)
on.
Residual heat/ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 191)
Controls in detail

C Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 187)
side (22†).
D Operating the rear climate (Y page 186)
control from the front
E Air distribution (directs air (Y page 188)
through center and side air
vents)
F Air distribution (directs air (Y page 188)
through the footwells and side
air vents)
G Air volume display
H Decreasing air volume (Y page 189)
I Rear window defroster (Y page 191)
J Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 190)
K Interior temperature sensor
L Climate control on/off i Switches on the climate (Y page 185)
control system. The indicator

Controls in detail
Canada only
side (22†).
button Ã comes on.
= Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 188)
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
? Front defroster i Keep this setting selected (Y page 189)
A Increasing air volume (Y page 189)
B Rear window defroster (Y page 191)
C Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 188)
(directs air through the
windshield and side air vents)
D Operating the rear climate (Y page 186)
control from the front
E Temperature control, passenger i Set the temperature to 72‡ (Y page 187)
side (22†).
Z
F Automatic climate control on/ i Switches on the climate (Y page 185)
off control system. The indicator
G Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 188)
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
Controls in detail
H Air distribution, passenger side (Y page 188)

(directs air through center and
side air vents)
I AC cooling on/off i Switches on the air (Y page 186)
on.
Residual heat ventilation i With the engine turned off, it (Y page 191)
J Display
K Decreasing air volume (Y page 189)
L Air recirculation i Only use this function for a (Y page 190)
M Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 188)
(directs air through center and
side air vents)
N Air distribution, driver’s side (Y page 188)
(directs air through the footwells
and side air vents)
O Interior temperature sensor
P Adopting driver’s side settings (Y page 191)
for all zones

Rear automatic climate control G Warning!

Severe conditions (e.g. strong air pollution)
may require replacement of the filter before
its scheduled replacement interval. A clogged
filter will reduce the air volume to the interior
and the windows could fog up, impairing
visibility and endangering you and others.
Have a clogged filter replaced as soon as
Controls in detail
possible at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
The air conditioning will not engage (no

: Increasing air volume cooling) if the A/C mode is deactivated
; Temperature control
(Y page 186).
= Air distribution and air volume (automatic G Warning!
mode) Follow the recommended settings for heating
? Air distribution (directs air through the and cooling given on the following pages.
side air vents) Otherwise the windows could fog up,
A Air distribution (directs air through the impairing visibility and endangering you and
footwells and side air vents) others.
B Rear automatic climate control on/off Keep the air intake grille in front of the
C Decreasing air volume windshield free of snow and debris.
i If the vehicle interior is hot, ventilate the
Notes on 3-zone automatic climate interior before driving off, see “Summer
control opening feature” (Y page 107). The climate
control will then adjust the interior
With the help of a sun sensor, the automatic temperature to the set value much faster.
climate control determines the relation of the
sun to the vehicle and automatically adjusts
the inside temperature for every individual Deactivating the climate control
zone. system
The automatic climate control is operational
whenever the engine is running. It cools the G Warning!
vehicle’s interior according to the angle and When the climate control system is switched
intensity of the sun’s rays, the outside off, the outside air supply and circulation are
temperature and the selected temperature. also switched off. Only choose this setting for
You can operate the automatic climate a short time. Otherwise the windows could fog
control in either the automatic or manual up, impairing visibility and endangering you
mode. and others.
Nearly all dust particles, pollutants and odors
are filtered out before outside air enters the Deactivating the front climate control
passenger compartment through the air X Deactivating: Press button ^.
distribution system. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Z
Canada only: Display J (Y page 183) is Deactivating the rear climate control
cleared. from the rear
X Reactivating: Press button Ã. X Deactivating: Press button ^.
i You can also press button ^ on the The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
X Reactivating: Press button Ã.
climate control panel.
If you press button ¦ to reactivate the The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
climate control system, the defrosting
Controls in detail
mode is activated.
Air conditioning
Deactivating the rear climate control The air conditioning is operational while the
from the front engine is running and cools the interior air to
USA only the temperature set by the operator. In
addition, the air conditioning dehumidifies
X Deactivating: Press button ±. the interior air and helps prevent window
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. fogging.
X Reactivating: Press button ±.
G Warning!
Canada only vehicle will not be cooled when weather
X Deactivating: Press button X. conditions are warm. The windows can fog up
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. more quickly. Window fogging may impair
visibility and endanger you and others.
In display J (Y page 183), you will see the
Y symbol followed by MODE for i Condensation may drip out from
approximately 3 seconds.
underneath the vehicle. This is normal and
X Within these 3 seconds press button not an indication of a malfunction.
^.
In display J, you will see the Y symbol Deactivating
followed by OFF.
It is possible to deactivate the cooling
The rear climate control is switched off. function of the climate control system. The
X Reactivating: Press button X. interior air will then no longer be cooled or
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. dehumidified.
In display J, you will see the Y symbol X Press button Á.
followed by ON and MODE. The MODE display The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
is cleared and the indicator lamp in button The cooling function switches off after a
X goes out after approximately short delay.
3 seconds.
The rear climate control switches on. Activating
Moist air can fog up the windows. You can
dehumidify the interior air with the air
conditioning.
X Press button Á again.

The air conditioning uses the refrigerant setting. The automatic air distribution
R134a. This refrigerant is free of CFCs which remains switched on.
are harmful to the ozone layer. or
! If the air conditioning cannot be activated X Press an air distribution button Z14,
again, this indicates that the air M14, \14, P, ¯15, c14 or
conditioning is losing refrigerant. The O.
compressor has turned off. The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
Have the air conditioning checked at the The automatic air distribution is switched
Controls in detail
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. off and is controlled according to the
desired position. The automatic air volume
Automatic mode
You can switch the climate control system on Automatic mode with rear climate
and off for each zone of the passenger control panel
compartment as desired. X Activating: Press button Ã.
When operating the climate control system in The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
automatic mode, the interior air temperature, The temperature, air volume and air
air volume and air distribution are adjusted distribution are adjusted automatically.
automatically. X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
In automatic mode, cooling with The automatic air volume is switched off
dehumidification is switched on. This function and is controlled according to the desired
can be switched off if necessary. setting. The automatic air distribution
G Warning! remains switched on.
If you switch off the air conditioning, the or
vehicle will not be cooled when weather X Press button M or P.
conditions are warm. The windows can fog up The automatic air distribution is switched
more quickly. Window fogging may impair off and is controlled according to the
visibility and endanger you and others. desired position. The automatic air volume
X Set the desired temperature
(Y page 187).
X Activating: Press button Ã. Setting the temperature
You can set the air temperature for each of
i The settings for the passenger side are the 3 zones separately.You should raise or
also used for the rear passenger lower the temperature setting in small
compartment. increments, preferably starting at 72‡
(22†).
X Deactivating: Press button I or K.
The indicator lamp in button Ã goes out.
The automatic air volume is switched off
and is controlled according to the desired
14 Canada only
15 USA only
Z
Rear temperature with rear climate

control panel
X Increasing/decreasing: Turn
temperature control ; (Y page 185)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.
Adjusting air distribution

Controls in detail
USA only
The air distribution can be adjusted manually.
Front temperature with front climate The symbols on the buttons represent the
control panel following functions:
USA only Symbol Function
¯ Directs air to the windshield and
temperature control : and/or C
side air vents
(Y page 181) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise. P Directs air through the center
and side air vents
Canada only
O Directs air to the footwells and
side air vents
temperature control : and/or E
(Y page 183) slightly clockwise or
counterclockwise. X Press the desired air distribution button
¯, P, or O.
Rear temperature with front climate The automatic mode is switched off. The
control panel indicator lamp in the desired button comes
on.
USA only
X Press button ±. Canada only
The air distribution can be adjusted
temperature control C (Y page 181) separately on each side of the passenger
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise. compartment.
Canada only The symbols on the buttons represent the
following functions:
X Press button X.
In display J (Y page 183) you will see the
Y symbol.
temperature control E (Y page 183)
slightly clockwise or counterclockwise.

Symbol Symbol Function When using the Voice Control System, the
blower speed reduces automatically. When
Driver’s Passenger
the Voice Control System is not used
side side
anymore, the blower speed increases to the
Z M Directs air to previously selected level.
the windshield
and side air
vents Front defroster
Controls in detail
\ P Directs air You can use this setting to defrost the
through the windshield, for example if it is iced up.
center, side You can also defog the windshield and the
and rear side windows.
passenger i Keep this setting selected only until the
compartment windshield or the side windows are clear
air vents again.
c O Directs air to
the footwells Activating
and side air X Press button ¦.
vents
The climate control switches to the
X Press the desired air distribution button following functions automatically:
Z, \, or c for the driver’s side, Rmost efficient blower speed and heating
or M, P, or O for the passenger power, depending on outside
side. temperature
The automatic mode is switched off. The Rair flows onto the windshield and the
indicator lamp in the desired button comes
front door windows (side air vents must
on.
be open)
Rthe air conditioning compressor
Adjusting air volume switches on at outside temperatures
above approximately 41‡ (5†) for air-
USA only drying
X Decrease/increase: Press button I or
K. Adjustments
The automatic mode is switched off. The You can adjust the air volume and the
selected blower speed is shown in air temperature when the front defroster is
volume display G (Y page 181). switched on. The air flow will remain on the
windshield and front door windows.
Canada only
X Press button I to decrease or button
X Decrease/increase: Press button I or K to increase air volume to the desired
K. level.
The automatic mode is switched off. The
The air volume decreases/increases to the
selected blower speed appears in display
next lower/higher blower speed and
J (Y page 183).
heating switches to the temperature that
Z
was set before the front defroster was X Press buttons O/c16 and P/
switched on. \16.
on. Air recirculation mode
or Switch to air recirculation mode to prevent
X Turn temperature control : and/or C unpleasant odors from entering the vehicle
(USA only) (Y page 181) or : and/or E
Controls in detail
from the outside (e. g. before driving through

(Canada only) (Y page 183) slightly in any a tunnel). This setting cuts off the intake of
direction. outside air and recirculates the air in the
Heating switches to the temperature that passenger compartment.
was set before the front defroster was
G Warning!
switched on.
Fogged windows impair visibility,
endangering you and others. If the windows
The indicator lamp in button Á comes begin to fog on the inside, switching off the
on. air recirculation mode immediately should
i The air conditioning compressor remains clear interior window fogging. If interior
on even if the indicator lamp in button window fogging persists, make sure the air
¦ goes out. This helps to prevent the conditioning is activated, or press button
windshield from fogging. ¦.
X Activating: Press button d.

Deactivating
X Press button ¦ once more.
i The air recirculation mode is activated
automatically at high outside
Defrosting is turned off.
temperatures.
The previous settings are once again in
The indicator lamp in button d is not lit
effect. The air conditioning compressor
when the air recirculation mode is switched
on automatically.
i To deactivate, you can also press button A quantity of outside air is added after
^ or Ã. approximately 30 minutes.
If you have turned off the air conditioning
Windshield fogged on the outside or the outside temperature is below 41‡
X
(5†), the air recirculation mode will not
Switch the windshield wipers on
switch on automatically.
(Y page 103).
X Press button Ã. X Deactivating: Press button d.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
Air volume and air distribution are
controlled separately for each zone.
If the automatic air volume and air
distribution are switched off:
16 Canada only

i The manually selected air recirculation Using driver-side settings for all
mode is deactivated automatically: temperature zones
Rafter 5 minutes if the outside
This feature is only available in Canada
temperature is below approximately vehicles.
41‡ (5†) You can use the settings of the driver’s side,
Rafter 5 minutes if the air conditioning and such as temperature, air volume and air
air-drying are turned off distribution, for all temperature zones. These
Controls in detail
Rafter 30 minutes if the outside settings only need to be made once and the
temperature is above approximately climate control system will automatically
41‡ (5†) regulate the settings for all temperature
zones quickly and comfortably.
At outside temperatures above 79‡ (26†) X Activating: Adjust the air temperature, air
the system will not automatically switch back volume and air distribution.
to outside air. A quantity of outside air is
X Press button ¸.
added after approximately 30 minutes.
The driver-side settings are used for all
Residual heat and ventilation temperature zones.
X Deactivating: Press button ¸ again.
With the engine switched off, it is possible to
continue to heat or ventilate the interior for The indicator lamp in the button goes out.
up to 30 minutes. This feature makes use of
the residual heat produced by the engine. i If you manually set the temperature, air
volume or air distribution for the passenger
i How long the system will provide heating side or the rear passenger compartment
depends on the coolant temperature and when the MONO setting is active, the
the battery voltage. MONO setting will be switched off.
Regardless of the temperature and air
volume set on the climate control panel, an
interior temperature is aimed at by 72‡ Rear window defroster
(22†) and the blower runs on low speed to
protect the vehicle battery. G Warning!
X Activating: Switch off the ignition. Any accumulation of snow and ice should be
removed from the rear window before driving.
X Press button Á.
Visibility could otherwise be impaired,
endangering you and others.
X Deactivating: Press button Á again.
The indicator lamp in the button goes out. The rear window defroster uses a large
The residual heat is deactivated amount of power. To keep the battery drain
automatically: to a minimum, switch off the defroster as
soon as the rear window is clear. The
Rwhen the ignition is switched on defroster is switched off automatically after
Rafter approximately 30 minutes some time of operation depending on the
Rif the battery voltage drops outside temperature.
Rif the coolant temperature is too low
Z
192 Power tilt/sliding sunroof
X Switch on the ignition. shatter. This may result in an opening in the

X Switching on: Press button ª on the roof.
respective climate control panel. In a vehicle rollover, occupants not wearing
The indicator lamp in the button comes on. their seat belts or not wearing them properly
X Switching off: Press button ª again. may be thrown out of the opening. Such an
opening also presents a potential for injury for
The rear window defroster switches off when
occupants wearing their seat belts properly as
the battery voltage is too low. The indicator
entire body parts or portions of them may
Controls in detail
lamp in button ª flashes. Too many

protrude from the passenger compartment.
electrical consumers may be operating
simultaneously.
! To avoid damaging the seals, do not
X Switch off consumers that are currently not
transport any objects with sharp edges
needed if required. which can stick out of the tilt/sliding
sunroof.
Do not open the tilt/sliding sunroof if there
Power tilt/sliding sunroof is snow or ice on the roof, as this could
Opening and closing result in malfunctions.
If you cannot open or close the tilt/sliding
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. sunroof due to a malfunction contact
G Warning! Roadside Assistance or an authorized
When opening or closing the tilt/sliding
sunroof, make sure there is no danger of ! Please keep in mind that weather
anyone being harmed by the opening/closing conditions can sometimes change rapidly.
procedure. Make sure to close the tilt/sliding sunroof
The tilt/sliding sunroof is equipped with the when leaving the vehicle. If water enters
express operation and automatic reversal the vehicle interior, vehicle electronics
function. If the movement of the tilt/sliding could be damaged which is not covered by
sunroof is blocked during the closing the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
procedure, the tilt/sliding sunroof will stop
and open slightly. i You can also open or close the tilt/sliding
The tilt/sliding sunroof operates differently sunroof using the SmartKey or the
when the sunroof switch is pressed and held. KEYLESS-GO function, see “Summer
See the “Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof opening feature” (Y page 107) and
is blocked” section for details. “Convenience closing feature”
The opening/closing procedure of the tilt/ (Y page 107).
sliding sunroof can be immediately halted by
i After switching off the ignition or
releasing the sunroof switch or, if the sunroof
removing the SmartKey from the starter
switch was moved past the resistance point
switch, you can operate the tilt/sliding
and released, by moving the sunroof switch in
sunroof until you open the driver’s or front
any direction.
passenger door. If no door was opened you
G Warning! can operate the tilt/sliding sunroof for up
to 5 minutes.
The tilt/sliding sunroof is made out of glass.
In the event of an accident, the glass may

Power tilt/sliding sunroof 193
i When the tilt/sliding sunroof is open,

resonance noises may result in addition to
the usual wind noises. They are caused by
minimal pressure changes in the passenger
compartment. To reduce or eliminate these
noises, change the position of the tilt/
sliding sunroof or open a window slightly.
Controls in detail
Raising
X Raising manually: Press and hold the
Sunroof switch sunroof switch to the resistance point in
With the sunroof closed or raised, you can direction of arrow :.
slide the sunroof screen forward and back. X Release the sunroof switch when the
desired position is reached.
X Express operation: To raise the tilt/
sliding sunroof completely, press the
sunroof switch past the resistance point in
direction of arrow : and release.
X Stopping during express operation:
Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
i Express raising is not available when the
tilt/sliding sunroof is open. The tilt/sliding
sunroof must be closed first.
Sunroof screen
Closing
X Closing manually: Pull and hold the
Opening sunroof switch to the resistance point in
direction of arrow =.
X Opening manually: Press and hold the X Release the sunroof switch when the
sunroof switch to the resistance point in desired position is reached.
direction of arrow ;.
X Express operation: To close the tilt/
X Release the sunroof switch when the
sliding sunroof completely, pull the sunroof
desired position is reached. switch past the resistance point in
X Express operation: To open the tilt/ direction of arrow = and release.
sliding sunroof completely, press the X Stopping during express operation:
sunroof switch past the resistance point in Move the sunroof switch in any direction.
direction of arrow ; and release.
X Stopping during express operation: Closing when the tilt/sliding sunroof is
Move the sunroof switch in any direction. blocked
i Express opening is not available when the G Warning!
tilt/sliding sunroof is raised. The tilt/ Make sure that nobody can become trapped
sliding sunroof must be closed first. and be seriously or even fatally injured when
Z
194 Loading and storing
closing the tilt/sliding sunroof with greater X Vehicles with SmartKey: Switch off the
force or without automatic reversal function. ignition and remove the SmartKey from the
starter switch.
If the movement of the tilt/sliding sunroof is X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Switch off the
blocked during the closing procedure (e.g. by ignition and open the driver’s door. This
ice or pollution), the tilt/sliding sunroof will puts the starter switch in position 0, same
stop and open slightly. as with the SmartKey removed from the
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof starter switch. The driver’s door then can
Controls in detail
has stopped and opened because it was be closed again.

blocked, pull and hold the sunroof switch X Remove the fuse for the tilt/sliding sunroof
in direction of arrow = until the tilt/sliding from the fuse box (Y page 355).
sunroof is fully closed. X Reinsert the fuse in the fuse box.
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes with greater X Switch on the ignition.
force.
X Press and hold the sunroof switch in
If the tilt/sliding sunroof is blocked again and direction of arrow : (Y page 193) until the
opens slightly: tilt/sliding sunroof is fully raised at the
X Immediately after the tilt/sliding sunroof rear.
was blocked and has opened, pull and hold X Keep holding the sunroof switch in
the sunroof switch in direction of arrow direction of arrow : for approximately
= until the tilt/sliding sunroof is fully 1 second.
closed. X Check the express operation feature
The tilt/sliding sunroof closes without (Y page 193).
automatic reversal function. If the tilt/sliding sunroof opens and closes
completely, the roof is synchronized.
G Warning!
Otherwise repeat the above steps.
Pulling and holding the sunroof switch to
close the tilt/sliding sunroof immediately
after it had been blocked two times will cause
the tilt/sliding sunroof to close without any
Loading and storing
reversal function for as long as you hold the Loading instructions
sunroof switch.
G Warning!
Always fasten items being carried as securely
Synchronizing as possible. Use cargo tie-down rings and
fastening materials appropriate for the weight
The tilt/sliding sunroof must be synchronized and size of the load.
Rafter the battery has been disconnected or In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
discharged maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
Rafter a malfunction inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
Rif the tilt/sliding sunroof does not open
securely fastened in the vehicle.
smoothly
To help avoid personal injury during a collision
! If the tilt/sliding sunroof cannot be closed or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
or synchronized, contact an authorized transporting cargo. Do not pile luggage or
Mercedes-Benz Center or call Roadside cargo higher than the seat backrests.
Assistance.

Loading and storing 195
The cargo compartment is the preferred place the Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the
to carry objects. Always use cargo tie-down front and rear axle. The GVWR and GAWR for
rings, and if so equipped, always use the cargo your vehicle are indicated on the certification
net when transporting cargo. label located on the driver’s door B-pillar
Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open. (Y page 242).
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may For more information, see “Tire and Loading
enter vehicle interior resulting in Information” (Y page 242).
unconsciousness and death. The handling characteristics of a fully loaded
Controls in detail
vehicle depend greatly on the load
Load distribution distribution. It is therefore recommended to
load the vehicle according to the illustration
shown. The heaviest items are to be placed
towards the front of the vehicle.
i The cargo compartment is the preferred
place to carry objects. The expanded cargo
volume (Y page 201) should only be used
for items which do not fit in the cargo
compartment alone.
Please pay attention to and comply with the
following instructions when loading the
vehicle and transporting cargo:
RAlways place items being carried against
front or rear seat backrests, and fasten
them as securely as possible.
RThe heaviest portion of the cargo should
always be kept as low as possible against
front or rear seat backrests.
The Gross Vehicle Weight (GVW) is the weight
of the vehicle including:
Rfuel
Rtools
Rspare wheel
Rinstalled accessories
Rpassengers
Rluggage/cargo
It must never exceed the load limit and the

Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) for your For additional safety when transporting cargo
vehicle. The load limit and the GVWR are while the rear seats are unoccupied, fasten
specified on the placard located on the the outer seat belts crosswise into the
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 242). opposite side buckles.
In addition, the load must be distributed so
that the weight on each axle never exceeds
Z
Carriers
For information about further carriers,
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
G Warning!
Only use carriers when the crossbars have
been completely mounted. The left and right
Controls in detail
roof rails are only stabilized by means of the

crossbars mounted.
Follow the manufacturer’s installation Roof rails
instructions. Otherwise, an improperly
attached carrier or its load could become Crossbars
detached from the vehicle.
Do not exceed the maximum roof load of
The maximum roof load of any add-on roof
198 lb (90 kg).
equipment is reduced by the unladen weight
of the crossbars (13.7 Ibs/6.2 kg).
Take into consideration that when the roof is
loaded, the handling characteristics are
Installing the crossbars increases the total
different from those when operating the
vehicle height given in the “Technical data”
vehicle without the roof loaded.
section by 2 in (50 mm).
Four keys and an hex key required for
Make sure installing and removing are included with the
Ryou can raise the tilt/sliding sunroof at the crossbars.
rear completely i The keys and the hex key are stored with
Ryou can open the tailgate completely the vehicle tool kit under the cargo
compartment floor (Y page 284).
i The following accessories are available
for your Mercedes-Benz: i Spare parts are available as Mercedes-
RRoof Cargo Container – Small, Medium, Benz accessories. Contact your authorized
or Large Mercedes-Benz Center.
RSki and Snowboard Carrier – Standard Installing the crossbars
RSki and Snowboard Carrier – Deluxe G Warning!
(Only in connection with corresponding Please follow these installation instructions
adapter.) carefully. Caution should be exercised to
For more information on Mercedes-Benz avoid damage to the vehicle while installing
accessories, contact your authorized the crossbars. Also, be careful not to injure
Mercedes-Benz Center. yourself or others while installing and
adjusting the crossbars or loading items on
them.
Each individual step of the installation
instructions, the warning notices, the general
safety precautions and the instructions for
use must be followed exactly. If the crossbars
are not mounted correctly, they and the

objects attached to them could come loose G Warning!

from your vehicle and cause an accident, A roof load creates a greater surface area
thereby injuring you and other persons and/ exposed to the wind and causes the vehicle
or causing damage to property, including to have a higher center of gravity, thereby
damage to your vehicle. changing the vehicle’s driving characteristics.
Accordingly, the additional weight on the roof
G Warning! of the vehicle can have a detrimental effect
Every time the crossbars are mounted, before on braking, cornering and acceleration.
Controls in detail
you set off on a journey and periodically Never exceed the maximum permissible roof
during longer journeys, check all the screws load or the maximum permissible vehicle
on the crossbars to make sure that they are weight, even when accessories for the
secure, and tighten them if necessary. Repeat crossbars (e.g. ski racks, bicycle racks, etc.)
these checks at regular intervals as road- are being used. Overloading the vehicle could
surface conditions dictate, and at least after result in an accident. When calculating the
every 1500 miles (2500 km) of continuous weight placed on the roof please make sure
use. to add the weight of the crossbars, accessory
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted racks and the load carried together.
accessories and the objects attached to them Always adapt your driving style to the road,
could come loose from the vehicle causing an traffic and weather conditions, and drive with
accident, thereby injuring you and other added caution when the roof is loaded.
persons and/or causing damage to property,
Always drive with extreme care when the
including damage to your vehicle.
carrier is loaded. Take into consideration that
Do not use lubricant on the screws of the when the carrier is loaded, the handling
crossbars. The screws could work loose and characteristics are different from those when
the crossbars could become detached from operating the vehicle without a carrier loaded.
your vehicle, together with the objects
attached to them causing an accident, G Warning!
thereby injuring you and other persons and/ Do not use accessories which have not been
or causing damage to property, including approved by Mercedes-Benz for use in
damage to your vehicle. conjunction with these crossbars. If non-
approved accessories are used, these
G Warning!
accessories and/or the objects attached to
Only install the crossbars at the exact them could come loose from the vehicle,
locations designated on the roof rails. The thereby injuring you and other persons and/
designated locations for the front crossbars or causing damage to property, including
are between the markings engraved on the damage to your vehicle.
inside of the roof rails. The designated
locations for the rear crossbars are between
! Have a second person assist you when
the gaps on the roof rails.
installing the crossbars. The vehicle could
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted otherwise be damaged.
accessories and the objects attached to them
could come loose from the vehicle causing an ! Objects attached to the crossbar
accident, thereby injuring you and other system’s accessories must not be allowed
persons and/or causing damage to property, to restrict the movement of the tilt/sliding
including damage to your vehicle. sunroof. The tilt/sliding sunroof could
otherwise be damaged when it is raised.
Z
i Markings E are located on the inside of

each roof rail, indicated by the white lines
in the illustration.
Controls in detail
: Key
; Cover cap
= Sticker FRONT (or REAR)
? Screw for clamping claw ? Screw for clamping claw
A Clamping claw A Clamping claw
The front and rear crossbars are of different F Roof rail
lengths. Please pay close attention to stickers
X Make sure clamping claw A lies flush
= FRONT and REAR on the crossbars.
against the inside of roof rail F as shown
X Unlock cover cap ; with key :.
in the illustration.
X Remove cover cap ;.
If necessary, adjust clamping width of
Sticker = indicating the location, FRONT crossbar (Y page 199).
or REAR, becomes visible. X Slightly tighten screw ? on both sides by
X Turn screw ? counterclockwise with the turning it clockwise.
included hex key until clamping claw A is X Place rear crossbar C on roof rails F in
wide open. such a way that the clamping claws reach
into gaps D (Y page 198) on the roof rails.
X Make sure clamping claw A lies flush
against the inside of roof rail F as shown
in the illustration (Y page 198).
If necessary, adjust clamping width of
crossbar (Y page 199).
X Slightly tighten screw ? on both sides by
turning it clockwise.
X On the front and rear crossbars tighten
screws ?. Observe a tightening torque of
B Front crossbar 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
C Rear crossbar
G Warning!
D Gaps
Have the tightening torque checked after
E Markings mounting the crossbars. The screws could
F Roof rails come loose if they are not tightened to a
torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
X Place front crossbar B between markings
E on roof rails F.

X Attach cover caps (Y page 198) and lock X Pull cover strip H out of groove until you
them. see screws G on each end of the crossbar.
X Store key and hex key back into the storage X Turn screws G on both sides
well (Y page 284). counterclockwise approximately 2
rotations.
Adjusting the clamping widths of the
X Place the crossbar at designated locations
crossbars
(Y page 198) on roof rails.
G Warning! X On both sides, make sure the clamping
Controls in detail
Only install the crossbars at the exact claws A lie flush against the roof rails. If
locations designated on the roof rails. The necessary, pull out or push in the clamping
designated locations for the front crossbars claws A.
are between the markings engraved on the
X Tighten screws G. Observe a tightening
inside of the roof rails. The designated
locations for the rear crossbars are between torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
the gaps on the roof rails. The width of the clamping claws is correctly
adjusted.
Otherwise, the crossbars, mounted
accessories and the objects attached to them G Warning!
could come loose from the vehicle causing an Have the tightening torque checked after
accident, thereby injuring you and other mounting the crossbars. The screws could
persons and/or causing damage to property, come loose if they are not tightened to a
including damage to your vehicle. torque of 4 lb-ft (6 Nm).
The clamping widths of the crossbars are
X Press cover strip H piece by piece into
factory set for your vehicle. These clamping
widths are solely intended for the designated groove of crossbar.
positions. X Install the crossbars as described
Only install the crossbars at the designated (Y page 196).

locations and pay attention to the stickers
Removing the crossbars
= FRONT and REAR (Y page 198).
: Key
? Screw for clamping claw
; Cover cap
A Clamping claw
= Sticker FRONT (or REAR)
G Screws for adjusting clamping width (2 in
? Screw for clamping claw
total for each side)
H Cover strip A Clamping claw
Z
X Unlock cover cap ; with key :. on the back of the front passenger seat.
X Remove cover cap ;. Otherwise, the OCS may not be able to
X Turn screws for clamping claws A properly approximate the occupant weight
counterclockwise until the crossbars can category.
be lifted from the roof rails.
G Warning!
Shortening the cover strip Parcel nets are intended for storing light-
The cover strips reduce the wind noise weight items only, such as road maps, mail,
Controls in detail
caused by the crossbars. In order to install etc.

add-on roof equipment, it may be necessary Heavy objects, objects with sharp edges, or
to shorten the cover strips. fragile objects may not be transported in the
parcel nets. In an accident, during hard
braking, or sudden maneuvers, they could be
thrown around inside the vehicle and cause
injury to vehicle occupants.
Parcel nets cannot protect transported goods
in the event of an accident.
Parcel nets are located in the front passenger

footwell and on each of the front seat
backrests.
H Cover strip
Cargo tie-down rings
X Pull cover strip H out of groove. Your vehicle is equipped with eight cargo tie-
X Attach add-on roof equipment to the down rings.
crossbars. Always follow loading instructions
X Place cover strip H flush against the add- (Y page 194).
on roof equipment, and mark the end of Carefully secure cargo by applying even load
crossbar on cover strip. on all the cargo tie-down rings with a rope of
X Cut off cover strip H at marked location. sufficient strength to hold down the cargo.
X Press cover strip H piece by piece into The maximum permissible weight per cargo
groove of the crossbar. tie-down ring is 331 lb (150 kg).
i Cover strips are available as Mercedes-

Benz accessories. Contact your Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Parcel nets
G Warning!
Vehicles with Occupant Classification System
(OCS)
Do not place objects with a combined weight
Cargo tie down rings, cargo compartment
of more than 4.4 lbs (2 kg) into the parcel net

Expanding cargo volume

You can separately fold each seat of the rear
passenger compartment to expand the cargo
volume.
You can expand the cargo volume
Rin part, i.e. folding third-row seats
(Y page 201)
Controls in detail
Rfully,i.e. folding second-row and third-row
seats (Y page 201)
Cargo tie down rings, second-row footwell
G Warning!
For Information on how to fold the third-row When expanding the cargo volume, always
seats, see “Expanding cargo volume” fully fold the corresponding seats and, if so
(Y page 201). equipped, always use the cargo net when
transporting cargo.
Unless you are transporting cargo, the seat
backrests must remain properly locked in the
upright position.
In an accident, during hard braking or sudden
maneuvers, loose items will be thrown around
inside the vehicle. This can cause injury to
vehicle occupants unless the items are
securely fastened in the vehicle.
Always use the cargo tie-down rings.
G Warning!
Hooks Never drive a vehicle with the tailgate open.
Deadly carbon monoxide (CO) gases may
Two hooks are located on the rear
enter vehicle interior resulting in
compartment trim panels, one on each side.
unconsciousness and death.
Use the hooks to secure light-weight items
only. The maximum permissible weight per
! When the second-row seats are folded
hook is 9 lbs (4 kg).
forward, the front seats may not be moved
to the rearmost position. Otherwise you
could damage the front and second-row
seats.
Expanding cargo volume in part

Folding third-row seats
There are several ways to fold the third-row
seats.
Use the left button, indicated by L, to fold
down the left third-row seat.
Z
Use the right button, indicated by R, to fold X Lower the head restraints of the third-row
down the right third-row seat. seats completely (Y page 88).
Two buttons are located on the right side trim X Remove cargo compartment cover blind
of the third-row seats. (Y page 205).
X Press button ; for each side until the
i It is only possible to fold the third-row
seats down when the rear right door is third-row seats are fully folded.
open.
Controls in detail
If a third-row seat is not engaged properly, for

Example, button for the left third-row seats example, the message 3rd Row Of Seats-
: Button for returning third-row seats to Right Not Locked appears in the
upright position multifunction display (Y page 125).
; Button for folding the third-row seats X Press button ; again, until the message
Two buttons are located on the passenger- disappears.
side in the cargo compartment.
i It is only possible to fold the third-row Expanding cargo volume fully
seats down when the tailgate is open. G Warning!
Folded second-row seats are intended to
serve as a cargo volume expansion in
conjunction with folded third-row seats only.
Do not fold the second-row seats and allow
third-row seat occupants to use folded
second-row seats as a footrest while driving.
Third-row seat occupants must, like all vehicle
occupants, keep both feet on the floor in front
of their seat. Otherwise, occupants could
slide under their seat belt in a collision. If
occupants slide under the seat belt, it would
Example, button for the right third-row seats
apply force at the abdomen or neck. That
: Button for returning third-row seats to could cause serious or even fatal injuries. Do
upright position not fold the second-row seats and allow third-
; Button for folding the third-row seats row seat occupants to use folded second-row
seats as a table while driving. Objects placed
on folded second-row seats may come loose
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or an

accident and be thrown around the vehicle

interior. Objects thrown around the vehicle
interior may cause an accident and/or
serious personal injury.
Folding second-row seats

! When the second-row seats are folded
forward, the front seats may not be moved
Controls in detail
to the rearmost position. Otherwise you
could damage the front and second-row
seats.
Folding third-row seats
X Lower the head restraints of the second-
Use the left button, indicated by L, to fold
row seats completely (Y page 88).
down the left third-row seat.
Use the right button, indicated by R, to fold
down the right third-row seat.
There are several ways to fold the third-row
seats.
Two buttons are located on the right side trim
of the third-row seats.
i It is only possible to fold the third-row
seats down when the rear right door is
open.
X Pull strap : in direction of arrow.

X Fold seat cushion ; forward.
Example, button for the left third-row seats

: Button for returning third-row seats to
upright position
; Button for folding the third-row seats
X Pull and hold lever = in direction of arrow Two buttons are located on the passenger-
at resistance point. side in the cargo compartment.
The seat backrest folds down.
X Check for secure locking by pushing and
pulling on the seat backrest.
Z
i It is only possible to fold the third-row Returning seats to their original position
seats down when the tailgate is open. G Warning!
Make sure all seats are properly locked in
position before driving off. Do not drive with
seats not properly locked.
Never ride in a moving vehicle with the seat
not properly locked as this can be dangerous.
Controls in detail
The seat could move forward and the seat

backrest could fold. You could slide under the
seat belt during braking, vehicle maneuvers,
or in an accident. If you slide under it, the seat
belt would apply force at the abdomen or
neck. That could cause serious or even fatal
Example, button for the right third-row seats
injuries. Never ride in a moving vehicle with
: Button for returning third-row seats to
the seat not properly locked as this can be
upright position
dangerous. The seat could move forward and
; Button for folding the third-row seats
the seat backrest could fold. You could slide
X Lower the head restraints of the third-row under the seat belt during braking, vehicle
seats completely (Y page 88). maneuvers, or in an accident. If you slide
under it, the seat belt would apply force at the
X Remove cargo compartment cover blind
abdomen or neck. That could cause serious
(Y page 205).
or even fatal injuries.
X Press button ; for each side until the
The seat backrest and seat belt provide the
third-row seats are fully folded. best restraint when the wearer is in a nearly
The cargo compartment is fully extended. upright position and the seat belt is properly
positioned on the body.
X Step 1: Return third-row seats to its

original position (Y page 203).
If a third-row seat is not engaged properly, for

example, the message 3rd Row Of Seats-
Right Not Locked appears in the
multifunction display (Y page 125).
X Press button ; again, until the message
disappears.

X Step 2: Pull and hold lever ; in direction X Rolling up: Disengage cargo compartment
of arrow at resistance point. cover blind and guide retraction by its
X Fold seat backrest : rearward until it handle :.
engages. Before removing or installing cargo
X Check for secure locking by pushing and compartment cover blind behind the third-
pulling on seat backrest :. row seats, fold the left or right third-row seat
forward (Y page 201). Afterwards, return the
left or right third-row seat into its original
Controls in detail
position.
Before installing cargo compartment cover
blind behind the second-row seats, fold the
third-row seats forward (Y page 201).
X Fold seat cushion = rearward until it locks

into position.
Cargo compartment cover blind

The cargo compartment cover blind can be X Removing: Roll up cargo compartment
installed behind the third-row seats or the cover blind.
second-row seats. X Push release button =.
! With the cargo compartment cover blind X Pull cargo compartment cover blind ? to
installed, do not pile luggage higher than the left.
the lower edges of the rear side windows. X Remove cargo compartment cover blind.
X Installing: Remove the mount covers in the

side trims of the third-row seats when
installing the cargo compartment cover
blind behind the second-row seats.
X Rolling out: Pull cargo compartment cover

blind on handle : across the cargo
compartment.
X Guide cargo compartment cover blind into
mounts ; and release. Mount cover behind second-row seats
Z
X Press on mount cover at its upper edge as backrests with smaller objects. For your
indicated by arrow. safety, always use the cargo net when
The mount cover’s lower edge flips up. transporting cargo.
X Remove mount cover by pulling its lower The cargo net can be installed behind the
edge out of the side trim. B-pillar or the C-pillar.
i To avoid loss of the mount covers, insert
the mount covers into the mounts currently
Controls in detail
not in use.
X Make sure release button = faces up and
the handle : is to the rear before inserting
the cargo compartment cover blind.
X Place left side of cargo compartment cover
blind in left mount.
X Position right side of cargo compartment
cover blind over right mount. RWith the cargo volume fully expanded
X Press release button = and guide cargo
(Y page 202), use holders : behind
compartment cover blind into mount. B-pillars and the cargo tie-down rings in the
X Make sure cargo compartment cover blind second-row footwell (Y page 201).
is securely fastened. RWith the cargo volume expanded in part
(Y page 201), use holders ; behind
C-pillars and the cargo tie-down rings
Cargo net behind the third-row seat backrests
G Warning! (Y page 200).
Make sure the cargo net is properly engaged X Open the hook and loop fasteners on the
at top and bottom position and the tightening cargo net package.
belts are securely fastened. X Roll out the cargo net.
Never use a damaged cargo net. X Unfold the cargo net.
Always use cargo net when transporting X Engage the upper cargo net bar.
cargo. This helps to avoid personal injury from The cargo net bar must engage audibly.
smaller objects being thrown around in the
occupant compartment during a collision or
Installing the cargo net
sudden maneuver.
The cargo net cannot prevent the movement
of large, heavier objects into the passenger
compartment in an accident. Such items must
be properly secured using the cargo tie-down
rings in the cargo compartment floor.
Passenger use of seats behind installed cargo
net is restricted because of the footwell being
taken up by the net.
Use of the cargo net is a particularly

important safety factor when the vehicle is
loaded higher than the top of the seat Cargo net installed behind the C-pillar

X Hang cargo net bar ; on holder : as X Loosen the tightening belt by pulling
indicated by the arrow. buckle : upward in direction of arrow.
X Push cargo net bar ; forward into X Remove belt hook ; from cargo tie-down
holder : in direction of arrow. ring =.
X Engage lower cargo net bar.
The cargo net bar must engage audibly. Removing and storing the cargo net
X Take cargo net bar ; (Y page 206) out of
Controls in detail
Pulling the cargo net tight holder : (Y page 206).
X Press the red button on the upper and lower
cargo net bar.
X Fold the cargo net.
X Roll up the cargo net.
X Close the hook and loop fasteners on the
cargo net package.
Front storage compartments
Belt hook attached behind the third-row seat G Warning!

backrest To help avoid personal injury during a collision
X
or sudden maneuver, exercise care when
Hook belt hook : into cargo tie-down
storing objects in the vehicle. Put luggage or
ring ; in direction of arrow.
cargo in the cargo compartment if possible.
X Pull tightening belt = by the loose end in Do not pile luggage or cargo higher than the
direction of arrow until the cargo net is seat backrests.
pulled tight. If so equipped, always use the cargo net when
X After driving a short distance, make sure transporting cargo. The cargo net cannot
the cargo net is still tight and, if necessary, secure hard or heavy objects.
pull it tight again. Parcel nets cannot secure hard or heavy
objects.
Loosening the cargo net Keep compartment lids closed. This will help
to prevent stored objects from being thrown
about and injuring vehicle occupants during
Rbraking
Rvehicle maneuvers
Ran accident
Glove box
Depending on vehicle equipment, an AUX
socket or a media interface is located in the
Belt hook attached behind the third-row seat glove box. For information on Audio AUX
backrest mode or on media interface, see separate
Z
Controls in detail
X Opening: Pull glove box lid release :. X Press the front of the cover briefly.
The cover opens automatically.
X Closing: Push glove box lid ; upwards
until it engages.
Front armrest storage compartment
You can lock the glove box, e.g. when the
vehicle is in the shop for service.
The glove box can only be locked or unlocked
with the mechanical key.
i The Roadside Assistance button º

(Y page 216) and the Information button
E (Y page 217) are located in the
1 Glove box unlocked storage compartment.
2 Glove box locked X Opening storage compartment: Pull
button : and lift up armrest.
Storage compartment in front center
console
In vehicles with enhanced off-road package,
the upper storage compartment contains a
control panel (Y page 123).
Coin holders = are located in front of storage

compartment ;.

Useful features 209
Rear storage compartments When not in use, keep the cup holder closed.
An open cup holder may cause injury to you
Depending on vehicle equipment, your
or others when contacted during braking,
vehicle may not be equipped with three
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident.
storage compartments in the front of the rear
seats. Keep in mind that objects placed in the cup
holder may come loose during braking,
vehicle maneuvers, or in an accident and be
thrown around in the vehicle interior. Objects
Controls in detail
thrown around in the vehicle interior may
cause an accident and/or serious personal
injury.
Cup holder in front center console

A cup holder and a removable card/ticket
holder are located in the front center console.
The cup holder can be removed for cleaning
: Storage compartment
purposes.
; Storage compartment cover
= Release button
? Storage compartment
X Briefly press release button = on storage

compartment cover ;.
The storage compartment opens
automatically.
Useful features
Cup holders X Removing: Hold cup holder at its
bridge ; and pull out bridge in direction of
G Warning! arrow.
In order to help prevent spilling liquids on X Pull cup holder : out in direction of arrow.
vehicle occupants and/or vehicle equipment,
X Reinstalling: First, insert cup holder :
only use containers that fit into the cup
and then insert bridge ;.
holder. Use lids on open containers and do
not fill containers to a height where the
contents, especially hot liquids, could spill Cup holder in rear armrest
during braking, vehicle maneuvers, or in an X Fold down the rear armrest.
accident. Liquids spilled on vehicle occupants
may cause serious personal injury. Liquids
spilled on vehicle equipment may cause
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Z
210 Useful features
Controls in detail
: Sun visor
! Do not sit on or lean your body weight ; Additional sun visor
against the armrest when it is folded down, = Vanity mirror lamp
as you could otherwise damage it.
? Vanity mirror cover
Cup holders in third-row side trims A Holder, e.g. for gas cards
B Vanity mirror
Cup holders are located in the side trims of
C Mounting
the third-row seats.
Glare through the windshield

X Flip sun visor : down when you
experience glare.
Glare through a door window

X Close vanity mirror cover ? if opened.
X Disengage sun visor : from mounting C.
X Pivot sun visor : to the side.
Sun visors
G Warning!
Do not use the vanity mirror while driving.
Keep the vanity mirrors in the sun visors
closed while vehicle is in motion. Reflected
glare can endanger you and others.
X Adjust sun visor : by pushing or pulling in

direction of arrows.
X Flip down additional sun visor ; when you
experience additional glare through the
windshield.

Useful features 211
Vanity mirror ! The storage compartment is not heat-

proof. Therefore, do not stub cigarettes in
Vanity mirror lamp = only functions when
the storage compartment.
sun visor : is engaged in mounting C.
X Flip sun visor down.
X Lift up vanity mirror cover ?.
Vanity mirror lamp = comes on.
Controls in detail
Rear panorama roof sunshade
The rear panorama roof sunshade over the
third-row seats prevents the sun from shining
directly into the vehicle.
You can open and close the sunshade by
hand. X Opening: Press cover ; briefly.
X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
! Always guide the sunshade. Do not let it
snap back abruptly, as it could be insert : on the sides and pull it out
damaged. upwards.
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install
ashtray insert :.
X Closing: Push cover ;.
Rear center console ashtray

! Close the ashtray when not in use and
before folding the second-row seats.
Otherwise you could damage the ashtray.
X Extending: Grasp on handle = and insert

clips ; into mounting :.
The third-row sunshade engages.
X Retracting: Press on button ? to
disengage the third-row sunshade from
mounting :.
Ashtrays
X Opening: Press cover ; briefly.
Center console ashtray X Removing ashtray insert: Grab ashtray
i A storage compartment is located under insert : on the sides and pull it out
the ashtray insert. upwards.
Z
212 Useful features
X Reinstalling ashtray insert: Install the lighter socket (for example extensive
ashtray insert :. connecting and disconnecting, or using
X Closing: Push cover ;. plugs that do not fit properly) can damage
the lighter socket. With the socket
damaged, the lighter may not function
properly any longer.
Cigarette lighter
G Observe Safety notes, see page 55. ! The cigarette lighter is not designed for
Controls in detail
use with the electric air pump. Use the

G Warning! power outlet in the second-row footwell for
Never touch the heating element or sides of electric air pump operation.
the lighter; they are extremely hot. Hold the
knob only.
Make sure any children traveling with you do Power outlets
not injure themselves or start a fire with the i You can use the power outlets even if the
hot cigarette lighter.
ignition is switched off.
If the engine is off and the cigarette lighter is An emergency shut-off feature is designed
being used extensively, the vehicle battery to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
may become discharged. from dropping below a minimum level. If
X Open the ashtray (Y page 211). the on-board voltage drops to this
minimum level, the power outlets are
automatically switched off, to help
preserve engine starting power.
12V Power outlets

! If you use all power outlets in the vehicle,
make sure that the maximum current
drawn does not exceed 55 A.
! The power outlets in the front passenger

footwell and cargo compartment are not
X
designed for use with the electric air pump.
Switch on the ignition.
Use the power outlet in the second-row
X Push in cigarette lighter :.
footwell for electric air pump operation.
Cigarette lighter : will pop out
The power outlets can be used to
automatically when hot.
accommodate 12V DC electrical accessories
X Take out cigarette lighter :.
(e.g. mobile phone chargers, auxiliary lamps)
X Reinsert cigarette lighter : in its socket up to a maximum of 20 A (240 W).
after use.
! The lighter socket can be used to
accommodate 12V DC electrical
accessories (up to a maximum of 180 W)
designed for use with the standard
“cigarette lighter” plug type. Keep in mind,
however, that connecting accessories to

Useful features 213
tapered objects. Keep the 115V AC socket

cover in the closed position, when not in use.
Otherwise, you could suffer an electric shock
and be seriously or even fatally injured.
G Warning!
A device that you connect must have a
suitable plug that complies with U.S.
Controls in detail
standards. Never pull on the cable to unplug
a plug from the 115V AC socket. Do not use
a damaged connection cable. The 115V AC
Front passenger footwell
socket may not be connected to another
115V AC power source. Do not use converters
to a grounding plug with the 115V AC socket.
This could cause serious personal injury to
you and/or others.
G Warning!
If the 115V AC socket is damaged or torn out
of the trim, do not use or touch the 115V AC
socket. Using a 115V AC socket that is
damaged or torn out of the trim could cause
serious personal injury to you and/or others.
Second-row footwell
Cargo compartment
The 115V AC socket : provides an
alternating current of 115 volts, which
115V AC Socket enables you to connect small electrical
devices with a combined received power of
G Warning! 150 W at most. You can connect small
The 115V AC socket operates at high voltage. devices such as game consoles, mobile
Use the 115V AC socket in the vehicle with phone chargers, laptops, etc.
the same caution and prudence that you
exercise when using power outlets at home.
Keep any fluids away from the 115V AC
socket. Do not clean the socket with fluids or
Z
214 Useful features
Prerequisites for operation: Tele Aid

RThe 12V power outlets in the second-row ! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
footwell and cargo compartment subscriber agreement must be completed.
(Y page 212) are operational. To ensure your system is activated and
RThe plug of the small device must be operational, please press Information
inserted fully into 115V AC socket :. button E to perform the acquaintance
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is within call. Failure to complete either of these
Controls in detail
the permissible voltage range. steps may result in a system that is not
activated.
RThe specified wattage of the small device
If you have any questions regarding
is identical or lower than the maximum
activation, please call the Customer
permissible wattage (150 W) of the 115V
Assistance Center at
AC socket :.
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
X Operation: Open cover =. (USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
X Insert the plug of the small device into only).
115V AC socket :. Shortly after the completion of your Tele Aid
LED ; comes on. acquaintance call, you will receive a user ID
If LED ; does not come on, refer to the and password in the mail. You may use this
section on possible nonoperation causes. password to access the Tele Aid section in
“Owner’s Online” at www.mbusa.com (USA
X Switching off: Pull the plug out of 115V AC
only). The “My Tele Aid” section will give you
socket :. access to account information, remote door
Do not pull on the cable. unlock and more.
X Close cover =. The Tele Aid system is available if
Possible nonoperation causes: Rit has been activated and is operational.
RThe on-board voltage of the vehicle is not Activation requires a subscription for
within the permissible voltage range. monitoring services, connection and
X Start the engine. cellular air time
Rvehicle battery power is available
RThe temperature of the DC/AC inverter is
temporarily too high. Rthe relevant cellular phone network and
X Pull the plug of the small device out of
GPS signals are available and pass the
information on to the Customer Assistance
115V AC socket : and plug it in again
Center
after waiting a few minutes.
RSome small devices have a continuous
i Location of the vehicle on a map is only
power rating of less than 150 W but a very possible if the vehicle is able to receive
high switch-on current. Such devices will signals from the GPS satellite network and
not operate. When connecting such a pass the information on to the Customer
device, 115V AC socket : will not provide Assistance Center.
power.
The Tele Aid system
If LED ; still does not come on, contact an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. (Telematic Alarm Identification on Demand)

Useful features 215
The Tele Aid system consists of three types If a malfunction is indicated as outlined above,
of response: the system may not operate as expected. In
RAutomatic and manual emergency case of an emergency, help will have to be
summoned by other means.
RRoadside Assistance
Have the system checked at the nearest
RInformation
Mercedes-Benz Center or contact the
To adjust the speaker volume during a Tele Customer Assistance Center at
Aid call do the following: 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
Controls in detail
(USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada only)
X Press button W or X on the
as soon as possible.
multifunction steering wheel.
or
Emergency calls
X Use the adjustment button on your
COMAND system. ! In order to activate the Tele Aid system, a
Be sure to check “Owner’s Online” at subscriber agreement must be completed.
www.mbusa.com (USA only) for more To ensure your system is activated and
information and a description of all available operational, please press Information
features. button E to perform the acquaintance
call. Failure to complete either of these
System self-test steps may result in a system that is not
activated.
The system performs a self-test after you If you have any questions regarding
have switched on the ignition. activation, please call the Customer
G Warning! Assistance Center at
A malfunction in the system has been 1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372)
detected if any or all of the following (USA only) or 1-888-923-8367 (Canada
conditions occur: only).
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button does An emergency call is initiated automatically
not come on during the system self-test. following an accident in which the Emergency
RThe indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance Tensioning Devices (ETDs) or air bags have
button º does not come on during the deployed.
system self-test. i An automatically initiated Tele Aid
RThe indicator lamp in Information button emergency call cannot be canceled.
E does not come on during the system An emergency call can also be initiated
self-test. manually (Y page 216).
RThe indicator lamp in the SOS button, Once the emergency call is in progress, the
Roadside Assistance button º, or indicator lamp in the SOS button will begin to
Information button E remains flash. The message Connecting Call
illuminated constantly in red after the appears in the multifunction display and the
system self-test. COMAND system is muted. When the
connection is established, the message
RThe message Tele Aid Inoperative or
Call Connected appears in the
Tele Aid Not Activated appears in the
multifunction display after the system self-
test All information relevant to the emergency,
such as the location of the vehicle
Z
216 Useful features
(determined by the GPS satellite location X Briefly press on cover : to open.

system), vehicle model, identification number X Press SOS button ; briefly.
and color are generated. The indicator lamp in SOS button ; will
A voice connection between the Customer flash until the emergency call is concluded.
Assistance Center and the occupants of the X Wait for a voice connection to the
vehicle will be established automatically soon Customer Assistance Center.
after the emergency call has been initiated.
X Close cover : after the emergency call is
The Customer Assistance Center will attempt
Controls in detail
to determine the nature of the emergency concluded.

more precisely, provided they can speak to G Warning!
an occupant of the vehicle.
If you feel at any way in jeopardy when in the
i If no vehicle occupant responds, an vehicle (e.g. smoke or fire in the vehicle,
ambulance will be sent to the vehicle vehicle in a dangerous road location), please
immediately. do not wait for voice contact after you have
pressed the emergency button. Carefully
G Warning!
leave the vehicle and move to a safe location.
If the indicator lamp in the SOS button is The Customer Assistance Center will
flashing continuously and there was no voice automatically contact local emergency
connection to the Customer Assistance officials with the vehicle’s approximate
Center established, then the Tele Aid system location if they receive an automatic SOS
could not initiate an emergency call (e.g. the signal and cannot make voice contact with the
relevant cellular phone network is not vehicle occupants.
available).
The message Call Failed appears in the X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
multifunction display for approximately the multifunction steering wheel.
10 seconds. or
Should this occur, assistance must be X Press the respective button for ending a
summoned by other means. telephone call on the COMAND system.
i The “911” emergency call system is a

Roadside Assistance button
public service. Using it without due cause
is a criminal offense. X Open the front armrest storage
compartment (Y page 208).
Initiating an emergency call manually

Useful features 217
X Press and hold Roadside Assistance system could not initiate a Roadside
button : for longer than 2 seconds. Assistance call (e.g. the relevant cellular
A call to a Mercedes-Benz Roadside phone network is not available). The
Assistance dispatcher will be initiated. The message Call Failed appears in the
indicator lamp in Roadside Assistance multifunction display.
button : will flash while the call is in
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on
progress. The message Connecting
the multifunction steering wheel.
Call will appear in the multifunction
Controls in detail
display and the COMAND system is muted. or
X Press the respective button for ending a
When the connection is established, the
message Call Connected appears in the telephone call on the COMAND system.
multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
transmit data generating the vehicle Information button
identification number, model, color and
X Open the front armrest storage
location (subject to availability of cellular and
compartment (Y page 208).
GPS signals).
i The COMAND system display indicates
that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
call is connected you can change to the
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI
button on the COMAND system. Spoken
commands are not available.
A voice connection between the Roadside
Assistance dispatcher and the occupants of
the vehicle will be established.
X Describe the nature of the need for
assistance. X Press and hold Information button : for
The Mercedes-Benz Roadside Assistance longer than 2 seconds.
dispatcher will either dispatch a qualified A call to the Customer Assistance Center
Mercedes-Benz technician or arrange to tow will be initiated. The indicator lamp in
your vehicle to the nearest authorized Information button : will flash while the
Mercedes-Benz Center. For services such as call is in progress. The message
labor and/or towing, charges may apply. Connecting Call will appear in the
Refer to the Roadside Assistance manual for multifunction display and the COMAND
more information. system is muted.
Sign and Drive services (USA only): When the connection is established, the
Services such as a jump start, a few gallons message Call Connected appears in the
of fuel or the replacement of a flat tire with multifunction display. The Tele Aid system will
the vehicle spare wheel are obtainable at no transmit data generating the vehicle
charge. identification number, model, color and
i If the indicator lamp in Roadside location (subject to availability of cellular and
Assistance button : is flashing GPS signals).
continuously and there was no voice i The COMAND system display indicates
connection to the Customer Assistance that a Tele Aid call is in progress. While the
Center established, then the Tele Aid call is connected you can change to the
Z
218 Useful features
navigation menu by pressing the NAVI i When a Tele Aid call has been initiated,
button on the COMAND system. Spoken the COMAND system audio is muted. The
commands are not available. mobile phone is no longer connected to the
A voice connection between the Customer COMAND system. If you must use this
Assistance Center representative and the phone, we recommend that you use it only
occupants of the vehicle will be established. with the vehicle at a standstill in a safe
Information regarding the operation of your location.
vehicle, the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Controls in detail
Benz Center or Mercedes-Benz USA products Destination Download to the COMAND

and services is available to you. system
For more details concerning the Tele Aid i The components and operating principles
system, please visit www.mbusa.com (USA of the COMAND system can be found in the
only), log in to “Owner’s Online” and visit the separate COMAND system operating
“My Tele Aid” section to learn more. instructions.
i If the indicator lamp in Information Destination Download allows you access to a
button : is flashing continuously and database of over 10 million points of interest
there was no voice connection to the (POIs) that can be downloaded to your
Customer Assistance Center established, vehicle’s navigation system. If you know the
then the Tele Aid system could not initiate destination, the address can be downloaded,
an Information call (e.g. the relevant or can be provided with points of interests
cellular phone network is not available). near your location.
The message Call Failed appears in the
multifunction display. Route guidance
You will be prompted to confirm that route
X Terminating calls: Press button ~ on guidance to the entered address is to be
the multifunction steering wheel. started.
or X Select Yes using button = or ; on
X Press the respective button for ending a the COMAND system.
telephone call on the COMAND system. X Press button 9 on the COMAND system
to confirm.
Call priority
The system calculates the route and
If other service calls such as a Roadside subsequently starts the route guidance to the
Assistance call or Information call are active, defined address.
an emergency call is still possible. In this i If you select No, you can save the address
case, the emergency call will take priority and
to your address book.
override all other active calls.
The indicator lamp in the respective button i The Destination Download feature is
flashes until the call is concluded. Automatic available if the relevant mobile phone
initiated emergency calls can only be network is available and data connection is
terminated by a Customer Assistance Center possible.
representative. All other calls can be
terminated by pressing button ~ on the Search & Send
multifunction steering wheel or the
respective button for ending a telephone call “Search & Send” is a navigation destination
on the COMAND system. address entry service. For more information

Useful features 219
on “Search & Send”, refer to separate Stolen Vehicle Recovery Services

In the event your vehicle was stolen:
Remote door unlock X Report the incident to the police.
The police will issue a numbered incident
In case you have locked your vehicle report.
unintentionally (e.g. SmartKey inside vehicle), X Pass this number on to the Customer
and the reserve SmartKey is not available:
Assistance Center along with your
Controls in detail
X Contact the Customer Assistance Center password.
at 1-800-FOR-MERCedes The Customer Assistance Center will then
(1-800-367-6372) (USA only) or attempt to covertly contact the vehicle’s
1-888-923-8367 (Canada only). Tele Aid system. Once the vehicle is
You will be asked to provide your password. located, the Customer Assistance Center
X Then return to your vehicle at the time will contact the local law enforcement and
arranged and pull the tailgate recessed you. The vehicle’s location will only be
handle (Y page 75) for a minimum of provided to law enforcement.
20 seconds until the indicator lamp in the
SOS button is flashing. i If the anti-theft alarm stays on for more
The message Connecting Call appears in than 30 seconds, the Tele Aid system will
the multifunction display. notify the Customer Assistance Center
automatically.
As an alternative, you may unlock the vehicle
via Internet in the “My Tele Aid” section of
“Owner’s Online”, using your ID and password
Garage door opener
(USA only).
The integrated remote control can operate up
i The remote door unlock feature is
to three separately controlled devices
available if the relevant cellular phone
compatible with HomeLink® or some other
network is available.
systems.
The SOS button will flash and the message
Call Connected will appear in the G Warning!
multifunction display to indicate receipt of Before programming the integrated remote
the door unlock command. control to a garage door opener or gate
If the tailgate recessed handle was pulled operator, make sure people and objects are
for more than 20 seconds before door out of the way of the device to prevent
unlock authorization was received by the potential harm or damage. When
Customer Assistance Center, you must programming a garage door opener, the door
wait 15 minutes before pulling the tailgate moves up or down. When programming a gate
recessed handle again. operator, the gate opens or closes.
Do not use the integrated remote control with
any garage door opener that lacks safety stop
and reverse features as required by U.S.
federal safety standards (this includes any
garage door opener model manufactured
before April 1, 1982). A garage door that
cannot detect an object - signaling the door
to stop and reverse - does not meet current
U.S. federal safety standards.
Z
220 Useful features
When programming a garage door opener, transmitter buttons, do not repeat this step
park vehicle outside the garage. and begin directly with step 3.
Do not run the engine while programming the X Step 3: Hold the end of hand-held remote
integrated remote control. Inhalation of control A of the device you wish to train
exhaust gas is hazardous to your health. All approximately 2 to 12 in (5 to 30 cm) away
exhaust gas contains carbon monoxide (CO), from the signal transmitter button (;, =
and inhaling it can cause unconsciousness or ?) to be programmed, while keeping
and possible death. indicator lamp : in view.
Controls in detail
X Step 4: Using both hands, simultaneously

press hand-held remote control button B
and the desired signal transmitter button
(;, = or ?). Do not release the buttons
until step 5 is completed.
Indicator lamp : will flash, first slowly and
then rapidly.
i Indicator lamp : flashes immediately
the first time the signal transmitter button
is programmed. If this button has already
been programmed, the indicator lamp will
Interior rear view mirror with integrated remote
control start flashing after 20 seconds.
Hand-held remote control A is not part of the X Step 5: After indicator lamp : changes
vehicle equipment. from a slow to a rapidly flashing light,
release the hand-held remote control
Programming the integrated remote button and the signal transmitter button.
control X Step 6: Press and hold the just-trained
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?) and
X Step 1: Switch on the ignition. observe indicator lamp :.
X Step 2: If you have previously programmed
If indicator lamp : stays on constantly,
a signal transmitter button and wish to programming is complete and your device
retain its programming, proceed to step 3. should activate when the respective signal
or transmitter button (;, = or ?) is pressed
X If you are programming the integrated and released.
remote control for the first time, press and
hold the two outer signal transmitter i If indicator lamp : flashes rapidly for
buttons ; and ? and release them when approximately 2 seconds and then turns to
indicator lamp : begins to flash after a constant light, continue with
approximately 20 seconds. programming steps 8 through 12 as your
garage door opener may be equipped with
Do not hold the buttons for longer than
the “rolling code” feature.
30 seconds.
This procedure erases any previous X Step 7: To program the remaining two
settings for all three channels and signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
initializes the memory. If you later wish to above starting with step 3.
program a second and/or third hand-held
transmitter to the remaining two signal

Useful features 221
Rolling code programming Gate operator/Canadian programming

To train a garage door opener (or other rolling Canadian radio-frequency laws require
code devices) with the rolling code feature, transmitter signals to “time-out” (or quit)
follow these instructions after completing the after several seconds of transmission which
“Programming” portion (steps 1 through 6) of may not be long enough for the integrated
this text. For your convenience and to signal transmitter to pick up the signal during
complete the procedure faster, you might programming. Similar to this Canadian law,
want to have someone assist you. some U.S. gate operators are designed to
Controls in detail
X Step 8: Locate the “training” button on the “time-out” in the same manner.
garage door opener motor head unit. If you live in Canada or if you are having
difficulties programming a gate operator
i Exact location and color of the button may (regardless of where you live) by using the
vary by garage door opener brand. programming procedures, replace step 4 with
Depending on manufacturer, the “training” the following:
button may also be referred to as “learn” or X Step 4: Press and hold the signal
“smart” button. If there is difficulty locating
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not
the transmitting button, refer to the garage
door opener Operator’s Manual. release this button until it has been
successfully trained.
X Step 9: Press the “training” button on the X While still holding down the signal
garage door opener motor head unit. transmitter button (;, = or ?), “cycle”
The “training light” is activated.
your hand-held remote control button B
You have 30 seconds to initiate the as follows: Press and hold button B for
following two steps. 2 seconds, then release it for 2 seconds,
X Step 10: Return to the vehicle and firmly and again press and hold it for 2 seconds.
press, hold for 2 seconds and release the Repeat this sequence on the hand-held
programmed signal transmitter button (;, remote control until the frequency signal
= or ?). has been learned.
X Step 11: Press, hold for 2 seconds and Upon successful training, indicator
release same signal transmitter button a lamp : will flash slowly and then rapidly
second time to complete the training after several seconds.
process. X Proceed with programming step 5 and
step 6 to complete.
i Some garage door openers (or other
rolling code equipped devices) may require i Upon completion of programming the
you to press, hold for 2 seconds and integrated remote control, make sure you
release the same signal transmitter button retain the hand-held remote control that
a third time to complete the training came with the garage door opener, gate
process. operator or other device. You may need it
X Step 12: Confirm the garage door for use in other vehicles, for future
operation by pressing the programmed programming of an integrated remote
signal transmitter button (;, = or ?). control, or simply for continued use as a
hand-held remote control to operate the
X Step 13: To program the remaining two
respective device in other situations.
signal transmitter buttons, repeat the steps
above starting with step 3.
Z
222 Useful features
Reprogramming a single signal Programming tips

transmitter button
If you are having difficulty programming the
To program a device using a signal integrated remote control, here are some
transmitter button previously trained, follow helpful tips:
these steps: RCheck the frequency of hand-held remote
X Switch on the ignition. control A (typically located on the reverse
X Press and hold the desired signal side of the remote). The integrated remote
Controls in detail
transmitter button (;, = or ?). Do not control is compatible with radio-frequency

release the button. devices operating between 280-390 MHz.
Indicator lamp : will begin to flash after RPut a new battery in hand-held remote
20 seconds. control A. This will increase the likelihood
X Without releasing the signal transmitter of the hand-held remote control sending a
button, proceed with programming starting stronger and more accurate signal to the
with step 3. integrated remote control.
RWhile performing step 3, hold hand-held
Operation of integrated remote control remote control A at different lengths and
X Switch on the ignition. angles from the signal transmitter button
X Select and press the appropriate
(;, = or ?) you are programming.
integrated signal transmitter button (;, Attempt varying angles at the distance of 2
to 12 inches (5 to 30 cm) away or the same
= or ?) to activate the remote controlled
angle at varying distances.
device.
The integrated remote control transmitter RIf another hand-held remote control is
continues to send the signal as long as the available for the same device, try the
button is pressed – up to 20 seconds. programming steps again using that other
hand-held remote control. Make sure new
Erasing the integrated remote control batteries are in the hand-held remote
memory control before beginning the procedure.
RStraighten the antenna wire from the
i If you sell your vehicle, erase the codes of garage door opener assembly. This may
all three channels. help improve transmitting and/or receiving
X Switch on the ignition. signals.
X Simultaneously press and hold outer signal i Certain types of garage door openers are
transmitter buttons ; and ?, for incompatible with the integrated remote
approximately 20 seconds, until indicator control. If you should experience further
lamp : flashes rapidly. Do not hold for difficulties with programming the
longer than 30 seconds. integrated remote control, contact an
The codes of all three channels are erased. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or call
the Mercedes-Benz Customer Assistance
Center (USA only) at
1-800-FOR-MERCedes (1-800-367-6372),
or the HomeLink® Hotline (USA only) at
1-800-355-3515, or the Customer Service
(Canada only) at 1-800-387-0100.

Useful features 223
i USA only: Floormats

This device complies with Part 15 of the
FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the G Warning!
following two conditions: Whenever you are using floormats, make sure
there is enough clearance and that the
1. This device may not cause harmful
floormats are securely fastened.
interference, and
Floormats should always be securely fastened
2. this device must accept any using the fastening equipment.
Controls in detail
Before driving off, check that the floormats
are securely in place and adjust them if
operation.
necessary. A loose floormat could slip and
Any unauthorized modification to this hinder proper functioning of the pedals.
device could void the user’s authority to Do not place several floormats on top of each
operate the equipment. other as this may impair pedal movement.
i Canada only: X Move the driver’s seat or front passenger
This device complies with RSS-210 of seat as far to the rear as possible.
Industry Canada. Operation is subject to
the following two conditions:
and
operation of the device.
X Removing: Pull floormat off of retainer
pins :.
Compass X Installing: Press floormat eyelets ; onto
X Calling up the compass: Press button retainer pins :.
V or U on the multifunction steering
wheel repeatedly until the off-road menu
appears in the multifunction display. Infrared reflecting windshield
The compass displays the direction into
which the vehicle is currently traveling: N, Infrared reflecting glass reduces the amount
NE, E, SE, S, SW, W, or NW. of radiated heat entering the vehicle interior
through the windows.
The infrared reflecting glass also prevents the
transmission of signals through the glass by
in-vehicle electronic devices, e.g. electronic
toll collection devices.
Z
224 Useful features
X Press the seat cover down until it engages.

X Make sure the seat cover is engaged
properly by folding the seat all the way in
and out.
Controls in detail
To allow the use of these devices in the

vehicle, infrared transparent areas : are
placed in the windshield.
Seat cover under third-row seats

If something falls under the third-row seats,
you can remove the seat cover in order to
reach under the seats.
Example passenger side

X Removing: Fold the respective seat
halfway in or out (Y page 201).
X Reach into the recess in the seat cover.
X Pull the seat cover in direction of arrow.
X Remove the seat cover to reach under the
seats.
X Installing: Fold the seat halfway in or out
(Y page 201).
X Put the seat cover back into place using the
guide pins.

225
Vehicle equipment ............................ 226

The first 1000 miles (1500 km) ....... 226
At the gas station ............................. 226
Engine compartment ........................ 228
Tires and wheels ............................... 233
Winter driving ................................... 257
Driving instructions .......................... 259
Maintenance ...................................... 273
Vehicle care ....................................... 275
Operation

226 At the gas station
Vehicle equipment At the gas station
i This Operator’s Manual describes all Refueling

features, standard or optional, potentially G Warning!
available for your vehicle at the time of Gasoline and diesel fuels are highly flammable
purchase. Please be aware that your and poisonous. They burn violently and can
vehicle might not be equipped with all cause serious injury.
features described in this manual.
Never allow sparks, flames or smoking
materials near gasoline or diesel fuel!
The first 1000 miles (1500 km) Turn off the engine before refueling.
Operation
Whenever you are around gasoline or diesel

The more cautiously you treat your vehicle fuel, avoid inhaling fumes and any skin or
during the break-in period, the more satisfied clothing contact. Extinguish all smoking
you will be with its performance later on. materials.
RDrive your vehicle during the first Direct skin contact with fuels and the
1 000 miles (1 500 km) at varying but inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
moderate vehicle and engine speeds. health.
RDuring this period, avoid heavy loads (full
G Warning!
throttle driving) and excessive engine
Overfilling of the fuel tank may create
speeds (no more than 2/3 of maximum rpm
pressure in the system which could cause a
in each gear). gas discharge. This could cause the gas to
RAvoid accelerating by kickdown. spray back out when removing the fuel pump
RDo not attempt to slow the vehicle down by nozzle, which could cause personal injury.
shifting to a lower gear using the gear
G Warning!
selector lever.
Do not fill diesel tanks with gasoline. Do not
RSelect gear ranges 3, 2 or 1 (Y page 118) mix diesel fuel with gasoline. Otherwise the
only when driving at moderate speeds (for fuel system and engine could be damaged. In
hill driving). addition, the vehicle could catch fire.
After 1 000 miles (1 500 km) you may
gradually increase vehicle and engine speeds ! Never refuel vehicles with gasoline engine
to the permissible maximum. with diesel fuel. Never refuel vehicles with
All of the above instructions, as may apply to diesel engine with gasoline. Even small
your vehicle type, also apply when driving the amounts of incorrect fuel will damage the
first 1 000 miles (1 500 km) after the engine, fuel system and engine. Damage resulting
the transfer case, the center differential or from the use of non-approved fuels or fuel
the rear differential have been replaced. additives or resulting from mixing gasoline
with diesel fuel or vice versa is not covered
i Always obey applicable speed limits. by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
! If you have accidentally filled the tank

with incorrect or non-approved fuel, do not
switch on the ignition. Otherwise the
incorrect or non-approved fuel will get into
the fuel lines. The fuel system must be

At the gas station 227
drained completely. Contact an authorized For more information on gasoline, see

Mercedes-Benz Center to have the fuel “Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
system drained completely. engine)” (Y page 371), see “Fuel
requirements” (Y page 371), or contact an
! Gasoline engine: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
To prevent damage to the catalytic www.mbusa.com (USA only).
converters, only use premium unleaded
gasoline in this vehicle. i Diesel engine:
Any noticeable irregularities in engine Only use commercially available vehicular
operation should be repaired promptly. ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL
Otherwise, excessive unburned fuel may FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM).
Operation
reach the catalytic converter, causing it to Information on diesel quality can normally
overheat and potentially start a fire. be found on the fuel pump. Please contact
gas station personnel in case labels on the
! Diesel engine: pump cannot be found.
When filling the diesel fuel tank using fuel For more information on diesel fuels, see
containers, place a filling filter, a suede “Fuel requirements” (Y page 371), or
cloth or a clean flannel cloth as a filter. contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Otherwise, particles from the fuel container Center, or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
could clog the fuel lines and/or the diesel only).
injection system.
i Diesel engine:
! Diesel engine: If you have driven the vehicle until the tank
The engine is more susceptible to wear and is empty, the fuel system needs to be bled
damage if you use (Y page 345).
Rmarine diesel fuel Locking/unlocking the vehicle with the
SmartKey or KEYLESS-GO automatically
Rheating oil
locks/unlocks the fuel filler flap.
Radditives
i In case the central locking system does
The exhaust aftertreatment device will be not release the fuel filler flap, see “Fuel filler
seriously damaged if you use any other flap” (Y page 324).
diesel fuel than ULTRA-LOW SULFUR
HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm The fuel filler flap is located on the right-hand
SULFUR MAXIMUM). side of the vehicle towards the rear.
The use of such non-approved fuels and/or
special additives is not covered by the
i Gasoline engine:
Only use premium unleaded gasoline with
a minimum Posted Octane Rating of 91
(average of 96 RON/86 MON).
Information on gasoline quality can
normally be found on the fuel pump. Please
contact gas station personnel in case
labels on the pump cannot be found. X Turn off the engine.
Z
228 Engine compartment
i Leaving the engine running and the fuel in the winter months. Check with your fuel
filler cap open can cause the yellow fuel retailer.
tank reserve warning lamp to flash and the
malfunction indicator lamp ! (USA
only) or ; (Canada only) to illuminate. Check regularly and before a long trip
For more information, see also “Practical For information on quantities and
hints” (Y page 320). requirements of operating agents, see “Fuels,
coolants, lubricants, etc.” (Y page 368).
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
switch. Check the following:
KEYLESS-GO: Open the driver’s door. This REngine oil level (Y page 230)
Operation
puts the starter switch in position 0, same RTire inflation pressure (Y page 237)
as with the SmartKey removed from the
starter switch. The driver’s door then can
RCoolant level (Y page 231)
be closed again. RVehicle lighting (Y page 328)
X Opening: Press fuel filler flap : at the RWasher system and headlamp cleaning
point indicated by the arrow. system (Y page 232)
X Turn fuel filler cap ; counterclockwise. RBrake fluid (Y page 233)
X Take off fuel filler cap ;.
! The fuel filler cap is tethered to the fuel Engine compartment

filler neck. Do not drop the cap. It could
damage the vehicle paint finish. Hood
X Set fuel filler cap ; on fuel filler flap :. G Warning!
X Fully insert filler nozzle unit and refuel. Do not pull the release lever while the vehicle
X Only fill your tank until the filler nozzle unit is in motion. Otherwise the hood could be
cuts out – do not top off or overfill. forced open by passing air flow.
This could cause the hood to come loose and
X Closing: Turn fuel filler cap ; clockwise
injure you and/or others.
until it audibly engages.
i Close the fuel filler flap before locking the Opening
vehicle. Otherwise the flap locking pin will
prevent closing the fuel filler flap. G Warning!
Do not open the hood when the engine is
X Close fuel filler flap :.
overheated. You could be seriously injured.
Observe the coolant temperature display to
Low outside temperatures (diesel determine whether the engine may be
engine) overheated. If you see flames or smoke
coming from the engine compartment, move
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not away from the vehicle. Wait until the engine
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene. has cooled. If necessary, call the fire
The fuel system and engine will otherwise department.
be damaged, which is not covered by the
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
improved cold flow characteristics is offered

Engine compartment 229
G Warning!
You could be injured when the hood is open –
even when the engine is turned off.
Parts of the engine can become very hot. To
prevent burns, let the engine cool completely
before touching any components on the
vehicle. Comply with all relevant safety
precautions.
G Warning!
Operation
To help prevent personal injury, stay clear of
X Pull hood lock release lever :.
moving parts when the hood is open and the
engine is running. The hood is unlocked.
The radiator fan may continue to run for ! Never open the hood if the wiper arms are
approximately 30 seconds or may even folded forward away from the windshield.
restart after the engine has been turned off. Otherwise the windshield wipers or the
Stay clear of fan blades. hood could be damaged.
G Warning!
Vehicles with gasoline engine:
The engine is equipped with a transistorized
ignition system. Because of the high voltage
it is dangerous to touch any components
(ignition coils, spark plug sockets, diagnostic
socket) of the ignition system
Rwith the engine running
Rwhile starting the engine
Rwhen the ignition is switched on and the
engine is turned manually X Press and hold handle ;.
The hood is unlocked.
G Warning! X Pull up on the hood in direction of arrow
Vehicles with diesel engine: and then release it.
The engine is equipped with a high-voltage The hood will be held open at shoulder
electronic control unit for the injection height by gas-filled struts automatically.
system. Because of the high voltage it is
dangerous to touch any components of the
Closing
injection system (injectors, electrical wires)
Rwith the engine running G Warning!
Rwhile starting the engine When closing the hood, use extreme caution
not to catch hands or fingers. Be careful that
Rwhen the ignition is switched on you do not close the hood on anyone.
Make sure the hood is securely engaged
before driving off. Do not continue driving if
the hood can no longer engage after an
Z
accident, for example. The hood could must have been stationary for at least
otherwise come loose while the vehicle is in 5 minutes with the engine turned off.
motion and injure you and/or others.
Checking engine oil level
X Let the hood drop from a height of
X Open the hood (Y page 228).
approximately 8 in (20 cm).
X Check to make sure the hood is fully
closed.
If you can raise the hood at a point above
the headlamps, then it is not properly
Operation
closed. Open it again and let it drop with

somewhat greater force.
Radiator
i Vehicles with diesel engine:
Do not cover the radiator, for example with Example illustration: Gasoline engine
a winter front or bug cover. Otherwise the
readings of the on-board diagnostic system
may be inaccurate. Some of theses
readings are required by law and must be
accurate at all times.
Engine oil
The amount of oil your engine consumes will
depend on a number of factors, including
driving style. Increased oil consumption can
Example illustration: Diesel engine
occur when the vehicle is new or the vehicle
is driven frequently at higher engine speeds. X Pull out oil dipstick :.
Engine oil consumption checks should only X Wipe oil dipstick : clean.
be made after the vehicle break-in period.
X Slowly insert oil dipstick : fully into the
! Do not use any special lubricant additives, dipstick guide tube.
as these may damage the drive assemblies. X Pull out oil dipstick : again after
Using special additives not approved by approximately 3 seconds to obtain
Mercedes-Benz may cause damage not accurate reading.
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited The oil level is correct when it is between
Warranty. lower (min) mark = and upper (max)
For further information contact an mark ; of oil dipstick :.
i The filling quantity between the upper and
Notes on checking engine oil level lower marks on the oil dipstick is
approximately 2.1 US qt. (2.0 l).
When checking the oil level the vehicle must
be parked on level ground and the vehicle X If necessary, add engine oil.

Engine compartment 231
For more information on engine oil, see Be careful not to spill any oil when adding.
“Fuels, coolants, lubricants etc.” Avoid environmental damage caused by oil
(Y page 368). entering the ground or water.
For information on messages in the ! Excess oil must be siphoned or drained
multifunction display concerning engine oil, off. It could cause damage to the engine
see the “Practical hints” section and emission control system not covered
(Y page 308). by the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Adding engine oil X Screw filler cap : back on filler neck.

For more information on engine oil, see the
! Only use approved engine oils and oil
Operation
“Technical data” section (Y page 368) and
filters required for vehicles with
(Y page 370).
Maintenance System. For a listing of
approved engine oils and oil filters, contact
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Transmission fluid level
visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
The following will result in engine or The transmission fluid level does not need to
emission control system damage not be checked. If you notice transmission fluid
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited loss or gearshifting malfunctions, have an
Warranty: authorized Mercedes-Benz Center check the
transmission.
RUsing engine oils and oil filters of
specification other than those expressly
required for the Maintenance System. Coolant level
RChanging of oil and oil filter at change
The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
intervals longer than those called for by
anticorrosion/antifreeze.
the Maintenance System.
When checking the coolant level, the vehicle
RUsing any oil additives. must be parked on level ground, and the
coolant temperature must be below 158‡
(70†).
G Warning!
In order to avoid any potentially serious burns:
RUse extreme caution when opening the
hood if there are any signs of steam or
coolant leaking from the cooling system, or
if the coolant temperature display indicates
that the coolant is overheated.
RDo not remove the cap on the coolant
Example illustration: GL 450 (GL 350 BlueTEC, expansion tank if the coolant temperature
GL 550 similar) is above 158‡ (70†). Allow the engine to
X Unscrew filler cap : from filler neck. cool down before removing the cap. The
coolant expansion tank contains hot fluid
X Add engine oil as required. Be careful not
and is under pressure.
to overfill with oil.
Z
RUsing a rag, slowly open the cap antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess ignite and burn. You could be seriously
pressure. If opened immediately, scalding burned.
hot fluid and steam will be blown out under
pressure. ! Always use washer solvent/antifreeze
RDo not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. where temperatures may fall below
Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which freezing point. Failure to do so could result
may burn if it comes into contact with hot in damage to the washer system/fluid
engine parts. reservoir.
! Only use washer fluid which is suitable for

Operation
plastic lenses. Improper washer fluid can

damage the plastic lenses of the
headlamps.
! Do not use distilled or deionized water in

the washer fluid reservoir. Otherwise, the
washer fluid level sensor could be
damaged.
X Using a rag, slowly open cap ;

approximately 1/2 turn to relieve excess
pressure.
X Continue turning cap ; counterclockwise
and remove it.
The coolant level is correct if the level
Rfor cold coolant: reaches marking
bar : in coolant expansion tank =
Fluid for the washer system, rear window
Rfor warm coolant: is approximately 0.6 in washer system, and the headlamp cleaning
(1.5 cm) higher system is supplied from the washer fluid
X Add coolant as required. reservoir.
X Screw cap ; back on and tighten it. During all seasons, use MB Windshield
Washer Concentrate “MB SummerFit”. Mix it
For more information on coolant, see the
with water or premixed washer solvent/
“Technical data” section (Y page 369) and
antifreeze depending on the ambient
(Y page 373).
temperature (Y page 375).
X Opening washer fluid reservoir: Pull tab
Washer system and headlamp of cap : upwards.

cleaning system X Refill the washer fluid reservoir.
X Closing washer fluid reservoir: Press
G Warning!
cap : onto filler hole until it engages.
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/

Tires and wheels 233
For more information, see “Washer system contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
and headlamp cleaning system” If incorrectly sized rims and tires are
(Y page 370). mounted, the wheel brakes or suspension
components can be damaged. Also, the
operating clearance of the wheels and the
Brake fluid level tires may no longer be correct.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
G Warning!
fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire
mark or below, have the brake system
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if
checked for brake pad thickness and leaks
the tires have sustained damage, replace
Operation
immediately. Contact an authorized
them.
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately. Do
not add brake fluid as this will not solve the When replacing rims, only use genuine
problem. For more information, see Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts specified for the
“Practical hints”. particular rim type. Failure to do so can result
in the bolts loosening and possibly an
When checking the brake fluid level, the accident.
vehicle must be parked on level ground.
Retreaded tires are not tested or
recommended by Mercedes-Benz, since
previous damage cannot always be
recognized on retreads. The operating safety
of the vehicle cannot be assured when such
tires are used.
G Warning!
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you
should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
The brake fluid level is correct when it is carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
between lower mark (MIN) ; and upper an area which is a safe distance from the road.
mark (MAX) : of the brake fluid reservoir. Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
Tires and wheels nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or
Safety notes tire dealer for repairs.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center G Warning!

for information on tested and recommended Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects
rims and tires for summer and winter the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You
operation. They can also offer advice could lose control of the vehicle. Continued
concerning tire service and purchase. driving with a flat tire or driving at high speed
G Warning! with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-
up and possibly a fire.
Replace rims or tires with the same
designation, manufacturer and type as shown
on the original part. For further information
Z
234 Tires and wheels
Important guidelines in handling or steering problems, or brake

ROnly
failure.
use sets of tires and rims of the same
type and make. Your vehicle is equipped with the Tire and
RTires must be of the correct size for the rim. Loading Information placard located on the
RBreak
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 242).
in new tires for approximately
60 miles (100 km) at moderate speeds. The tire inflation pressure should be checked
regularly. Only adjust the tire inflation
RRegularly check the tires and rims for pressure on cold tires. The tires can be
damage. Dented or bent rims can cause tire considered cold if the vehicle has been
inflation pressure loss and damage to the parked for at least 3 hours or driven less than
Operation
tire beads. 1 mile (1.6 km). Depending on the ambient

RIf the vehicle is heavily loaded, check tire temperature, the driving speed and the tire
inflation pressure and correct as required. load, the tire temperature changes. When the
RDo
tire temperature changes by 18‡ (10†), the
not allow your tires to wear down too
tire inflation pressure will change by
far. Adhesion properties on wet roads are
approximately 1.5 psi (0.1 bar). Keep this in
sharply reduced at tread depths of less
mind when checking tire inflation pressure on
than 1/8 in (3 mm).
warm tires and adjust the tire pressure only
RWhen replacing individual tires, you should if the tire inflation pressure is too low for the
mount new tires on the front wheels first current operating conditions. If you check the
(on vehicles with same-sized wheels all tire inflation pressure when the tires are
around). warm, the reading will be higher than the cold
reading. This is normal. Do not let air out to
match the specified cold tire inflation
Recommended tire inflation pressure pressure. Otherwise, the tire will be
underinflated.
G Warning! Follow recommended cold tire inflation
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures. pressures listed on Tire and Loading
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires Information placard on the driver’s door
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely B-pillar.
affect handling and fuel economy, and are Keeping the tires properly inflated provides
more likely to fail from being overheated. the best handling, tread life and riding
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can comfort.
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, In addition to the Tire and Loading
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, Information placard on the driver’s door
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) B-pillar, also consult the tire inflation
because they are more likely to become pressure label on the inside of the filler flap
punctured or damaged by road debris, for any additional information pertaining to
potholes etc. special driving situations. For more
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the information, see “Important notes on tire
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire inflation pressure” (Y page 235).
and Loading Information placard on the
i Data shown on Tire and Loading
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Information placard example are for
can overheat them, possibly causing a
illustration purposes only. Tire data are
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
specific to each vehicle and may vary from

data shown in the following illustration. i Driving comfort may be reduced when the
Refer to Tire and Loading Information tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the
placard on vehicle for actual data specific value for speeds above 100 mph
to your vehicle. (160 km/h) as specified on the tire inflation
pressure label located on the inside of the
fuel filler flap.
Make sure to readjust the tire inflation
pressure for normal driving speeds.
Supplemental tire inflation pressure
information for different loading conditions of
Operation
the vehicle can be found on the tire inflation
pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
flap.
For the tire inflation pressure for spare
The Tire and Loading Information placard lists wheels such as Minispare wheels or spare
the recommended cold tire inflation wheels with collapsible tire refer to
pressures : for maximum loaded vehicle Rthe yellow label on the spare wheel rim
weight. The tire inflation pressures listed
Rthe “Technical data” section of this
apply to the tires installed as original
equipment. Operator’s Manual (Y page 368)
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on
Important notes on tire inflation the driver’s door B-pillar
pressure Unless specified otherwise, the tire inflation
G Warning! pressures on the tire inflation pressure label
are valid for all approved, factory-equipped
If the tire inflation pressure drops repeatedly,
tires.
check the tires for punctures from foreign
objects and/or whether air is leaking from the i Data shown on tire inflation pressure
valves or from around the rim. label examples are for illustration purposes
only. Tire inflation pressure data are
Tire temperature and tire inflation pressure specific to each vehicle and may vary from
are also increased while driving, depending data shown in the following illustrations.
on the driving speed and the tire load. Refer to the tire inflation pressure label on
If you will be driving your vehicle at high vehicle for actual data specific to your
speeds of 100 mph (160 km/h) or higher, vehicle.
where it is legal and conditions allow, consult
the tire inflation pressure label on the inside
of the fuel filler flap on how to adjust the cold
tire inflation pressure. If you do not adjust the
tire inflation pressure, excessive heat can
build up and result in sudden tire failure.
If you are not sure about the proper tire
inflation pressure, contact an authorized
Z
i When towing a trailer, inflate the tires to

the tire inflation pressure as specified for a
fully loaded vehicle.
Potential problems associated with

underinflated and overinflated tires
Underinflated tires
G Warning!
Follow recommended tire inflation pressures.
Operation
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for all Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
approved, factory equipped tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely
When a tire size is specified, the tire inflation affect handling and fuel economy, and are
pressure that follows applies to that more likely to fail from being overheated.
particular tire size only.
Underinflated tires can
Rcause excessive and uneven tire wear
Radversely affect fuel economy
Rlead to tire failure from being overheated
Radversely affect handling characteristics
Overinflated tires
G Warning!
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures for adversely affect handling and ride comfort,
particular tire sizes
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance,
Some tire inflation pressure labels may only and result in sudden deflation (blowout)
show the rim diameter instead of the entire because they are more likely to become
tire size, e.g. R 18 or 18". punctured or damaged by road debris,
The rim diameter is part of the tire size as potholes etc.
specified on the tire sidewall (Y page 251).
Overinflated tires can
Radversely affect handling characteristics
Rcause uneven tire wear
Rbe more prone to damage from road
hazards
Radversely affect ride comfort
Rincrease stopping distance
Example illustration: Tire inflation pressures

specific to rim diameter

Checking tire inflation pressure stem of the valve with e.g. a tip of a pen.
Then recheck the tire inflation pressure
Safety notes with the tire gauge.
X Install the valve cap.
G Warning!
X Repeat this procedure for each tire.
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely Tire pressure loss warning system
affect handling and fuel economy, and are (Canada only)
more likely to fail from being overheated. While the vehicle is being driven, the tire
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can pressure loss warning system monitors the
Operation
adversely affect handling and ride comfort, set tire inflation pressures by evaluating each
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, wheel’s rotational speed. This allows the
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) system to detect a significant loss of pressure
because they are more likely to become in a tire. If a wheel’s rotational speed changes
punctured or damaged by road debris, due to falling tire inflation pressure, you will
potholes etc. see a corresponding warning message in the
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the multifunction display.
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire The tire pressure loss warning system may
and Loading Information placard on the function in a restricted manner or with a delay
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires Rwhen snow chains are mounted to the
vehicle
in handling or steering problems, or brake Rin the presence of ice and snow
failure. Rwhen you are driving on a loose surface
(e.g. sand or gravel)
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once
a month. Rwhen you are driving in a very sporty
Check and adjust the tire inflation pressure manner (involving rapid acceleration or
when the tires are cold (Y page 234). high speeds in curves)
G Warning!
Checking tire inflation pressure
When the multifunction display shows the
manually
message Tire Pressure Check Tires, one
Follow the steps below to achieve correct tire or more of your tires are significantly
inflation pressure: underinflated. You should stop and check
X Remove the cap from the valve on one tire. your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
X Firmly press a tire gauge onto the valve.
them to the proper tire inflation pressure as
indicated on the vehicle’s Tire and Loading
X Read the tire inflation pressure on the tire
Information placard or on the tire inflation
gauge and check against the pressure label.
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Driving on a significantly underinflated tire
Tire and Loading Information placard on the
causes the tire to overheat and can lead to
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 242). If
tire failure. Underinflation also reduces fuel
necessary, add air to achieve the
efficiency and tire tread life, and may affect
recommended tire inflation pressure.
the vehicle’s handling and stopping ability.
X If you have overfilled the tire, release tire
inflation pressure by pushing the metal
Z
Each tire, including the spare, should be Restarting the tire pressure loss warning
checked at least once a month when cold. system
Inflate the tires to the recommended tire The tire pressure loss warning system must
inflation pressure as specified on be restarted in the following situations:
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard on Rafter you have changed the tire inflation
the driver’s door B-pillar pressure
or Rafter you have replaced the wheels or tires
Rthe tire inflation pressure label located on Rafter you have installed new wheels or tires
the inside of the fuel filler flap
X Using the Tire and Loading Information
Operation
placard on the driver’s door B-pillar or, if

i The recommended tire inflation pressures available, the tire inflation pressure label on
for your vehicle can be found on the inside of the fuel filler flap, make sure
Rthe Tire and Loading Information placard the tire inflation pressure of all four tires is
located on the driver’s door B-pillar correct.
(Y page 242)
G Warning!
Rthe tire inflation pressure label on the
The tire pressure loss warning system can
inside of the fuel filler flap
only warn you in a reliable manner if you have
The tire inflation pressures are not listed in set the correct tire inflation pressures for
the Operator’s Manual. each tire.
G Warning! If an incorrect tire inflation pressure was set,
the system will monitor the pressure
The tire pressure loss warning system does
according to the incorrect value.
not provide a warning for wrongly selected tire
inflation pressures. Always adjust tire
inflation pressure according to the Tire and
X Make sure the standard display appears in
Loading Information placard on the driver’s
door B-pillar or on the tire inflation pressure the multifunction display (Y page 128).
label located on the inside of the fuel filler flap. X Press button * or & on the
The tire pressure loss warning system does multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
not replace regular checks of the tire inflation until the following message appears in the
pressures since a gradual pressure loss in multifunction display:
more than one tire cannot be detected by the Run Flat Indicator
tire pressure loss warning system. Active
The tire pressure loss warning system is not Menu: R-Button
able to issue a warning due to a sudden X Press the reset button (Y page 124).
dramatic loss of tire inflation pressure (e.g. The following message will appear in the
tire blowout caused by a foreign object). In multifunction display:
this case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully Restart
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt Run Flat Indicator?
steering maneuvers. X If you wish to confirm: Press button
W.
The following message will appear in the
multifunction display:
Run Flat Indicator
Restarted

After a certain “learning phase”, the tire G Warning!

pressure loss warning system checks the Each tire, including the spare (if provided),
set pressure values for all four tires. should be checked at least once a month
X If you wish to cancel: Press button X. when cold and inflated to the inflation
pressure recommended by the vehicle
Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring manufacturer on the Tire and Loading
System (Advanced TPMS), (USA only) Information placard on the driver’s door B-
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the
Your vehicle is equipped with the Advanced inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has
Tire Pressure Monitoring System (Advanced tires of a different size than the size indicated
TPMS). It measures the tire inflation pressure
Operation
on the Tire and Loading Information placard
in the vehicle’s tires and issues warnings in or the tire inflation pressure label, you should
case of pressure loss in one or more of the determine the proper tire inflation pressure
tires. for those tires.
The TPMS is equipped with a combination low As an added safety feature, your vehicle has
tire pressure/ TPMS malfunction telltale in been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring
the instrument cluster. Depending on how the system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire
telltale illuminates, it indicates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your
pressure condition or a malfunction in the tires are significantly underinflated.
TPMS system itself: Accordingly, when the low tire pressure
RIf the telltale illuminates continuously, one telltale illuminates, you should stop and check
or more of your tires is significantly your tires as soon as possible, and inflate
underinflated. There is no malfunction in them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
the TPMS. significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
RIf to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
the telltale flashes for 60 seconds and
then stays illuminated, the TPMS system Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
itself is not operating properly. and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
handling and stopping ability. Please note that
The TPMS only functions on wheels that are the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
equipped with the proper electronic sensors. maintenance, and it is the driver’s
G Warning! responsibility to maintain correct tire
The TPMS does not indicate a warning for pressure, even if underinflation has not
wrongly selected inflation pressures. Always reached the level to trigger illumination of the
adjust tire inflation pressure according to the TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
Tire and Loading Information placard or the Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
supplemental tire inflation pressure TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
information on the inside of the fuel filler flap. the system is not operating properly. The
The TPMS is not able to issue a warning due TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
to a sudden dramatic loss of pressure (e.g. tire the low tire pressure telltale. When the
blowout caused by a foreign object). In this system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
case bring the vehicle to a halt by carefully flash for approximately 1 minute and then
applying the brakes and avoiding abrupt remain continuously illuminated. This
steering maneuvers. sequence will continue upon subsequent
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction
exists. When the malfunction indicator is
Z
illuminated, the system may not be able to

detect or signal low tire pressure as intended.
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of
reasons, including the installation of
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
TPMS from functioning properly. Always
check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
replacing one or more tires or wheels on your When the vehicle has been parked for longer
vehicle to ensure that the replacement or than 20 minutes, the message Tire
pressure displayed after driving
Operation
alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to

continue to function properly. for a few minutes. appears in the
i If a condition causing the TPMS to The TPMS recognizes new wheels or sensors
malfunction develops, it may take up to automatically after the learn-in phase. As long
10 minutes for the system to signal a as the tire inflation pressure values cannot be
malfunction using the TPMS telltale allocated to the individual wheels, the
flashing and illumination sequence. message Tire Pressure Monitor Active
The telltale extinguishes after a few appears. Despite this message, the tire
minutes driving if the malfunction has been inflation pressure values are monitored
corrected. already.
Tire pressure inquiries are made using the i With a spare wheel mounted, the system
multifunction display. The current tire may still indicate the tire inflation pressure
inflation pressure for each tire appears in the of the removed road wheel for some
multifunction display after a few minutes of minutes. If this happens, keep in mind that
driving. the indicated value where the spare wheel
is mounted does not reflect the actual
i Possible differences between the spare tire inflation pressure.
readings of a tire pressure gauge of an air
hose, e.g. gas station equipment, and the i Operating radio transmission equipment
vehicle’s control system can occur. The tire (e.g. wireless headsets, two-way radios) in
pressure displayed by the control system or near the vehicle could cause the TPMS
apply to sea level. In high-altitude to malfunction.
locations, the reading on a tire pressure
gauge will be higher than the reading issued i This device complies with Part 15 of the
by the vehicle’s control system. Do not FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the
reduce the tire inflation pressure under following two conditions:
such circumstances.
1. This device may not cause harmful
X Switch on the ignition. interference, and
X Press button V or U on the 2. this device must accept any
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly interference received, including
until the standard display appears in the interference that may cause undesired.
multifunction display (Y page 128). Any unauthorized modification to this
X Press button & or * until the current device could void the user’s authority to
inflation pressure for each tire appears in operate the equipment.

Tire inflation pressure warnings X Using the Tire and Loading Information
If the system detects a significant loss of tire placard on the driver’s door B-pillar
inflation pressure in one or more than one (Y page 242) or the supplemental tire
tire, a message appears in the multifunction inflation pressure information on the inside
display. In addition, an acoustic warning of the fuel filler flap, make sure the tire
sounds and the low tire pressure telltale in the inflation pressure of all four tires is correct.
instrument cluster comes on. X Switch on the ignition.
X Press button V or U on the
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly
until the standard display appears in the
Operation
you see the current inflation pressures for
each tire appear in the display or the
Example illustration following message appears in the
The respective tire is indicated by a red multifunction display:
rectangle. Tire pressure
displayed after
Restarting Advanced TPMS driving for
G Warning! a few minutes.
It is the driver’s responsibility to set the tire X Press the reset button (Y page 124).
inflation pressure to the recommended cold The following message will appear in the
tire inflation pressure. Underinflated tires multifunction display:
affect the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. Restart tire
You might lose control over the vehicle. pressure monitor?
X If you wish to confirm: Press button
When you restart the TPMS, the system sets
W.
new reference values for each tire.
The following message will appear in the
The TPMS must be restarted when you have
multifunction display:
adjusted the tire inflation pressure to a new
Tire Pressure Monitor
level (e.g. because of different load or driving
Restarted
conditions). The TPMS is then recalibrated to
the current tire inflation pressures. After driving a few minutes the system
verifies that the current tire inflation
Restart the TPMS after adjusting the tire
pressures are within the system’s specified
inflation pressure to the inflation pressure
range. Afterwards the current tire inflation
recommended for the vehicle operating
pressures are accepted as reference values
condition. Tire pressure should only be
and then monitored.
adjusted on cold tires. Observe the
X If you wish to cancel: Press button X.
recommended tire inflation pressure on the
Tire and Loading Information placard on the i When the wheel positions have been
driver’s door B-pillar. Some vehicles may have changed, the inflation pressure of a tire
supplemental tire pressure information for may be displayed for the wrong position
driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads less temporarily. After driving for a few minutes,
than the maximum loaded vehicle condition. the inflation pressure will be shown for the
If such information is provided, it can be correct position.
found on the inside of the fuel filler flap.
Z
Maximum tire inflation pressure B-pillar. This placard tells you important
information about the number of people
G Warning! that can be in the vehicle and the total
Never exceed the maximum tire inflation weight that can be carried in the vehicle.
pressure. Follow recommended tire inflation It also contains information on the proper
pressures. size and recommended tire inflation
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires pressures for the original equipment tires
wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely on your vehicle.
affect handling and fuel economy, and are (2) The certification label, also found on the
more likely to fail from being overheated. driver’s door B-pillar. It tells you about the
gross weight capacity of your vehicle,
Operation
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can

adversely affect handling and ride comfort, called the Gross Vehicle Weight Rating
wear unevenly, increase stopping distance, (GVWR). The GVWR includes the weight
and result in sudden deflation (blowout) of the vehicle, all occupants, fuel and
because they are more likely to become cargo. The certification label also tells
punctured or damaged by road debris, you about the front and rear axle weight
potholes etc. capacity, called the Gross Axle Weight
Rating (GAWR).
The GAWR is the total allowable weight
that can be carried by a single axle (front
or rear). Never exceed the GVWR or
GAWR for either the front axle or rear
axle.
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data

on tires are specific to each vehicle and
may vary from data shown in above
illustration.
This is the maximum permissible tire inflation
pressure : for the tire.
Always follow the recommended tire inflation
pressure (Y page 234) for proper tire
inflation.
Loading the vehicle

: Driver’s door B-pillar
Two labels on your vehicle show how much
weight it may properly carry. Following is a discussion on how to work with
the information contained on the Tire and
(1) The Tire and Loading Information placard
can be found on the driver’s door

Loading Information placard with regards to applicable) should never exceed the weight
loading your vehicle. referenced in that statement.
Tire and Loading Information Seating capacity

G Warning! i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the Information placard example are for
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire illustration purposes only. Seating capacity
and Loading Information placard on the data are specific to each vehicle and may
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires vary from data shown in the following
can overheat them, possibly causing a illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Operation
blowout. Overloading the tires can also result Information placard on vehicle for actual
in handling or steering problems, or brake data specific to your vehicle.
failure.
Tire and Loading Information placard

i Data shown on Tire and Loading
Information placard example are for
illustration purposes only. Load limit data
are specific to each vehicle and may vary
from data shown in the following
illustration. Refer to Tire and Loading
Information placard on vehicle for actual
data specific to your vehicle.
The seating capacity gives you important
information on the number of occupants that
can be in the vehicle. Observe front and rear
seating capacity. The Tire and Loading
Information placard showing seating
capacity : is located on the driver’s door
B-pillar (Y page 242).
Steps for determining correct load limit

The following steps have been developed as
required of all manufacturers under Title 49,
Code of U.S. Federal Regulations, Part 575
The Tire and Loading Information placard
pursuant to the “National Traffic and Motor
showing load limit information : is located
Vehicle Safety Act of 1966”.
on the driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 242).
X Step 1: Locate the statement “The
X Locate the statement “The combined
combined weight of occupants and cargo
weight of occupants and cargo should
should never exceed XXX kg or XXX lbs.”
never exceed XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.”
on your vehicle’s Tire and Loading
on the Tire and Loading Information
Information placard.
placard.
X Step 2: Determine the combined weight of
The combined weight of all occupants,
the driver and passengers that will be riding
cargo/luggage and trailer tongue load (if
in your vehicle.
Z
X Step 3: Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from
XXX kilograms or XXX lbs.
X Step 4: The resulting figure equals the
available amount of cargo and luggage load
capacity. For example, if the “XXX” amount
equals 1 400 lbs and there will be five
150 lbs passengers in your vehicle, the
amount of available cargo and luggage load
capacity is 650 lbs
(1 400 - 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).
Operation
X Step 5: Determine the combined weight of

luggage and cargo being loaded on the
vehicle. That weight may not safely exceed
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity calculated in step 4.
X Step 6 (if applicable): If your vehicle will
be towing a trailer, load from your trailer
will be transferred to your vehicle. Consult
this manual to determine how this reduces
the available cargo and luggage load
capacity of your vehicle (Y page 246).
The following table shows examples on how
to calculate total and cargo load capacities
with varying seating configurations and
number and size of occupants. The following
examples use a load limit of 1 500 lbs. This
is for illustration purposes only. Make sure
you are using the actual load limit for your
vehicle stated on the vehicle’s Tire and
Loading Information placard (Y page 243).

Example 1 Example 2 Example 3

Step 1 Combined weight limit 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs 1 500 lbs
of occupants and cargo
from Tire and Loading
Information placard

Step 2 Number of occupants 5 3 1
(driver and passengers)
Operation
Seating configuration front: 2 front: 1 front: 1
rear: 3 rear: 2
Occupants weight Occupant 1: Occupant 1: Occupant 1:
150 lbs 200 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 2: Occupant 2:
180 lbs 190 lbs
Occupant 3: Occupant 3:
160 lbs 150 lbs
Occupant 4:
140 lbs
Occupant 5:
120 lbs
Combined weight of all 750 lbs 540 lbs 150 lbs
occupants

Step 3 Available cargo/ 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs - 1 500 lbs -
luggage and trailer 750 lbs = 540 lbs = 150 lbs =
tongue weight (total 750 lbs 960 lbs 1 350 lbs
load limit from Tire and
Loading Information
placard minus
combined weight of all
occupants)
The higher the weight of all occupants, the Certification label

less cargo and luggage load capacity is
Even after careful determination of the
available.
combined weight of all occupants, cargo and
For more information, see “Trailer tongue the trailer tongue load (if applicable)
load” (Y page 246). (Y page 246) as to not exceed the
permissible load limit, you must make sure
your vehicle never exceeds the Gross Vehicle
Z
Weight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle

Weight Rating (GAWR) for either the front or
rear axle. You can obtain the GVWR and
GAWR from the certification label. The
certification label can be found on the driver’s
door B-pillar, see the “Technical data” section
(Y page 360).
Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR): The
total weight of the vehicle, all occupants, all
cargo, and the trailer tongue load (if
applicable) must never exceed the GVWR.
Operation
Gross Axle Weight Rating (GAWR): The total i For illustration purposes only. Actual data
allowable weight that can be carried by a on tires are specific to each vehicle and
single axle (front or rear). may vary from data shown in above
To assure that your vehicle does not exceed illustration.
the maximum permissible weight limits The maximum tire load rating : is the
(GVWR and GAWR for front and rear axle), maximum weight the tires are designed to
have the loaded vehicle (including driver, support.
passengers and all cargo and, if applicable,
For more information on tire load rating, see
trailer fully loaded) weighed on a suitable
(Y page 251).
commercial scale.
For information on calculating total and cargo
Trailer tongue load load capacities, see (Y page 243).
The tongue load of any trailer is an important

weight to measure because it affects the load Direction of rotation
you can carry in your vehicle. If a trailer is
Unidirectional tires offer added advantages,
towed, the tongue load must be added to the
such as better hydroplaning performance. To
weight of all occupants riding and any cargo
benefit, however, you must make sure the
you are carrying in the vehicle. The tongue
tires rotate in the direction specified.
load typically is between 8% and 15% of the
trailer weight and everything loaded in it. An arrow on the sidewall indicates the
intended direction of rotation of the tire.
Spare wheels may be mounted against the
Maximum tire load direction of rotation (spinning) even with a
unidirectional tire for temporary use only until
G Warning! the regular drive wheel has been repaired or
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the replaced. Always observe and follow
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire applicable temporary use restrictions and
and Loading Information placard on the speed limitations indicated on the spare
driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires wheel.
in handling or steering problems, or brake MOExtended system
failure.
The MOExtended system allows you to
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires.

You may only use the MOExtended system in Make sure you also inspect the spare tire
conjunction with the tire pressure loss periodically for condition and inflation. Spare
warning system (Y page 237) or the tires will age and become worn over time even
Advanced TPMS (Y page 239). if never used, and thus should be inspected
and replaced when necessary.
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit.
When retrofitting with tires that do not have Life of tire
run-flat characteristics, e.g. winter tires, G Warning!
you should also equip your vehicle with a
Tires and spare tire should be replaced after
TIREFIT kit. TIREFIT kits are available at any
6 years, regardless of the remaining tread.
Operation
For information on driving in case of pressure The service life of a tire is dependent upon
loss in one or more tires (emergency mode), varying factors including but not limited to:
see the “Practical hints” section RDriving style
(Y page 345). RTire inflation pressure
RDistance driven
Tire care and maintenance
Tread depth
G Warning!
Regularly check the tires for damage. G Warning!
Damaged tires can cause tire inflation Although the applicable federal motor vehicle
pressure loss. As a result, you could lose safety laws consider a tire to be worn when
control of your vehicle. the treadwear indicators (TWI) become visible
Worn, old tires can cause accidents. If the tire at approximately 1/16 in (1.6 mm), we
tread is worn to minimum tread depth, or if recommend that you do not allow your tires
the tires have sustained damage, replace to wear down to that level. As tread depth
them. approaches 1/8 in (3 mm), the adhesion
Check the tire inflation pressure at least once properties on a wet road are sharply reduced.
a month. For more information on checking Depending upon the weather and/or road
tire inflation pressure, see “Recommended surface (conditions), the tire traction varies
tire inflation pressure” (Y page 234). widely.
Do not allow your tires to wear down too far.

Tire inspection
Adhesion properties on wet roads are sharply
Every time you check the tire inflation reduced at tread depths of less than 1/8 in
pressure, you should also inspect your tires (3 mm).
for the following: Treadwear indicators (TWI) are required by
Rexcessive treadwear (Y page 247) law. These indicators are located in six places
Rcord or fabric showing through the tire’s on the tread circumference and become
rubber visible at a tread depth of approximately
1/ in (1.6 mm), at which point the tire is
16
Rbumps, bulges, cuts, cracks or splits in the
considered worn and should be replaced.
tread or side of the tire
The recommended minimum tire tread depth
Replace the tire if you find any of the above for summer tires is 1/8 in (3 mm). The
conditions.
Z
recommended minimum tire tread depth for regarding tire performance. Tire
winter tires is 1/6 in (4 mm). manufacturers are required to grade tires
based on three performance factors:
treadwear :, traction ;, and temperature
resistance =. Although not a Government of
Canada requirement, all tires made for sale in
North America have these grades branded on
the sidewall.
Operation

illustration.
Quality grades can be found, where
Treadwear indicator : appears as a solid
applicable, on the tire sidewall between tread
band across the tread. shoulder and maximum section width. For
example:
Storing tires
Treadwear Traction Temperature
! Keep unmounted tires in a cool, dry place
with as little exposure to light as possible. 200 AA A
Protect tires from contact with oil, grease
and fuels. All passenger car tires must conform to
federal safety requirements in addition to
Cleaning tires these grades.
! Never use a round nozzle to power wash
Treadwear
tires. The intense jet of water can result in
damage to the tire. The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
Always replace a damaged tire. based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
U.S. Government test course. For example, a
Uniform Tire Quality Grading tire graded 150 would wear one and one-half
Standards (1 1/2) times as well on the government
course as a tire graded 100.
The relative performance of tires depends
upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from
the norm due to variations in driving habits,
service practices and differences in road
characteristics and climate.
Traction
G Warning!
The Uniform Tire Quality Grading is a U.S. The traction grade assigned to this tire is
Government requirement designed to give based on straight-ahead braking traction
drivers consistent and reliable information

tests, and does not include acceleration, excessive heat build-up and possible tire
cornering, hydroplaning, or peak traction failure.
characteristics.
The temperature grades are A (the highest),
The traction grades, from highest to lowest, B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to
are AA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the generation of heat and its ability to
the tire’s ability to stop on wet pavement as dissipate heat when tested under controlled
measured under controlled conditions on conditions on a specified indoor laboratory
specified government test surfaces of asphalt test wheel. Sustained high temperature can
and concrete. A tire marked C may have poor cause the material of the tire to degenerate
traction performance. and reduce tire life, and excessive
Operation
temperature can lead to sudden tire failure.
G Warning! The grade C corresponds to a level of
If ice has formed on the road, tire traction will performance which all passenger car tires
be substantially reduced. Under such weather must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
conditions, drive, steer and brake with Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
extreme caution. represent higher levels of performance on the
The safe speed on a wet, snow covered or icy laboratory test wheel than the minimum
road is always lower than on a dry road. required by law.
You should pay particular attention to the
condition of the road whenever the outside
Rotating tires
temperature is close to the freezing point.
Mercedes-Benz recommends winter tires G Warning!
(Y page 257) with a minimum tread depth of Rotate front and rear wheels only if the tires
approximately 1/6 in (4 mm) on all four wheels are of the same dimension.
for the winter season to ensure normal If your vehicle is equipped with mixed-size
balanced handling characteristics. On tires (different tire dimensions front vs. rear),
packed snow, they can reduce your stopping tire rotation is not possible.
distance compared to summer tires.
Stopping distance, however, is still G Warning!
considerably greater than when the road is Have the tightening torque checked after
not covered with snow or ice. Exercise changing a wheel. The wheels could come
appropriate caution. loose if they are not tightened to a torque of
! Avoid spinning of a drive wheel. This may 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).
cause serious damage to the drivetrain Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts
which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz specified for your vehicle’s rims.
Limited Warranty. Tire rotation can be performed on vehicles
with tires of the same dimension all around.
Temperature If your vehicle is equipped with tires of the
same dimension all around, tires can be
G Warning!
rotated, observing a front-to-rear rotation
The temperature grade for this tire is
pattern that will maintain the intended
established for a tire that is properly inflated
rotation (spinning) direction of the tire
and not overloaded. Excessive speed,
(Y page 246).
underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause In some cases, such as when your vehicle is
equipped with mixed-size tires (different tire
Z
dimension front vs. rear), tire rotation is not

possible.
If applicable to your vehicle’s tire
configuration, tires can be rotated according
to the tire manufacturer’s recommended
intervals in the tire manufacturer’s warranty
pamphlet located in your vehicle literature
portfolio. If none is available, tires should be
rotated every 3 000 to 6 000 miles (5 000 to
10 000 km), or sooner if necessary, according
to the degree of tire wear. The same rotation
Operation
(spinning) direction must be maintained.

Rotate tires before the characteristic tire
wear pattern becomes visible (shoulder wear
on front tires and tread center wear on rear
tires).
: Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards
Thoroughly clean the mounting face of wheels (Y page 248)
and brake disks, i.e. the inner side of the
; DOT, Tire Identification Number
wheels/tires, during each rotation. Check for
(Y page 253)
and ensure proper tire inflation pressure.
= Maximum tire load (Y page 246)
For information on wheel change, see “Flat
tire” (Y page 336). ? Maximum tire inflation pressure
(Y page 242)
A Manufacturer
Tire labeling B Tire ply material (Y page 254)
Besides tire name (sales designation) and C Tire size designation, load and speed
manufacturer name, a number of markings rating (Y page 251)
can be found on a tire. D Load identification (Y page 253)
Following are some explanations for the E Tire name
markings on your vehicle’s tires:
illustration.
For more information, see “Rims and tires”
(Y page 365).

Tire size designation, load and speed Aspect ratio

rating Aspect ratio ; is the dimensional
relationship between tire section height and
section width and is expressed in percentage.
The aspect ratio is arrived at by dividing
section height by section width.
Tire code
Tire code = indicates the tire construction
type. The “R” stands for radial tire type. Letter
“D” means diagonal or bias ply construction;
Operation
letter “B” means belted-bias ply construction.
At the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
: Tire width with a speed capability above 149 mph
; Aspect ratio in % (240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
= Radial tire code designation (for example: 245/40 ZR 18). For
additional information, see “Tire speed
? Rim diameter
rating” (Y page 252).
A Load index
B Speed symbol Rim diameter
Rim diameter ? is the diameter of the bead
i For illustration purposes only. Actual data seat, not the diameter of the rim edge. The
on tires are specific to each vehicle and rim diameter is indicated in inches (in).
illustration. Load index
General: Depending on the design standards G Warning!
used, the tire size molded into the sidewall The tire load rating must always be at least
may have no letter or a letter preceding the half of the GAWR of your vehicle. Otherwise,
tire size designation. tire failure may be the result which may cause
No letter preceding the size designation (as an accident and/or serious injury to you or
illustrated above): Passenger car tire based others.
on European design standards. Always replace rims and tires with the same
Letter “P” preceding the size designation: designation, manufacturer and type as shown
Passenger car tire based on U.S. design on the original part.
standards.
G Warning!
Letter “LT” preceding the size designation:
Do not overload the tires by exceeding the
Light Truck tire based on U.S. design
specified load limit as indicated on the Tire
standards.
and Loading Information placard on the
Letter “T” preceding the size designation: driver’s door B-pillar. Overloading the tires
Temporary spare tires which are high can overheat them, possibly causing a
pressure compact spares designed for blowout. Overloading the tires can also result
temporary emergency use only. in handling or steering problems, or brake
Tire width failure.
Tire width : indicates the nominal tire width Load index A is a numerical code associated
in millimeters. with the maximum load a tire can support.
Z
For example, a load rating of 91 corresponds Index Speed rating

to a maximum load of 1356 lb (615 kg) the
tire is designed to support. See also ZR...(..Y) above 186 mph (300 km/h)
“Maximum tire load” (Y page 246) where the
ZR above 149 mph (240 km/h)
maximum load associated with the load index
is indicated in kilograms and lbs.
RAt the tire manufacturer’s option, any tire
For additional information on the load index,
see “Load identification” (Y page 253). with a speed capability above 149 mph
(240 km/h) can include a “ZR” in the size
Speed symbol designation (for example: 245/40 ZR18).
G Warning! To determine the maximum speed
Operation
capability of the tire, the service

Even when permitted by law, never operate a
description for the tire must be referred to.
vehicle at speeds greater than the maximum
speed rating of the tires. The service description is comprised of
load index A and speed symbol B.
Exceeding the maximum speed for which tires
are rated can lead to sudden tire failure, If your tire includes “ZR” in the size
causing loss of vehicle control and possibly designation and no service description is
resulting in an accident and/or serious given, the tire manufacturer must be
personal injury and possible death, for you consulted for the maximum speed
and for others. capability.
If a service description is given, the speed
Regardless of the tire speed rating, local capability is limited by the speed symbol in
speed limits should be obeyed. Use prudent the service description. Example:
driving speeds appropriate to prevailing 245/40 ZR18 97Y. In this example, “97Y”
conditions. is the service description. The letter “Y”
Speed symbol B indicates the approved designates the speed rating and the speed
maximum speed (tire speed rating) for the capability of the tire is limited to 186 mph
tire. (300 km/h).
Summer tires RAny tire with a speed capability above
Index Speed rating 186 mph (300 km/h) must include a “ZR”
in the size designation AND the service
Q up to 100 mph (160 km/h) description must be placed in parenthesis.
Example: 275/40 ZR 18 (99Y). The “(Y)”
R up to 106 mph (170 km/h)
speed symbol in parenthesis designates
S up to 112 mph (180 km/h) the maximum speed capability of the tire
as being above 186 mph (300 km/h).
T up to 118 mph (190 km/h) Consult the tire manufacturer for the actual
H up to 130 mph (210 km/h) maximum permissible speed of the tire.
All-season and winter tires
V up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
Index Speed rating
W up to 168 mph (270 km/h)
Q M+S17 up to 100 mph (160 km/h)
Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
T M+S17 up to 118 mph (190 km/h)
ZR...Y up to 186 mph (300 km/h)
17 or M+Sifor winter tires

Index Speed rating Load identification
H M+S17 up to 130 mph (210 km/h)

V M+S17 up to 149 mph (240 km/h)
i Not all M+S rated tires provide special

winter performance. Make sure the tires
you use show M+S and the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire
Operation
sidewall. These tires meet specific snow
traction performance requirements of the
Rubber Manufacturers Association (RMA)
and the Rubber Association of Canada
(RAC) and have been designed specifically
for use in snow conditions.
illustration.
An electronic speed limiter prevents your
In addition to the load index, special load
vehicle from exceeding a speed of 130 mph
identification : may be molded into the tire
(210 km/h).
sidewall following the letter designating the
The factory equipped tires on your vehicle speed symbol B (Y page 251).
may have a tire speed rating above the
RNo specification given: absence of any text
maximum speed permitted by the electronic
speed limiter. (like in above example) indicates a
standard load (SL) tire.
Make sure your tires have the required tire
speed rating as specified for your vehicle in RXL or Extra Load: designates an extra load
the “Technical data” section (Y page 365), (or reinforced) tire.

for example when purchasing new tires. RLight Load: designates a light load tire.
If you are uncertain about the correct reading RC, D, E: designates load range associated
of the information given on a tire’s sidewall, with the maximum load a tire can carry at
any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will be a specified pressure.
glad to assist you.
DOT, Tire Identification Number (TIN)

U.S. tire regulations require each new tire
manufacturer or tire retreader to mold a TIN
into or onto a sidewall of each tire produced.
17 or M+Sifor winter tires
Z
Tire type code

Tire type code ? may, at the option of the
manufacturer, be used as a descriptive code
for identifying significant characteristics of
the tire.
Date of manufacture
The date of manufacture A identifies the
week and year of manufacture.
Operation
The first two figures identify the week,

The TIN is a unique identifier. The TIN
starting with “01” to represent the first full
facilitates efforts by tire manufactures to
week of the calendar year. The second two
notify purchasers in recall situations or other
figures represent the year.
safety matters concerning tires. It gives
purchasers the means to easily identify such For example, “3208” represents the 32nd
tires. week of 2008.
The TIN is comprised of “Manufacturer’s
identification mark” ;, “Tire size” =, “Tire
Tire ply material
type code” ? and “Date of manufacture”
A.
illustration.
DOT (Department of Transportation)

Tire branding symbol : denotes that the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department
of Transportation.
Manufacturer’s identification mark on tires are specific to each vehicle and
Manufacturer’s identification mark ; illustration.
denotes the tire manufacturer.
This marking tells you about the type of cord
New tires have a mark with two symbols.
and number of plies in the sidewall : and
Retreaded tires have a mark with four under the tread ;.
symbols. For more information on retreaded
tires, see (Y page 233).
Tire and loading terminology
Tire size
Accessory weight
Code = indicates the tire size.
The combined weight (in excess of those
standard items which may be replaced) of
automatic transmission, power steering,
power brakes, power windows, power seats,

radio, and heater, to the extent that these GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
items are available as factory-installed
The GAWR is the maximum permissible axle
equipment (whether installed or not).
weight. The gross vehicle weight on each axle
must never exceed the GAWR for the front
Air pressure and rear axle indicated on the certification
The amount of air inside the tire pressing label located on the driver’s door B-pillar.
outward on each square inch of the tire. Air
pressure is expressed in pounds per square GTW (Gross Trailer Weight)
inch (psi), kilopascal (kPa), or bar.
The GTW is the weight of the trailer plus the
weight of all cargo, equipment, luggage etc.
Operation
Aspect ratio loaded on the trailer.
Dimensional relationship between tire
section height and section width expressed GVW (Gross Vehicle Weight)
in percentage.
The GVW comprises the weight of the vehicle
including fuel, tools, spare wheel, installed
Bar accessories, passengers and cargo and, if
Metric unit for air pressure. There are applicable, trailer tongue load. The GVW must
14.5038 pounds per square inch (psi) to never exceed the GVWR indicated on the
1 bar; there are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to 1 bar. certification label located on the driver’s door
B-pillar.
Bead
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
The tire bead contains steel wires wrapped by
steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim. This is the maximum permissible vehicle
weight of the fully loaded vehicle (weight of
Cold tire inflation pressure the vehicle including all options, passengers,
fuel, and cargo and, if applicable, trailer
Tire inflation pressure when your vehicle has tongue load). It is indicated on the
been sitting for at least 3 hours or driven no certification label located on the driver’s door
more than 1 mile (1.6 km). B-pillar.
Curb weight Kilopascal (kPa)

The weight of a motor vehicle with standard Metric unit for air pressure. There are 6.9 kPa
equipment including the maximum capacity to 1 psi; another metric unit for air pressure
of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, is bar. There are 100 kilopascals (kPa) to
air conditioning and additional optional 1 bar.
equipment, but without passengers and
cargo. Load index
DOT (Department of Transportation) Numerical code associated with the
maximum load a tire can support.
A tire branding symbol which denotes the tire
meets requirements of the U.S. Department Maximum load rating
of Transportation.
The maximum load in kilograms and pounds
that can be carried by the tire.
Z
Maximum loaded vehicle weight Rim

The sum of curb weight, accessory weight, A metal support for a tire or a tire and tube
total load limit, and production options assembly upon which the tire beads are
weight. seated.
Maximum permissible tire inflation Sidewall

pressure
The portion of a tire between the tread and
This number is the greatest amount of air the bead.
pressure that should ever be put in the tire.
TIN (Tire Identification Number)
Operation
Normal occupant weight

Unique identifier which facilitates efforts by
The number of occupants the vehicle is tire manufacturers to notify purchasers in
designed to seat, multiplied by 68 kilograms recall situations or other safety matters
(150 lb). concerning tires and gives purchasers the
means to easily identify such tires. The TIN is
Occupant distribution comprised of “Manufacturer’s identification
mark”, “Tire size”, “Tire type code” and “Date
The distribution of occupants in a vehicle at of manufacture”.
their designated seating positions.
Tire ply composition and material used
Production options weight
This indicates the number of plies or the
The combined weight of those installed number of layers of rubber-coated fabric in
regular production options weighing over the tire tread and sidewall. Tire
5 lbs (2.3 kilograms) in excess of those manufacturers also must indicate the ply
standard items which they replace, not materials in the tire and sidewall, which
previously considered in curb weight or include steel, nylon, polyester, and others.
accessory weight, including heavy duty
brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty
Tire speed rating
battery, and special trim.
Part of tire designation (speed symbol);
PSI (Pounds per square inch) indicates the speed range for which a tire is
approved.
A standard unit of measure for air pressure.
Total load limit
Recommended tire inflation pressure
Rated cargo and luggage load plus
The recommended tire inflation pressure for 68 kilograms (150 lb) times the vehicle’s
normal driving conditions is listed on the Tire designated seating capacity.
and Loading Information placard located on
the driver’s door B-pillar. It provides best
Traction
handling, tread life and riding comfort.
Supplemental information pertaining to The adhesive friction of a tire on a surface on
special driving situations can be found on the which it moves. The amount of grip provided.
tire inflation pressure label on the inside of
the fuel filler flap.

Winter driving 257
Tread Winter tires

The portion of a tire that comes into contact G Warning!
with the road.
Winter tires with a tread depth of less than
1/ in (4 mm) must be replaced. They are no
6
Treadwear indicators
longer suitable for winter operation.
Narrow bands, sometimes called “wear bars”
that show across the tread of a tire when only G Warning!
1/ in (1.6 mm) of tread remains. If you use your spare wheel when winter tires
16
are fitted on the other wheels, be aware that
the difference in tire characteristics may very
Operation
TWR (Tongue Weight Rating)
well impair turning stability and that overall
Maximum permissible weight on trailer driving stability may be reduced. Adapt your
tongue. driving style accordingly.
Have the spare wheel replaced by a regular
Uniform Tire Quality Grading Standards road wheel with a winter tire at the nearest
A tire information system that provides authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
consumers with ratings for a tire’s traction,
Always use winter tires at temperatures
temperature and treadwear. Ratings are
below 45‡ (7†) and whenever wintry road
determined by tire manufacturers using U.S.
conditions prevail. Not all M+S rated tires
government testing procedures. The ratings
provide special winter performance. Make
are molded into the sidewall of the tire.
sure the tires you use show the mountain/
snowflakeimarking on the tire sidewall.
Vehicle maximum load on the tire These tires meet specific snow traction
Load on an individual tire that is determined performance requirements of the Rubber
by distributing to each axle its share of the Manufacturers Association (RMA) and the
maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing Rubber Association of Canada (RAC) and
it by two. have been designed specifically for use in
snow conditions. Use of winter tires is the
only way to achieve the maximum
Winter driving effectiveness of your vehicle’s driving safety
systems such as the ABS and the ESP® in
General information winter operation.
Have your vehicle winterized at an authorized For safe handling, make sure all mounted
Mercedes-Benz Center. winter tires are of the same make and have
i Vehicles with diesel engine: the same tread design.
Do not cover the radiator, for example with For information on winter tires for your
a winter front. Otherwise the readings of vehicle model, see the “Technical data”
the on-board diagnostic system may be section (Y page 365).
inaccurate. Some of theses readings are Always observe the speed rating of the winter
required by law and must be accurate at all tires installed on your vehicle.
times.
Z
258 Winter driving
After installing winter tires: and state laws before installing snow
X Check the tire inflation pressure and adjust chains.
it if necessary (Y page 237). RDo not use snow chains on the spare wheel.
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning
i When driving with snow chains, you may
system (Y page 237) or the Advanced Tire
Pressure Monitoring System (Y page 239). wish to switch off the ESP® (Y page 63)
before setting the vehicle in motion. This
will improve the vehicle’s traction.
Snow chains
Winter driving instructions
Operation
! Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System

(ADS):
G Warning!
When driving with snow chains, do not
select SPORT mode as this may result in If the vehicle becomes stuck in snow, make
sure snow is kept clear of the exhaust pipe
damage to your vehicle.
and from around the vehicle with the engine
! Some tire sizes do not leave adequate running. Otherwise, deadly carbon monoxide
clearance for snow chains. To help avoid (CO) gases may enter vehicle interior
serious damage to your vehicle or tires, resulting in unconsciousness and death.
make sure the use of snow chains is To assure sufficient fresh air ventilation, open
permissible as specified in the “Technical a window slightly on the side of the vehicle
data” section of this Operator’s Manual. not facing the wind.
Snow chains should only be driven on snow- G Warning!
covered roads at speeds not to exceed
The outside temperature indicator is not
30 mph (50 km/h). Remove chains as soon
designed to serve as an ice-warning device
as possible when driving on roads without
and is therefore unsuitable for that purpose.
snow.
Indicated temperatures just above the
Observe the following guidelines when using
freezing point do not guarantee that the road
snow chains:
surface is free of ice. The road may still be icy,
RUse of snow chains is not permissible with especially in wooded areas or on bridges.
all wheel/tire combinations (Y page 365).
RUse snow chains in pairs and on rear G Warning!
wheels only. Follow the manufacturer’s On slippery road surfaces, never downshift in
mounting instructions. order to obtain braking action. This could
result in drive wheel slip and reduced vehicle
! If snow chains are mounted to the front control. Your vehicle’s ABS will not prevent
wheels, they may scrape against the body this type of control loss.
or axle components. The tires or the vehicle Do not engage the transfer case in position
could be damaged as a result. LOW when driving on ice or packed snow. At
ROnly use snow chains that are approved by speeds below 18 mph (30 km/h) vehicle
Mercedes-Benz. Any authorized Mercedes- steering is adversely affected by the Off-road
Benz Center will be glad to advise you on ABS.
this subject.
The most important rule for slippery or icy
RUse of snow chains may be prohibited
roads is to drive sensibly and to avoid abrupt
depending on location. Always check local acceleration, braking and steering

Driving instructions 259
maneuvers. Do not use the cruise control Maintenance system. Contact an

system under such conditions. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
When the vehicle is in danger of skidding, shift Fuel consumption is also increased by driving
the automatic transmission to neutral in cold weather, in stop-and-go traffic, on
position N. Try to keep the vehicle under short trips and in mountainous areas.
control by corrective steering action.
i For information on driving with snow
chains, see “Snow chains” (Y page 258). Drinking and driving
Road salts and chemicals can adversely G Warning!
affect braking efficiency. Increased pedal Drinking and driving and/or taking drugs and
Operation
force may become necessary to produce the driving are very dangerous combinations.
normal brake effect. Even a small amount of alcohol or drugs can
Depressing the brake pedal periodically when affect your reflexes, perceptions and
traveling at length on salt-strewn roads can judgment.
bring road-salt-impaired braking efficiency The possibility of a serious or even fatal
back to normal. accident are greatly increased when you drink
If the vehicle is parked after being driven on or take drugs and drive.
salt-treated roads, the braking efficiency Do not drink or take drugs and drive or allow
should be tested as soon as possible after anyone to drive who has been drinking or
driving is resumed. taking drugs.
G Warning!
Make sure not to endanger any other road
users when carrying out these braking
Pedals
maneuvers. G Warning!
Make sure absolutely no objects are
Driving instructions Keep the driver’s footwell clear of all
obstacles. If there are any floormats or
Drive sensibly – save fuel
carpets in the footwell, make sure that the
To save fuel you should: pedals still have sufficient clearance.
RKeep tires at the recommended inflation During sudden driving or braking maneuvers,
pressures. the objects could get caught between the
RRemove pedals. You could then no longer brake or
unnecessary loads.
accelerate. This could lead to accidents and
RRemove carriers when not in use. injury.
RRemove the crossbars when not in use.
RAllow engine to warm up under low load
use. Power assistance
RAvoid frequent acceleration and G Warning!
deceleration. There is no power assistance for the steering
RHave all maintenance work performed at and the brake when the engine is not running.
the intervals specified in the Maintenance
Booklet and as required by the
Z
260 Driving instructions
Steering and braking requires significantly first braking action may be somewhat
more effort and you could lose control of the reduced and increased pedal pressure may be
vehicle and cause an accident as a result. necessary to obtain expected brake effect.
Do not turn off the engine while the vehicle is Maintain a safe distance from vehicles in
in motion. front.
To help prevent brake disk corrosion after

driving on wet or salt-covered roads, it is
Brakes advisable to brake the vehicle with
Downhill grades considerable force prior to parking. The heat
generated serves to dry the brakes.
Operation
! When driving down long and steep

grades, relieve the load on the brakes by Salt-covered roads
shifting into a lower gear to use the
engine’s braking power. This helps prevent G Warning!
overheating of the brakes and reduces A layer of salt on the brake discs and the brake
wear. linings may cause a delay in the braking
When using the engine’s braking power, a effect, resulting in a significantly increased
drive wheel may not spin for an extended braking distance, which could lead to an
period of time, e.g. on slippery road accident.
surfaces. This may cause serious damage To avoid this danger, you should:
to the drivetrain which is not covered by the Roccasionally brake carefully when you are
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. driving on salt-covered roads, so that any
layer of salt that may have built up on the
Continuous or hard braking brake discs and the brake linings is
removed without putting other road users
G Warning!
at risk
Resting your foot on the brake pedal will
Rmaintain a greater distance to the vehicle
cause excessive and premature wear of the
brake pads. ahead and drive with particular care
It can also result in the brakes overheating, Rcarefully apply the brakes at the end of a
thereby significantly reducing their trip and immediately after commencing a
effectiveness. It may not be possible to stop new trip, so that salt residues are removed
the vehicle in sufficient time to avoid an from the brake disc
accident.
After hard braking, it is advisable to drive on Brake service

for some time, rather than immediately park, ! The brake fluid level in the reservoir may
so that the air stream will cool down the be too low if the brake warning lamp in the
brakes faster. instrument cluster comes on and an
acoustic warning sounds although the
Wet roads parking brake is released. Observe
additional messages in the multifunction
G Warning!
display that may appear.
After driving in heavy rain for some time
without applying the brakes or through water
Brake pad wear or a leak in the system may
deep enough to wet brake components, the
be the reason for low brake fluid in the
reservoir.

Have the brake system inspected G Warning!

immediately. Contact an authorized Make sure not to endanger any other road
Mercedes-Benz Center. users when carrying out these braking
All checks and service work on the brake maneuvers.
system should be carried out by qualified
technicians only. Contact an authorized Refer to the description of the Brake Assist
Mercedes-Benz Center. System (BAS) (Y page 63).
Only install brake pads and use brake fluid
recommended by Mercedes-Benz.
Parking brake
When driving on wet roads or dirt covered
G Warning!
Operation
surfaces, road salt and/or dirt can get into
If other than recommended brake pads are the parking brake.
installed, or other than recommended brake
fluid is used, the braking properties of the To prevent corrosion and a reduction in the
vehicle can be degraded to an extent that safe braking power of the parking brake, observe
braking is substantially impaired. This could the following:
result in an accident. X From time to time, lightly engage the
parking brake before driving off.
! Only conduct operational or performance X Drive a distance of approximately 110 yds
tests on a two-axle dynamometer. If such (100 m) at a maximum speed of 12 mph
tests are necessary, contact an authorized (20 km/h).
Mercedes-Benz Center. You could
otherwise seriously damage the brake G Warning!
system or the transfer case which is not While performing this procedure please
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited assure that the vehicle is stopped before
Warranty. applying the parking brake. Otherwise the
rear wheels could lock up. You could lose
! Because the ESP® operates control of the vehicle and cause an accident.
automatically, the engine and ignition must In addition, the vehicle’s brake lights do not
be shut off (SmartKey in starter switch light up when the parking brake is engaged.
position 0 or 1 or KEYLESS-GO start/stop Make sure not to endanger any other road
button in position 0 or 1) when the parking users when you engage the parking brake.
brake is being tested on a brake test
dynamometer. Such testing should be no
longer than 10 seconds. Driving off
Active braking action through the ESP® Warm up the engine smoothly. Do not place
may otherwise seriously damage the brake full load on the engine until the operating
system which is not covered by the temperature has been reached.
! When driving off on a slippery surface, do
If your brake system is only subjected to
not allow a drive wheel to spin for an
moderate loads, you should occasionally test
the effectiveness of the brakes by applying extended period with the ESP® switched
above-normal braking pressure at higher off. Doing so may cause serious damage to
speeds. This will also enhance the grip of the the drivetrain which is not covered by the
brake pads. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
! Simultaneously depressing the Off-road driving

accelerator pedal and applying the brakes
reduces engine performance and causes G Warning!
premature brake and drivetrain wear which Do not load items on the crossbars. It may
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz cause instability during some maneuvers
Limited Warranty. which could result in an accident.
Drive slowly in unknown terrain. This will
make it easier to recognize unexpected
Hydroplaning obstacles and avoid damage to the vehicle.
Depending on the depth of the water layer on To help avoid the vehicle rolling over, never
Operation
the road, hydroplaning may occur, even at low turn it around on steep inclines. If the vehicle
speeds and with new tires. In heavy rain or cannot complete the attempted climb, back it
when conditions indicate possible down in reverse gear.
hydroplaning: Do not drive along the side of a slope. The
X Reduce vehicle speed. vehicle might otherwise rollover. If in doing so
X Avoid track grooves in the road.
the vehicle begins to show a tendency to roll,
immediately steer into a line of gravity
X Apply brakes cautiously.
(straight up or downhill).
Never let the vehicle roll backwards in idle.
You may lose control of the vehicle if you use
Standing water only the service brake. For information on
! Do not drive through flooded areas. driving downhill, see “Driving downhill”.
Before driving through water, determine its
depth. G Warning!
If you must drive through standing water, Sand, dirt, mud and other material having
drive slowly to prevent water from entering friction property can cause exceptional wear
the passenger compartment or the engine and tear as well as brake failure.
compartment. Water in these areas could Have the brakes checked for dirt build-up and
cause damage to electrical components or cleaned. There is otherwise a risk that full
wiring of the engine or transmission, or braking power may not be available in an
could result in water being ingested by the emergency.
engine through the air intake causing
severe internal engine damage. Any such G Warning!
damage is not covered by the Mercedes- Please be aware that by raising the vehicle
Benz Limited Warranty. level, the center of gravity also rises.
Therefore, always ensure that the vehicle
i Select the raised level (Y page 159) level is as low as possible. With higher ride
before driving through standing water. height the ESP® may activate earlier in certain
For more information, see “Driving through situations.
water” (Y page 266). Read this chapter carefully before you begin
off-road travel.
Familiarize yourself with the vehicle
characteristics and gear changing before you
attempt any difficult terrain off-road driving.

We recommend that you start out with easy ! Observe the following during off-road
off-road travel. driving:
RKeep doors, tailgate, windows, and tilt/
Special driving features for off-road sliding sunroof closed whenever driving
driving off-road.
The following driving features are available for RAdjust vehicle speed to condition of
specific kind of operation: terrain. The more uneven, rutty and
ROff-road ABS (Y page 63) steeper the terrain, the lower the speed
should be. Drive through water slowly at
ROff-road ESP® (Y page 65) an even speed, avoiding a bow wave.
Operation
ROff-road 4-ETS (Y page 64) RBe especially careful when driving in
RHill-start assist system (Y page 117) unknown territory. It may be necessary
RLOW RANGE mode (Y page 120) to get out of the vehicle and scout the
path you intend to take.
RDifferential locks (Y page 121)
RWatch out for obstacles, such as rocks,
RDownhill Speed Regulation (DSR) holes, tree stumps and ruts.
(Y page 155)
RBefore driving through water, determine
ROff-road driving program (Vehicles without its depth.
enhanced off-road package) (Y page 158)
RDo not stop vehicle while immersed in
RAir suspension program (Y page 159) water, and do not shut off the engine.
RIn sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
Off-road driving rules allowed by conditions. This helps
REngage the off-road driving program overcome the vehicle rolling resistance
(Y page 158) or LOW RANGE mode and reduces the likelihood of the vehicle
(Y page 120) before driving under off-road sinking into the ground.
conditions. RDo not initiate jumps with the vehicle. It
RIf necessary, activate differential locks interrupts the forward momentum of the
(Y page 121). vehicle.
RMake sure you select a vehicle level RAlways drive onto slopes with the engine
(Y page 159) appropriate to the running and the vehicle in gear.

topographical conditions. Always make RDo not shift automatic transmission into
sure the vehicle has enough ground neutral position N.
clearance.
RFasten items being carried as securely as G Warning!
possible (Y page 194). Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
before driving through sand. However, if you
RAlways navigate gradients with the engine do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
on and with the transmission engaged in a pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
gear. Switch on the DSR (Y page 155) to with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
help maintain a preset speed. the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
rolling over.
Z
Checklist before off-road driving Driving in steep terrain

Engine oil level
RCheck the engine oil level (Y page 230).
Only with a proper oil level can the vehicle

obtain a trouble-free oil supply, even on
steep gradients.
! If the engine oil level warning lamp comes
on while driving, stop the vehicle in a safe
location or as soon at is safe to do so.
Operation
Check the engine oil level.

The engine oil level warnings should not be Slope angle
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol : Overhang angle, front
displayed could result in serious engine
; Overhang angle, rear
damage that is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Vehicles : : ;
Tires with air GL 450, GL all
RCheck the tread depth and maintain
suspension GL 350 550 models
program BlueTEC
specified tire inflation pressure. A placard
with the recommended tire inflation Raised level 31° 32° 26°
pressures is located on the driver’s door B-
pillar (Y page 243). Highway 26° 27° 21°
RCheck tires for possible damage and
remove foreign objects. Vehicles : : ;
RReplace missing valve caps. with GL 450, GL all
enhanced GL 350 550 models
Rims off-road BlueTEC
RDented or bent rims can cause tire inflation package
pressure loss and damage the tire beads. Off-road 32° 33° 27°
For this reason, check and, if necessary, level 3
change rims before driving off-road.
Off-road 31° 32° 26°
Vehicle tool kit level 2
RCheck if the jack (Y page 286) is
functional. Off-road 28° 28° 23°
level 1
RAlways take the vehicle tool kit, a strong
tow rope, a shovel and a small plank (to put Highway 26° 27° 21°
under the jack on sandy soil) with you.
RComply with the warnings (Y page 262) and
rules for off-road driving (Y page 263).
RDriving on embankments, slopes and other
steep inclines should only be done straight
up or downhill, i.e. in the line of gravity.
Maximum vehicle climbing ability is a

100% grade which is equivalent to a slope The 4-ETS recognizes the situation and
angle of 45°. Keep in mind that the limits the torque for the front wheels by
climbing ability of the vehicle depends on braking them.
terrain conditions. Simultaneously the torque for the rear
RShift automatic transmission into gear wheels is increased.
range 1 (Y page 118).
i Vehicles with enhanced off-road package
RDrive slowly. are equipped with automatic locks for the
RAvoid excessive engine speeds – drive with center and rear axle differential to improve
moderate engine speeds (max. 3 000 rpm). vehicle traction.
Operation
RUtilize the engine’s braking power when
Driving across a hilltop
descending a slope, observe the engine
speed (do not overrev the engine). Apply Decelerate just ahead of a hilltop (do not shift
the service brake as needed. automatic transmission into neutral position
N), to prevent the vehicle from speeding up
i For maximum engine speed, see
too much after climbing a hill.
“Tachometer” (Y page 125) and see vehicle
specification for your vehicle Use the momentum of the vehicle to drive
(Y page 362). across the hilltop.
RCheck the brakes after a lengthy
After climbing a hill, driving in this manner
prevents the vehicle from:
downgrade drive.
Rlosing ground contact when cresting hills
G Warning! Rlosing its forward momentum
Never turn the vehicle around on steep
Rspeeding up too much after climbing the hill
inclines. The vehicle might roll over. If the
vehicle cannot complete the attempted climb,
back it down in reverse gear. Driving downhill
RDrive slowly.
i The hill-start assist system supports you
RDo not drive at an angle to the incline. Steer
when driving uphill.
into the line of gravity and drive with the
For more information, see “Hill-start assist
front wheels pointing straight downhill.
system” (Y page 155).
Otherwise, the vehicle may slide sideways
Traction in steep terrain off the path and roll over.
The maximum vehicle climbing ability is a RShift automatic transmission into gear
100% grade which is equivalent to a slope range 1 (Y page 118).
angle of 45°. Keep in mind that the climbing ROn steep inclines, use the Downhill Speed
ability of the vehicle depends on terrain
Regulation (Y page 155).
conditions.
RUtilize the engine’s braking power to
Be easy on the accelerator and watch for
continuous wheel traction when driving in reduce vehicle speed.
steep terrain. If this is insufficient, apply the brakes
gently. Make sure the vehicle is moving in
i The 4-ETS helps greatly when starting out the line of gravity.
on a steep incline when the front wheels
RCheck the brakes after a lengthy
have then the tendency to slip due to the
weight shifting towards the rear axle. downgrade drive.
Z
i The special Off-road ABS (Y page 63) through it. Please note that the water level
setting allows for precise and brief is correspondingly lower for flowing water.
(cyclical) blocking of the front wheels, RSelect the highest vehicle level possible
permitting them to dig into loose ground. (Y page 159).
Remember that, when stopped, the front RSwitch to off-road driving program
wheels slide across a surface and thus lose
(Y page 158) or LOW RANGE mode
their ability to steer the vehicle.
(Y page 120) before driving through water.
RShift automatic transmission into gear
Driving through water
range 1 or 2 (Y page 118).
Operation
RAvoid high engine speeds.

REnter and leave the water only at a shallow
spot, driving at walking speed.
! Never accelerate before driving into the
water. The bow wave could force water into
the engine and auxiliary equipment, thus
damaging them.
RDrive through the water slowly and at a
constant speed.
: Fording depth
RDo not stop vehicle while immersed in
Vehicles with air : water, and do not shut off the engine.
suspension
! Do not open any of the vehicle’s doors
program (raised
while driving through water. Water could
level)
otherwise enter the vehicle interior and
20 in (50 cm) damage the vehicle’s electronics, as well as
the interior equipment.
RThere is a very high level of driving
Vehicles with :
enhanced off-road resistance in water. The surface is slippery
package and may not be firm, making pulling away
in water difficult and dangerous.
Off-road level 1 20 in (50 cm) RMake sure that only small bow waves are
Off-road level 2 20 in (50 cm) formed when driving the vehicle through
water.
Off-road level 3 23.6 in (60 cm)
RClean mud off the tire tread after driving
through water.
RBefore driving through water, determine its
RTo dry the brakes, apply pressure to the
depth.
brake pedal several times while driving
! The water depth must not exceed the after leaving the water.
respective value listed in the table. The
ground under the water might not be firm
which could result the water being deeper
than expected when driving the vehicle

Crossing obstacles wheels at the center of the obstacle, and

repeat same with the rear wheel.
! Special attention is needed when you
cross obstacles on a steep incline.
The vehicle could slide sideways as a result
of its possible slanted position which in turn
may result in the vehicle tipping or rolling
over.
Driving on sand
Operation
G Warning!
! Obstacles can damage the vehicle Do not reduce the tire inflation pressure
underbody or suspension components. If before driving through sand. However, if you
possible use the assistance of a second do so, remember to correct the tire inflation
person outside the vehicle to scout the pressure before continuing your trip. Driving
path you intend to take and check for with reduced tire inflation pressure increases
adequate ground clearance when you cross the risk of losing control of the vehicle and
obstacles with your vehicle. The person rolling over.
assisting you outside the vehicle should
When driving on sand, observe the following
always be a safe distance away from the
rules:
vehicle and positioned so that he or she RSet the raised level (Y page 159).
cannot get hurt in case of any unexpected
vehicle movement. RAvoid high engine speeds.
After off-road driving or crossing obstacles, RShift automatic transmission into a gear
inspect vehicle for any damage, especially range that is appropriate for the terrain.
vehicle underbody and suspension RIn sandy soil, drive at a steady speed as
components. Failure to do so can adversely conditions permit. This helps overcome the
affect the vehicle’s future performance, vehicle rolling resistance and reduce the
including increased chance of an accident. likelihood of the vehicle sinking into the
When driving over tree stumps, big rocks and ground.
other obstacles, observe the following rules: RDrive in tracks of other vehicles if they are
RMake sure the off-road driving program not too deep and you have sufficient
(Y page 158) or if equipped the clearance.
LOW RANGE mode (Y page 120) is
switched on. Ruts
A number of off-road tracks or other byways
RShift automatic transmission into gear have deep ruts which can cause the
range 1 (Y page 118). underbody to come in contact with the
RCheck the vehicle clearance before ground.
crossing obstacles. RMake sure the off-road driving program
RCross (Y page 158) or, if equipped, the

obstacles (e.g. tree stumps or big
rocks) very slowly by aiming one of the front
Z
LOW RANGE mode (Y page 120) is Proceed as follows:

switched on. RSwitch off the off-road driving program
RSet the raised level (Y page 159). (Y page 158) or the LOW RANGE mode
(Y page 120).
! Check that the ruts are not too deep and
your vehicle’s clearance is sufficient.
RSwitch off the DSR (Y page 156).
Otherwise: RSet the differential locks to AUTO
Ryour vehicle may be damaged (Y page 122).
RLower the vehicle back to a level suitable
Rthe underbody of the vehicle may come
in contact with the ground and you may for road conditions, e.g. highway/high-
Operation
get stuck speed level (Y page 159).

RClean all exterior lamps and check for
possible damage.
RShift automatic transmission into gear RClean the front and rear license plate.
range 1 (Y page 118).
RRemove excessive dirt from tires, wheels,
RDrive next to the ruts rather than through
wheel housings, and underbody.
them if at all possible.
For instance, after driving in mud, clean the
RIf the ruts are too deep to drive in, drive with radiator, chassis, engine, brakes, and
one side of the vehicle on the grassy center wheels from extreme dirt using a strong jet
strip if the route permits. of water.
RCheck tires for possible damage.
Returning from off-road driving RInspect vehicle underbody, oil pan, brake
G Warning! hoses, etc., as well as vehicle underbody
If you feel a sudden significant vibration or for possible damage.
ride disturbance, or you suspect that possible RCheck for brush or branches caught in the
damage to your vehicle has occurred, you underbody.
should turn on the hazard warning flashers,
! Brush or branches could increase the
carefully slow down, and drive with caution to
an area which is a safe distance from the road.
possibility of a fire, as well as cut fuel and/
or brake lines, puncture rubber bellows of
Inspect the tires and the vehicle underbody the axles or drive shafts.
for possible damage. If the vehicle or tires
RAfter continued operation in mud, sand,
appear unsafe, have the vehicle towed to the
nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or water or other dirty conditions clean the
tire dealer for repairs. brake discs, wheels, brake pads and check
and clean axle joints.
Off-road driving increases strain on the RConduct a brake test.
vehicle.
We recommend that you inspect the vehicle
for possible damage after each off-road trip.
Recognizing any damage and a subsequent
timely repair reduces the chance of a possible
breakdown or accident later on.

Trailer towing trailer. The maximum permissible GTW to be

towed: 7 500 lb (3 402 kg).
G Warning! Trailer Tongue Weight Rating (TWR) is the
Failure to use proper equipment and driving maximum permissible weight on the trailer
technique can result in a loss of vehicle tongue: 600 lb (272 kg) limit for Mercedes-
control when towing a trailer. Benz approved hitch receiver.
Improper towing or failure to follow the
instructions in this manual can result in Loading a trailer
vehicle damage and/or serious personal RWhen loading a trailer, you should observe
injury. Follow the guidelines below carefully that neither the permissible GTW, nor the
to assure safe trailer operation. Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR) are
Operation
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center exceeded. The GVWR is indicated on the
should you require an explanation of certification label located on the driver’s
information contained in this manual. door B-pillar (Y page 242).
Maximum permissible values are listed on
Trailer hitch the safety compliance certification labels
for the vehicle and for the trailer to be
ROnly install a trailer hitch receiver approved
towed.
for your vehicle. The lowest value listed must be selected
For information on availability and when determining how the vehicle and
installation, contact an authorized trailer are loaded.
Mercedes-Benz Center. RThe tongue weight at the hitch ball must be
RThe bumpers on your vehicle are not added to the rear axle weight to prevent
designed for use with clamp-type hitches. exceeding the rear Gross Axle Weight
Do not attach rental hitches or other Rating (GAWR). The GAWR is indicated on
bumper-type hitches to them. the certification label located on the
RTo
driver’s door B-pillar (Y page 242).
reduce the possibility of damage,
remove the hitch ball adapter from the i Mercedes-Benz recommends loading the
receiver when not in use. trailer in such a manner that it has a tongue
weight between 8 % and 15 % of the GTW.
Electrical connections
i The weight of other accessories,
The vehicle is prewired to accept the seven- passengers and cargo will reduce the
wire harness included in the Mercedes-Benz maximum trailer weight and tongue weight
approved trailer hitch receiver kit. your vehicle can tow.
i A four-pole conversion plug is available Checking weights of vehicle and trailer
from your authorized Mercedes-Benz RTo assure that the towing vehicle and trailer
Center as a spare part.
are in compliance with the maximum
For further information, contact an permissible weight limits, have the loaded
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. rig (towing vehicle including driver,
passengers and cargo, trailer fully loaded)
Vehicle and trailer weights and ratings weighed on a commercial scale.
The Gross Trailer Weight (GTW) is the weight RCheck the vehicle’s front and rear gross
of the trailer plus the weight of all cargo, axle weight, the Gross Trailer Weight (GTW)
equipment, luggage, etc. loaded on the and tongue weight.
Z
The values as measured must not exceed i The provided vehicle electrical wiring
the weight limits listed under “Vehicle and harness for trailer towing has a brake signal
trailer weights and ratings” (Y page 269). wire for hook-up to a brake controller.
Coupling a trailer park position P (Y page 115).
G Warning! X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle
While you are coupling or decoupling a trailer, (Y page 112).

make sure nobody locks or unlocks the X Start the engine (Y page 108).
vehicle and/or opens or closes doors or the X Select the highway level (Y page 159).
tailgate.
Operation
X Vehicles with Adaptive Damping System

The vehicle’s level could change and you (ADS):
could endanger yourself and/or others as a Set the ADS to AUTO or COMF
result. (Y page 159).
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS X Turn off the engine (Y page 113).
button or the vehicle level control system X Close all doors and the tailgate.
when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
X Attach the trailer.
Observe maximum permitted trailer X Plug in all electrical connectors.
dimensions (width and length).
i When you are towing a trailer, the vehicle
Most states and all Canadian provinces
level always remains in the highway setting.
require
The following applies additionally when
Rsafety chains between the towing vehicle towing a trailer:
and the trailer
RThe vehicle is lowered to the highway
The chains should be criss-crossed under
level when it reaches a speed of 5 mph
the trailer tongue. They must be attached
(8 km/h) if not set to highway level.
to the hitch receiver, and not to the
vehicle’s bumper or axle. RThe highspeed level is not available.
Make sure to leave enough slack in the The restrictions that apply to towing also
chains to permit turning corners. apply when using accessories that are
Ra separate brake system at various trailer connected to the trailer power socket, such
weights as a bicycle rack.
Ra break-away switch on trailers with a Towing a trailer
separate brake system.
Check with your local state laws for specific There are many different laws, including
requirements. speed limit restrictions, having to do with
The switch activates the trailer brakes in trailer towing. Make sure your rig will be legal,
the possible event that the trailer might not only for where you reside, but also for
separate from the tow vehicle. where you will be driving. A good source for
this information can be the police or local
! Do not connect a trailer brake system (if authorities.
trailer is so equipped) directly to the Note the following, when driving with a trailer:
vehicle’s hydraulic brake system, as your
RIn order to gain skill and an understanding
vehicle is equipped with antilock brakes. If
you do, neither the vehicle’s brakes nor the of the vehicle’s behavior, you should
trailer’s brakes will function properly.

practice turning, stopping and backing up Do not attempt to straighten out the tow
in an area which is free of traffic. vehicle and trailer by increasing the speed.
RBefore you start driving check the RIf the transmission shifts between gears on
- trailer hitch inclines repeatedly, shift to a lower gear

range manually (Y page 118). Select 4, 3,
- break-away switch 2 or 1.
- safety chains A lower gear and reduction of speed
- electrical connections reduces the chance of engine overloading
and/or overheating.
- lighting
ROn very steep inclines, not manageable
Operation
- tires with automatic transmission in gear range
RAdjust the mirrors (Y page 94) to permit 1, switch on off-road driving program
unobstructed view beyond rear of trailer. (Y page 158) or LOW RANGE mode
RIf
(Y page 120).
the trailer has electric brakes, start your
vehicle and trailer moving slowly, and then RWhen going down an incline, shift into a
apply only the trailer brake controller by lower gear and use the engine’s braking
hand to make sure the brakes are working effect.
properly. Avoid riding the brakes, thus overheating
RAlways secure items in the trailer to the vehicle and trailer brakes (if so
prevent load shifts while driving. equipped).
RIf the engine coolant rises to an extremely
RWhen towing a trailer, check occasionally
to make sure the load is secure, and that high temperature when the air conditioning
trailer lighting and brakes (if so equipped) is on, turn off the air conditioning system.
are functioning properly. Engine coolant heat can be additionally
RTake into consideration that when towing a
vented by opening the windows, switching
the climate control fan speed to high and
trailer, the handling characteristics are
setting the temperature control to the
different and less stable from those when
maximum.
operating the vehicle without a trailer.
RDuring a passing maneuver extreme care
It is important to avoid sudden maneuvers.
must be exercised since your vehicle with
RThe vehicle and trailer combination is a trailer will require additional passing
heavier, and therefore limited in distance ahead than when driving without
acceleration and climbing ability, and has a a trailer.
larger braking distance.
Because your vehicle and trailer is longer
It is more prone to reacting to cross wind than your vehicle alone, you will also need
gusts, and requires more sensitive steering to go much farther ahead of the passed
input. vehicle before you can return to your lane.
RIf possible, do not brake abruptly, but
rather engage the brake slightly at first to Decoupling a trailer
permit the trailer to activate its brake. Then
increase the braking force. G Warning!
! If the trailer should begin to sway, reduce While you are coupling or decoupling a trailer,
make sure nobody locks or unlocks the
the vehicle’s speed immediately.
Z
vehicle and/or opens or closes doors or the network information for your destination from
tailgate. any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
The vehicle’s level could change and you
could endanger yourself and/or others as a
result. Control and operation of radio
transmitter
Make sure that you do not operate the ADS
button or the vehicle level control system Safety notes
when coupling/decoupling the trailer.
G Warning!
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in Please do not forget that your primary
Operation
park position P (Y page 115). responsibility is to drive the vehicle. A driver’s

X Engage the parking brake for the vehicle attention to the road must always be his/her
(Y page 112). primary focus when driving. For your safety
X Start the engine (Y page 108). and the safety of others, we recommend that
you pull over to a safe location and stop
X Close all doors and the tailgate.
before placing or taking a telephone call.
X Engage the parking brake for the trailer.
If you choose to use the telephone18 while
G Warning! driving, please use the hands-free device and
As soon as you disconnect the electrical only use the telephone when road, weather
connection between the trailer and the and traffic conditions permit. Some
vehicle, the vehicle will lower. To help avoid jurisdictions prohibit the driver from using a
personal injury, make sure no one is near the mobile telephone while driving a vehicle.
wheel housing or underneath the vehicle Only operate the COMAND18 (Cockpit
before the electrical connection is Management and Data System) if road,
disconnected. weather and traffic conditions permit.
When you decouple the trailer, the vehicle is Otherwise, you may not be able to observe
temporarily raised because the springs are traffic conditions and could endanger yourself
relieved of load. Be especially careful during and others.
this process, as you could otherwise injure Bear in mind that at a speed of just 30 mph
yourself and/or others. Make sure that any (approximately 50 km/h), your vehicle is
persons remaining in the vehicle do not press covering a distance of 44 feet (approximately
the switches for vehicle level control or the 14 m) every second.
ADS.
X Disconnect all electrical plug connectors. Emission control

X Decouple the trailer.
Certain systems of the engine serve to keep
X Make sure that the trailer coupling is free
the toxic components of the exhaust gases
of load. within permissible limits required by law.
X Turn off the engine (Y page 113).
These systems will function properly only
when maintained strictly according to factory
specifications. Any adjustments on the
Driving abroad engine should, therefore, be carried out only
If you plan to drive the vehicle outside the U.S. by qualified Mercedes-Benz Center
or Canada, you should request dealer authorized technicians.
18 Observe all legal requirements.

Maintenance 273
Engine adjustments should not be altered in Maintenance service indicator

any way. Moreover, the specified service message
procedures must be carried out regularly
according to Mercedes-Benz servicing Information on maintenance work and
requirements. For details refer to the maintenance intervals are specified in the
Maintenance Booklet. Maintenance Booklet. Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center, or visit
G Warning! www.mbusa.com (USA only) for additional
Inhalation of exhaust gas is hazardous to your information.
health. All exhaust gas contains carbon The maintenance service indicator message
monoxide (CO), and inhaling it can cause will notify you when the next maintenance
Operation
unconsciousness and possible death. service is required.
Do not run the engine in confined areas (such Starting approximately 1 month before the
as a garage) which are not properly ventilated. next maintenance service is required, one of
If you think that exhaust gas fumes are the following messages will appear in the
entering the vehicle while driving, have the multifunction display. The messages will
cause determined and corrected appear while you are driving or when you
immediately. If you must drive under these switch on the ignition (example service A):
conditions, drive only with at least one Service A In XXXXX Miles (km)
window fully open at all times.
Service A In XX Days
Service A In X Day
Maintenance Service A Due Now
Notes
The Maintenance System in your vehicle
tracks the distance driven and the time
elapsed since the last maintenance service.
It calculates other maintenance service work
required, and calls for the next maintenance
service accordingly. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for a listing of
We strongly recommend that you have your maintenance services and intervals they need
vehicle serviced at an authorized Mercedes- to be performed at.
Benz Center. Have it serviced in accordance
with the Maintenance Booklet at the times Clearing the maintenance service
called for by the maintenance service indicator message
indicator.
The maintenance service indicator message
i Failure to have the vehicle maintained in is cleared automatically
accordance with the Maintenance Booklet Rafter approximately 10 seconds when you
and maintenance service indicator at the switch on the ignition
designated times/mileage will result in
Rafter approximately 10 seconds when
vehicle damage not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. reaching the service threshold while driving
Rafter approximately 30 seconds, once the
suggested maintenance service term has
passed
Z
274 Maintenance
until the standard display (Y page 128)

X Press button * or & on the
multifunction steering wheel until the
maintenance service indicator display with
the service symbol ¯ and the
maintenance service deadline appears in
i If the battery was disconnected, the days
of disconnection will not be included in the
Operation
X Clearing the maintenance service count shown by the maintenance service

indicator message manually: Press reset indicator. To arrive at the true maintenance
button : on the instrument cluster. service deadline, you will need to subtract
The standard display appears in the these days from the days shown in the
multifunction display. maintenance service indicator message or
maintenance service indicator display.
Maintenance service term exceeded Do not confuse the maintenance service
indicator with the engine oil level indicator
If you have exceeded the suggested 4.
maintenance service term, you will see the
following message in the multifunction
display: Resetting the maintenance service
Service A Exceeded By XXXXX Miles indicator
(Km) In the event that the maintenance service on
Service A Exceeded By XXX Days your vehicle is not carried out at an authorized
Service A Exceeded By X Day Mercedes-Benz Center, you can have the
In addition, a signal sounds when the maintenance service indicator reset.
message appears. The automotive maintenance facility carrying
Any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will out the maintenance service will find the
reset the maintenance service indicator information for resetting the maintenance
following a completed maintenance service. service indicator in the maintenance-relevant
literature for your vehicle.
Such literature is available at any authorized
Calling up the maintenance service Mercedes-Benz Center or directly from
indicator display Mercedes-Benz.
i The menu overview can be found on ! If the maintenance service indicator was
(Y page 127). reset inadvertently, have an authorized
You can call up the maintenance service Mercedes-Benz Center correct it.
indicator display at any time to check when Only reset the maintenance service
the next maintenance service is required. indicator if the proper maintenance service
has been performed. Not following the
proper maintenance service as described
X Press button V or U on the
in the Maintenance Booklet will result in
multifunction steering wheel repeatedly engine damage and/or other vehicle

Vehicle care 275
damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz RCoolant

Limited Warranty. RBrake fluid
RBird droppings
Vehicle care RInsects
Cleaning and care of the vehicle RTree resins etc.

Frequent washing reduces and/or eliminates
Notes
the aggressiveness and potency of the above
Regular and proper care will help to maintain adverse influences.
the value of your vehicle. More frequent washings are necessary to
Operation
G Warning! deal with unfavorable conditions:
Many cleaning products can be hazardous. Rnear the ocean
Some are poisonous, others are flammable. Rin industrial areas (smoke, exhaust
Always follow the instructions on the emissions)
particular container. Always open your
Rduring winter operation
vehicle’s doors or windows when cleaning the
inside. You should check your vehicle from time to
Never use fluids or solvents that are not time for stone chipping or other damage. Any
designed for cleaning your vehicle. damage should be repaired as soon as
Always lock away cleaning products and keep
possible to prevent corrosion.
them out of reach of children. In doing so, do not neglect the underbody of
the vehicle. A prerequisite for a thorough
! When cleaning the vehicle, do not use check is a washing of the underbody followed
scouring agents. Never apply strong force by a thorough inspection. Damaged areas
and only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge. need to be re-undercoated.
Otherwise you may scratch or damage the Your vehicle has been treated at the factory
surface to be cleaned. with a wax-base rustproofing in the body
cavities which will last for the lifetime of the
While in operation, even while parked, your
vehicle. Post-production treatment is neither
vehicle is subjected to varying external
necessary nor recommended by Mercedes-
influences which, if gone unchecked, can
Benz because of the possibility of
attack the paintwork as well as the vehicle
incompatibility between materials used in the
underbody and cause lasting damage.
production process and others applied later.
Such damage is caused not only by extreme
We have selected vehicle-care products and
and varying climatic conditions, but also by:
compiled recommendations which are
RAir pollution specially matched to our vehicles and which
RRoad salt always reflect the latest technology. You can
obtain Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care
RTar
products at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
RGravel and stone chipping Center.
To avoid paint damage, you should Scratches, corrosive deposits, corrosion or
immediately remove: damage due to negligent or incorrect care
cannot always be removed or repaired with
RGrease and oil
the vehicle-care products recommended
RFuel
Z
276 Vehicle care
here. In such cases it is best to seek aid at an Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Cleaner
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. should be applied if the paint surface shows
The following topics deal with the cleaning signs of embedded dirt (i.e. loss of gloss).
and care of your vehicle and give important Do not apply any of these products or wax if
“how-to” information as well as references to your vehicle is parked in the sun or if the hood
Mercedes-Benz approved vehicle-care is still hot.
products. X Use the appropriate MB-Touch-Up Stick for
quick and provisional repairs of minor paint
Power washer damage (i.e. chips from stones, vehicle
! Follow the instructions provided by the doors, etc.).
Operation
power washer manufacturer on

maintaining a distance between the vehicle Engine cleaning
and the nozzle of the power washer. Prior to cleaning the engine compartment,
Never use a round nozzle to power-wash make sure to protect electrical components
tires. The intense jet of water can result in and connectors from contact with water and
damage to the tire. cleaning agents.
Always replace a damaged tire. Corrosion protection, such as MB
Always keep the jet of water moving across Anticorrosion Wax should be applied to the
the surface. Do not aim directly at electrical engine compartment after every engine
parts, electrical connectors, seals, or other cleaning. Before applying, all control linkage
rubber parts. bushings and joints should be lubricated. The
poly-V-belt and all pulleys should be
i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: protected from any wax.
If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within Vehicle washing
approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked. In the winter, thoroughly remove all traces of
road salt as soon as possible.
Tar stains When washing the vehicle underbody, do not
forget to clean the inner sides of the wheels.
Quickly remove tar stains before they dry and
become more difficult to remove. A tar i Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
remover is recommended. If a door handle is hit by a strong jet of
water, and a SmartKey is within
Paintwork, painted body components approximately 3 ft (1 m) of the vehicle, it
could be inadvertently locked or unlocked.
! Affixing stickers, magnets, adhesive tape
or similar materials to painted body Hand-wash
components may damage the paintwork. X Do not use hot water or wash your vehicle
Mercedes-Benz approved Paint Care should in direct sunlight.

be applied when water drops on the paint X Only use a soft, wet cloth or sponge to
surface do not “bead up”. This should clean the vehicle.

normally be done every 3 to 5 months, X Only use a mild vehicle wash detergent,
depending on the climate and washing such as Mercedes-Benz approved Car
detergent used. Shampoo.

Vehicle care 277
X Thoroughly spray the vehicle with a will prevent smears and reduce wiping noise
diffused jet of water. which can be caused by residual wax on the
X Do not spray directly towards the windshield.
ventilation intake.
X Use plenty of water and rinse the sponge Ornamental moldings
and chamois frequently. X For regular cleaning and care of ornamental
X Rinse with clean water and dry with a moldings, use a damp cloth.
chamois thoroughly.
! Do not use chrome cleaner on ornamental
Do not allow cleaning agents to dry on the
moldings. Although ornamental moldings
finish.
may have chrome appearance, they could
Operation
Automatic car wash be made of anodized aluminum that will be
damaged when cleaned with chrome
You can have your vehicle washed in an
cleaner. Instead, use a damp cloth to clean
automatic car wash from the start. Brushless
those ornamental moldings.
car washes are preferable.
For very dirty ornamental moldings of
X To protect the filter system, activate the air
which you are sure are chrome-plated, use
recirculation mode using button d on
a chrome cleaner. If in doubt whether an
the climate control panel. ornamental molding is chrome-plated,
! Do not clean your vehicle in an automatic contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
touchless car wash which uses caustic Center.
spray. Caustic spray will damage the paint
or ornamental moldings. Headlamps, brake lamps, tail lamps,
side markers, turn signal lenses
If the vehicle is very dirty, prewash it before
running it through the automatic car wash. X Use a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo,
! Make sure the combination switch is set
with plenty of water.
to wiper setting $. Otherwise, the rain
sensor could activate and cause the wipers ! Only use window cleaning solutions that
to move unintentionally. This may lead to are suitable for plastic lamp lenses.
vehicle damage. Window cleaning solutions which are not
Due to the width of the vehicle, fold in suitable may damage the plastic lamp
exterior rear view mirrors prior to running lenses of the headlamps. Therefore, do not
the vehicle through an automatic car wash use abrasives, solvents or cleaners that
to prevent damage to the mirrors. contain solvents.
X When taking the vehicle through an
automatic conveyor-type car wash:
Make sure the automatic transmission
remains in neutral position N. Observe
instructions, see “Remaining in neutral
position N” (Y page 115).
When leaving the automatic car wash, make
sure the mirrors are folded out.
After running the vehicle through an
automatic car wash, wipe any wax off of the
windshield and the wiper blade inserts. This
Z
278 Vehicle care
Cleaning the driving systems sensors Cleaning the rear view camera lens
Operation
X Only use clean water and a soft, non-

scratching cloth to clean rear view camera
lens :.
Be careful not to apply wax to rear view
camera lens : when waxing the vehicle. If
necessary, remove the wax using the
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo with
X Switch off the ignition. plenty of water.
X Clean Distronic system sensor cover : by ! Do not clean the camera and the area
hand. around the camera
To clean Distronic system sensor cover : Rwith a high-pressure cleaner
and the bumper area near sensors ; observe Rwith a dry cloth and strong pressure
the following:
Rwith aggressive cleaning agents
RUse a mild vehicle wash detergent, such as
Mercedes-Benz approved Car Shampoo, You could otherwise damage the camera.
with plenty of water.
Cleaning the windows and the wiper
RUse a soft, non-scratching cloth. blades
! If you use a power washer to clean the ! Never open the hood when the wiper arms
sensor covers, observe the following: are folded forward.
RFollow the instructions provided by the
G Warning!
power washer manufacturer.
For safety reasons, switch off wipers and
RMaintain a distance between the sensor
remove SmartKey from starter switch before
covers and the nozzle of the power cleaning the windshield and/or the wiper
washer. blades. Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make
sure the vehicle’s on-board electronics have
status 0. Otherwise, the wiper motor could
suddenly turn on and cause injury.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts.

They could tear.

Vehicle care 279
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they snap Therefore, the vehicle’s brake system
into place. should always be warmed-up before it is
X Clean the windshield and the wiper blade parked after cleaning. Drive your vehicle for
inserts with a clean cloth and mild several minutes to allow the brakes to dry.
detergent solution. When applying Mercedes-Benz approved
X Use a soft, clean cloth and a mild window Tire Care and Mercedes-Benz approved
cleaning solution on all outside and inside Wheel Care products, take care not to
glass surfaces. spray them on the brake disks.
An automotive glass cleaner is
recommended.
Plastic and rubber parts
Operation
X Use a gentle dishwashing detergent or mild
! Fold the windshield wiper arms back onto detergent for delicate fabrics as a washing
the windshield before turning the SmartKey solution.
in the starter switch or pressing the
X Wipe with a cloth moistened in a lukewarm
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button.
solution.
Hold on to the wiper when folding the wiper The surface may temporarily change color.
arm back. If released, the force of the If this is the case, wait for it to dry.
impact from the tensioning spring could
crack the windshield. G Warning!
Do not use cleaners or cockpit care sprays
! To clean the window interior, do not use
containing solvents to clean the cockpit or the
a dry cloth, abrasives, solvents or cleaners steering wheel. Cleaners containing solvents
containing solvents. Do not touch the will make the surface porous and vehicle
inside of the windows with hard objects occupants could suffer serious injuries from
such as an ice scraper or ring. Doing so may plastic parts coming loose in the event of air
damage the windows. bag deployment.
Light alloy wheels ! Do not use oil, wax or scouring agents.

If possible, clean wheels once a week. Otherwise you may scratch or damage the
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Wheel Care, surface.
a soft bristle brush and a strong spray of
Hard plastic trim items
water for cleaning the light alloy wheels.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
! Only use acid-free cleaning materials. on a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with light
Acid may cause corrosion or damage the pressure.
clear coat.
! The vehicle should not be parked for an COMAND display

extended period of time immediately after ! You must switch off the COMAND display
it has been cleaned. This applies especially and allow it to cool prior to cleaning.
after the wheel rims have been cleaned
with wheel rim cleaner. Wheel rim cleaners ! Do not use any liquids or cleaning agents.
can lead to increased corrosion of the These can damage or even destroy the
brake disks and brake pads. Non-approved COMAND display screen.
wheel cleaners may also damage the wheel
X Use a standard microfiber cloth and apply
paint if the vehicle is not driven after
cleaning. with light pressure.
Z
280 Vehicle care
Steering wheel Using other seat or head restraint covers may

X Wipe with a damp cloth and dry thoroughly interfere with or prevent
or clean with Mercedes-Benz approved Rdeployment of the front side impact air
Leather Care. bags
Rdeployment of the rear side impact air bags
Carpets Ractivation of the NECK-PRO active front
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Carpet and head restraints
Fabric Care for cleaning the carpets. Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
for availability.
Operation
Headliner
Leather upholstery
X Use a soft bristle brush or a dry-shampoo Please note that leather upholstery is a
cleaner in case of excessive dirt. natural product and is therefore subject to a
natural aging process. Leather upholstery
Seat belts may also react to certain ambient influences
X
such as high humidity or high temperature by
Only use clear, lukewarm water and soap.
showing wrinkles for example.
! The seat belts must not be treated with X Wipe leather upholstery with a damp cloth
chemical cleaning agents. Do not dry the and dry thoroughly or clean with Mercedes-
seat belts at temperatures above 176‡ Benz approved Leather Care.
(80†) or in direct sunlight.
! To avoid damage to leather upholstery:
G Warning!
RWipe with light pressure only.
Do not bleach or dye seat belts as this may
severely weaken them. In a crash they may RDo not clean with abrasive cleaning
not be able to provide adequate protection. agents such as scouring milk or powder.
RDo not soak the leather upholstery.
Upholstery As leather is a natural product, it could
Using aftermarket seat covers or wearing otherwise harden or become porous.
clothing that have the tendency to give off RExercise particular care when cleaning
coloring (e.g. when wet, etc.) may cause the perforated leather as its underside
upholstery to become permanently should not become wet.
discolored. By lining the seats with a proper
intermediate cover, contact-discoloration will MB Tex upholstery
be prevented. X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Interior Care
onto a soft, lint-free cloth and apply with
G Warning!
light pressure for cleaning the upholstery.
Only use seat or head restraint covers which
have been tested and approved by Mercedes-
Benz for your vehicle model. Wood trims
X Only use water and a damp cloth to clean
wood trims in your vehicle.
! Do not use solvents like tar remover or
wheel cleaner nor polishes or waxes as
these may be abrasive.

Vehicle care 281
Chrome-plated exhaust tip

Regular cleaning and care of chrome-plated
exhaust tips will help to maintain their shine
and the classy appearance.
X Use Mercedes-Benz approved Chrome
Polishing Paste each time the vehicle has
been washed, especially during the winter.
! Do not use alkaline cleaners such as
wheel cleaners as they could cause
Operation
corrosion.
Z
282

283

Where will I find ...? .......................... 284
Vehicle status messages in the
multifunction display ....................... 287
What to do if … .................................. 314
Unlocking/locking manually ........... 323
Resetting activated NECK-PRO
active front head restraints ............. 325
Replacing SmartKey batteries ......... 326
Replacing bulbs ................................. 328
Replacing wiper blades .................... 334
Practical hints
Flat tire .............................................. 336
Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
engine only) ....................................... 345
AdBlue® (diesel engine only) ........... 346
Battery ............................................... 348
Jump starting .................................... 350
Towing the vehicle ............................ 352
Fuses .................................................. 355

284 Where will I find ...?
Vehicle equipment RJack19
RReversible ratchet for jack19

i This Operator’s Manual describes all
RTowing eye bolt
features, standard or optional, potentially
available for your vehicle at the time of RWheel wrench19
purchase. Please be aware that your RSpare wheel bolts19
vehicle might not be equipped with all
features described in this manual. X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
Where will I find ...?

First aid kit
Practical hints
i Check expiration dates and contents for

completeness at least once a year and
replace missing/expired items.
The first aid kit is located on the driver’s side
in the cargo compartment behind the cover.
X Push in floor handle ; as indicated by

arrow.
X Lift cargo compartment floor : using floor
handle ;.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the

arrow.
X Fold down cover ;.
The first aid kit can be removed.
X Release securing hook = (located below

Vehicle tool kit the floor handle) from holder.
The vehicle tool kit is located in the space
underneath the cargo compartment floor.
The vehicle tool kit includes:
RAlignment bolt 19
RCollapsible wheel chock 19
RFuse chart
19 Vehicles with spare wheel only.

Where will I find ...? 285
: Jack
X Engage securing hook = on upper cargo
; Towing eye bolt
compartment lip ?.
Practical hints
= Reversible ratchet for jack
! With the cargo compartment cover blind ? Alignment bolt
installed behind the third-row seats,
A Fuse chart
disengage cargo compartment cover blind
and flip it forward. Otherwise the strap of B Collapsible wheel chock
the securing hook could damage the cargo C Wheel wrench
compartment cover blind.
Vehicles with spare wheel
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
compartment floor before closing the
tailgate.
Vehicles without spare wheel

i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
factory-equipped with the tools required for
a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
change are specific to your vehicle. : Alignment bolt
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz ; Towing eye bolt
Center to obtain the tools approved for = Wheel wrench
your vehicle. The illustration shows the ? Reversible ratchet for jack
vehicle retrofitted with the necessary tools A Hook and loop fastener
for a wheel change.
B Jack
C Spare wheel bolts
D Collapsible wheel chock
E Fuse chart
F Storage well casing
X To remove jack B, loosen hook and loop

fastener A.
Z
286 Where will I find ...?
Collapsible wheel chock

The collapsible wheel chock serves to secure
the vehicle, e.g. while changing a wheel.
X Take the collapsible wheel chock from the
vehicle tool kit (Y page 284).
Storage position
X Take the reversible ratchet from the vehicle
Practical hints
tool kit (Y page 284).
X Setting up: Tilt both plates upward :.

X Fold the lower plate outward ;.
X Guide the tabs of the lower plate all the way
into the openings of base plate =.
For information on where to place wheel
chocks when changing a wheel, see “Lifting
the vehicle” (Y page 341).
Operational position
Jack
X Attach reversible ratchet ; to jack : in
G Warning! such a way that the word UP can be seen.
Only use the jack supplied with your vehicle
Before placing the jack and the reversible
to lift the vehicle briefly for wheel changes. If
ratchet back into the vehicle tool kit:
you use the jack for any other purpose, you or
others could be injured, as the jack is X Fully collapse the jack (storage position).
designed only for the purpose of changing a X Remove the reversible ratchet.
wheel.
When using the jack, observe the safety notes
in the “Mounting the spare wheel” section and Spare wheel
the notes on the jack.
X Take the jack from the vehicle tool kit i The GL 350 BlueTEC does not have a
(Y page 284). spare wheel.
The spare wheel is located in the space

Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display 287
X Removing: Open the tailgate (Y page 75). X Place the jack into the vehicle tool kit
X Lift the cargo compartment floor and (Y page 285).
secure it on the upper cargo compartment X Close and pull tight the hook and loop
lip (Y page 284). fastener (Y page 285) that secures the
jack.
! To prevent damage, always disengage the
securing hook from upper cargo
compartment lip and lower the cargo
Vehicle status messages in the
compartment floor before closing the
multifunction display
tailgate.
Notes
X Remove the jack from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 285). Warning and malfunction messages appear in
the multifunction display located in the
Practical hints
instrument cluster.
Certain warning and malfunction messages
are accompanied by an audible signal.
Address these messages accordingly and
follow the additional instructions given in this
Operator’s Manual.
Selecting the Vehicle status message
memory menu in the control system
(Y page 131) displays both cleared and
uncleared messages.
X Remove retaining screw : by turning it High-priority messages appear in the
counterclockwise. multifunction display in red color.
Certain messages of high priority cannot be
i If retaining screw : does not come cleared from the multifunction display using
loose, turn storage well casing = slightly the reset button (Y page 124) or button
counterclockwise. Retaining screw : &, *, U or V on the
should then come loose easily. multifunction steering wheel.
X Remove storage well casing =. Other messages of high priority and
X Remove spare wheel ;. messages of less immediate priority can be
cleared from the multifunction display using
For information on mounting the spare wheel,
the reset button or button &, *,
see “Flat tire” (Y page 336).
U or V on the multifunction steering
Storing the spare wheel after use wheel. They are then stored in the Vehicle
status message memory menu
X Place spare wheel ; into the spare wheel (Y page 131). Remember that clearing a
well (Y page 287). message will only make the message
X Place storage well casing = into the spare disappear. Clearing a message will not
wheel (Y page 287). correct the condition that caused the
X Secure spare wheel ; by turning retaining
message to appear.
screw : clockwise (Y page 287).
Z
288 Vehicle status messages in the multifunction display
G Warning! Rspeed
All categories of messages contain important Routside temperature

information which should be taken note of
Rwarning/indicator lamps
and, where a malfunction is indicated,
addressed as soon as possible at an Rmalfunction/warning messages
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Rfailure of any systems
Failure to repair the condition noted may
Driving characteristics may be impaired.
cause damage not covered by the Mercedes-
Benz Limited Warranty, or result in property If you must continue to drive, do so with added
damage or personal injury. caution. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
G Warning! On the pages that follow, you will find a
No messages will be displayed if either the compilation of the most important warning
Practical hints
instrument cluster or the multifunction and malfunction messages that may appear.
display is inoperative.
For your convenience the messages are
As a result, you will not be able to see divided into text messages (Y page 288) and
information about your driving conditions, symbol messages (Y page 299).
such as
Text messages
Safety systems
Display messages Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

ABS ABS, ESP The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Inoperativ malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-
e SAFE® system are unavailable.
See X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
Operator’s during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Manual
X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible.
Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
accident.
ABS ABS, ESP The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
Unavailabl The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle
e speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
See
Operator’s
Manual


ABS ABS, ESP The brake system still functions normally but due to
Unavailabl insufficient power supply, the ABS, the BAS, the ESP®, and
e See the PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
Operator’s When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS,
Manual the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-SAFE® system are
operational again and the message should disappear.
X If the message does not disappear: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon
as possible.
ESP Inoperativ In addition, the yellow ESP® warning lamp d comes on.
Practical hints
e See The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
Operator’s malfunction the BAS, the ESP®, and the PRE-SAFE® system
Manual are unavailable.
The ABS may not be operational.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
accident.
ESP Unavailabl The brake system still functions normally but due to
e See insufficient power supply the ESP®, the BAS, and the
Operator’s PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
Manual X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
When the voltage is above the required value again, the
ESP®, the BAS, and the PRE-SAFE® system are operational
again and the message in the multifunction display should
disappear.
If the message in the multifunction display does not
disappear:
X Have the alternator and the battery checked.
Z

ESP Unavailabl If the yellow ESP® warning lamp d flashes while driving
e See and this message appears, the Electronic Traction System
Operator’s (4-ETS) has switched off to prevent overheating of the drive
Manual wheel brakes.
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the Electronic Traction
System (4-ETS) switches on again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
ESP Unavailabl The self-diagnosis may not be completed yet.
e See The display will clear after driving a short distance at a vehicle
Practical hints
Operator’s speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).

Manual
PRE-SAFE Inoperativ The PRE-SAFE® system has failed. All other occupant safety
e See systems, such as the air bags, are still available.
Operator’s X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Manual possible.


Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is activated while driving
Airbag even though a child, small individual, or object below the
Enabled system’s weight threshold is on the front passenger seat, or
See the front passenger seat is empty. Objects on the seat or
Operator’s forces acting on the seat may make the system sense
Manual supplemental weight.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Engage the parking brake.
Practical hints
X Open the front passenger door.
X Remove child and child restraint from front passenger seat
and properly secure the child in rear seat employing the
child restraint if necessary.
X Remove any other items from on and around the front
passenger seat and make sure the parcel net on the back
of the front passenger seat is empty.
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged
behind or around the seat, head restraints pushing against
roof etc.). The system may recognize such forces as
supplemental weight and sense that an occupant on the
front passenger seat is of a greater weight than actually
present.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger
front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
Z

If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains out even after performing the above corrective
steps, do not have any children 12 years old and under and other small individuals use the front
Practical hints
passenger seat until the system has been repaired.


Front USA only:
Passenger The front passenger front air bag is deactivated while driving
Airbag even though an adult or someone larger than a small
Disabled individual is occupying the front passenger seat. Forces
See acting on the seat may make the system sense a decrease in
Operator’s weight.
Manual X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as possible.
X Have the front passenger vacate the seat and exit the
Practical hints
vehicle.
X Adjust the seat height to a higher position (Y page 83).
X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are
present (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged
underneath, behind or around the seat). Such forces may
cause the system to sense that an occupant of a lesser
weight than actually present is on the front passenger seat.
X Keep the seat unoccupied, close the front passenger door
and switch on the ignition.
Monitor the 42 indicator lamp in the center
console (Y page 45) and the multifunction display in the
instrument cluster for the following:
With the seat unoccupied and the ignition switched on,
Rthe 42 indicator lamp in the center console
should illuminate and remain illuminated, indicating that
the OCS (Y page 42) has deactivated the front passenger
front air bag.
Rthe message Front Passenger Airbag Enabled See
Operator’s Manual or the message Front Passenger
Airbag Disabled See Operator’s Manual should not
appear in the multifunction display at any time the seat is
unoccupied. Wait at least 60 seconds for the system to
complete the necessary check cycles and to make sure
neither message appears in the multifunction display.
If above conditions are met, you can occupy the front
passenger seat again. Depending on the front passenger
classification sensed by the OCS, the 42
indicator lamp will remain illuminated or go out.
If above conditions are not met, the system is not working
properly. Have the system checked at an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as possible.
Z
G Warning!
If the 42 indicator lamp remains illuminated with an adult occupant on the front
passenger seat even after performing the above corrective steps, do not have any passenger use
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
Driving systems

Cruise Inoperativ The cruise control is malfunctioning.
Control e X Have the cruise control checked at an authorized
Practical hints
Cruise - - - MPH One of the activation conditions for cruise control has not
Control been fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for cruise control
(Y page 145).
DISTRONIC - - - Km/h One of the activation conditions for Distronic has not been
(Canada fulfilled. You may have attempted to set a speed below
only) 20 mph (30 km/h).
X Drive faster than 20 mph (30 km/h) if the situation allows
and set the speed.
X Check the activation conditions for Distronic
(Y page 151).
DISTRONIC Inoperativ The Distronic or the display are malfunctioning.

e X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
DISTRONIC Override You have accelerated. The Distronic has switched off.
X Stop accelerating.
DISTRONIC Available Distronic had been deactivated and is available again.

Again X Activate Distronic (Y page 151).


DISTRONIC Currently Distronic is deactivated because:
Unavailabl RThe Distronic cover in the radiator grille is dirty.
e
RThe functionality is impaired by heavy precipitation or fog.
See
Operator’s RThe system is overheated.
Manual
X If necessary, clean the Distronic cover in the area of the
radiator grille (Y page 278).
X If necessary, wait until the system has cooled down.
X Restart the vehicle.
Distronic becomes operational again without the engine being
Practical hints
restarted when:
Rdirt on the radiator grille has fallen off while driving (e.g.
slush or snow)
Rthe system recognizes full sensor availability (due to
lessening rain or the road surface drying)
Rthe message in the multifunction display disappears
You can then operate Distronic as usual again.
DISTRONIC Currently Distronic is deactivated because the functionality is impaired
Unavailabl by external interferences, e.g. high-frequency sources such
e as toll stations, speed measuring systems etc.
See X Leave the area of the external interference.
Operator’s X
Activate Distronic again (Y page 151) when the message
Manual
DISTRONIC Available Again appears.
Distronic is deactivated because the Distronic sensor has not

sensed any other vehicles or objects, e.g. road sign or such,
for a long time.
X Activate Distronic again (Y page 151) when the message
DISTRONIC Available Again appears.
G Warning! the system is able to detect a dirty sensor. The

Distronic cannot take weather conditions into message DISTRONIC Currently
account. Switch off Distronic or do not turn it Unavailable See Operator’s Manual will
on if the sensor is dirty or visibility is be displayed in the multifunction display and
diminished as a result of snow, rain or fog. The Distronic will be turned off.
distance control may be impaired even before
Z
Vehicle

Depress You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into
brake to drive position D, reverse gear R or neutral position N without
shift out depressing the brake pedal.
of P. X Depress the brake pedal.
Door Open Vehicle You have opened the driver’s door and the automatic
Not In transmission is still in drive position D, reverse gear R or
Park neutral position N.
X Before you leave the vehicle, make sure the automatic
Practical hints
transmission is in park position P and the parking brake is

engaged.
Drive to The automatic transmission cannot be shifted out of the

workshop current transmission position because of a malfunction.
without If the automatic transmission is in drive position D:
shifting X Without shifting the automatic transmission out of drive
gears.
position D, drive to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
If the automatic transmission is set to neutral position N,
reverse gear R or park position P:
X Do not drive.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Only You have attempted to shift the automatic transmission into

shift to park position P although the vehicle was still in motion.
P when X Stop the vehicle.
vehicle
is at a
standstill
.
Shift to You have attempted to start the engine with the KEYLESS-GO
P or N to start/stop button while the automatic transmission was in
start reverse gear R or drive position D.
engine. X Shift the automatic transmission into park position P or
neutral position N. Make sure the brake pedal is depressed.
Auxiliary Malfunctio The backup battery for the automatic transmission is no

Battery n longer charging.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.

Tires

Check then There has been a warning message about a loss in the tire
tires, restart inflation pressure and the tire pressure loss warning system
Run Flat was not restarted yet.
Indicator. X Make sure the correct tire inflation pressure is set for each
tire.
X Then restart the tire pressure loss warning system
(Y page 237).
Run Flat Inoperativ The tire pressure loss warning system is malfunctioning.
Indicator e
Practical hints
X Have the tire pressure loss warning system checked at an
Tire Check The tire pressure loss warning system indicates that the tire
Pressure Tires inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic
situation around you.
X Check the tires and, if necessary, change the wheel
(Y page 336).
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 237).
X Restart the tire pressure loss warning system after
adjusting the tire inflation pressure values (Y page 237).
Tire driving The tire inflation pressure is being checked by the Advanced
pressure for a few TPMS.
displayed minutes. X Drive the vehicle for a few minutes.
after
Tire Inoperativ The Advanced TPMS is malfunctioning.
Pressure e X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Monitor Mercedes-Benz Center.
Tire Inoperativ There are wheels without appropriate wheel sensors mounted
Pressure e No (e.g. winter tires).
Monitor Wheel X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
Sensors Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Have the appropriate wheel sensors installed at an
Z

Tire Wheel At least one sensor is defect (e.g. battery is empty).
Pressure Sensor The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
Monitor Missing inflation pressure in the multifunction display.
X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
At least one wheel without appropriate wheel sensors is

mounted (e.g. spare tire).
The respective tire is indicated by – – instead of the tire
Practical hints
inflation pressure in the multifunction display.

X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized
X Have the wheel sensors installed at an authorized
Tire Currently The Advanced TPMS cannot monitor the tire inflation pressure
Pressure Unavailabl due to a nearby radio interference source or insufficient
Monitor e power supply.
As soon as the causes of the malfunction have been rectified,
the Advanced TPMS becomes active again automatically after
a few minutes of driving.
Tire The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
Pressure(s or
) Please The tire inflation pressures of the individual tires differ from
Correct each other significantly.
The tire inflation pressure values are shown in the
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 237).
X Restart the Advanced TMPS (Y page 241).
Caution: At least one tire is deflating.

Tire The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
Defect X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 336).


Check The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly
Tire(s) below the reference value.
The respective tire is indicated in the multifunction display.
X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
Practical hints
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
Symbol messages
Brake
# Brake Wear The brake pads have reached their wear limit.
X Have the brake pads replaced as soon as possible.
! Brake pad thickness must be visually inspected by a qualified technician at the intervals
specified in the Maintenance Booklet.
Z
$ EBV, ABS, The brake system is still functioning normally but due to a
ESP malfunction, the ABS, the BAS, the EBP, the ESP®, and the
(USA only) Inoperativ PRE-SAFE® system are unavailable.
J e See X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock
(Canada Operator’s during hard braking, reducing steering capability.
only) Manual
X Adjust driving to be consistent with reduced braking
responsiveness.
$ Release You are driving with the parking brake engaged. In addition
Practical hints
Parking an acoustic warning sounds.

(USA only) Brake X Release the parking brake.
!
(Canada
only)
$ Check There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.

Brake Risk of accident!
(USA only) Fluid X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
J Level
to do so.
(Canada X Engage the parking brake
only)
X Do not drive any further.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
Roadside Assistance.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning!
Driving with the message Check Brake Fluid Level displayed can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately.
Do not add brake fluid before checking the brake system. Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can
result in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and the brake fluid catching fire. You can be
seriously burned.
! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum mark
or below, have the brake system checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.

Safety systems
G Tele Aid One or more main functions of the Tele Aid system are
Inoperativ malfunctioning.
e X Have the Tele Aid system checked at an authorized
+ Restraint The system is malfunctioning.

Sys. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized
Malfunctio Mercedes-Benz Center and have the system checked
n immediately.
Service
Practical hints
Required
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.
Driving systems
Á Level The selected vehicle level cannot be adjusted, because

Selection Ryou are driving too fast for the desired vehicle level
Not
Ryou are towing a trailer
Permitted
Ryou are using accessories that are connected to the trailer
power socket, e.g. a bicycle rack
X Reduce vehicle speed and set the desired vehicle level
again (Y page 159).
X Observe the notes on trailer towing (Y page 269).
Á Malfunctio The air suspension is malfunctioning.

n X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
Center.
Z
Á Compressor You have selected a higher vehicle level. Due to frequent level
Cooling changes within a short period, the compressor must cool
Down down first.
! When the message Compressor Cooling Down appears
in the multifunction display, driving is still possible. Keep in
mind that the ride height of the vehicle is not yet reached,
so you can damage the underbody of the vehicle.
X Let the compressor cool down until the message
disappears.
The selected level will be set once the compressor has
Practical hints
cooled down.
Á Rising The vehicle is adjusting to off-road level 3.

Max. 12 X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h).
MPH
Á Max. 12 You are driving while using off-road level 3. The message
MPH reminds you of the maximum speed at which you may drive
with off-road level 3.
X Do not drive faster than 12 mph (20 km/h).
Æ Being The vehicle is being lowered from off-road level 3 to off-road

lowered level 2.
Max. 12 X Do not drive faster than 12 mph
MPH (20 km/h) until the off-road level 2 is reached.
Æ Reduce You are driving too fast for the set vehicle level.
speed to
under
G Warning!
12 MPH Adapt your driving style to the modified driving conditions.
Avoid extreme, quick steering maneuvers. Please keep in
mind that the driving characteristics of the vehicle have been
modified. You should therefore drive in off-road level 3 with
particular caution as it could otherwise lead to an accident
and/or serious injury to you or others.
X Do not drive faster than 12 mph
(20 km/h) until the off-road level 2 is reached.
8 Locking The differential locks are malfunctioning.

System X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
Inoperativ X
Have the vehicle checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
e Service
Center.
Required

8 Diff. The differential locks are too hot and have been deactivated
Lock as a result.
System X Continue driving with added caution. The lock function is
Overheated unavailable.
- Wait X Wait for the lock system to cool down.
briefly.
The differential locks will be reactivated as soon as they
have cooled down.
8 Stop A shifting procedure could not be completed. LOW RANGE is

vehicle, in neutral position. There is no connection between the engine
engage and the drive wheels.
Practical hints
parking X Do not attempt to continue driving. You could otherwise
brake. damage the vehicle’s drivetrain.
X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so.
X Perform the shifting procedure again (Y page 120).
Å Service The LOW RANGE system is malfunctioning.

Required X Do not drive faster than 50 mph (80 km/h).
If parked X
Engage the parking brake if parked.
engage
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
pk. brake.
possible.
Å Max. Speed too high for shifting procedure.

Speed X Continue driving more slowly.
25 MPH The shifting procedure will be performed.
Å Max. Speed too high for shifting procedure.

Speed X Continue driving more slowly.
40 MPH The shifting procedure will be performed.
Å Shift You have reduced engine speed, but the automatic

briefly transmission is not in neutral position N.
into N. X Briefly shift automatic transmission to neutral position N.
Å Shifting The shifting procedure was not carried out.

Process X Repeat the shifting procedure if desired.
Canceled
Reactivate
Ã Inoperativ Downhill Speed Regulation is malfunctioning.

e X Have the Downhill Speed Regulation checked at an
Z
Vehicle
E You are driving with the hood or the tailgate open.

X Stop the vehicle in a safe location as soon as it is safe to
do so.
X Close the hood (Y page 229) or the tailgate (Y page 75).
There is otherwise danger of an accident.
You are trying to lock the vehicle with the KEYLESS-GO
function with a door or the tailgate open.
X Close all doors and/or the tailgate (Y page 75).
Practical hints
; You are driving with at least one door open.

X Close all doors.
+ Key A SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO left in the vehicle was

Detected recognized while trying to lock the vehicle from the outside.
In Vehicle X Take the SmartKey out of the vehicle.
+ Don’t This message appears for a maximum of 60 seconds if the

Forget driver’s door is opened with the engine turned off and no
Your Key SmartKey in the starter switch. This message is only a
reminder.
X Take the SmartKey with you when leaving the vehicle.
+ Remove Key You have forgotten to remove the SmartKey.

X Remove the SmartKey from the starter switch.
+ You need The SmartKey is malfunctioning.

a new key. X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
+ Key Does The SmartKey in the starter switch does not belong to the
Not vehicle.
Belong to X Find the SmartKey that belongs to the vehicle to operate
Vehicle the vehicle.
+ Change The batteries in the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO are

Key discharged.
Batteries X Replace the batteries (Y page 326).

+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because the SmartKey is not in the vehicle.
(message X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
appears in X Engage the parking brake.
red)
X Search for the SmartKey.
The vehicle cannot be locked centrally nor can the engine
be started again after the engine is stopped.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is not detected while the
Detected engine is running because there is strong radio-frequency
(message interference.
Practical hints
appears in X Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
red) X Engage the parking brake.
X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
(Y page 80).
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+ Key Not The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is momentarily not detected.

Detected X Change the position of the SmartKey in the vehicle.
(message X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the
appears in
starter switch (Y page 80).
white)
X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
+ Pull The SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO is permanently not detected.

starting X Remove the KEYLESS-GO button from the starter switch
button (Y page 80).
out then X Operate the vehicle with the SmartKey in the starter switch.
insert
key.
~ Bluetooth The telephone has not yet been connected to the COMAND
Ready system via Bluetooth®.
X Connect the telephone to the COMAND system via
Bluetooth®.
¥ Top Up The fluid level has dropped to approximately 1/3 of total

Washer reservoir capacity.
Fluid X Add washer fluid (Y page 232).
Z
Engine
+ Top Up The coolant level is too low.

Coolant X Add coolant (Y page 231).
See X If you have to add coolant frequently, have the cooling
Operator’s
system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
G Warning!
Do not spill antifreeze on hot engine parts. Antifreeze contains ethylene glycol which may burn
if it comes into contact with hot engine parts. You could be seriously burned.
Practical hints
! Do not ignore the low engine coolant level warning. Extended driving with the message
and symbol displayed may cause serious engine damage not covered by the Mercedes-Benz
Limited Warranty.
Do not drive without sufficient amount of coolant in the cooling system. The engine will
overheat causing major engine damage.
? Coolant The coolant is too hot.

Stop car, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
switch X Turn off the engine immediately.
engine
off.
X Only start the engine again after the message disappears.
You could otherwise damage the engine.
X Observe the coolant temperature in the multifunction
display.
X If the temperature rises again: Contact an authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center immediately.
During severe operation conditions and stop-and-go city
traffic, the coolant temperature may rise close to 248‡
(120†).
G Warning!
Driving when your engine is overheated can cause some fluids which may have leaked into the
engine compartment to catch fire. You could be seriously burned.
Steam from an overheated engine can cause serious burns which can occur just by opening the
engine hood. Stay away from the engine if you see or hear steam coming from it.
Stop the vehicle in a safe location away from other traffic. Turn off the engine, get out of the
vehicle and do not stand near the vehicle until the engine has cooled down.

! The engine should not be operated with the coolant temperature above 248‡ (120†).
Doing so may cause serious damage which is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
? Coolant The poly-V-belt could be broken.

Stop car, X Stop the vehicle immediately as soon as it is safe to do so.
switch X Turn off the engine immediately.
engine
X Check the poly-V-belt.
off.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
Practical hints
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an
X If it is intact: Do not continue to drive the vehicle with this
message displayed. Doing so could result in serious engine
damage that is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty.
display.
X Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
immediately.
? The radiator cooling fan is malfunctioning.

display.
If the coolant temperature is below 248‡ (120†), you may
continue driving to an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Avoid placing heavy loads on the engine (e.g. by driving
uphill) as well as stop-and-go traffic.
X Have the fan replaced as soon as possible.
Z
# The battery is no longer charging.

Possible causes:
Ralternator malfunctioning
Rbroken poly-V-belt
Ra malfunction in the electronic system
X Stop immediately in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
to do so and check the poly-V-belt.
X If it is broken: Do not continue to drive. Otherwise the
engine will overheat due to an inoperative water pump
Practical hints
which may result in damage to the engine. Contact an

X If it is intact: Drive to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center immediately. Adjust driving to be consistent
with reduced braking responsiveness.
# Battery/ The battery is defective.

Alternator X Stop the vehicle in a safe location or as soon as it is safe
Stop to do so.
Vehicle X Engage the parking brake.
X Do not continue to drive.
4 Check The engine oil level is too low.

engine X Check the engine oil level (Y page 230) and add engine oil
oil level as required (Y page 231).
at next X If you must add engine oil frequently, have the engine
refueling.
checked for possible leaks.
If the message Check engine oil level For information on approved engine oils
at next refueling. appears while the contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
engine is running and at operating or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
temperature, the engine oil level has dropped ! Engine oil level warnings should not be
to approximately the minimum level.
ignored. Extended driving with the symbol
The message will be stored in the vehicle displayed could result in serious engine
status message memory after you have damage that is not covered by the
cleared it from the multifunction display. Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Visually check for oil leaks. If there are no
obvious oil leaks, drive to the nearest service
station to refill your engine oil to the required
level.

C The fuel level is low.

X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Reserve The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Fuel X Refuel at the next gas station.
8 Ultra Low- Vehicles with diesel engine only:

sulfur The fuel level has dropped below the reserve mark.
Diesel X Refuel at the next gas station.
Fuel Only
X Only use commercially available vehicular ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL (ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR
Practical hints
MAXIMUM).
8 Gas Cap A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The
Open fuel cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may
be leaking.
X Check the fuel cap (Y page 227).
X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked at
an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
¸ Replace The air filter is clogged.

air filter X Have the air filter checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
· Clean There is water in the fuel filter.

Fuel X Have the water drained at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Filter Center as soon as possible.
Ø Check The AdBlue® supply is almost depleted.

Additive X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled as soon as possible
See (Y page 346).
Operator's Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Manual
Ø Remaining The AdBlue® supply has dropped to the minimum level.

Starts: 20 X Have the AdBlue® tank refilled immediately (Y page 346).
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
i When the message Remaining point. Therefore, fill the AdBlue® tank with
Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®
display, you can start the engine 20 more (corresponds to approximately 2 refill
times. If you do not add AdBlue®, the containers AdBlue®) or have the AdBlue®
engine cannot be started beyond that tank filled at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Z
Center. After AdBlue® was refilled, the

engine can be started again.
Lamps
b Active The active Bi-Xenon headlamp system is malfunctioning.

Headlamps X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Inoperativ possible.
e
b Daytime The left or right daytime running lamps are malfunctioning.

Running X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Practical hints
Light Left possible.

or
Daytime
Running
Light
Right
b Reverse The left or right backup lamp is malfunctioning.

Lamp Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
or
Reverse
Lamp Right
b Brake The left or right brake lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute

Lamp Left bulb is being used.
or X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
Brake
Lamp Right
b 3rd Brake The high-mounted brake lamp is malfunctioning. This

Lamp message will only appear if all LEDs have stopped working.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
b Front The left or right front fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Foglamp X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
Left possible.
or
Front
Foglamp
Right

b Marker The front left side or right side marker lamp is malfunctioning.
Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
Front Left
or
Marker
Lamp
Front
Right
b Parking The left or right front parking lamp is malfunctioning. A

Lamp substitute bulb is being used.
Front Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
Practical hints
or
Parking
Lamp
Front
Right
b High Beam The left or right high-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
or (Y page 328).
High Beam X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Right
b License The left or right license plate lamp is malfunctioning.

Plate X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
Lamp Left
or
License
Plate
Lamp Right
b AUTO The light sensor is malfunctioning. The headlamps come on

Light automatically.
Inoperativ X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
e possible.
To switch off the headlamps (U.S. vehicles only):
X In the control system, set daytime running lamp mode to
manual (Y page 136).
X Switch off the headlamps using the exterior lamp switch
(Y page 97).
Z
b Low Beam The left or right low-beam lamp is malfunctioning.

Left X Halogen headlamp: Replace the bulb as soon as possible
or (Y page 328).
Low Beam X Bi-Xenon headlamp: Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Right
b Foglamp The rear fog lamp is malfunctioning.

Rear Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
b Switch You have removed the SmartKey from the starter switch,
Off Lights opened the driver’s door and left the headlamps on or
Practical hints
removed the SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO from the vehicle

and left the headlamps on.
X Turn the exterior lamp switch to $ or Ã
(Y page 97).
or
X With the rear fog lamp switched on: Push in the exterior
lamp switch to its stop.
b Tail Lamp The left or right tail lamp is malfunctioning. A substitute bulb
Left is being used.
or X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
Tail Lamp
Right
b Trailer The left or right trailer brake lamp is malfunctioning.

Brake Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
b Trailer The left or right trailer tail lamp is malfunctioning.

Tail Lamp X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Left
or
Trailer
Tail Lamp
Right
b Trailer The left or right trailer turn signal lamp is malfunctioning.

Turn X Replace the bulb as soon as possible.
Signal
Left
or
Trailer
Turn
Signal
Right

b Turn The left or right rear turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Signal substitute bulb is being used.
Rear Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
or
Turn
Signal
Rear Right
b Turn The left or right front turn signal lamp is malfunctioning. A

Signal substitute bulb is being used.
Front Left X Replace the bulb as soon as possible (Y page 328).
or
Practical hints
Turn
Signal
Front
Right
b Turn The turn signal in the left or right exterior rear view mirror is
Signal malfunctioning. This message will only appear if all LEDs have
Left stopped working.
Mirror X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
or possible.
Turn
Signal
Right
Mirror
Tires
h Tire The tire inflation pressure is too low in at least one tire.
pressure(s or
) Please The tire inflation pressure of the individual tires differ from
Correct each other significantly.
X Check and correct tire inflation pressure as required
(Y page 237).
h Tire At least one tire is deflating.

Pressure X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Caution: steering and braking maneuvers.
Tire X If necessary, change the wheel (Y page 336).
Defect
Z
314 What to do if …
h Tire The tire inflation pressure in at least one tire is significantly

Pressure below the reference value.
Check X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt
Tires steering and braking maneuvers.
X Check and adjust tire inflation pressure as required.
G Warning!
Do not drive with a flat tire. A flat tire affects the ability to steer or brake the vehicle. You may
lose control of the vehicle. Continued driving with a flat tire will cause excessive heat build-up
Practical hints
and possibly a fire.
G Warning!
Do not underinflate tires. Underinflated tires wear excessively and/or unevenly, adversely affect
handling and fuel economy, and are more likely to fail from being overheated.
Do not overinflate tires. Overinflated tires can adversely affect handling and ride comfort, wear
unevenly, increase stopping distance, and result in sudden deflation (blowout) because they are
more likely to become punctured or damaged by road debris, potholes etc.
What to do if … When you switch on the ignition, all lamps

(except low-beam headlamp indicator lamp,
Lamps in instrument cluster high-beam headlamp indicator lamp, and turn
signal indicator lamps unless activated) in the
Notes
instrument cluster come on. If a lamp in the
If any of the following lamps in the instrument instrument cluster fails to come on when the
cluster fails to come on during the bulb self- ignition is switched on, have it checked and
check when switching on the ignition, have replaced if necessary.
the respective bulb checked and replaced if
necessary.

What to do if … 315
Brake
Problem Possible causes/consequences and M Solutions

! The yellow ABS The ABS has detected a malfunction and switched off. The BAS,
indicator lamp the ESP® and the PRE-SAFE® are also switched off.
comes on while The brake system is still functioning normally but without the
the engine is systems specified above available.
running.
If the ABS control unit is malfunctioning, other systems such as
the navigation system or the automatic transmission may also be
malfunctioning.
X Continue driving with added caution. Wheels may lock during
hard braking, reducing steering capability.
Practical hints
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
accident.
! The yellow ABS The ABS has switched off due to insufficient power supply.
indicator lamp The battery might not be charged sufficiently.
comes on while When the voltage is above the required value again, the ABS is
the engine is operational again. The ABS indicator lamp should go out.
running.
X If the ABS indicator lamp does not go out: Have the alternator
and the battery checked.
! The yellow ABS The self-diagnosis has not been completed yet.
indicator lamp The indicator lamp will go out after driving a short distance at a
comes on while vehicle speed of above 12 mph (20 km/h).
the engine is
running.
Z

$ (USA only) The Electronic Brake Proportioning (EBP) switched off due to a
J (Canada only) malfunction.
! The ABS, the BAS, the ESP® and PRE-SAFE® are also switched off.
d X Have the system checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
The red brake warning Center as soon as possible.
lamp comes on while Failure to follow these instructions increases the risk of an
driving. In addition, the accident.
yellow ABS malfunction
indicator lamp, and the
yellow ESP® warning
lamp come on and an
Practical hints
acoustic warning
sounds.
$ (USA only) You are driving with the parking brake engaged.
J (Canada only) X Release the parking brake.
The red brake warning
lamp comes on while
driving and an acoustic
warning sounds.
$ (USA only) There is insufficient brake fluid in the reservoir.
J (Canada only) Risk of accident!
The red brake warning X Do not drive any further. Stop the vehicle in a safe location as
lamp comes on while soon as it is safe to do so.
the engine is running X Engage the parking brake.
and an acoustic
X Read and observe messages that may appear in the
warning sounds.
Do not add brake fluid! This will not solve the problem.
G Warning! the brake fluid catching fire. You can be

Driving with the brake warning lamp seriously burned.
illuminated can result in an accident. Have
your brake system checked immediately if the ! If you find that the brake fluid in the brake
brake warning lamp stays on. Do not add fluid reservoir has fallen to the minimum
brake fluid before checking the brake system. mark or below, have the brake system
Overfilling the brake fluid reservoir can result checked for brake pad thickness and leaks.
in spilling brake fluid on hot engine parts and

Safety systems

7 The red seat belt The seat belt telltale reminds you and your passengers to fasten
telltale comes your seat belts before driving off.
on for a X Fasten your seat belts.
maximum of
Regardless of whether the seat belts are fastened or not, the seat
6 seconds after
belt telltale always comes on and remains lit for 6 seconds after
starting the
starting the engine.
engine.
7 The red seat belt You have forgotten to fasten your seat belt.
telltale comes X Fasten your seat belt.
Practical hints
on. In addition The warning chime stops sounding.
you hear a
warning chime
for a maximum
of 6 seconds
after starting the
engine.
7 The red seat belt You and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your
telltale comes seat belts.
on while the X Fasten your seat belts.
vehicle is The seat belt telltale goes out.
standing still
and the engine is There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
running or while the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
driving. X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out.
7 The red seat belt The vehicle’s speed once exceeded 15 mph (25 km/h) and you
telltale flashes and/or your front passenger have forgotten to fasten your seat
while driving. In belts.
addition, an X Fasten your seat belts.
intermittent The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
warning chime sounding.
sounds with
increasing There are items placed on the front passenger seat and therefore
intensity. the system senses the front passenger seat as being occupied.
X Remove the items from the front passenger seat and put them
in a safe place.
The seat belt telltale goes out and the warning chime stops
sounding.
Z
i After 60 seconds with an unfastened seat belt the warning chime stops sounding and the
seat belt telltale illuminates continuously. The seat belt telltale will only go out if both, the
driver and front passenger’s seat belt are fastened, or the vehicle is standing still and a front
door is opened.

+ The red SRS There is a malfunction in the restraint systems. The air bags or
indicator lamp Emergency Tensioning Devices (ETDs) could deploy unexpectedly
comes on while or fail to activate in an accident.
driving. X Drive with added caution to the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Practical hints
G Warning! Center immediately to have the system

In the event a malfunction of the SRS is checked. Otherwise the SRS may not be
indicated as outlined above, the SRS may not activated when needed in an accident, which
be operational. could result in serious or fatal injury, or it
For your safety, we strongly recommend that might deploy unexpectedly and unnecessarily
you contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz which could also result in injury.

d The yellow ESP® The ESP® has been switched off.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while
When the ESP® is switched off it will not stabilize the vehicle if the
the engine is
system recognizes that the vehicle starts to skid or that a wheel
running.
is spinning.
X Switch the ESP® back on.
Exceptions: (Y page 64).
X If leaving the ESP® switched off, adapt your speed and driving
to the prevailing road and weather conditions.
X If the ESP® cannot be switched back on: Have the system
checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center as soon as
possible.
d The yellow ESP® The ESP® is not operational due to a malfunction.
warning lamp Risk of accident!
comes on while X
Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
the engine is
running.
X Continue driving with added caution.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.


d The yellow ESP® The ESP® or the 4-ETS has come into operation because of
warning lamp detected traction loss in at least one tire.
flashes while The cruise control is deactivated.
driving. X When driving off, apply as little throttle as possible.
X While driving, ease up on the accelerator pedal.
X Adapt your speed and driving to the prevailing road and weather
conditions.
X Do not deactivate the ESP®.
Exceptions: (Y page 64).

Practical hints
accident.
At least one wheel is spinning and the 4-ETS has switched off to
prevent overheating of the drive wheel brakes.
X Read and observe additional messages that may appear in the
As soon as the brakes have cooled off, the 4-ETS switches on
again.
The message in the multifunction display disappears and the
ESP® warning lamp d goes out.
Driving systems

· The red distance You are too close to the vehicle in front of you to maintain selected
warning lamp speed.
comes on while X Apply the brakes immediately to increase the following
driving. distance.
· The red distance You are gaining too rapidly on the vehicle ahead of you or the
warning lamp distance warning system has recognized a stationary obstacle on
comes on while your probable line of travel.
driving and an X Apply the brakes immediately.
acoustic X Carefully observe the traffic situation. You may need to brake
warning sounds.
or maneuver to avoid hitting an obstacle.
Z
Vehicle

The yellow fuel tank The fuel level has gone below the reserve mark.
reserve warning lamp in X Refuel at the next gas station.
the fuel gauge comes
on while driving.
Engine

! (USA only) There may be a malfunction in
Practical hints
; (Canada only) Rthe fuel management system

The yellow engine Rthe ignition system
malfunction indicator
Rthe emission control system
lamp comes on when
the engine is running. Rsystems which affect emissions
Such malfunctions may result in excessive emissions values and
may switch the engine to limp-home (emergency operation) mode.
X Have the vehicle checked as soon as possible at an authorized
i Some states may by law require you to visit a workshop as
soon as the engine malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Check
local requirements.
! (USA only) A loss of pressure has been detected in the fuel system. The fuel
; (Canada only) cap may not be closed properly or the fuel system may be leaky.
The yellow engine X Check the fuel cap (Y page 226).
malfunction indicator X If it is not closed properly: Close the fuel cap.
lamp comes on when X If it is closed properly: Have the fuel system checked by an
the engine is running. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
Diesel engine: Your fuel tank was driven empty.

X After refueling, start, turn off and restart the engine three or four
times in succession.
The limp-home mode is canceled. You do not need to have your
vehicle checked.

Tires

h USA only: The Advanced TPMS detects a loss of pressure in at least one tire.
Combination X Carefully bring the vehicle to a halt, avoiding abrupt steering and
low tire pressure braking maneuvers. Observe the traffic situation around you.
telltale/TPMS X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
malfunction (Y page 287).
telltale for the
If the tire inflation pressure in the respective tire(s) has (have) been
Advanced TPMS
corrected, the combination low tire pressure/TPMS malfunction
illuminates
telltale goes out after a few minutes of driving.
continuously.
Practical hints
h USA only: There is a malfunction in the Advanced TPMS.
Combination X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display
low tire pressure (Y page 287).
telltale/TPMS X Have the Advanced TPMS checked at an authorized Mercedes-
malfunction Benz Center.
telltale for the
After the malfunction has been remedied, the combination low tire
Advanced TPMS
pressure/TPMS malfunction telltale goes out after a few minutes
flashes 60
of driving.
seconds and
then stays
illuminated.
G Warning! your tires as soon as possible, and inflate

Each tire, including the spare (if provided), them to the proper pressure. Driving on a
should be checked at least once a month significantly underinflated tire causes the tire
when cold and inflated to the inflation to overheat and can lead to tire failure.
pressure recommended by the vehicle Underinflation also reduces fuel efficiency
manufacturer on the Tire and Loading and tire tread life, and may affect the vehicle’s
Information placard on the driver’s door B- handling and stopping ability. Please note that
pillar or the tire inflation pressure label on the the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire
inside of the fuel filler flap. If your vehicle has maintenance, and it is the driver’s
tires of a different size than the size indicated responsibility to maintain correct tire
on the Tire and Loading Information placard pressure, even if underinflation has not
or the tire inflation pressure label, you should reached the level to trigger illumination of the
determine the proper tire inflation pressure TPMS low tire pressure telltale.
for those tires. Your vehicle has also been equipped with a
As an added safety feature, your vehicle has TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when
been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring the system is not operating properly. The
system (TPMS) that illuminates a low tire TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with
pressure telltale when one or more of your the low tire pressure telltale. When the
tires are significantly underinflated. system detects a malfunction, the telltale will
Accordingly, when the low tire pressure flash for approximately 1 minute and then
telltale illuminates, you should stop and check remain continuously illuminated. This
Z
sequence will continue upon subsequent or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the
vehicle start-ups as long as the malfunction TPMS from functioning properly. Always
exists. When the malfunction indicator is check the TPMS malfunction telltale after
illuminated, the system may not be able to replacing one or more tires or wheels on your
detect or signal low tire pressure as intended. vehicle to ensure that the replacement or
TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to
reasons, including the installation of continue to function properly.
incompatible replacement or alternate tires
Lamp in center console

Practical hints
Canada only: A BabySmartTM child seat is installed on the front passenger seat.
42 Therefore the front passenger front air bag is switched off.
The front passenger
The system is malfunctioning when there is no BabySmartTM child
front air bag off
seat installed on the front passenger seat.
indicator lamp
illuminates and X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
remains illuminated Mercedes-Benz Center.
(Y page 47).
Canada only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat.
The front passenger X Check installation of the child seat (Y page 58).
front air bag off If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains out:
indicator lamp does not
X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
illuminate or does not
remain illuminated with
a BabySmartTM child Do not use the BabySmartTM restraint to transport children on the
seat properly installed front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
on the passenger seat.
USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Have the system checked as soon as possible at an authorized
The front passenger Mercedes-Benz Center.
front air bag off X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
indicator lamp follow corrective steps (Y page 287).
illuminates and
remains illuminated
with the weight of a
typical adult or
someone larger than a
small individual on the
front passenger seat.

Unlocking/locking manually 323
G Warning! than a small individual on the front passenger

If the 42 indicator lamp seat, do not have any passenger use the front
illuminates and remains illuminated with the passenger seat until the system has been
weight of a typical adult or someone larger repaired.

USA only: The system is malfunctioning.
42 X Make sure there is nothing between seat cushion and child seat
The front passenger and check installation of the child seat.
front air bag off X Make sure no objects applying supplemental weight onto the
indicator lamp does not seat are present.
illuminate and/or does X Make sure no objects which apply forces to the seat are present
Practical hints
not remain illuminated (e.g. objects such as books, briefcases etc. lodged behind or
with the weight of a around the seat, head restraints pushing against roof etc.). The
typical 12-month-old system may recognize such forces as supplemental weight.
child in a standard child X
If the front passenger front air bag off indicator lamp remains
restraint or less on the
out, have the system checked as soon as possible at an
front passenger seat.
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. Do not transport a child on
the front passenger seat until the system has been repaired.
X Read and observe messages in the multifunction display and
follow corrective steps (Y page 287).
G Warning! and
If the 42 indicator lamp does not Ropen the driver’s door
illuminate or remains out with the weight of a To cancel the alarm, insert the SmartKey into
typical 12-month-old child in a standard child the starter switch.
restraint or less on the front passenger seat,
do not transport a child on the front
Removing the mechanical key
passenger seat until the system has been
repaired.
Unlocking/locking manually
Unlocking the vehicle
If you cannot unlock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, unlock the
driver’s door using the mechanical key.
The anti-theft alarm system will trigger when
you SmartKey
Runlocking the driver’s door with the
mechanical key
Z
324 Unlocking/locking manually
Locking the vehicle

If you cannot lock the vehicle with the
SmartKey or with KEYLESS-GO, lock it as
follows:
X Close the front passenger door, the right
rear door, and the tailgate.
X Open the driver’s door and the rear left
door.
X Press the central locking switch
(Y page 75).
SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
The locking knobs of the front passenger
X Move locking tab : in the direction of door and the rear doors move down.
Practical hints
arrow. X If the vehicle battery is disconnected or

X Slide mechanical key ; out of the housing. drained: Press down the locking knobs on
the front passenger door and the rear
doors.
Unlocking the driver’s door
X Exit the vehicle.
X Close the driver’s door.
X Enter the vehicle through the rear left door.

X Press down the locking knob of the driver’s
door.
! To prevent inadvertent lockout, make
sure to have the SmartKey with you before
proceeding with the next step. The next
step will lock the vehicle.
X Exit the vehicle.
X Insert mechanical key ; into the driver’s X Close the rear left door.
door lock. The vehicle is locked.
X Turn mechanical key ; counterclockwise
to position 1. i This procedure does not arm the anti-
theft alarm system, nor does it lock the fuel
X Pull the door handle past the resistance
filler flap.
point until the locking knob moves up.
The driver’s door is unlocked.
X Pull the door handle once more to open the Fuel filler flap
driver’s door.
X Turn mechanical key ; back and remove G Warning!
it from the driver’s door lock. Avoid contact with the vehicle walls as they
may contain sharp edges. Otherwise, you
could injure yourself while releasing the fuel
filler flap.

Resetting activated NECK-PRO active front head restraints 325
In case the central locking system does not G Warning!

release the fuel filler flap, you can open it When pushing back the head restraint
manually. cushion, make sure your fingers do not
The fuel filler flap release is located on the become caught between the head restraint
passenger side in the cargo compartment cushion and the cover. Failing to do so may
behind the cover. lead to injury.
X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
X Open the cover on the passenger-side trim i Pressing the head restraint cushion back
panel (Y page 332). requires high force. If you encounter
difficulties when pushing the head restraint
back, please have the procedure
performed at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.
Practical hints
Head restraints (standard)
X Pull red fuel filler flap release : in

direction of arrow.
The fuel filler flap is unlocked.
X Open the fuel filler flap (Y page 226).
X Close the cover.
X Close the tailgate.
X Pull the top of the head restraint cushion in
direction of arrow : as far as it will go.
Resetting activated NECK-PRO active X Adjust the head restraint cushion
front head restraints downward in direction of arrow ; as far as
it will go.
If the NECK-PRO active front head restraints X Firmly press the top of the head restraint
have been triggered in a rear-end collision, cushion towards the head restraint cover in
they must be reset. direction of arrow = until it engages.
You can tell that the NECK-PRO active front X Repeat this procedure on the NECK-PRO
head restraints have been triggered when active front head restraint for the second
they have been moved forward and cannot be front seat.
adjusted.
G Warning!
For safety reasons, have the NECK-PRO active
front head restraints checked at an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center after a
rear-end collision.
Z
326 Replacing SmartKey batteries
Comfort head restraints G Warning!

Batteries contain poisonous and corrosive
substances. Therefore, keep the batteries out
of reach of children.
If a battery is swallowed, seek medical help
immediately.
G Warning!
SmartKey batteries contain perchlorate
material, which may require special handling
and regard for the environment. Check with
your local government’s disposal guidelines.
X Take reset tool : out of the Mercedes- California residents, see www.dtsc.ca.gov/
Practical hints
Benz literature pouch. HazardousWaste/Perchlorate/

index.cfm.
X Guide reset tool : into rectangular
opening ; between head restraint cushion Batteries contain materials that can harm the
and head restraint cover. environment if disposed of improperly.
X Press reset tool : downward in direction Recycling of batteries is the preferred method
of arrow until you hear the head restraint of disposal. Many states (USA only) or
release mechanism audibly engage. provinces (Canada only) require sellers of
X Pull out reset tool :.
batteries to accept old batteries for recycling.
When inserting the batteries, make sure they
X Firmly press the head restraint cushion
are clean and free of lint.
backward towards the head restraint cover
in direction of arrow = until it engages. When replacing batteries, always replace
both batteries.
X Repeat this procedure for the second front
seat. i The required replacement batteries are
X After resetting the NECK-PRO active front available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
head restraints store reset tool : in the Center.
Mercedes-Benz literature pouch. Replacement batteries: Lithium, type
For information on NECK-PRO active front CR 2025 or equivalent.
head restraints, see “NECK-PRO active front X Remove the mechanical key from the
head restraints” (Y page 53). SmartKey (Y page 323).
Replacing SmartKey batteries
If the batteries in the SmartKey are

discharged, the vehicle can no longer be
locked or unlocked. It is recommended to
have the batteries replaced at an authorized

Replacing SmartKey batteries 327
SmartKey SmartKey with KEYLESS-GO
X Press mechanical key ; into the SmartKey X Insert mechanical key : into opening.
Practical hints
opening until battery compartment X Press mechanical key : in direction of
cover : opens. Do not keep the cover arrow.
shut. Battery compartment ; is unlatched.
X Pull battery compartment ; out of the
SmartKey housing.
X Remove the battery compartment cover.

X Pat the SmartKey against the palm of your
hand until battery = falls out. X Pull out batteries =.
X Insert the new battery with the positive
X Insert new batteries = under contact
terminal (+) facing up. Use a lint-free cloth. springs ? with the positive terminal (+)
X Insert the tabs of the battery compartment
side facing up.
cover into the housing and press the cover X Return battery compartment ; into
closed.
SmartKey housing until it locks into place.
X Slide mechanical key : back into the
X Slide mechanical key : back into the
SmartKey.
SmartKey.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey.
X Check the operation of the SmartKey as
well as the KEYLESS-GO function.
Z
328 Replacing bulbs
Replacing bulbs Wear eye and hand protection.

Because of high voltage in Xenon lamps, it is
Safety notes
dangerous to replace the bulb or repair the
Safe vehicle operation depends on proper lamp and its components. We recommend
exterior lighting and signaling to a large that you have such work done by a qualified
degree. technician.
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely
important. Have headlamps checked and i Since replacing bulbs is a technically
readjusted at regular intervals and when a highly demanding process, we recommend
bulb has been replaced. Contact an to have them replaced at an authorized
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for Mercedes-Benz Center.
headlamp adjustment.
i If the headlamps or front fog lamps are
G Warning!
Practical hints
fogged up on the inside as a result of high

Bulbs and bulb sockets can be very hot. Allow humidity, driving the vehicle a distance with
the lamp to cool down before changing a bulb. the lights on should clear up the fogging.
Keep bulbs out of reach of children.
Halogen lamps contain pressurized gas. A
bulb can explode if you
Rtouch or move it when hot
Rdrop the bulb
Rscratch the bulb

Replacing bulbs 329
Bulbs
You can replace the following bulbs yourself:
Halogen headlamps Type
: Low-beam lamp: H7 55 W
; High-beam lamp/High-beam flasher
lamp: H7 55 W
= Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
? Turn signal lamp: 3457A
A Side marker lamp: WY 5 W
Practical hints
Bi-Xenon headlamps Type
: High-beam flasher lamp/High-beam
flasher spot lamp: H7 55 W
; Parking and standing lamp: W 5 W
= Turn signal lamp: 3457A
? Side marker lamp: WY 5 W
Z
330 Replacing bulbs
Rear lamps Type

: Backup lamp: P 21 W
; Rear foglamp (driver’s side only): H 21 W
Practical hints
License plate lamps Type

: License plate lamps: C 5 W
Notes on bulb replacement i Mercedes-Benz recommends using

Longlife (LL) bulbs.
! Do not replace LEDs or bulbs not
described in this section. You could
otherwise damage the LEDs, the bulbs or Replacing bulbs for front lamps
parts of the vehicle. Only have the LEDs and
bulbs replaced at an authorized Mercedes- Before you start to replace a bulb for a front
Benz Center. lamp, do the following:
ROnly use 12-volt bulbs of the same type and X Switch off the ignition.
with the specified watt rating. X Turn the exterior lamp switch to position
RSwitch the lights off before changing a bulb $.

to prevent short circuits. X Open the hood (Y page 228).
RAlways use a clean lint-free cloth when

handling bulbs.
RYour hands should be dry and free of oil and
grease.
RIf the newly installed bulb does not come
on, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center.

Replacing bulbs 331
X Turn housing cover : counterclockwise

and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket B with the bulb
counterclockwise and remove it.
Example illustration: Driver’s side headlamp

: Housing cover for low-beam halogen or Bi-
Xenon headlamp
Practical hints
; Housing cover for high-beam halogen
bulb (high beam and high-beam flasher)
= Bulb socket for parking and standing lamp X Pull bulb E out of bulb socket B.
bulb
? Bulb socket for front turn signal lamp bulb
i Do not remove clip D from bulb socket
B.
A Bulb socket for side marker lamp bulb
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
G Warning! B.
Do not remove the cover for the Bi-Xenon X Place bulb socket B back into the housing
headlamp. Because of high voltage in Xenon
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
lamps, it is dangerous to replace the bulb or
X Align housing cover : and turn it
repair the lamp and its components. It is
recommended to have such work done by a clockwise until it engages.
qualified technician.
High-beam and high-beam flasher bulb
Low-beam bulb (halogen headlamps (halogen headlamps only)/high-beam
only) flasher bulb (Bi-Xenon headlamps only)
B Bulb socket for low-beam headlamp C Bulb socket for high-beam headlamp
Z
332 Replacing bulbs
X Turn housing cover ; counterclockwise Opening the driver’s side trim panel
and remove it.
X Turn bulb socket C with the bulb
X Pull the bulb out of bulb socket C.
X Gently press the new bulb into bulb socket
C.
X Place bulb socket C back into the housing
and turn it clockwise until it engages.
X Align housing cover ; and turn it
clockwise until it engages.
X Turn lock : counterclockwise by 90°.
Practical hints
Parking and standing lamp bulb, X Remove cover ;.

front turn signal lamp bulb,
side marker lamp bulb
X Turn respective bulb socket =, ? or A
(Y page 331) with the bulb
X Pull the bulb out of the bulb socket.
X Gently press the new bulb into the bulb
socket.
X Place bulb socket =, ? or A back into
the housing and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
X Remove everything from storage
compartment ?.
Replacing bulbs for rear lamps X Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock =.
Before you start to replace a bulb for a rear
X Turn lock = counterclockwise by 90°.
lamp, do the following:
X Remove storage compartment ?.
Opening the passenger-side trim panel
$.
Tail lamp unit

To access the tail lamp units, you first have to
remove the cover in the corresponding side
trim panel of the cargo compartment.
X Open the tailgate.

Replacing bulbs 333
X Insert a suitable object such as a coin into License plate lamps

the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of the
arrow.
X Remove cover ;.
Replacing bulbs
X Loosen screws : of lamp cover to be
Practical hints
removed.
X Remove lamp cover ;.
X Replace the bulb.
X Reinstall lamp cover ;.
Example illustration: LED rear lamp driver’s side X Retighten screws :.
: Backup lamp bulb socket
; Rear fog lamp bulb socket (driver’s side
only) Adjusting headlamp aim
X Depending on which bulb needs to be
replaced, turn the respective bulb socket
counterclockwise.
X Pull the bulb socket out of the housing.
X Backup lamp bulb :: Gently press onto
the bulb and turn it counterclockwise out
of its bulb socket.
X Gently press the new bulb into its bulb
socket and turn it clockwise until it
engages.
X Rear fog lamp bulb ;: Pull the bulb out : V Vertical centerline
of its bulb socket. ; H Horizontal mounting height, measured
X Gently press the new bulb into its bulb from the center
socket.
X Align the bulb socket and turn it clockwise.
X Make sure the bulb socket is attached
properly.
X Close the respective cover in the cargo
compartment.
Z
334 Replacing wiper blades
Correct headlamp adjustment is extremely i If it is not possible to obtain a proper

important. High beam adjustments headlamp adjustment, have the system
simultaneously aim the low beam. To check checked at an authorized Mercedes-Benz
and readjust a headlamp, follow the steps Center.
described:
X Park the vehicle on a level surface 25 feet
(7.6 m) from a vertical test screen or wall. Replacing wiper blades
X Make sure the vehicle has a normal tailgate Safety notes
load.
X Switch on the low beam headlamps L. G Warning!
For safety reasons, switch off the wipers and
If the beam does not show a beam pattern as remove the SmartKey from the starter switch
indicated in the figure left, then follow the (vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Make sure the
Practical hints
steps below: vehicle’s on-board electronics have status 0)

X Open the hood (Y page 228). before replacing a wiper blade. Otherwise, the
wiper motor could suddenly turn on and cause
injury.
G Warning!
Wiper blades are components that are subject
to wear and tear. Replace the wiper blades
twice a year, preferably in the spring and fall.
Otherwise the windows will not be wiped
properly. As a result, you may not be able to
observe surrounding traffic conditions and
could cause an accident.
The adjustment screws are located under the
! Never open the hood when a front wiper
cover panel.
arm is folded forward.
X Insert a suitable tool into the openings in
Hold on to the wiper when folding a wiper
the panel cover. The direction of arrows
arm back. If released, the force of the
= and ? indicate the angle in which the
impact from the tensioning spring could
tool has to be inserted in oder to access the crack the windshield or the rear window.
adjustment screws.
Do not allow a wiper arm to contact the
X Always turn the adjustment screws equally
windshield glass or the rear window
for vertical adjustment until the headlamp without a wiper blade inserted.
is adjusted as shown in :. Turn clockwise
Mercedes-Benz recommends that you have
for upward movement and
this work carried out at an authorized
counterclockwise for downward
movement.
Graduations: X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
RScrew at arrow =: 0.67° pitch switch.
RScrew at arrow ?: 0.50° pitch Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO:
X Make sure the vehicle’s on-board
The left and right headlamps must be
electronics have status 0 (Y page 80).
adjusted individually.

Replacing wiper blades 335
Removing wiper blades X Hold wiper arm : and disengage wiper

blade ; by carefully sliding it in direction
Front wiper blades of arrow.
! Do not pull on the wiper blade inserts. X Remove wiper blade ;.
They could tear.
X Fold the wiper arms forward until they
Installing wiper blades
engage.
Front wiper blades
Practical hints
X Press tabs ; together.
X Tilt wiper blade : away from wiper arm X With guide tab = sliding into opening ?,
=. place wiper blade : onto wiper arm in
X Take off wiper blade : in direction of direction of arrow.
arrow. X Fold wiper blade : towards wiper arm.
Tabs ; (Y page 335) must engage into
Rear wiper blade both recesses of attachment ;.
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
! Do not pull on the wiper blade insert. It fastened.
could tear. X Fold the wiper arm backward to rest on the
windshield.
Make sure you hold on to the wiper arm
when folding it back.
! Make sure the wiper blades are installed
properly. Improperly installed wiper blades
may cause windshield damage.
X Fold wiper arm : away from the rear

window until it engages.
X Turn wiper blade ; as far as it will go.
Z
336 Flat tire
Rear wiper blade The spare wheel is for temporary use only.
When driving with a spare wheel mounted,
ensure proper tire inflation pressure and do
not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
(80 km/h).
Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center as soon as possible to have the
spare wheel replaced with a regular road
wheel.
Never operate the vehicle with more than one
spare wheel mounted.
Do not switch off the ESP® when a spare
X Insert wiper blade ; into wiper arm :. wheel is mounted.
Practical hints
X Hold wiper arm : and engage wiper

blade ; by pushing it in direction of arrow G Warning!
until it locks into place. Your vehicle is equipped with air suspension
program. Do not open or close any doors or
X Check whether the wiper blade is securely
the tailgate while mounting a spare wheel. The
fastened.
vehicle could rise or lower to a previously
X Fold wiper arm : to rest on the rear
selected level. You or others could be injured
window. as a result.
Make sure to hold on to the wiper when
folding the wiper arm back.
! Make sure the wiper blade is installed Preparing the vehicle
properly. An improperly installed wiper X Make sure the vehicle level is set to
blade may cause rear window damage. highway level (Y page 159).
X Whenever possible, park the vehicle in a
safe distance from moving traffic on a hard,
Flat tire flat surface.
Safety notes X Turn on the hazard warning flasher.
X Turn the steering wheel so that the front
Your vehicle may be equipped with an
MOExtended system or a Minispare wheel. wheels are in a straight-ahead position.
Vehicles with an MOExtended system do not X Engage the parking brake.
have a spare wheel or a TIREFIT kit. X Shift the automatic transmission into park
For information on your vehicle’s equipment, position P.
see “Rims and tires” (Y page 365). X Turn off the engine.
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter
G Warning!
switch.
The dimensions of the spare wheel are
different from those of the road wheels. As a or
result, the vehicle handling characteristics X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
change when driving with a spare wheel driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in
mounted. Adapt your driving style position 0, same as with the SmartKey
accordingly. removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door can then be closed again.

Flat tire 337
Open doors only when conditions are safe Contact the nearest authorized Mercedes-
to do so. Benz Center for assistance or call Roadside
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Remove the Assistance.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button from the
starter switch. X Foreign objects (e.g. screws or nails)
X Have any passenger exit the vehicle at a should not be removed from the tire.
safe distance from the roadway. Open X Take the TIREFIT kit, the sticker, and the
doors only when conditions are safe to do electric air pump out of the vehicle.
so.
i Vehicles retrofitted with TIREFIT kit:
Only use the power outlet in the second-
row footwell for electric air pump
Practical hints
operation.
You can use the power outlet even when
the ignition is switched off, e.g. in order to
inflate the collapsible tire.
An emergency shut-off feature is designed
to prevent the vehicle’s on-board voltage
from dropping below a minimum level. If Two-part sticker
the on-board voltage drops to this X Attach upper part : of the sticker where
minimum level, the power outlets are it will be easily seen by the driver on the
switched off automatically to help preserve instrument cluster.
engine starting power.
X Attach lower part ; of the sticker to the
damaged tire (close to the tire valve).
Sealing tires with TIREFIT G Warning!
This section applies to vehicles retrofitted Take care not to allow the contents of TIREFIT
with a TIREFIT kit only. to come in contact with hair, eyes or clothing.
Small tire punctures, particularly those in the TIREFIT is harmful if inhaled, swallowed or
tread, can be sealed with TIREFIT. absorbed through the skin - causes skin, eye
TIREFIT can be used in ambient temperatures and respiratory irritation.
down to -4‡ (-20†). Any contact with eyes or skin should be
flushed immediately with plenty of water.
G Warning! If clothing comes in contact with TIREFIT,
TIREFIT is a limited repair device. TIREFIT change clothing as soon as possible.
cannot be used for cuts or punctures larger
In case of allergic reaction or rash, consult a
than approximately 0.16 in (4 mm) and tire
physician immediately.
damage caused by driving with extremely low
tire inflation pressure, or on a flat tire, or a G Warning!
damaged wheel.
Keep TIREFIT out of reach of children. If
Do not drive the vehicle under such swallowed, rinse mouth immediately with
circumstances. plenty of water and drink plenty of water.
Do not induce vomiting!
Consult a physician immediately.
Z
338 Flat tire
i If sealant has leaked out, let it dry. You X Version 1 only: Open flap C on the
can then peel it off. electric air pump.
If clothing has come in contact with X Pull plug ? and air hose A out of the pump
TIREFIT, have it dry-cleaned with housing.
perchloroethylene as soon as possible. X Screw the air pump’s air hose A onto
G Warning! flange B of TIREFIT container :.

Observe safety instructions on air pump label. X Stick TIREFIT container : upside down
into notch ; of the electric air pump.
Your vehicle may be equipped with either of
two versions of the electric air pump:
RVersion 1: The air hose with pressure
gauge and the electrical plug are located
Practical hints
behind a flap.
RVersion 2: The pressure gauge is located
in the pump housing. The air hose and
electrical plug are located at the bottom of
the pump housing.
The following description applies to both
versions. Differences in usage are expressly
declared.
X Unscrew the valve cap of the damaged tire
from tire valve E.
Version 1
Version 1
X Version 1 only: Close vent screw F on
pressure gauge G.
X Screw filler hose D onto tire valve E.
X Insert electrical plug ? into the power
outlet in the second-row footwell
(Y page 212).
! The cigarette lighter as well as the power
outlets in the passenger footwell and cargo
Version 2 compartment are not designed for use with
the electric air pump. Use the power outlet

Flat tire 339
in the second-row footwell for electric air G Warning!

pump operation. If a tire inflation pressure of 26 psi (1.8 bar)
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to is not attained, the tire is too severely
position 1. damaged for TIREFIT to provide a reliable tire
repair.
or
In this case, TIREFIT cannot properly seal the
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Press the
tire.
KEYLESS-GO start/stop button once. Do
not depress the brake pedal. Do not drive the vehicle.
X Press I on electric air pump switch =. Contact the nearest Mercedes-Benz Center or
The electric air pump is switched on and call Roadside Assistance.
inflates the tire.
After attaining a tire inflation pressure of
at least 26 psi (1.8 bar):
Practical hints
i First, the sealing is pumped into the tire.
The pressure may briefly rise to up to 73 psi X Press 0 on electric air pump switch =.
(5 bar). This is normal and not an indication The electric air pump is switched off.
of a malfunction. Do not switch off the X Detach the TIREFIT kit from the tire valve.
electric air pump.
X Let the electric air pump inflate the tire for G Warning!
approximately 5 minutes. The air hose may still be hot. Exercise proper
The pressure gauge must display at least caution to avoid burning yourself when
26 psi (1.8 bar). detaching the electric air pump.
G Warning! ! Remaining TIREFIT sealant could escape

The air hose can become hot during inflation. from the filler hose after it has been
Please exercise appropriate caution. detached from the tire valve. TIREFIT
sealant may cause stains.
! Do not operate the electric air pump Therefore, cover the filler hose, e.g. by
longer than 8 minutes without interruption. inserting it into the plastic bag the TIREFIT
Otherwise it may overheat. kit was packed in.
You may operate the air pump again after
it has cooled off. X Drive off immediately.
If the tire inflation pressure of at least G Warning!

26 psi (1.8 bar) is not attained: Do not exceed a vehicle speed of 50 mph
X Turn off the electric air pump by pressing (80 km/h). A TIREFIT repair is not designed to
0 on electric air pump switch =. operate at higher speeds.
X Detach filler hose D from tire valve E.
The sticker must be attached on the
instrument cluster where it will be easily seen
X Drive vehicle back or forth very slowly
by the driver.
approximately 30 ft (10 m).
Vehicle handling characteristics of a TIREFIT
This serves to better distribute the TIREFIT
repaired tire may change. Adapt your driving
sealant material inside the tire.
accordingly.
X Inflate the tire again.
Z
340 Flat tire
(80 km/h) or below with the recommended

tire inflation pressure.
X Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
Center as soon as possible to obtain a new
TIREFIT kit.
X Bring used TIREFIT materials to an
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
proper disposal.
X Replace your TIREFIT container every
4 years. Replacement containers are
Version 2 available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
X
Center.
After driving the vehicle for an initial
Practical hints
10 minutes, check the tire inflation

pressure using pressure gauge G on the
air pump. Mounting the spare wheel
Introduction
G Warning!
If tire inflation pressure has fallen below X Prepare the vehicle as described
20 psi (1.3 bar) do not continue to drive the (Y page 336).
vehicle. X Take the following out of the vehicle:
Park your vehicle safely away from the Rspare wheel
roadway and contact the nearest authorized Rjack
Mercedes-Benz Center or Roadside
Rwheel wrench
Assistance.
Have the damaged tire replaced. Rcollapsible wheel chock
Ralignment bolt
If the tire inflation pressure is at least 20 psi
(1.3 bar), inflate or deflate the tire to the For information on where to find the
correct tire inflation pressure (see Tire and respective items, see “Where will I find ...?”
Loading Information placard on the driver’s (Y page 284) and (Y page 286).
door B-pillar): i Vehicles without spare wheel are not
X To increase tire inflation pressure: factory-equipped with the tools required for
Switch on the electric air pump. a wheel change such as a jack or a wheel
X To decrease tire inflation pressure: wrench. Some tools required for a wheel
change are specific to your vehicle.
Version 1: Open vent screw F on
pressure gauge G (Y page 338).
Center to obtain the tools approved for
Version 2: Press deflate button F located your vehicle. This section describes the
at the end of the filler hose. wheel change using the tools approved and
X Drive to the nearest qualified workshop, recommended for your vehicle.
e.g. an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center,
to have the damaged tire replaced.
X Recommended duration of use: A
maximum of 300 miles (500 km) at 50 mph

Flat tire 341
Lifting the vehicle X Prevent the vehicle from rolling away by

blocking wheels with wheel chocks or other
G Warning! sizeable objects.
When jacking up the vehicle, only use the jack When your vehicle is equipped with a wheel
which has been specifically approved by chock, it is included with the vehicle tool kit
Mercedes-Benz for your vehicle. (Y page 284). For information on setting up
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up the collapsible wheel chock, see
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets built (Y page 286).
into both sides of the vehicle. Make sure the
jack arm is fully seated in the jack take-up G Warning!
bracket. The jack must always be vertical Only jack up the vehicle on level ground or on
when in use, especially on inclines or slight inclines/declines. Otherwise, the
declines. vehicle could fall off the jack and injure you or
Practical hints
The jack is intended only for lifting the vehicle others.
briefly for wheel changes. It is not suited for
Changing a wheel on a level surface
performing maintenance work under the
vehicle. To help avoid personal injury, use the
jack only to lift the vehicle during a wheel
change.
Never get beneath the vehicle while it is
supported by the jack. Keep hands and feet
away from the area under the lifted vehicle.
Always lower the vehicle onto sufficient
capacity jackstands before working under the
vehicle.
Always engage the parking brake firmly and
block the wheels with wheel chocks or other Changing rear wheel on passenger side (example
sizeable objects before raising the vehicle illustration)
with the jack. Do not disengage the parking
X Place a wheel chock or other sizeable
brake while the vehicle is raised.
object in front of and another wheel chock
Make sure that the ground on which the
or other sizeable object behind the wheel
vehicle is standing and where you place the
that is diagonally opposite to the wheel
jack is solid, level and not slippery. If
being changed.
necessary, use a large underlay. On slippery
surfaces, such as tiled floors, you should use Changing a wheel on a slight decline
a non-slip underlay, for example a rubber mat.
Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
Do not use wooden blocks or similar objects a level surface. However, should
to support the jack. Otherwise the jack may circumstances require you to do so on a slight
not be able to achieve its load-bearing decline:
capacity if it is not at its full height.
Never start the engine when the vehicle is
raised.
Also observe the notes on the jack.
Z
342 Flat tire
Changing wheel on passenger side (example

X On the wheel to be changed, loosen but do
illustration)
not yet remove the wheel bolts
Practical hints
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable (approximately one full turn with wheel
objects on the downhill side in front of both wrench :).
wheels on the side opposite to the side on X Assemble the jack (Y page 286).
which the wheel is to be changed.
Changing a wheel on a slight incline

Always try lifting the vehicle using the jack on
a level surface. However, should
circumstances require you to do so on a slight
incline:
The jack take-up brackets are located directly

behind the front wheel housings and in front
of the rear wheel housings.
G Warning!
The jack is designed exclusively for jacking up
the vehicle at the jack take-up brackets. Make
Changing wheel on passenger side (example
illustration) sure the jack arm is fully seated in the jack
take-up bracket.
X Place wheel chocks or other sizeable If you do not position the jack correctly in the
objects on the downhill side in front of both jack take-up bracket, the vehicle can fall off
wheels on the side opposite to the side on the jack and seriously or fatally injure you or
which the wheel is to be changed. others.
! Do not position the jack on the body of

the vehicle, as this may cause damage to
the vehicle.

Flat tire 343
Removing the wheel
X Attach reversible ratchet ? to jack = in

such a way that the word UP can be seen. X Unscrew the uppermost wheel bolt and
Practical hints
X Place jack = on firm ground. remove it.
X Position jack = under take-up X Replace this wheel bolt with alignment
bracket ; so that it is always vertical as bolt :.
seen from the side, even if the vehicle is X Remove the remaining bolts.
parked on an incline.
! Do not place wheel bolts in sand or dirt.
This could result in damage to the wheel
bolts and wheel hub threads.
X Remove the wheel.
Attaching the spare wheel

G Warning!
Always replace wheel bolts that are damaged
or rusted.
Never apply oil or grease to wheel bolts.
X Turn ratchet ? up and down until jack = Damaged wheel hub threads should be
is fully seated in take-up bracket ; and the repaired immediately. Do not continue to
jack base evenly meets the ground. drive under these circumstances! Contact an
X Jack up the vehicle until the wheel is a authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
maximum of 1.2 in (3 cm) from the ground. Roadside Assistance.
Incorrect wheel bolts or improperly tightened
wheel bolts can cause the wheel to come off.
This could cause an accident. Make sure to
use the correct wheel bolts.
G Warning!
Only use genuine Mercedes-Benz wheel bolts.
Other wheel bolts may come loose.
Z
344 Flat tire
Do not tighten the wheel bolts when the

vehicle is raised. Otherwise the vehicle could
fall off the jack.
X Guide the spare wheel onto the alignment

bolt and push it on.
Practical hints
X Insert the wheel bolts and tighten them

slightly.
Wheel bolt : must be used for 19", 20", and X Unscrew the alignment bolt.
21" light alloy wheels. Wheel bolt ; must be
X Install the last wheel bolt and tighten it
used for the Minispare wheel. The wheel bolts
slightly.
for the Minispare wheel are located in vehicle
tool kit.
Lowering the vehicle
! Wheel bolts ; must be used when
X Attach ratchet to vehicle jack so that the
mounting the Minispare wheel. The use of
any wheel bolts other than wheel bolts ; word DOWN can be seen.
for the Minispare wheel will damage the Lower the vehicle until the vehicle is resting
vehicle’s brakes. fully on its own weight:
G Warning! X Turn ratchet in direction DOWN.
Make sure to use the original length wheel X Remove the jack.
bolts when remounting the original wheel
after it has been repaired.
X Clean contact surfaces of wheel and wheel

hub.
! To avoid paint damage, place wheel flat
against hub and hold it there while
installing first wheel bolt.
X Tighten the five wheel bolts evenly,

following the diagonal sequence illustrated
(: to A), until all bolts are tight. Observe
a tightening torque of 110 lb-ft (150 Nm).

Bleeding the fuel system (diesel engine only) 345
G Warning! G Warning!
Have the tightening torque checked after In emergency mode, your vehicle’s driving
changing a wheel. The wheels could come characteristics are diminished in such
loose if they are not tightened to a torque of situations as:
110 lb-ft (150 Nm). Rdriving around curves
X Fully collapse the jack to storage position, Rwhile braking
see (Y page 286). Rwhile accelerating rapidly
X Store the jack and the other vehicle tools
Therefore, your driving style must be adapted
in the designated storage space. accordingly. Avoid abrupt steering and driving
For information on storing the spare wheel maneuvers, as well as driving over obstacles
after it has been replaced by a regular road (road curbs, potholes, or off-road areas). This
wheel, see (Y page 286). is especially important if the vehicle is heavily
Practical hints
i The damaged road wheel cannot be loaded.
stored in the spare wheel well under the The emergency driving distance that can be
cargo compartment floor. It should be achieved greatly depends on the demands
transported in the cargo compartment placed on the vehicle. Depending on speed,
wrapped in a protective wrap. load, driving maneuvers, road conditions,
outside temperature, etc., the distance can be
i USA only: significantly shorter or, if the vehicle is driven
Do not restart the tire inflation pressure cautiously, somewhat longer.
monitor until a full size wheel/tire with Do not continue driving in emergency mode if
functioning sensor has been placed back Ryou notice knocking sounds
into service on the vehicle.
Rthe vehicle starts to shake
Rsmoke develops and you smell rubber
MOExtended system
RESP® is intervening continuously
The MOExtended system allows you to
Ryou notice tears on the tire sidewalls
continue driving your vehicle even if there is
a total loss of pressure in one or more tires. After driving in emergency mode, you must
You may only use the MOExtended system in have the rims inspected by an authorized
conjunction with the tire pressure loss Mercedes-Benz Center to check if they are
warning system (Y page 237) or the suitable for further use. The failed tire must
Advanced TPMS (Y page 239). be replaced in any case.
The maximum distance in emergency mode When replacing individual or all tires on the
depends on the vehicle’s load. It is 50 miles vehicle, make sure only tires marked with
(80 km) if the vehicle is partially loaded and “MOExtended” are mounted in the size
18 miles (30 km) if the vehicle is fully loaded. specified for your vehicle (Y page 365).
The point at which the maximum driving
distance in emergency mode begins is when
the warning message appears in the Bleeding the fuel system (diesel
multifunction display indicating that there is engine only)
a loss of tire inflation pressure.
X Do not exceed the maximum speed of Driving the vehicle until the fuel tank is empty
50 mph (80 km/h). is not recommended. Otherwise, air may be
Z
346 AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
sucked into the fuel system. If this happens, AdBlue® (diesel engine only)
the malfunction indicator lamp = (USA
only) or ; (Canada only) comes on and the The BlueTEC exhaust gas aftertreatment
engine may not start immediately after system requires a reducing agent (AdBlue®)
refueling the vehicle. in order to function properly. Refilling with
After refueling: AdBlue® is part of the regular maintenance
X Make sure the automatic transmission is in service work. A tankful of AdBlue® should
park position P. suffice until the next maintenance service
The transmission position indicator in the under normal driving conditions.
multifunction display should be on P. When the AdBlue® tank is low, the message
X Do not depress the accelerator. Check Additive See Operator’s
X If necessary, remove the KEYLESS-GO Manual appears in the multifunction display.
Practical hints
start/stop button from the starter switch. When the AdBlue® level drops to the
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to minimum level, the message Remaining
position 2 for at least 10 seconds. Starts: 20 appears in the multifunction
X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch display.
to position 0. i When the message Remaining Starts:
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch to 20 appears in the multifunction display, you
position 3 and hold it there for a maximum can start the engine 20 more times. If you
of 10 seconds or until the engine runs do not add AdBlue®, the engine cannot be
surge-free. started beyond that point. Fill the
If the engine does not start: AdBlue® tank with approximately 1 gal
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch (3.79 l) AdBlue® (corresponds to
once more to position 2 for at least approximately 2 AdBlue® refill containers)
10 seconds. or have the AdBlue® tank filled by an
X Return the SmartKey in the starter switch authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
to position 0.
i For refilling outside the maintenance
X Turn the SmartKey in the starter switch
service intervals, refill the AdBlue® tank
once more to position 3 and hold it there
with approximately 1 gal (3.79 l) AdBlue®
for a maximum of 10 seconds or until the
engine runs surge-free. (corresponds to approximately 2 AdBlue®
refill containers).
X If necessary, repeat the above steps.
If the engine still does not start after Always use the particular AdBlue® refill
3 attempts: containers for refilling outside the
maintenance service interval. Contact an
Do not make any further attempts to start the
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center or call
engine. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Roadside Assistance if necessary
Benz Center or call Roadside Assistance
(Y page 216).
(Y page 216).
Additional information on BlueTEC exhaust
i When the malfunction indicator lamp gas aftertreatment and AdBlue® is available
= (USA only) or ; (Canada only) in at any authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
the instrument cluster has been illuminated
for the above condition, it will remain
illuminated until the engine was cycled on
and off four times in a row.

AdBlue® (diesel engine only) 347
Refilling with AdBlue® AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil

the affected surfaces.
G Warning!
Make sure ! AdBlue® is not a fuel additive and must
RAdBlue®
not be added to the diesel fuel tank. If
does not come into contact with
AdBlue® reaches the diesel fuel tank, the
skin, eyes, or clothing
engine could be damaged which is not
Rto keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
If you and/or others have come into contact Warranty.
with AdBlue®: For more information on AdBlue®, see
RIf AdBlue® has gotten into contact with (Y page 373).
eyes, flush with plenty of water immediately The AdBlue® filler neck is located under the
and seek medical help. cargo compartment floor.
Practical hints
RClean affected skin immediately with plenty X Switch off the ignition.
of water. X Open the tailgate (Y page 75).
RIf AdBlue® was swallowed, rinse mouth X Lift the cargo compartment floor
immediately with plenty of water and drink (Y page 284).

plenty of water. Consult a physician.
G Warning!
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue®
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only.
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
are particularly irritating for your skin,
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes,
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
watering eyes. X Turn AdBlue® filler cap cover :
! Only use AdBlue® complying with
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system could be damaged.
Damage caused by using additives or
diluting with water are not covered by the
! Rinse surfaces that have come into

contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
with a moist cloth and cold water
X Turn AdBlue® filler cap ;
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
already, use cold water and a sponge. counterclockwise and open it.
Filler cap ; is tethered with a plastic strap.
Z
348 Battery
X Place AdBlue® filler cap cover : as

illustrated and turn it clockwise to its stop.
X Lower cargo compartment floor.
X Drive the vehicle at a speed of at least
10 mph (16 km/h).
The message Check Additive See
Operator’s Manual disappears after
approximately 1 minute.
i If the message Check Additive See
X Pull dust cap off of AdBlue® refill container Operator’s Manual still appears in the
=. multifunction display, refill with one more
Practical hints
X Place AdBlue® refill container = on the container of AdBlue®.

filler neck as illustrated and tighten it
moderately (hand-tight) by turning it i Have the AdBlue® level checked and, if
clockwise. necessary, filled completely afterward at
! Make sure to tighten the AdBlue® refill
container only moderately, i.e. hand-tight,
as you could otherwise damage it. Battery
X Push AdBlue® refill container = down. Safety notes
The AdBlue® tank is filled. This may take up A battery should always be sufficiently
to 1 minute. charged in order to achieve its rated service
i When you stop pushing the AdBlue® refill life. Refer to Maintenance Booklet for battery
maintenance intervals.
container down, the filling process is
stopped and you can remove the refill If you use your vehicle mostly for short-
container. distance trips, you will need to have the
battery charge checked more frequently.
X Release AdBlue® refill container =. When replacing a battery, always use a
X Turn AdBlue® refill container = battery approved by Mercedes-Benz.
counterclockwise and remove it. If you do not intend to operate your vehicle
X Place AdBlue® filler cap ; (Y page 347) on for an extended period of time, contact an
filler neck and turn it clockwise. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center about
steps you need to observe.
G Warning!
Observe all safety instructions and
precautions when handling automotive
batteries.

Battery 349
Risk of explosion. flush affected area with water and seek

medical help if necessary.
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas,
which is flammable and explosive. Keep
Fire, open flames and
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid
smoking are prohibited
improper connection of jumper cables,
when handling batteries.
smoking etc.
Avoid creating sparks.
Battery acid is caustic. Do G Warning!
not allow it to come into Do not place metal objects on the battery as
contact with skin, eyes or this could result in a short circuit.
clothing.
Use leak-proof batteries only to avoid the risk
Wear suitable protective of acid burns in the event of an accident.
Practical hints
clothing, especially gloves,
Take care that you do not become statically
apron and faceguard.
charged, e.g. by wearing synthetic clothing or
Wear eye protection. rubbing against textiles. For this reason, you
Rinse any acid spills also should not pull or push the battery over
immediately with clear carpets or other synthetic materials.
water. Contact a physician Never touch the battery first. First touch the
if necessary. outside body of the vehicle in order to release
Keep children away. any possible electrostatic charges.
Do not rub the battery with rags or cloths. The
battery could explode if touched due to
Follow the instructions in electrostatic charge or due to spark
this Operator’s Manual. formation.
! The battery is a Valve-Regulated Lead

A battery contains materials that can harm Acid (VRLA) battery, also referred to as
the environment if disposed of improperly. A “fleece” battery.
large 12 V storage battery contains lead. Such batteries do not require topping-up of
Recycling of the battery is the preferred the electrolyte level. VRLA batteries
method of disposal. Many states (USA only) therefore do not have cell caps and the
or provinces (Canada only) require sellers of battery cover is non-removable. Do not
batteries to accept the old battery for attempt to open the battery as otherwise
recycling. the battery will be damaged.
VRLA batteries do not require topping-up of
G Warning!
the electrolyte level. They cannot be
Failure to follow these instructions can result opened to check the electrolyte level.
in severe injury or death. However, the battery condition must be
Never lean over batteries while connecting. checked periodically by performing a
You might get injured. battery conductance test. Refer to
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not Maintenance Booklet for battery condition
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, testing intervals.
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately
Z
350 Jump starting
The factory-equipped battery may only be RSynchronize the power tilt/sliding

replaced with a battery that sunroof (Y page 194).
Rhas the same security features RSynchronize the exterior rear view
Ris of identical size mirrors (Y page 96).
Ris of identical voltage
Ris of identical capacity Charging the battery
! As any other battery, the battery may G Warning!

discharge if you do not operate the vehicle Never charge a battery while still installed in
for an extended period of time. Have the the vehicle unless the accessory battery
battery disconnected at a qualified charge unit approved by Mercedes-Benz is
workshop or an authorized Mercedes-Benz being used. Gases may escape during
Practical hints
Center in such a case. You may also charging and could cause an explosion that
connect an accessory battery charge unit may result in personal injury, paint damage or
expressly approved by Mercedes-Benz for corrosion.
your vehicle model to maintain the battery An accessory battery charge unit specially
charge. Contact an authorized Mercedes- adapted for Mercedes-Benz vehicles and
Benz Center for further information. tested and approved by Mercedes-Benz is
The battery, the battery ventilation hose available. It permits the charging of the
and the lateral plug must always be battery in its installed position. Contact an
securely installed when the vehicle is in authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for
operation. information and availability.
Charge battery in accordance with the
! Never loosen or detach battery terminal separate instructions for the accessory
clamps while the engine is running or the battery charger.
SmartKey is in the starter switch or
KEYLESS-GO button is in position 1. Have the battery charged at an authorized
Otherwise the alternator and other Mercedes-Benz Center. If you charge the
electronic components could be severely battery yourself, follow the operating
damaged. instructions for your charging device.
Have the battery checked regularly at an Only use a battery charge unit with a
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center. maximum charging voltage of 14.8 V.
Refer to Maintenance Booklet for X Charge battery in accordance with the
maintenance intervals or contact an instructions of the battery charger
authorized Mercedes-Benz Center for manufacturer.
further information.
i After battery power was interrupted, do Jump starting

the following:
RSet the clock (Y page 135). G Warning!
Vehicles with COMAND system with Failure to follow these directions will cause
navigation module: Time and date are set damage to the electronic components, and
automatically. can lead to a battery explosion and severe
RSynchronize the door windows injury or death.
(Y page 107).

Jump starting 351
Never lean over batteries while connecting or If the battery is discharged, the engine can be
jump starting. You might get injured. started with jumper cables and the fully
Battery fluid contains sulfuric acid. Do not charged battery of another vehicle or an
allow this fluid to come in contact with eyes, equivalent starter pack. Observe the
skin or clothing. In case it does, immediately following:
flush affected area with water, and seek RAccess to the battery is not possible on all
medical help if necessary. vehicles. If you cannot access the battery
A battery will also produce hydrogen gas, of the other vehicle, provide jump start
which is flammable and explosive. Keep power by an external battery or starter
flames or sparks away from battery, avoid pack.
improper connection of jumper cables, RJump starting should only be performed
smoking, etc. when the engine and catalytic converter21
Attempting to jump start a frozen battery can are cold.
Practical hints
result in it exploding, causing personal injury. RDo not start the engine if the battery is
Read all instructions before proceeding. frozen. Let the battery thaw out first.
ROnly jump start from batteries with the
! Do not tow-start the vehicle. You could
same voltage rating (12 V). Jump starting
otherwise seriously damage the automatic
with a more powerful battery could damage
transmission which is not covered by the
the vehicle’s electrical system. Such
damage will not be covered by the
! Jump starting should only be performed Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
using the jump-start terminals located in ROnly use jumper cables with sufficient
the engine compartment. cross-section and insulated terminal
Avoid repeated and lengthy starting clamps.
attempts. RAlways make sure the jumper cables are
Do not attempt to start the engine using a not on or near pulleys, fans or other parts
battery quick-charge unit. that move when an engine is started or
If the engine does not run after several running.
unsuccessful starting attempts, have it RShould the battery be drained completely,
checked at the nearest authorized let the donating power source charge the
Mercedes-Benz Center. vehicle for several minutes before
Excessive unburned fuel generated by reattempting the starting process.
repeated failed starting attempts may The jump-start contacts are located in the
damage the catalytic converter20 and may engine compartment on the passenger side.
present a fire risk.
X Make sure the two vehicles do not touch.
Make sure the jumper cables do not have
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
loose or missing insulation.
Make sure the cable clamps do not touch
any other metal part while the other end is
still attached to a battery. park position P.
X Open the hood (Y page 228).
20 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.

21 Vehicles with gasoline engine only.
Z
352 Towing the vehicle
Practical hints
Position C represents the charged battery of X Remove the jumper cables from negative
another vehicle or an equivalent starter pack. terminals ? and B first.
X Flip up cover : of positive terminal = in X Remove the jumper cables from positive
direction of arrow. terminals ; and =.
You can now switch on the headlamps.
! Never invert the terminal connections! X Close cover : of positive terminal =.
X Connect positive terminal ; of charged X Slide cover A back onto negative terminal
battery C with positive terminal = with a B.
jumper cable. Clamp the cable to positive X Have the battery checked at the nearest
terminal ; of charged battery C first. authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
X Start engine of the vehicle with charged
battery C and run at idle speed.
X Slide cover A from negative terminal B in Towing the vehicle
direction of arrow.
Safety notes
X Connect negative terminal ? of charged
battery C with negative terminal B with Mercedes-Benz recommends that the vehicle
a jumper cable. Clamp the cable to be transported with all wheels off the ground
negative terminal ? of charged battery using flatbed or appropriate wheel lift/dolly
equipment. This method is preferable to other
C first.
types of towing.
X Start engine of the vehicle with the
discharged battery and run at idle speed. ! To prevent damage during transport, do
You can now turn on the electrical not tie down vehicle by its chassis or
consumers. Do not switch on the suspension parts.
headlamps under any circumstances. If circumstances do not permit the
recommended towing methods, the vehicle

Towing the vehicle 353
may be towed with all wheels on the ground i If the battery is disconnected or
only so far as necessary to have the vehicle discharged
moved to a safe location where the Rthe SmartKey will not turn in the starter
recommended towing methods can be switch
employed.
Rthe automatic transmission will remain in
! Before towing the vehicle observe the park position P
following instructions:
For more information see “Battery”
RDo not tow-start the vehicle. You could
(Y page 348) or “Jump starting”
otherwise seriously damage the (Y page 350).
automatic transmission which is not
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited
Warranty. Installing towing eye bolt
Practical hints
RDo not tow with sling-type equipment.
Depending on whether you are towing a
Towing with sling-type equipment over vehicle or you are being towed, the towing eye
bumpy roads will damage radiator and bolt can be screwed into threaded holes
supports. which are located behind covers on each
RTowing of the vehicle should only be bumper.
done using the properly installed towing The towing eye bolt is supplied with the
eye bolt. Never attach a tow cable, tow vehicle tool kit, located in the cargo
rope or tow rod to the vehicle chassis, compartment underneath the cargo
frame or suspension parts. compartment floor (Y page 284).
X Take the towing eye bolt out of the space
! Do not tow with one axle raised. Doing so
could damage the transfer case, which is
Warranty. All wheels must be on or off the Removing cover in front bumper
ground. Observe instructions for towing the
vehicle with all wheels on the ground.
G Warning!
With the engine not running, there is no power
assistance for the brake and steering
systems. In this case, it is important to keep
in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.
! Avoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or

X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
diagonally, since it could result in damage
to the chassis alignment. arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole
! Do not use the towing eye bolt for for the towing eye bolt.
recovery, as this could damage the vehicle.
If in doubt, recover the vehicle with a crane.
Z
354 Towing the vehicle
Removing cover in rear bumper X Insert wheel wrench into towing eye and
tighten towing eye bolt ; by turning it
G Warning! clockwise.
In order to avoid possible serious burns or or
injury, use extreme caution when removing
X If your vehicle is not equipped with a wheel
the rear cover, because the rear exhaust pipe
wrench, use a suitable object to turn the
is extremely hot.
towing eye bolt.
Removing towing eye bolt

X Loosen towing eye bolt ; by turning it
counterclockwise.
X Unscrew towing eye bolt ;.
Practical hints
X Reinstalling cover: Engage cover :

(Y page 353) on the right and press on the
left.
X Store the towing eye bolt ; and wheel
wrench back into the vehicle tool kit.
X Press mark on cover : as indicated by the
arrow.
X Lift cover : off to reveal the threaded hole Towing with all wheels on the ground
for the towing eye bolt.
G Warning!
Fixing towing eye bolt If circumstances require towing the vehicle
with all wheels on the ground, always tow with
a tow bar if:
Rthe engine will not run
Rthere is a malfunction in the brake system
Rthere is a malfunction in the power supply
or in the vehicle’s electrical system
This is necessary to adequately control the
towed vehicle.
Prior to towing the vehicle with all wheels on
the ground, make sure the SmartKey is in
Example illustration front bumper starter switch position 2.
X Take the towing eye bolt and, if so G Warning!
equipped, the wheel wrench from the With the engine not running, there is no power
vehicle tool kit. assistance for the brake and steering
X Screw towing eye bolt ; clockwise into systems. In this case, it is important to keep
threaded hole to its stop. in mind that a considerably higher degree of
effort is necessary to brake and steer the
vehicle. Adapt your driving accordingly.

Fuses 355
X Make sure the ignition is switched on. Fuses

brake pedal and keep it pressed. Introduction
X Shift the automatic transmission into The electrical fuses in your vehicle serve to
neutral position N. switch off malfunctioning power circuits.
X Release the brake pedal. If a fuse is blown, the components and
X If engaged, release the parking brake. systems secured by that fuse will stop
X Switch on the hazard warning flasher
operating.
(Y page 101). G Warning!
! Keep in mind that it is important to have Only use fuses approved by Mercedes-Benz
with the specified amperage for the system in
the ignition switched on. Removing the
question and do not attempt to repair or
SmartKey from the starter switch or
Practical hints
bridge a blown fuse. Using other than
opening a front door with the ignition
approved fuses or using repaired or bridged
switched off will automatically shift the
fuses may cause an overload leading to a fire,
automatic transmission into park position
and/or cause damage to electrical
P.
components and/or systems. Have the cause
! The vehicle may be towed only for determined and remedied by an authorized
distances up to 30 miles (50 km) and at a Mercedes-Benz Center.
speed not to exceed 30 mph (50 km/h). A blown fuse must be replaced by an
appropriate spare fuse (recognizable by its
i While being towed with the hazard
color or the fuse rating given on the fuse) of
warning flasher in use, use the combination
the amperage recommended in the fuse
switch in the usual manner to signal turns.
chart. Any Mercedes-Benz Center will be glad
Only the selected turn signal will operate.
to advise you on this subject.
Upon canceling the turn signal, the hazard
warning flasher will operate again. i In case of a blown fuse contact Roadside
Assistance or an authorized Mercedes-
Benz Center.
Stranded vehicle If a newly inserted fuse blows again, have the
Freeing a stranded vehicle, on which the cause determined and rectified by an
wheels are dug into sand or mud, should be authorized Mercedes-Benz Center.
done with the greatest of care, especially if The fuse chart is located in the cargo
the vehicle is heavily loaded. compartment with the vehicle tool kit
Note the following when freeing a stranded (Y page 284). The fuse chart explains the fuse
vehicle: allocation and fuse amperages.
RAvoid pulling the vehicle abruptly or
diagonally, since it could result in damage
Before replacing fuses
to the chassis alignment.
RNever try to free a vehicle that is still
coupled to a trailer. X Make sure the automatic transmission is in
park position P.
RIf possible, a vehicle equipped with a trailer
hitch receiver should be pulled backward in The transmission position indicator in the
its own previously made tracks. multifunction display should be on P.
X Switch off all electrical consumers.
Z
356 Fuses
X Turn off the engine. moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
X Remove the SmartKey from the starter and possibly impair fuse operation.
switch.
X Vehicles with KEYLESS-GO: Open the
driver’s door (this puts the starter switch in Fuse box in engine compartment
position 0, same as with the SmartKey X Open the hood.
removed from the starter switch). The
driver’s door then can be closed again.
Fuse box in passenger compartment

! Do not use sharp objects such as a
Practical hints
screwdriver to open the fuse box cover in

the dashboard. You could damage the fuse
box cover or the dashboard.
The fuse box is located behind a cover in the
dashboard on the front passenger side. Example illustration fuse box GL 450 (GL 350
BlueTEC, GL 550 similar)
X With a dry cloth, remove any moisture from
fuse box cover :.
X Opening: Pull clamps ; in direction of
arrow.
X Lift fuse box cover : up.
X Closing: Make sure the sealing rubber is

positioned properly.
X Press fuse box cover : down and secure
with clamps ;.
X Open the front passenger door.
X Opening: Open the glove box. ! The fuse box cover must be properly
X Opening: Insert flat, blunt object as a lever positioned as described. Otherwise,
into the edge of fuse box cover : at the moisture or dirt could enter the fuse box
position indicated by the arrow. and possibly impair fuse operation.
X Loosen fuse box cover : from the X Close the hood after checking or replacing
dashboard using the lever. fuses.
X Using your hands, pull fuse box cover :
out and remove.
X Closing: Hook fuse box cover : into
holders on the front of the dashboard.
X Press fuse box cover : back on until it
engages.
! The fuse box cover must be properly
positioned as described. Otherwise,

Fuses 357
Fuse box in cargo compartment
X Opening: Open the cargo compartment.
Practical hints
X Insert a suitable object such as a coin into
the slot of lock :.
X Turn lock : by 90° in direction of arrow.
X Remove cover ;.
X Closing: Install everything in reverse order.
Emergency engine shutdown

If the engine cannot be turned off as
described (Y page 113), you may use the
following emergency procedure.
X Take the fuse chart from the vehicle tool kit
(Y page 284).
X Open the fuse box in engine compartment.
X Remove fuse 120.
Find its location in the fuse chart.
Z
358

359

Parts service ..................................... 360
Warranty coverage ........................... 360
Identification labels .......................... 360
Vehicle specification GL 350 Blue-
TEC (164.825) ................................... 362
Vehicle specification GL 450
(164.871) ........................................... 362
(164.886) ........................................... 363
Rims and tires ................................... 365
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. ...... 368
Technical data

360 Identification labels
Vehicle equipment accordance with the terms of the following

warranties:
i This Operator’s Manual describes all RNew Vehicle Limited Warranty
features, standard or optional, potentially REmission System Warranty

available for your vehicle at the time of REmission Performance Warranty
purchase. Please be aware that your
vehicle might not be equipped with all RCalifornia,Connecticut, Maine,
features described in this manual. Massachusetts, New York, Pennsylvania,
Rhode Island, and Vermont Emission
Control Systems Warranty22
Parts service RState Warranty Enforcement Laws (Lemon
Laws)
All authorized Mercedes-Benz Centers
maintain a stock of Genuine Mercedes-Benz Replacement parts and accessories are
Parts required for maintenance and repair covered by the Mercedes-Benz Parts and
work. In addition, strategically located parts Accessories warranties, copies of which are
Technical data
distribution centers provide quick and available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz

reliable parts service. Center.
More than 300 000 different parts for
Mercedes-Benz models are available.
Loss of Service and Warranty
Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts are subjected Information booklet
to stringent quality inspections. Each part has
been specifically developed, manufactured or Should you lose your Service and Warranty
selected for and adapted to Mercedes-Benz Information booklet, have an authorized
vehicles. Mercedes-Benz Center arrange for a
Therefore, Genuine Mercedes-Benz Parts replacement. It will be mailed to you.
should be installed.
! Do not use non-genuine Mercedes-Benz Identification labels
parts and accessories not authorized by
Mercedes-Benz. Doing so could damage
the vehicle, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. Also, it
could compromise the vehicle’s durability
or safety.
Warranty coverage
Your vehicle is covered under the terms of the

warranties printed in the Service and
Warranty Information booklet.
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center will
exchange or repair any defective parts
originally installed in the vehicle in
22 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.

Identification labels 361
The Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) can specific to each vehicle and may vary from
be found data shown in the illustration. Refer to
Ron certification label : on the driver’s door certification label on vehicle for actual data
specific to your vehicle.
B-pillar
Ron passenger side underneath the second-
row seat (Y page 361)
Ron the lower edge of the windshield
(Y page 361)
Technical data
Passenger-side second-row seat
X Fold carpet A forward in direction of
arrow.
VIN ? is now visible.
Example certification label (U.S. vehicles)
; Paintwork code
= VIN
B Emission control information label,

includes both federal and California
certification exhaust emission standards
C Engine number (engraved on engine)
Example certification label (Canada vehicles)
D VIN (on lower edge of windshield)
; Paintwork code
= VIN i When ordering parts, please specify
vehicle identification and engine number.
i Data shown on certification label are for
illustration purposes only. These data are
Z
362 Vehicle specification GL 450 (164.871)
Vehicle specification GL 350 BlueTEC Main dimensions GL 350 BlueTEC

(164.825)
Overall vehicle 201.1 in (5 108 mm)
The quoted data apply only to the standard length
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes- Overall vehicle 83.6 in (2 124 mm)
Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
width23
special bodies and special equipment.
Overall vehicle 72.4 - 75.6 in
Engine GL 350 BlueTEC
height (1 840 - 1 920 mm)24
Engine, type 642
72.4 - 76.8 in
Mode of operation Diesel 4-stroke (1 840 - 1 950 mm)25
engine
Wheelbase 121.1 in (3 075 mm)
No. of cylinders 6
Track, front 64.8 in (1 645 mm)
Bore 3.27 in (83.00 mm)
Technical data
Track, rear 64.9 in (1 648 mm)

Stroke 3.62 in (92.00 mm)
Ground clearance 8.0 - 10.9 in
Total piston 182.3 cu in (202 - 277 mm)24
displacement (2 987 cm3)
8.0 - 12.1 in
Compression 16.5:1 (202 - 307 mm)2529
ratio
Turning circle 39.7 ft (12.1 m)
Output acc. to 210 hp/3 400 rpm
SAE J 1349 (157 kW/3 400 rpm)
Weights GL 350 BlueTEC
Maximum torque 400 lb-ft/
acc. to SAE J 1349 1 600 - 2 400 rpm Roof load max. 198 lb (90 kg)
(543 Nm/
1 600 - 2 400 rpm)
Maximum engine 4 500 rpm (164.871)
speed
Firing order 1-4-2-5-3-6 The quoted data apply only to the standard
vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
Poly-V-belt 2 035 mm Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Electrical system GL 350 BlueTEC Engine GL 450
Alternator 14 V/220 A Engine, type 273
Starter motor 12 V/2.0 kW Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection
Battery 12 V/95 Ah
23 Exterior
rear view mirrors folded out.
24 Depending on the set vehicle level (vehicles without enhanced off-road package).
25 Depending on the set vehicle level (vehicles with enhanced off-road package).

Vehicle specification GL 550 (164.886) 363
Engine GL 450 Main dimensions GL 450

No. of cylinders 8 Overall vehicle 201.1 in (5 108 mm)
length
Bore 3.66 in (92.90 mm)
width27
Total piston 284.5 cu in
displacement (4 663 cm3) height (1 840 - 1 920 mm)28
Compression 10.7:1
72.4 - 76.8 in
ratio
(1 840 - 1 950 mm)29
Output acc. to 335 hp/6 000 rpm
SAE J 134926 (250 kW/6 000 rpm)
Track, front 64.8 in (1 645 mm)
Maximum torque 339 lb-ft/
Technical data
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 700 - 5 000 rpm Track, rear 64.9 in (1 648 mm)
(460 Nm/
2 700 - 5 000 rpm) Ground clearance 8.0 - 10.9 in
(202 - 277 mm)28
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm
speed 8.0 - 12.1 in
(202 - 307 mm)2529
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8
Turning circle 39.7 ft (12.1 m)
Poly-V-belt 2 398 mm
Weights GL 450
Electrical system GL 450
Roof load max. 198 lb (90 kg)
Alternator 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW
Battery 12 V/95 Ah (164.886)
Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 7A
The quoted data apply only to the standard
Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm) vehicle. Contact an authorized Mercedes-
electrode gap Benz Center for the corresponding data of all
Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
26 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
27 Exterior
Z
364 Vehicle specification GL 550 (164.886)
Engine GL 550 Electrical system GL 550

Engine, type 273 Spark plugs, 0.031 in (0.8 mm)
electrode gap
Mode of operation 4-stroke engine,
gasoline injection Spark plugs, 15 - 18 lb-ft
tightening torque (20 - 25 Nm)
No. of cylinders 8
Bore 3.86 in (98.00 mm)
Main dimensions GL 550
Total piston 333.2 cu in length
displacement (5 461 cm3) Overall vehicle 83.6 in (2 124 mm)
Compression 10.7:1 width31
ratio
Technical data
Output acc. to 382 hp/6 000 rpm height (1 840 - 1 920 mm)32
SAE J 134930 (285 kW/6 000 rpm)
72.4 - 76.8 in
Maximum torque 391 lb-ft/ (1 840 - 1 950 mm)33
acc. to SAE J 1349 2 800 - 4 800 rpm
(530 Nm/
2 800 - 4 800 rpm) Track, front 66.3 in (1 683 mm)34
Maximum engine 6 500 rpm Track, rear 66.5 in (1 688 mm)34
speed
Ground clearance 8.0 - 10.9 in
Firing order 1-5-4-2-6-3-7-8 (202 - 277 mm)32
Poly-V-belt 2 398 mm 8.0 - 12.1 in
(202 - 307 mm)33
Electrical system GL 550 Turning circle 39.7 ft (12.1 m)
Alternator 14 V/180 A
Starter motor 12 V/1.4 kW Weights GL 550
Battery 12 V/95 Ah Roof load max. 198 lb (90 kg)
Spark plugs, type NGK PLKR 7A
30 Premium fuel required. Performance may vary with fuel octane rating.
31 Exterior
34 21" wheels.

Rims and tires 365
Rims and tires vehicle body or axle parts. Damage to the

tires or the vehicle may be the result.
Notes
i Further information on tires and rims is
! Only use tires which have been tested and
available at any authorized Mercedes-Benz
approved by Mercedes-Benz. Tires
Center. The Tire and Loading Information
approved by Mercedes-Benz are developed
placard with the recommended tire
to provide best possible performance in
inflation pressures for cold tires is located
conjunction with the driving safety systems
on the driver’s door B-pillar. Supplemental
on your vehicle such as the ABS or the
tire inflation pressure information for
ESP®. Tires specially developed for your driving at high speeds or for vehicle loads
vehicle and tested and approved by less than the maximum loaded vehicle
Mercedes-Benz can be identified by finding condition can be found on the tire inflation
the following on the tire’s sidewall: pressure label. The tire inflation pressure
RMO = Mercedes-Benz Original
label is located on the inside of the fuel filler
equipment tires flap. The tire inflation pressure should be
Technical data
RMOE = Mercedes-Benz Original Extended checked regularly and should only be
(tires with limited run-flat adjusted on cold tires. Follow tire
characteristics) original equipment tires manufacturer’s maintenance
recommendation included with the vehicle.
Using tires other than those approved by
Mercedes-Benz may result in damage that For information on recommended tire
is not covered by the Mercedes-Benz inflation pressure and supplemental tire
Limited Warranty. inflation pressure information for special
driving situations, see (Y page 234).
For information on driving with MOExtended
tires, see the “Practical hints” section i Please keep in mind that the vehicle must
(Y page 345). be equipped
i Vehicles with MOExtended system are Rwith wheels of identical dimensions on
not factory-equipped with a TIREFIT kit. each axle (left and right)
When retrofitting with tires that do not have Rwith tires of identical characteristics all
run-flat characteristics, you should also around, i.e. summer tires, winter tires,
equip your vehicle with a TIREFIT kit. all-season tires, or MOExtended tires etc.
TIREFIT kits are available at any authorized
Mercedes-Benz Center. i The following pages also list the approved
rim and tire sizes for equipping your vehicle
! Using tires other than those approved by with winter tires. Winter tires are not
Mercedes-Benz can have detrimental available as standard or optional factory
effects, such as equipment, but can be purchased from an
Rpoor handling characteristics
Rincreased noise Equipping your vehicle with winter tires
Rincreased fuel consumption approved for your vehicle model may
require the purchase of rims of the
Moreover, tires and rims not approved by recommended size for use with these
Mercedes-Benz may, under load, exhibit winter tires. This depends on vehicle model
dimensional variations and different tire and the standard or optional factory-
deformation characteristics that could equipped wheel rim/tire configuration on
cause them to come into contact with the
Z
366 Rims and tires
your vehicle. For more information contact

Technical data

Rims and tires 367
Same size tires
Model GL 350 BlueTEC GL 550

GL 450
19" wheels Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 19 H2 8.5 J x 19 H2
Wheel offset 2.20 in (56 mm) 2.20 in (56 mm)
All-season tires35,36 275/55 R19 111H —
M+S37,38
Winter tires35,39 265/55 R19 109H 265/55 R19 109H
M+Si40 M+Si
All-terrain tires35,36,39 275/55 R19 111H 275/55 R19 111H

M+S40 M+S
Technical data
GL 450
20" wheels Rims (light alloy) 8.5 J x 20 H2 —
Wheel offset 2.20 in (56 mm)
All-season tires35,36,41 275/50 R20 109H —
M+S MOExtended37,42

GL 450
21" wheels AMG rims (light alloy) — 10 J x 21 H2
All-season tires35,36 — 295/40 R21 111V XL
(Extra Load) M+S
35 Radial-ply tires.
36 Must not be used with snow chains.
37 GL 350 BlueTEC: Availabilty in Canada depending on vehicle production date.
38 GL 450: USA only.
39 Not available as factory equipment.
40 GL 350 BlueTEC: Standard tire without run-flat characteristics. Equipping the vehicle with TIREFIT is strongly
recommended.
41 Must be used in conjunction with Advanced Tire Pressure Monitoring System (U.S. vehicles) or Tire pressure
loss warning system (Canada vehicles) only.
42 GL 450: Canada only.
Z
368 Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc.
Spare wheel
! Compare the recommended tire inflation pressure for your vehicle with the tire inflation
pressure on the yellow label located on the spare wheel rim.
If the tire inflation pressure on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim differs from the values
given in this Operator’s Manual, inflate the tire to the recommended tire inflation pressure
given on the yellow label on the spare wheel rim.
i Please note that the tire inflation pressure of the spare wheel differs from the tire inflation
pressure of the road tires.
i The GL 350 BlueTEC does not have a spare wheel.

Model GL 450
GL 550
Rim 4.5 B x 19 H2
Technical data

Minispare tire43 T 165/90 D19 119M
or
T 165/90 R19 119M
Recommended tire inflation pressure 61 psi (4.2 bar)
Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. fluids. Otherwise you could endanger persons
or the environment.
Capacities
Keep service fluids out of the reach of
Vehicle components and their respective children.
lubricants must match. Therefore only use For health reasons, you should prevent
products tested and approved by Mercedes- service fluids from coming into direct contact
Benz. with your skin or clothing.
For information on tested and approved If a service fluid is swallowed, contact a
products, contact an authorized Mercedes- physician immediately.
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA
only).
G Warning!
Comply with all valid regulations with respect
to handling, storing, and disposing of service
43 Must not be used with snow chains.

Fuels, coolants, lubricants, etc. 369
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Engine with oil GL 350 BlueTEC 9.0 US qt (8.5 l) Approved engine
filter oils
GL 450 9.5 US qt (9.0 l)
GL 550
Automatic All models 9.5 US qt (9.0 l) MB Automatic
transmission Transmission Fluid
Front axle All models 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Rear axle All models 1.2 US qt (1.1 l) Hypoid gear oil
Rear axle with All models 1.7 US qt (1.6 l) Hypoid gear oil
differential lock
Technical data
Transfer case All models 0.53 US qt (0.5 l) MB Automatic
single speed Transmission Fluid
Transfer case All models 1.6 US qt (1.5 l) MB Automatic
double speed Transmission Fluid
Power steering All models approx. 1.1 US qt (1.0 l) MB Power Steering
Fluid or approved
Dexron III ATF
Brake system All models 0.63 US qt (0.6 l) MB Brake Fluid
(DOT 4+)
Cooling system GL 350 BlueTEC approx. 10.0 US qt (9.5 l) MB 325.0
Anticorrosion/
GL 450 approx. 12.7 US qt (12.0 l) Antifreeze
GL 550
Fuel tank All models 26.4 US gal (100.0 l) Gasoline engine:
Premium unleaded
Fuel tank All models approx. 3.4 US gal (13.0 l) gasoline (Minimum
reserve Posted Octane 91
[Avg. of
96 RON/86 MON])
Diesel engine:
ULTRA-LOW
SULFUR HIGHWAY
DIESEL FUEL
(ULSD, 15 ppm
SULFUR MAXIMUM)
AdBlue® tank GL 350 BlueTEC 8.3 US gal (31.7 l) AdBlue® complying
with ISO 22241
Z
Model Capacity Fuels, coolants,

lubricants, etc.
Air All models — R134a refrigerant
conditioning and special
system PAG lubricant oil
(never R 12)
Washer system All models 7.6 US qt (7.2 l) MB Windshield
and headlamp Washer
cleaning Concentrate44
system (Y page 375)
Washer fluid mixing
ratio (Y page 375)
Technical data
Approved engine oils Use the table below to determine the

MB sheet number.
Engine oils are specifically tested for their
suitability in our engines and durability for our Model Engine, MB sheet
service intervals. Therefore, only use type number
approved engine oils and oil filters required
GL 350 BlueTEC 642 229.51
for vehicles with the Maintenance System.
For a listing of approved engine oils and oil GL 450 273 229.5
filters, contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
GL 550 273 229.5
Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only).
! Using engine oils and oil filters of a
specification other than those expressly i MB sheet numbers are printed on the
required for the Maintenance System, or outside of oil containers.
changing of oil and oil filter at change
intervals longer than those called for by the Viscosity grades for engine oils
Maintenance System will result in engine or Using the chart below, select oil viscosity
emission control system damage not according to the lowest air temperature
covered by the Mercedes-Benz Limited expected before the next oil change.
Warranty.
Please follow Maintenance System
recommendations for scheduled oil
changes. Failure to do so will result in
engine or emission control system damage
Warranty.
Mercedes-Benz recommends MOBIL OIL.
44 Mixed with water or commercially available premixed washer solvent/antifreeze.

Engine oil additives Never allow sparks, flames or smoking

materials near gasoline!
! Do not blend oil additives with engine oil.
Turn off the engine before refueling.
They may damage the engine. Damage or
malfunctions resulting from blending oil Whenever you are around gasoline, avoid
additives are not covered by the Mercedes- inhaling fumes and any skin or clothing
Benz Limited Warranty. contact. Extinguish all smoking materials.
Direct skin contact with fuels and the
inhalation of fuel vapors are damaging your
Air conditioning refrigerant health.
R134a (HFC) refrigerant and special PAG
lubricating oil are used in the air conditioning ! To maintain the engine’s durability and
system. performance, premium unleaded gasoline
must be used.
! Never use R 12 (CFC) or mineral-based If premium unleaded gasoline is not
lubricating oil. Otherwise damage to the available and low octane gasoline is used,
Technical data
system will occur. follow these precautions:
RHave the fuel tank only partially filled
Brake fluid with unleaded regular gasoline and fill up
with premium unleaded gasoline as soon
G Warning! as possible.
During vehicle operation, the boiling point of RAvoid full throttle driving and abrupt
the brake fluid is continuously reduced acceleration.
through the absorption of moisture from the
RDo not exceed an engine speed of
atmosphere.
3 000 rpm if the vehicle is loaded with a
Under extremely strenuous operating
light load such as two persons and no
conditions, this moisture content can lead to
luggage.
the formation of bubbles in the system, thus
reducing the system’s efficiency. RDo not exceed 2/3 of maximum
Therefore, the brake fluid must be replaced accelerator pedal position if the vehicle
regularly. Refer to your vehicle’s Maintenance is fully loaded or operating in
Booklet for replacement interval. mountainous terrain.
Only brake fluid approved by Mercedes-Benz

is recommended. Any authorized Mercedes- Fuel requirements
Benz Center will provide you with additional
information. Gasoline engine
Only use premium unleaded gasoline. The
octane number (posted at the pump) must be
Premium unleaded gasoline (gasoline
91 min. It is an average of both the Research
engine)
Octane Number (RON) and the Motor Octane
G Warning! Number (MON): (RON+MON)/2. This is also
Gasoline is highly flammable and poisonous. known as the ANTI-KNOCK INDEX.
It burns violently and can cause serious Reformulated gasolines (RFG) and/or
personal injury. unleaded gasoline containing oxygenates
such as ethanol, TAME, ETBE, IPA, IBA, and
Z
TBA can be used provided the ratio of any one Please ask your service station personnel for
of these oxygenates to gasoline does not further information. If the B5 biodiesel blend
exceed 10%; MTBE must not exceed 15%. is not sufficiently labeled to clearly indicate
The ratio of methanol to gasoline must not that it meets the ULSD standard, please do
exceed 3% plus additional cosolvents. not use it.
Using mixtures of ethanol and methanol is not The Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty does
allowed. Gasohol, which contains 10% not cover damages caused by the use of fuels
ethanol and 90% unleaded gasoline, can be not meeting Mercedes-Benz approved fuel
used. standards.
These blends must also meet all other fuel
requirements, such as resistance to spark
knock, boiling range, vapor pressure, etc. Gasoline additives (gasoline engine)
A major concern among engine
Diesel engine manufacturers is carbon build-up caused by
gasoline. Mercedes-Benz recommends only
Only use commercially available vehicular
Technical data
the use of quality gasoline containing

ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL FUEL
additives that prevent the build-up of carbon
(ULSD, 15 ppm SULFUR MAXIMUM) that
deposits.
meets the ASTM D975 standard. Failure to
use ULTRA-LOW SULFUR HIGHWAY DIESEL After an extended period of using fuels
FUEL (ULSD) can severely damage the without such additives carbon deposits can
vehicle’s exhaust after-treatment device. build up, especially on the intake valves and
in the combustion area, leading to engine
To prevent malfunctions, diesel fuel with
performance problems such as:
improved cold flow characteristics is offered
in the winter months. Check with your fuel RWarm-up hesitation
retailer. RUnstable idle
! Do not fill the tank with gasoline. Do not RKnocking/pinging
blend diesel fuel with gasoline or kerosene. RMisfire
The fuel system and engine will otherwise
RPower loss
be damaged, which is not covered by the
Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty. In areas where carbon deposits may be
For further information on diesel fuel pump encountered due to lack of availability of
labeling, contact an authorized Mercedes- gasoline which contains these additives, the
Benz Center or visit www.mbusa.com (USA use of Mercedes-Benz approved additives is
only). recommended.
Contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center
Biodiesel (FAME = Fatty Acid Methyl or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only) for a
Ester) containing fuels listing of approved products. Follow
Mercedes-Benz USA approves the use of B5 directions on the product label.
(standard ULSD which may contain a Do not blend other fuel additives with fuel.
maximum of 5% biodiesel) in all Common-rail This only results in unnecessary cost and may
injection (CDI) and BlueTEC diesel engines. be harmful to the engine operation.
Diesel fuels containing a higher percentage of
biodiesel, e.g. B20, as well as straight ! Damage or malfunction resulting from
biodiesel may cause severe damage to your poor fuel quality or from blending additional
engine/fuel system and are not approved. fuel additives other than those tested and
approved by us for use on Mercedes-Benz

vehicles are not covered by the Mercedes- Special additives

Benz Limited Warranty or by any pre-owned
or Extended Limited Warranties. ! Only use AdBlue® complying with
ISO 22241. Do not add additives to
AdBlue® and do not dilute AdBlue® with
AdBlue® water. Otherwise, the BlueTEC exhaust gas
aftertreatment system could be damaged.
AdBlue® is a non-flammable, non-toxic, Damage caused by using additives or
colorless and odorless, water-soluble liquid. diluting with water are not covered by the
! Only use AdBlue® complying with Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
ISO 22241. Do not blend with additives.
Purity
! Rinse surfaces that have come into
The purity of AdBlue® is of particular
contact with AdBlue®, or remove AdBlue®
importance for avoiding malfunctions in the
with a moist cloth and cold water
exhaust gas aftertreatment.
immediately. If AdBlue® has crystallized
Technical data
already, use cold water and a sponge. If AdBlue® is pumped out of the tank, e.g.
AdBlue® residues will crystallize and soil during repair work, the same liquid must not
the affected surfaces. be used to refill the tank as its purity is no
longer guaranteed.
High ambient temperatures ! Impurities caused for example by other
service products, cleaning agents, and dust
If AdBlue® in the reservoir heats up to above
result in increased emissions,
122‡ (50†) for a long period of time, for
malfunctions, catalyst damage, or engine
example due to direct sunlight, ammonia gas
damage.
vapors may escape when opening the
AdBlue® tank.
G Warning! Coolants
When opening the filler cap of the AdBlue® The engine coolant is a mixture of water and
tank ammonia gas vapors may escape. Refill anticorrosion/antifreeze, which provides:
AdBlue® in a well ventilated area only. RCorrosion protection
Ammonia gas vapors have a pungent odor and
RFreeze protection
are particularly irritating for your skin,
mucous membranes, and eyes. Inhaling RBoiling protection (by increasing the boiling
ammonia gas vapors will cause burning eyes, point)
nose, and throat, as well as coughing and
The cooling system was filled at the factory
watering eyes.
with a coolant providing freeze protection to
approximately -35‡ (-37†) and corrosion
Low ambient temperatures protection.
AdBlue® freezes at a temperature of ! Add premixed coolant solution only.
approximately 12‡ (-11†). Your vehicle is Adding water and MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/
factory equipped with an AdBlue® preheating Antifreeze separately from each other,
system. The vehicle can thus be operated at could cause engine damage not covered by
temperatures below 12‡ (-11†). the Mercedes-Benz Limited Warranty.
Z
If the antifreeze mixture is effective to -35‡ If the coolant level is low, water and MB 325.0
(-37†), the boiling point of the coolant in the Anticorrosion/Antifreeze should be used to
pressurized cooling system is reached at bring it up to the proper level (have cooling
approximately 266‡ (130†). system checked for signs of leakage). Please
The coolant solution must be used year round make sure the mixture is in accordance with
to provide the necessary corrosion protection label instructions.
and increase boil-over protection. Refer to The water in the cooling system must meet
the Maintenance Booklet for replacement minimum requirements, which are usually
interval. satisfied by normal drinking water.
Coolant system design and coolant used If you are not sure about the water quality,
determine the replacement interval. The contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz
replacement interval published in the Center.
Maintenance Booklet is only applicable if
MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze solution Anticorrosion/antifreeze
or other Mercedes-Benz approved products
of equal specification are used to renew the Your vehicle contains a number of aluminum
Technical data
coolant concentration or bring it back up to parts. The use of aluminum components in

the proper level. motor vehicle engines necessitates that
anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant used in
For information on other Mercedes-Benz such engines be specifically formulated to
approved products of equal specification, protect the aluminum parts. Failure to use
contact an authorized Mercedes-Benz Center such anticorrosion/antifreeze coolant will
or visit www.mbusa.com (USA only). result in a significantly shortened service life.
To provide important corrosion protection, Therefore, the following product is strongly
the solution must be at least 50% recommended for use in your vehicle:
anticorrosion/antifreeze (equivalent to MB 325.0 Anticorrosion/Antifreeze agent.
freeze protection to approximately -35‡
[-37†]). Before the start of the winter season (or once
a year in hot southern regions), you should
If you use a solution that is more than 55% have the anticorrosion/antifreeze
anticorrosion/antifreeze (freeze protection concentration checked.
to approximately -49‡ [-45†]), the engine
temperature will increase due to the lower The coolant is also regularly checked each
heat transfer capability of the solution. time you bring your vehicle to an authorized
Therefore, do not use more than this amount Mercedes-Benz Center for service.
of anticorrosion/antifreeze.
Model Approximate freeze protection

-35‡ (-37†) -49‡ (-45†)
Cooling system GL 350 BlueTEC 5.0 US qt (4.75 l) 5.5 US qt (5.2 l)
GL 450 6.3 US qt (6.0 l) 7.0 US qt (6.6 l)
GL 550

Washer system and headlamp

cleaning system
G Warning!
Washer solvent/antifreeze is highly
flammable. Do not spill washer solvent/
antifreeze on hot engine parts, because it may
ignite and burn. You could be seriously
burned.
X Use MB Windshield Washer Concentrate

“MB SummerFit”.
X Mix with water for temperatures above
freezing point.
Technical data
X Mix with commercially available premixed
washer solvent/antifreeze for
temperatures below freezing point.
Washer fluid mixing ratio

For temperatures above the freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts water
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] water)
For temperatures below freezing point:
1 part “MB SummerFit” to 100 parts solvent
(1.34 fl oz [40 ml] “MB SummerFit” to 1 gal
[4.0 l] solvent)
Z
376

Service and Literature
Your authorized Mercedes-Benz Center has
trained technicians and Genuine Mercedes-
Benz Parts to service your vehicle properly.
For expert advice and quality service, contact
If you are interested in obtaining service
literature for your vehicle, please contact an
We consider this the best way for you to
obtain accurate information for your vehicle.
For further information you can find us on the
Mercedes-Benz web site www.mbusa.com
(USA only) or www.mercedes-benz.ca
(Canada only).
G Warning!
To help avoid personal injury, be extremely
careful when performing any service work or
repairs. Improper or incomplete service or the
use of incorrect or inappropriate parts or
materials may damage the vehicle or its
equipment, which may in turn result in
personal injury.
If you have any questions about carrying out
any type of service, turn to the advice of an
We reserve the right to make changes in

design and equipment.
Therefore, information, illustrations and
descriptions in this Operator’s Manual might
differ from your vehicle.
Reprinting, translation and copying, even of
excerpts, is not permitted without our prior
authorization in writing.
Press time September 11, 2009
GSP/OIS
Printed in U. S. A.

É1645841583&ËÍ
1645841583
Order no. 6515 4318 13 Part no. 164 584 15 83 Edition B 2010

2010 Glclass

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

2010 Glclass

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

GL

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

! Highlights hazards that may result in

i Helpful hints or further information you

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Index ....................................................... 4 At a glance ........................................... 25

Introduction ......................................... 20 Safety and security ............................. 35

Controls in detail ................................. 69

Operation ........................................... 225

Practical hints ................................... 283

Technical data ................................... 359

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1, 2, 3 ... Front passenger front air bag off

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Ashtrays ............................................. 211 Bleeding the fuel system (diesel

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Central locking Collapsible wheel chock ................... 286

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Resume function ............................ 147 Messages in the multifunction

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Through standing water ................. 262 Emergency calls

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

ETD (Emergency Tensioning Front passenger front air bag ............ 40

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Transmission position indicator ..... 116 NECK-PRO active front head

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Interior lighting Selective setting ........................ 71, 73

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

LATCH-type child seat anchors Manual headlamp mode (Low-

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Brake pads ..................................... 299 N

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Returning ....................................... 268 PASS AIR BAG OFF indicator lamp

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

R Reset tool (NECK-PRO active front

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Capacities fuels, coolants, Tether anchorage points

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Problems under-/overinflation ...... 236 Transmission

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Modifications and alterations, Washer fluid

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Product Information We continuously strive to improve our

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

1 Applicable to vehicles with gasoline engine only.

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Operating safety Proper use of the vehicle

interconnected, any modifications made may Rtraffic rules and regulations

G Warning! Problems with your vehicle

Reporting safety defects This information helps, for example, to

Vehicle data recording

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Exterior view ....................................... 26

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

A Fuel filler flap 226

D Towing eyes 353 L Headlamp cleaning system 101

E Front lamps 328 M LED daytime running lamps 97

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Function Page Function Page

Downloaded from www.Manualslib.com manuals search engine

Multifunction steering wheel Function Page

4 Function only available in telephone menu.